Asv m1117 TM 9 2320 381 10 Operator Technical

*TM 9-2320-381-10
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FOR
M1117 ARMORED SECURITY VEHICLE (ASV)

NSN 2320-01-437-6957 (EIC : ALL)
ASV00003
*SUPERSEDURE NOTICE - Supersedes TM 9-2320-307-10 dated 30 September 2010 and TM 9-2320-309-10 dated 30 June 2010.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D - Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and U.S. DoD contractors only. This publication is
critical technology, as determined on 1 June 2010. Other requests for this document will be referred to: TACOM Life Cycle Management
Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-IM/TECH PUBS, 6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
WARNING - This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C., Sec 2751, et.
seq.) or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended, Title 50, U.S.C., App. 2401 et.seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to
severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DoD Directive 5230.25.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE - Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

28 NOVEMBER 2014 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(frntcover) wpno(F00001)
TM 9-2320-381-10
WARNING SUMMARY
This warning summary contains general safety and hazardous materials warnings that must be understood and
applied during operation and maintenance of the vehicle. Failure to observe these precautions or operate this
vehicle without training or instruction may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
FIRST AID
For general first aid information, refer to FM 4-25.11, First Aid. Refer to the label and/or Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS), for first aid information on hazardous materials. Fire extinguisher(s), first aid kit and eye wash/shower
station should be close at hand (or easily accessible) in case of an emergency.
EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS
AIR PRESSURE - human hand blocking air gun shows the need to reduce air pressure before use, or
debris may injure user and/or damage equipment.
EAR PROTECTION - headphones over ears show that noise level will harm ears.
ELECTRICAL - electrical wire to hand with electricity symbol running through human hand shows that
shock hazard is present.
EYE PROTECTION - person with face shield shows that material will injure the eyes.
HEAVY OBJECT - human figure stooping over heavy object shows physical injury potential for
improper lifting technique, and/or aid of soldier(s) and/or lifting device (as required).
HEAVY PARTS - hand with heavy object on top shows that heavy parts can crush and harm.
HEAVY PARTS - foot with heavy object on top shows that heavy parts can crush and harm.
a 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
WARNING SUMMARY - Continued
EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS - Continued
HEAVY PARTS - moving heavy object pinning human figure against stationary object shows that
heavy, moving parts/objects present a danger to life or limb.
HEAVY PARTS - heavy object on human figure shows that heavy parts present a danger to life or
limb.
HOT AREA - hand over object radiating heats shows that part is hot and can burn.
MOVING PARTS - hand with fingers caught between gears shows that the moving parts of the
equipment present a danger to life or limb.
PRESSURE/TENSION HAZARD - human body being impacted by rotating projectile shows that
equipment is under pressure or tension presenting a danger to life or limb if pressure or tension is not
carefully released.
PROJECTILE HAZARD - human body with object passing through it shows that a projectile hazard
exists.
ROLLOVER HAZARD - vehicle indicating direction of human figure shows that vehicle may roll over if
conditions are not avoided, presenting a danger to life or limb.
RUN OVER HAZARD - vehicle running over human body shows hazard.
SEAT BELT USE - human figure wearing seat belt indicates a seat belt must be used to prevent injury
or death in the event of a vehicle crash or rollover.
b 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS - Continued
SHARP OBJECT - pointed object in hand shows that a sharp object presents a danger to life or limb.
SLICK FLOOR - wavy line on floor with legs prone shows that slick floor presents a danger of falling.
TIRE BLOWOUT - tire with hole shows that an over or under inflated tire may rupture, presenting a
danger to life or limb.
WIRE CABLE/ROPE - human hand with frayed wire cable/rope running across shows injury to
unprotected (bare) hands may result.
GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION
WARNING
Always wear seat belts during vehicle operation. Belts should be adjusted to remove slack
to provide maximum protection. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
WARNING
Firing machine guns with turret override switch in ON position allows fired rounds to strike
vehicle deck in certain azimuth and depression positions. Do not fire machine guns with
turret override switch in ON position. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
c 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued
WARNING
Operating with open hatches and turret override switch in ON position can be hazardous.
Do not raise any part of body above hatch opening when turret is traversing. Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Parking brake is inoperative when transfer case is disengaged or drive shafts are
disconnected. Wheels must be chocked to prevent movement. Failure to comply may
result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Hatches must be fully opened and locked down when operating vehicle or turret with
hatches open. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Upper door is heavy. Keep hands and head clear of door opening when closing door.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Surfaces painted with non-skid paint can become slippery when worn and cause a falling
hazard. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
d 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
WARNING
Keep hands clear of hatch opening when lowering hatches. Failure to comply may result in
injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
If non-skid surfaces have become worn, a hazardous condition may exist for personnel
working on top of vehicle hull. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Particles blown by compressed air are hazardous. Ensure air stream is directed away from
user and other persons in area. Always wear safety glasses when using compressed air.
WARNING
Exhaust blower must be operating during firing of weapons to remove toxic gas caused by
smoke and fumes. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Ear protection should be worn when firing weapons. Failure to comply may result in injury
to personnel.
e 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
WARNING
If firing relay ON indicator light on weapon control lights up red when turret power switch is
moved to ON, a safety hazard exists, and machine guns may fire when machine gun
switch is placed in ARMED position. If this condition exists, immediately move turret power
to OFF and notify maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
WARNING
Last round override switch will not hold in override position unless last round indicator light
comes on. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
A safety hazard condition exists if grenade indicator lamps do not light up red. If this
condition exists, immediately move turret power switch to OFF position, and notify
maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Ensure all personnel are clear of area. Keep launchers aimed downrange until grenades
are removed. Ensure smoke grenade arming switch is off before handling grenades. If
misfired grenades fire during unloading, personnel in area could be killed or injured. Any
misfired grenade must remain in the discharge tube for at least five minutes. Keep hatches
closed during this time. Only qualified ordnance personnel should troubleshoot grenade
launchers. An exploding or burning smoke grenade could kill or injure personnel.
f 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
WARNING
Firing machine guns with Turret Inhibit Override selected, will allow fired rounds to strike
ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Operation of machine guns while in override may
damage vehicle or injure personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
WARNING
Ensure all personnel are clear of the turret and basket area before operating turret. Failure
to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Ensure weapons are clear of ammo before performing installation or removal procedures.
Accidental firing of machine guns could kill or injure personnel.
WARNING
M1 high-pressure test cartridges can explode. Do not use them unless trained to test fire
machine gun. Ensure the right test equipment is used. Failure to comply may result in
WARNING
Radio transmitter must not be operated within a distance of 6.6 ft. (2.0 meters) from
launchers during loading of grenades. Turret power must be off. Failure to comply may
g 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
WARNING
FRESH AIR control slide lever must be placed in OFF position when operating under threat
of NBC conditions. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Each switch in the turret acts as a circuit breaker. If a switch suddenly moves to its off
position by itself, it is the result of an overloaded circuit. Do not hold the switch in the on
position. This will cause damage to circuits and/or equipment, possibly resulting in an
electrical fire. Notify maintenance personnel if this condition exists. Failure to comply may
WARNING
Do not allow bolt to slam forward when receiver cover is open. Ensure 40-mm machine
gun is clear of all ammunition and bolt is forward before removing back plate pin. Be
prepared to catch dropped/ejected live round. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
EXPLANATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ICONS
BIOLOGICAL - abstract symbol bug shows that a material may contain bacteria or viruses that present
a danger to life or health.
CHEMICAL - drops of liquid on hand shows that material will cause burns or irritation to human skin or
tissue.
CRYOGENIC - hand in block of ice shows that material is extremely cold and can injure human skin
and tissue.
h 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
EXPLANATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ICONS - Continued
EXPLOSION - rapidly expanding symbol shows that the material may explode if subjected to high
temperatures, sources of ignition, or high pressure.
EXTREMELY COLD SURFACE - hand touching object with ice formed on both shows that surface is
extremely cold and can damage human tissue.
EYE PROTECTION - person with goggles shows that material will injure the eyes.
FIRE - flame shows that material may ignite and cause burns.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER - fire extinguisher shows that material may ignite and a fire extinguisher should
be within easy reach.
RADIATION - three circular wedges shows that material emits radioactive energy and can injure
human tissue.
SKIN IRRITATION - hand radiating shows that material can cause skin irritation.
VAPOR - human figure in a cloud shows that material vapors present a danger to life or health.
i 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
GENERAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING DESCRIPTION
WARNING
Do not get ABC dry chemical extinguishing agent in eyes or on bare skin. Chemical agent
may cause mild skin irritation, moderate eye irritation, and possible gastric distress. Wash
affected area immediately with running water. Carefully remove contaminated clothing to
avoid eye contamination. Immediately flush eyes under gentle running water for at least 15
minutes. If chemical is inhaled, move victim to fresh air. Use respirator as needed to
support breathing. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury or damage to clothing, DO NOT allow battery acid to contact
eyes, skin, or fabric. Remove all jewelry (i.e. watches, dog tags, rings) before working with
equipment. Upon contact with eyes or skin, immediately flush with water, apply first aid and
obtain medical attention. DO NOT lean over battery when connecting battery cables. DO
NOT allow negative and positive cables to touch each other. Keep open flame or sparks
away from battery vent holes. ALWAYS wear eye protection when working with batteries.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can be accidently ignited. Do not allow fuel to come in contact
with hot surfaces such as exhaust manifold, pipes, or muffler. Do not smoke or allow open
flame or sparks in the vicinity while working on any part of fuel system. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel.
j 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10
GENERAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued
WARNING
Cleaning solvent or mineral spirits paint thinner is flammable and should not be used near
an open flame. Fire extinguishers should be provided when these materials are used.
WARNING
Use only approved cleaning solvent and work in well-ventilated areas. Wear rubber gloves
when using solvents. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
Respiratory protection, chemical splash goggles and rubber gloves are required when
performing any paint repairs. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
NBC contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions, as described in

NBC Field Manual (FM 3-11.5), and must be disposed of by trained personnel. Do not
open NBC filter boxes if NBC contamination is suspected. Failure to comply may result in
k
TM 9-2320-381-10
GENERAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued
WARNING
After exposure to NBC contaminants, all air filters shall be handled with extreme caution.
Unprotected personnel may experience injury or death if residual toxic agents or
radioactive materials are present. Servicing personnel will wear protective clothing,
including hoods, masks, gloves and boots. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel.
WARNING
All contaminated air filters are to be placed into double lined plastic bags and moved
immediately to a temporary segregation area away from the work site. The temporary
segregation area will be marked with the appropriate NBC warning signs. Final disposal of
contaminated air filters will be in accordance with local standard operating procedures.
WARNING
If contaminated by radioactive dust, the Company NBC team will measure radiation before
removal to determine the extent of safety procedures required. Failure to comply may
l
TM 9-2320-381-10
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES
NOTE: This manual supersedes TM 9-2320-307-10 dated 30 September 2010 and TM 9-2320-309-10 dated 30
June 2010, including all changes. Zero in the "Change No." column indicates an original page or work package.
Date of issue for the original manual is:
Original 28 November 2014
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 78 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF
WORK PACKAGES IS 178 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page/WP No. Change No. Page/WP No. Change No.
Front Cover 0 WP 0036 (10 pgs) 0

a-l 0 WP 0037 (2 pgs) 0
i-xl 0 WP 0038 (2 pgs) 0
Chapter 1 title page 0 WP 0039 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0001 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0040 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0002 (14 pgs) 0 WP 0041 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0003 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0042 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0004 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0044 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0005 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0045 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0006 (8 pgs) 0 WP 0046 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0007 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0047 (10 pgs) 0
WP 0008 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0048 (10 pgs) 0
WP 0009 (8 pgs) 0 WP 0049 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0010 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0050 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0011 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0051 (22 pgs) 0
WP 0012 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0052 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0013 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0053 (10 pgs) 0
WP 0014 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0054 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0015 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0055 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0016 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0056 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0017 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0057 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0018 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0058 (12 pgs) 0
WP 0019 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0059 (8 pgs) 0
WP 0020 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0060 (8 pgs) 0
WP 0021 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0061 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0022 (10 pgs) 0 WP 0062 (16 pgs) 0
WP 0023 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0063 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0024 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0064 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0025 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0065 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0026 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0066 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0027 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0067 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0028 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0068 (10 pgs) 0
WP 0029 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0069 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0030 (8 pgs) 0 WP 0070 (10 pgs) 0
WP 0031 (8 pgs) 0 WP 0071 (8 pgs) 0
WP 0032 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0072 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0033 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0073 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0034 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0074 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0035 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0075 (2 pgs) 0
A 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(loepwp) wpno(ASV_LOEP_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES - Continued
WP 0076 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0126 (2 pgs) 0

WP 0077 (12 pgs) 0 WP 0127 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0078 (14 pgs) 0 WP 0128 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0079 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0129 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0080 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0131 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0081 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0132 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0082 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0133 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0083 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0134 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0084 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0135 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0085 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0136 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0086 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0137 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0087 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0138 (12 pgs) 0
WP 0088 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0139 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0089 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0140 (8 pgs) 0
WP 0090 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0141 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0091 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0142 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0092 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0143 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0093 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0144 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0094 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0145 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0095 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0146 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0096 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0147 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0097 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0148 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0098 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0149 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0099 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0150 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0100 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0151 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0101 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0152 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0102 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0153 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0103 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0154 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0104 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0155 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0105 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0156 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0106 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0157 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0107 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0158 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0108 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0159 (8 pgs) 0
WP 0109 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0160 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0110 (2 pgs) 0 Chapter 4 title page 0
WP 0111 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0161 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0112 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0162 (46 pgs) 0
WP 0113 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0163 (12 pgs) 0
WP 0115 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0164 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0116 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0165 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0117 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0166 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0118 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0167 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0119 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0168 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0120 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0169 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0121 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0170 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0122 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0171 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0123 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0172 (10 pgs) 0
WP 0124 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0173 (2 pgs) 0
B 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(loepwp) wpno(ASV_LOEP_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES - Continued
WP 0174 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0178 (2 pgs) 0

WP 0175 (28 pgs) 0 Index-1 – Index-5/blank 0
WP 0176 (2 pgs) 0 Back Cover 0
WP 0177 (4 pgs) 0
C/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(loepwp) wpno(ASV_LOEP_1)

*TM 9-2320-381-10
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 28 November 2014
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
M1117 ARMORED SECURITY VEHICLE (ASV)

NSN 2320-01-437-6957 (EIC : ALL)
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this publication. If you find any errors, or if you would like to recommend any
improvements to the procedures in this publication, please let us know. The preferred method is to
submit your DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) through the
Internet on the TACOM Unique Logistics Support Applications (TULSA) Web site. The Internet
address is https://tulsa.tacom.army.mil. Access to all applications requires CAC authentication, and
you must complete the Access Request form the first time you use it. The DA Form 2028 is located
under the TULSA Applications on the left-hand navigation bar. Fill out the form and click on
SUBMIT. Using this form on the TULSA Web site will enable us to respond more quickly to your
comments and better manage the DA Form 2028 program. You may also mail, e-mail, or fax your
comments or DA Form 2028 directly to the U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command.
The postal mail address is U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-
LCL-IM/TECH PUBS, MS 727, 6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000. The e-mail address
is tacomlcmc.daform2028@us.army.mil. The fax number is DSN 786-1856 or Commercial (586)
282-1856. A reply will be furnished to you.
*SUPERSEDURE NOTICE - Supersedes TM 9-2320-307-10 dated 30 September 2010 and TM 9-2320-309-10 dated 30 June 2010.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D - Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and U.S. DoD contractors only. This publication is
critical technology, as determined on 1 June 2010. Other requests for this document will be referred to: TACOM Life Cycle Management
Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-IM/TECH PUBS, 6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
WARNING - This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C., Sec 2751, et.
seq.) or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended, Title 50, U.S.C., App. 2401 et.seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to
severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DoD Directive 5230.25.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE - Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
i/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(titleblk) wpno(F00004)

TM 9-2320-381-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL............................................................................................................................ xxxix
Chapter 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND THEORY OF

OPERATION
GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................ WP 0001
Table 1. List of Abbreviations/Acronyms..................................................................................... 0001-2
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA......................................................................................... WP 0002
Figure 1. Item Location................................................................................................................ 0002-2
Table 1. Basic Item Location....................................................................................................... 0002-2
Figure 2. Turret - Components.................................................................................................... 0002-4
Table 2. Turret Components........................................................................................................ 0002-4
Figure 3. Vehicle Dimensions...................................................................................................... 0002-6
Figure 4. Turret - Dimensions...................................................................................................... 0002-7
THEORY OF OPERATION................................................................................................................ WP 0003
Chapter 2 - OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS......................................... WP 0004
Figure 1. Instrument and Control Panels..................................................................................... 0004-2
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF DRIVER’S CONTROL UNIT (200 AMP)............................................ WP 0005
Figure 1. Driver's Control Unit...................................................................................................... 0005-1
Figure 2. Machine Gun Firing Inhibit Zones................................................................................. 0005-3
Figure 3. Driver’s Control Unit..................................................................................................... 0005-5
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF DRIVER’S CONTROL UNIT (400 AMP)............................................ WP 0006
Figure 1. Driver's Control Unit...................................................................................................... 0006-2
Figure 2. Machine Gun Firing Inhibit Zones................................................................................. 0006-4
Figure 3. Driver’s Control Unit..................................................................................................... 0006-6
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF WARNING LIGHT PANEL................................................................. WP 0007
Figure 1. Warning Light Panel..................................................................................................... 0007-2
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF INSTRUMENT PANEL...................................................................... WP 0008
Figure 1. Instrument Panel.......................................................................................................... 0008-1
iii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF SIDE CONTROL PANEL................................................................... WP 0009
Figure 1. Transmission Shift Selector Panel and Four-Wheel Drive Shift Lever......................... 0009-1
Figure 2. Rear AC-Heater Controls............................................................................................. 0009-3
Figure 3. Front AC-Heater Controls............................................................................................. 0009-4
Figure 4. Climate Control Panel................................................................................................... 0009-5
Figure 5. Crew Heater Coolant Supply Valve.............................................................................. 0009-6
Figure 6. Climate Control Panel................................................................................................... 0009-7
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF DRIVER'S CONTROLS..................................................................... WP 0010
Figure 1. Driver's Controls........................................................................................................... 0010-1
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF STEERING COLUMN........................................................................ WP 0011
Figure 1. Steering Column........................................................................................................... 0011-1
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF FUEL SYSTEM CONTROLS............................................................. WP 0012
Figure 1. Fuel Tank Selector Valve............................................................................................. 0012-1
Figure 2. Fuel Crossover Valve................................................................................................... 0012-2
Figure 3. Engine Stop T-Handle.................................................................................................. 0012-3
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF WINCH CONTROL............................................................................ WP 0013
Figure 1. Winch Control Valve..................................................................................................... 0013-1
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF VIEW BLOCK WIPERS AND RESERVOIRS.................................... WP 0014
Figure 1. View Block Wipers........................................................................................................ 0014-1
Figure 2. View Block Washer Reservoirs.................................................................................... 0014-2
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) CONTROL............... WP 0015
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Control Panel...................................................... 0015-1
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF TRANSFER CASE DRIVE LOCKOUT LEVER................................. WP 0016
Figure 1. Transfer Case Closeout Cover..................................................................................... 0016-1
Figure 2. Transfer Case Lockout Lever....................................................................................... 0016-2
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF HULL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (HPDU)................................. WP 0017
Figure 1. Hull Power Distribution Unit.......................................................................................... 0017-1
iv 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF AUXILIARY HEATER CONTROL PANEL......................................... WP 0018
Figure 1. Auxiliary Heater Control................................................................................................ 0018-1
Figure 2. Auxiliary Heater Control Panel..................................................................................... 0018-3
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF MASTER BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH.................................. WP 0019
Figure 1. Master Battery Disconnect Switch................................................................................ 0019-1
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF GUNNER'S CONTROLS................................................................... WP 0020
Figure 1. Gunner's Controls - Main Turret Controls..................................................................... 0020-1
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF TURRET CONTROL PANEL............................................................. WP 0021
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Turret Control Panel.......................................................................... 0021-1
Figure 2. Turret Controls - Spotlight Switch................................................................................. 0021-3
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL......................................................... WP 0022
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Gunner's Control Panel..................................................................... 0022-1
Figure 2. Turret Controls - Gunner's Control Panel..................................................................... 0022-2
Figure 3. Turret Controls - Machine Gun Arming Switch............................................................. 0022-3
Figure 4. Turret Controls - Machine Gun Inhibit Zones............................................................... 0022-4
Figure 5. Turret Controls - Gunner’s Control Panel..................................................................... 0022-5
Figure 6. Turret Override - (200 Amp DCU)................................................................................ 0022-6
Figure 7. Turret Controls - Smoke Grenade Launcher Controls.................................................. 0022-7
Figure 8. Turret Controls - Smoke Grenade Launcher Firing Pattern.......................................... 0022-8
Figure 9. Turret Controls - Last Round Override......................................................................... 0022-9
Figure 10. Turret Controls - Lamp Test All.................................................................................. 0022-9
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF TURRET TRAVERSE CONTROLS................................................... WP 0023
Figure 1. Turret Traverse Controls.............................................................................................. 0023-2
Figure 2. Turret Traverse Control - Powered Turret Traverse..................................................... 0023-2
Figure 3. Turret Traverse Controls - Manual Turret Traverse...................................................... 0023-3
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF ELEVATION CONTROL.................................................................... WP 0024
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Elevation Control............................................................................... 0024-1
v 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 2. Turret Controls - Elevation Control............................................................................... 0024-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - VEHICLE FUELING................................................ WP 0025
Figure 1. Fuel Filler...................................................................................................................... 0025-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVER’S AND COMMANDER’S SEATS AND SEAT
BELTS...................................................................................................................................... WP 0026
Figure 1. Electric Seat Controls................................................................................................... 0026-1
Figure 2. Seat Actuator Bypass Valves....................................................................................... 0026-2
Figure 3. Seat Controls................................................................................................................ 0026-3
Figure 4. Three-Point Seat Belts................................................................................................. 0026-5
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER'S SEAT................................................... WP 0027
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Gunner's Seat.................................................................................... 0027-1
Figure 2. Gunner’s Seat............................................................................................................... 0027-2
Figure 3. Seat Belt....................................................................................................................... 0027-3
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - INTERIOR LIGHT.................................................... WP 0028
Figure 1. Interior Light.................................................................................................................. 0028-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - UTILITY LIGHT....................................................... WP 0029
Figure 1. Utility Light.................................................................................................................... 0029-1
Figure 2. Utility Light.................................................................................................................... 0029-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ENGINE STARTING AND SHUTDOWN

PROCEDURES........................................................................................................................ WP 0030
Figure 1. Transmission Switch (200 Amp DCU).......................................................................... 0030-1
Figure 2. Master Power Switch (200 Amp DCU)......................................................................... 0030-2
Figure 3. Fuel Tank Gauges........................................................................................................ 0030-2
Figure 4. Parking Brake............................................................................................................... 0030-3
Figure 6. Ignition Switch (200 Amp DCU).................................................................................... 0030-4
Figure 7. Transmission Shift Selector Panel................................................................................ 0030-4
vi 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 8. Accelerator Pedal......................................................................................................... 0030-5
Figure 9. Instrument Panel.......................................................................................................... 0030-6
Figure 10. Transmission Shift Selector Panel.............................................................................. 0030-6
Figure 11. Parking Brake............................................................................................................. 0030-7
Figure 12. Engine Stop T-Handle................................................................................................ 0030-7
Figure 13. Master Power and Ignition Switches.......................................................................... 0030-8
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVING PROCEDURES....................................... WP 0031
Figure 1. Driver's Controls - Driving Forward............................................................................... 0031-2
Table 1. Maximum Governed Engine Speeds............................................................................. 0031-3
Figure 2. Driver's Controls - Stopping Vehicle............................................................................. 0031-4
Figure 3. Driver's Controls - Reversing Vehicle........................................................................... 0031-5
Figure 4. Driver's Controls........................................................................................................... 0031-6
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - SHIFTING TO FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE.................... WP 0032
Figure 1. Four-Wheel Drive Shift Selector................................................................................... 0032-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MANUAL DOWNSHIFTING.................................... WP 0033
Figure 1. Transmission Shift Selector.......................................................................................... 0033-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVING TIPS........................................................ WP 0034
Table 1. CTIS Pressure Settings................................................................................................. 0034-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - LATCH HANDLES................................................... WP 0035
Figure 1. Latch Handles............................................................................................................... 0035-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - HATCHES, DOORS, AND DOOR PORTS............. WP 0036
Figure 1. Latch Opening and Closing.......................................................................................... 0036-2
Figure 2. Side Doors.................................................................................................................... 0036-4
Figure 3. Winch Hatch................................................................................................................. 0036-5
Figure 4. Emergency Ingress Post Bar........................................................................................ 0036-6
Figure 5. Door Ports.................................................................................................................... 0036-7
Figure 6. Rear Doors................................................................................................................... 0036-9
vii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ENGINE COMPARTMENT ACCESS...................... WP 0037
Figure 1. Engine Compartment Access Door.............................................................................. 0037-1
Figure 2. Engine Compartment Access Door Release................................................................ 0037-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MIRRORS............................................................... WP 0038
Figure 1. Vehicle Mirror............................................................................................................... 0038-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TOWING PINTLE.................................................... WP 0039
Figure 1. Towing Pintle................................................................................................................ 0039-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TOWING EYES, LIFTING EYES, AND TIE-DOWN
SHACKLES.............................................................................................................................. WP 0040
Figure 1. Towing Eyes, Lifting Eyes, and Tie-Down Shackles.................................................... 0040-1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS)

OPERATION............................................................................................................................ WP 0041
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Control Panel...................................................... 0041-2
Table 1. CTIS Pressure Settings................................................................................................. 0041-3
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - PRIMING FUEL SYSTEM....................................... WP 0042
Figure 1. Driver's Control Unit (200 Amp DCU)........................................................................... 0042-1
Figure 2. Fuel Tank Gauges........................................................................................................ 0042-2
Figure 3. Transfer Pump Priming................................................................................................. 0042-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - PREPARATION FOR AIR TRANSPORT................ WP 0043
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER'S HATCH................................................ WP 0044
Figure 1. Gunner's Hatch............................................................................................................. 0044-1
Figure 2. Gunner's Hatch............................................................................................................. 0044-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER’S SIGHT.................................................. WP 0045
Figure 1. Gunner's Sight.............................................................................................................. 0045-1
Figure 2. Gunner's Sight - Components...................................................................................... 0045-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TURRET PERISCOPES......................................... WP 0046
Figure 1. Turret Periscopes......................................................................................................... 0046-1
Figure 2. Turret Periscopes......................................................................................................... 0046-2
viii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION.... WP 0047
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun - Installation................................................................................ 0047-2
Figure 2. 40-MM Machine Gun.................................................................................................... 0047-2
Figure 10. 40-MM Machine Gun.................................................................................................. 0047-7
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN REMOVAL............ WP 0048
ix 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION..... WP 0049
Figure 1. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun........................................................................................... 0049-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN REMOVAL............. WP 0050
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MINOR BORESIGHTING........................................ WP 0051
Figure 1. Gunner's Sight - Minor Boresighting............................................................................. 0051-3
Figure 10. Gunner's Sight - Minor Boresighting........................................................................... 0051-9
Figure 11. Gunner's Sight - Minor Boresighting......................................................................... 0051-10
x 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. AMMUNITION LOADING................. WP 0052
Figure 1. M48 .50-Cal. Ammunition - Loading............................................................................. 0052-2
Figure 5. Turret Control Panel..................................................................................................... 0052-4
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION

LOADING................................................................................................................................. WP 0053
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun Ammunition - Loading................................................................ 0053-2
xi 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 10. 40-MM Machine Gun Ammunition - Loading.............................................................. 0053-6
Figure 11. Secondary Drive Lever and Feed Slide Assembly..................................................... 0053-7
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - REPLENISHING 40-MM AMMUNITION TO LAST

LINK......................................................................................................................................... WP 0054
Figure 1. Gunner’s Control Panel................................................................................................ 0054-1
Figure 2. 40-MM Ammunition - Replenishing to Last Link........................................................... 0054-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TURN TURRET POWER ON/OFF.......................... WP 0055
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0055-1
Figure 4. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0055-3
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER’S PROCEDURE...................................... WP 0056
Figure 3. Traverse Control Panel................................................................................................. 0056-4
Figure 4. Traverse Control Mechanism....................................................................................... 0056-5
Figure 5. Elevation Control Handle.............................................................................................. 0056-5
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MANUAL TURRET OPERATIONS......................... WP 0057
Figure 1. Traverse Control Mechanism....................................................................................... 0057-1
xii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 3. Rear Mantlet Cover...................................................................................................... 0057-3
Figure 4. Manual Trigger Switches.............................................................................................. 0057-3
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN FIRING.................. WP 0058
Figure 2. Focus Using Eyepiece.................................................................................................. 0058-2
Figure 3. Set Target Range......................................................................................................... 0058-3
Figure 4. Sight Reticle................................................................................................................. 0058-3
Figure 7. Pushbutton Trigger Switch........................................................................................... 0058-5
Figure 10. Focus Using Eyepiece................................................................................................ 0058-7
Figure 11. Set Target Range....................................................................................................... 0058-7
Figure 12. Sight Reticle............................................................................................................... 0058-8
Figure 13. Gunner’s Control Panel.............................................................................................. 0058-8
Figure 14. Turret Control Panel................................................................................................... 0058-9
Figure 15. Pushbutton Trigger Switch......................................................................................... 0058-9
Figure 16. Gunner’s Control Panel............................................................................................ 0058-10
Figure 17. Turret Control Panel................................................................................................. 0058-10
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN FIRING.................. WP 0059
Figure 1. Reticle Control Adapter Lever...................................................................................... 0059-1
Figure 2. Focus Using Eyepiece.................................................................................................. 0059-2
Figure 3. Sight Reticle................................................................................................................. 0059-2
Figure 6. Pushbutton Firing Switch.............................................................................................. 0059-4
xiii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 9. Spent Cartridge Bag..................................................................................................... 0059-6
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GRENADE LAUNCHERS....................................... WP 0060
Figure 2. Launcher Caps............................................................................................................. 0060-2
Figure 3. Grenade Into Launcher Tube....................................................................................... 0060-2
Figure 5. Grenade Launchers...................................................................................................... 0060-5
Figure 6. Firing Pattern................................................................................................................ 0060-5
Figure 7. Grenade Launcher Buttons.......................................................................................... 0060-6
Figure 8. Grenade Launcher Barrel Caps.................................................................................... 0060-7
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - UNLOADING SMOKE GRENADE

LAUNCHERS........................................................................................................................... WP 0061
Figure 2. Smoke Grenade Launcher Caps.................................................................................. 0061-3
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - WEAPONS CLEARING........................................... WP 0062
Figure 4. Machine Gun Safety Selectors..................................................................................... 0062-3
Figure 5. Mantlet Cover Detent Pin............................................................................................. 0062-4
Figure 6. Ammunition Chute Cover............................................................................................. 0062-4
Figure 7. Weather Boot and Ammunition Flex Chute.................................................................. 0062-5
Figure 8. Machine Gun Receiver Top Cover and Charger Handle.............................................. 0062-6
Figure 9. Ammunition Flex Chute................................................................................................ 0062-7
Figure 10. Charger Handle.......................................................................................................... 0062-8
Figure 11. Ammunition Box......................................................................................................... 0062-8
xiv 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 12. Mantlet Top Cover.................................................................................................... 0062-11
Figure 13. Ammunition Flex Chute............................................................................................ 0062-11
Figure 14. Ammunition Chute Cover......................................................................................... 0062-12
Figure 17. Safety Selector......................................................................................................... 0062-14
Figure 18. Ammunition Belt....................................................................................................... 0062-15
Figure 19. Machine Gun Ammunition Box................................................................................. 0062-15
Figure 20. Charge Lock Selector and Charger Handle.............................................................. 0062-16
Figure 21. Machine Gun Cover.................................................................................................. 0062-16
Figure 22. Charge Lock Selector............................................................................................... 0062-17
Figure 23. Lock Selector and Charger Handle.......................................................................... 0062-17
Figure 24. Machine Gun Cover.................................................................................................. 0062-18
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM

(AFES)..................................................................................................................................... WP 0063
Figure 1. Automatic Fire Extinguisher System (AFES) Components.......................................... 0063-3
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - HAND-HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHERS............... WP 0064
Figure 1. Hand-Held Fire Extinguisher........................................................................................ 0064-2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - COMPRESSED AIR RECEPTACLE....................... WP 0065
Figure 1. Compressed Air Receptacle......................................................................................... 0065-1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - SLAVE RECEPTACLE....................................... WP 0066
Figure 1. Slave Receptacle.......................................................................................................... 0066-1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - LIKE-VEHICLE TOWING................................... WP 0067
Table 1. Like-Vehicle Towing Equipment.................................................................................... 0067-2
Figure 1. Vehicle Towbar............................................................................................................. 0067-3
Figure 2. Tie-Down Shackles - Location...................................................................................... 0067-4
Figure 3. Parking Brake............................................................................................................... 0067-5
Figure 4. Transfer Case Lockout Lever....................................................................................... 0067-5
xv 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - WINCHING OPERATIONS................................ WP 0068
Figure 1. Vehicle Winching Without Snatch Block....................................................................... 0068-2
Figure 2. Snatch Block................................................................................................................. 0068-4
Figure 4. Snatch Block With Cable.............................................................................................. 0068-5
Figure 7. Vehicle Winching With Snatch Block............................................................................ 0068-7
Figure 9. Snatch Block With Cable.............................................................................................. 0068-9
Figure 10. Snatch Block............................................................................................................. 0068-10
Figure 11. Snatch Block............................................................................................................. 0068-10
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - SLAVE RECEPTACLE STARTING................... WP 0069
Figure 2. Slave Receptacle.......................................................................................................... 0069-2
Figure 4. Voltmeter Gauge.......................................................................................................... 0069-3
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - STARTING VEHICLE IN ARCTIC WEATHER

CONDITIONS........................................................................................................................... WP 0070
Figure 1. Cooling Air Intake Cover............................................................................................... 0070-2
Figure 2. Battery Heater Valves................................................................................................... 0070-3
Figure 3. Diesel Supply and Crew Heater Valves........................................................................ 0070-3
Figure 4. Auxiliary Heater Display Panel..................................................................................... 0070-4
Figure 5. Grid Heater Switch (200 Amp DCU)............................................................................. 0070-4
Figure 6. Crew Heater Valve....................................................................................................... 0070-6
Figure 7. Rear Heater Control..................................................................................................... 0070-7
Figure 8. Front Heater Control..................................................................................................... 0070-7
Figure 9. Front and Rear Fan Controls........................................................................................ 0070-8
xvi 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 10. View Block DE-ICE Switch (200 Amp DCU)............................................................... 0070-9
Figure 11. Battery Heater Valves................................................................................................. 0070-9
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - TIRE CHAINS INSTALLATION/REMOVAL....... WP 0071
Figure 1. Tire Chains on Ground................................................................................................. 0071-1
Figure 2. CTIS Control Panel Sand Mode................................................................................... 0071-2
Figure 3. Vehicle on Tire Chains................................................................................................. 0071-3
Figure 4. Tire Chains on Tire....................................................................................................... 0071-3
Figure 5. Tire Chains................................................................................................................... 0071-4
Figure 6. Tire Chains Link............................................................................................................ 0071-4
Figure 7. Tire Chains Sliding Lock Ring...................................................................................... 0071-5
Figure 8. CTIS Control Panel - Hwy Mode.................................................................................. 0071-5
Figure 9. CTIS Control Panel - Sand Mode................................................................................. 0071-7
Figure 10. Tire Chain Sliding Lock Ring...................................................................................... 0071-7
Figure 11. Tire Chain................................................................................................................... 0071-8
Figure 12. CTIS Control Panel - Hwy Mode................................................................................ 0071-8
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL (NBC) SYSTEM

OPERATION............................................................................................................................ WP 0072
Figure 1. NBC Fan Switch (200 Amp DCU)................................................................................. 0072-2
Figure 2. NBC System - Components......................................................................................... 0072-3
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVER’S NIGHT VISION GOGGLES.............. WP 0073
Figure 1. Master Light Switch...................................................................................................... 0073-1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - HIGH ALTITUDE OPERATION.......................... WP 0074
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - CROSSING VERTICAL OBSTACLES............... WP 0075
Figure 1. ASV Crossing Vertical Obstacles................................................................................. 0075-1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - FORDING OPERATIONS.................................. WP 0076
Figure 1. Fording Depth............................................................................................................... 0076-2
xvii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 2. Hull Drain Plug - Locations........................................................................................... 0076-2
Figure 3. Driver's Controls (200 Amp DCU)................................................................................. 0076-3
STOPPAGE IMMEDIATE ACTIONS................................................................................................. WP 0077
Figure 3. Driver’s Control Unit (200 Amp).................................................................................... 0077-3
Figure 5. Gun Safety Selector..................................................................................................... 0077-4
Figure 6. Ammunition Chute Cover............................................................................................. 0077-4
Figure 9. Charger Handle............................................................................................................ 0077-7
Figure 10. Gun Receiver Cover................................................................................................... 0077-8
Figure 11. Manual Charger Lock Selector................................................................................... 0077-9
Figure 12. Charging Handle, Bolt Assembly, and Receiver Cover............................................ 0077-10
Figure 13. Charger Lock Selector and Feed Tray Cover........................................................... 0077-11
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - WEAPONS MALFUNCTION.............................. WP 0078
Figure 3. 40-MM Machine Gun - Gun Charger Handle................................................................ 0078-3
Figure 4. 40-MM Machine Gun - Rear Mantlet Cover.................................................................. 0078-4
Figure 5. 40-MM Machine Gun - Top Cover Latch...................................................................... 0078-4
Figure 6. 40-MM Machine Gun - Mantlet Top Cover................................................................... 0078-5
Figure 7. 40-MM Machine Gun - Ammunition Chute Cover......................................................... 0078-5
Figure 8. 40-MM Machine Gun - Ammunition Flex Chute........................................................... 0078-6
Figure 9. 40-MM Machine Gun - Trigger Switch.......................................................................... 0078-7
Figure 10. 40-MM Machine Gun - Receiver Top Cover............................................................... 0078-7
xviii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 11. 40-MM Machine Gun - Charger Handle..................................................................... 0078-8
Figure 14. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Charger Handle.......................................................... 0078-11
Figure 15. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Safety Selector........................................................... 0078-12
Figure 16. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Cover.......................................................................... 0078-12
Figure 17. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Cartridge Extractor and Ammunition Belt................... 0078-13
Figure 18. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Ammunition Boxes..................................................... 0078-13
STOWAGE AND DECAL LOCATIONS............................................................................................. WP 0079
Table 1. BII Stowage Straps........................................................................................................ 0079-1
Figure 1. Side Exterior Stencil - Locations................................................................................... 0079-2
Figure 2. Tow Eye - Locations..................................................................................................... 0079-3
Figure 3. Top Exterior Stencil - Locations.................................................................................... 0079-3
Figure 4. Interior Stencil - Locations............................................................................................ 0079-4
Figure 5. Interior Decal and Data Plate - Locations..................................................................... 0079-4
Figure 6. Crew Compartment Decal and Data Plate - Locations................................................. 0079-5
Figure 7. Rear Crew Compartment Decal and Data Plate - Locations........................................ 0079-5
Figure 8. Interior Rear Tunnel Decal and Data Plate - Location.................................................. 0079-6
Figure 9. Interior Rear Tunnel Decal and Data Plate - Location.................................................. 0079-6
Chapter 3 - TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM INDEX - OPERATOR MAINTENANCE..................................... WP 0080
AUXILIARY HEATER DOES NOT OPERATE................................................................................... WP 0081
Figure 1. Auxiliary Heater Control Panel..................................................................................... 0081-1
VEHICLE PULLS TO ONE SIDE WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED................................................... WP 0082
Figure 1. Valve Stem................................................................................................................... 0082-1
PARKING BRAKE DRAGS AND OVERHEATS................................................................................ WP 0083
Figure 1. Parking Brake Release Lever....................................................................................... 0083-1
xix 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
PARKING BRAKE DOES NOT HOLD............................................................................................... WP 0084
Figure 1. Transfer Case Closeout Cover..................................................................................... 0084-1
Figure 2. Lockout Lever............................................................................................................... 0084-2
Figure 3. Shift Selector................................................................................................................ 0084-3
Figure 4. Lockout Lever............................................................................................................... 0084-3
LOW BRAKE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN BRAKE PEDAL IS
PRESSED................................................................................................................................ WP 0085
Figure 1. Brake Pedal.................................................................................................................. 0085-2
Figure 2. Low Brake Hydraulic Pressure Indicator Light.............................................................. 0085-3
CTIS DOES NOT OPERATE............................................................................................................. WP 0086
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation Circuit Breaker Switch (200 Amp DCU)...................................... 0086-2
FIVE FLASHING CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS.................................................................................... WP 0087
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation Circuit Breaker Switch (200 Amp DCU)...................................... 0087-2
Figure 2. Central Tire Inflation System Control Panel................................................................. 0087-2
FOUR FLASHING CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS.................................................................................. WP 0088
TWO STEADY CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS....................................................................................... WP 0089
NO CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS.......................................................................................................... WP 0090
AIR PRESSURE LOW....................................................................................................................... WP 0091
Figure 1. CTIS Control Panel....................................................................................................... 0091-1
Figure 2. Accelerator Pedal and Tachometer.............................................................................. 0091-2
Figure 3. CTIS Control Panel....................................................................................................... 0091-2
CONTINUOUS DIFFERENTIAL GEAR NOISE................................................................................. WP 0092
ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK............................................................................................................ WP 0093
Figure 1. DCU (200 Amp)............................................................................................................ 0093-1
xx 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 2. Push Button Shift Selector in Neutral Position............................................................. 0093-2
Figure 3. Ignition Switch (200 Amp DCU).................................................................................... 0093-2
Figure 4. DCU (200 Amp)............................................................................................................ 0093-3
Figure 6. DCU (200 Amp)............................................................................................................ 0093-3
Figure 7. Battery and Cable Terminals........................................................................................ 0093-4
Figure 8. DCU (200 Amp)............................................................................................................ 0093-5
Figure 9. Push Button Shift Selector............................................................................................ 0093-6
Figure 10. Ignition Switch (200 Amp DCU).................................................................................. 0093-6
ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START..................................................................................... WP 0094
Figure 2. Air Cleaner and Intake Tube......................................................................................... 0094-2
ENGINE STALLS............................................................................................................................... WP 0095
Figure 1. DCU (200 Amp)............................................................................................................ 0095-1
Figure 2. Left and Right Fuel Gauges.......................................................................................... 0095-2
Figure 3. Fuel Crossover Valve................................................................................................... 0095-2
Figure 4. Fuel Selection Valve Handle........................................................................................ 0095-3
Figure 5. Air Restriction Gauge................................................................................................... 0095-3
Figure 6. Fuel Line Fittings.......................................................................................................... 0095-4
ENGINE DOES NOT DEVELOP FULL POWER............................................................................... WP 0096
Figure 1. Air Cleaner and Intake Tube......................................................................................... 0096-1
Figure 2. Air Induction Grille........................................................................................................ 0096-1
Figure 3. Exhaust Pipes and Muffler............................................................................................ 0096-2
ENGINE OVERHEATS...................................................................................................................... WP 0097
Figure 1. Air Induction Grille and Air Intake Grille........................................................................ 0097-2
Figure 2. Engine Cooling Fan and Drive Belt.............................................................................. 0097-3
xxi 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 3. Engine Service Access Door........................................................................................ 0097-4
EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION..................................................................................... WP 0098
Figure 1. Engine Oil Dipstick....................................................................................................... 0098-2
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION................................................................................................. WP 0099
Figure 1. Air Restriction Gauge................................................................................................... 0099-1
Figure 2. Air Restriction Gauge and Intake Tube........................................................................ 0099-2
Figure 3. Air Induction Grille........................................................................................................ 0099-2
ENGINE FAILS TO START AFTER HOLDING GRID HEATER SWITCH IN ON POSITION FOR 20 - 30
SECONDS................................................................................................................................ WP 0100
EXHAUST FUMES IN VEHICLE........................................................................................................ WP 0101
Figure 2. Exhaust Pipes and Muffler............................................................................................ 0101-2
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE IS ERRATIC............................................................................................. WP 0102
Figure 1. Low Oil Pressure Light................................................................................................. 0102-2
Figure 2. Accelerator Pedal......................................................................................................... 0102-3
Figure 3. Oil Pressure Gauge...................................................................................................... 0102-3
HEATER DOES NOT OPERATE....................................................................................................... WP 0103
Figure 1. Heat/AC Circuit Breaker Switch (200 Amp DCU)......................................................... 0103-1
Figure 2. Forward Heater Control Selector.................................................................................. 0103-2
Figure 3. Rear Heater Control Selector....................................................................................... 0103-2
Figure 4. Front and Rear Fan Control Switches.......................................................................... 0103-3
Figure 5. Crew Heater Supply Valve........................................................................................... 0103-3
Figure 6. Engine Temperature Gauge......................................................................................... 0103-4
HEATER BLOWS COLD AIR............................................................................................................. WP 0104
xxii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 1. Crew Heater Supply Valve........................................................................................... 0104-1
LOW OR NO AIR FLOW TO NBC MASK.......................................................................................... WP 0105
Figure 1. NBC Circuit Breaker Switches...................................................................................... 0105-2
Figure 2. NBC-FAN Switch (200 Amp DCU shown).................................................................... 0105-2
Figure 3. NBC Hoses................................................................................................................... 0105-3
Figure 4. NBC Hose Connections................................................................................................ 0105-4
Figure 5. Mask Canister............................................................................................................... 0105-5
NBC SYSTEM - NBC HEATER BLOWS COLD AIR......................................................................... WP 0106
Figure 2. NBC Heater Control...................................................................................................... 0106-2
NBC SYSTEM - NBC CIRCUIT BREAKERS WILL NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION....................... WP 0107
STARTER DOES NOT ENGAGE NORMALLY................................................................................. WP 0108
Figure 1. DCU (200 Amp)............................................................................................................ 0108-1
Figure 3. Battery/Cable Terminals............................................................................................... 0108-3
Figure 4. Starter Motor................................................................................................................. 0108-3
STEERING DIFFICULTY................................................................................................................... WP 0109
Figure 1. Drive Selector Lever..................................................................................................... 0109-2
Figure 2. Steering Linkage........................................................................................................... 0109-3
VEHICLE DRIFTS FROM SIDE TO SIDE......................................................................................... WP 0110
xxiii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 2. Steering Linkage........................................................................................................... 0110-2
WHEEL WOBBLE.............................................................................................................................. WP 0111
Figure 1. Lug Nuts and Studs...................................................................................................... 0111-2
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT DOES NOT TURN OFF AT START-UP AND VEHICLE DOES NOT SHIFT
INTO DRIVE............................................................................................................................. WP 0112
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT FLASHES INTERMITTENTLY.......................................................... WP 0113
Figure 1. Do Not Shift Light......................................................................................................... 0113-1
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT SHIFT INTO DRIVE OR REVERSE.................................................. WP 0114
Figure 1. Tachometer.................................................................................................................. 0114-1
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT MAKE A SPECIFIC SHIFT................................................................ WP 0115
TRANSMISSION SHIFTS ROUGHLY............................................................................................... WP 0116
Figure 1. Tachometer.................................................................................................................. 0116-1
NO RESPONSE TO TRANSMISSION SHIFT SELECTIONS WITH VEHICLE IN GEAR................. WP 0117
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT SHIFT PROPERLY OR MAKES ABNORMAL NOISES.................... WP 0118
TRANSMISSION OIL BLOWING OUT OF FILL TUBE OR OVERHEATS........................................ WP 0119
Figure 1. Transmission Fill Cap................................................................................................... 0119-1
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES................................................................. WP 0120
Figure 2. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light................................................................................... 0120-2
Figure 4. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light................................................................................... 0120-4
TRANSMISSION HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES................................... WP 0121
Figure 1. Transmission High Temperature Warning Light........................................................... 0121-2
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES......................................................... WP 0122
Figure 1. Voltmeter...................................................................................................................... 0122-1
xxiv 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 4. Low Battery Voltage Warning Light.............................................................................. 0122-4
HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES............................................. WP 0123
Figure 2. Air Intake Grille and Air Conditioning Condenser......................................................... 0123-2
Figure 5. High Coolant Temperature Warning Light.................................................................... 0123-4
LOW COOLANT LEVEL WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES.............................................................. WP 0124
PARKING BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES....................................................................... WP 0125
Figure 1. Parking Brake Warning Light........................................................................................ 0125-1
LOW BRAKE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE LIGHT ILLUMINATES....................................................... WP 0126
Figure 1. Low Brake Hydraulic Pressure Light............................................................................ 0126-2
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES........................... WP 0127
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0127-1
Figure 2. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Warning Light..................................................... 0127-2
Figure 3. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0127-2
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES...................................................................... WP 0128
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0128-1
Figure 2. Left and Right Fuel Tank Gauges................................................................................. 0128-2
Figure 3. Low Fuel Level Warning Light...................................................................................... 0128-3
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT ILLUMINATES AT START-UP.......................................................... WP 0129
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT ILLUMINATES AFTER START-UP AND DOES NOT SHIFT OUT OF
NEUTRAL................................................................................................................................. WP 0130
xxv 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) WARNING LIGHT FLASHES................................... WP 0131
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Warning Light..................................................... 0131-1
AIR CONDITIONER BLOWS WARM AIR.......................................................................................... WP 0132
Figure 1. Air Intake Grille............................................................................................................. 0132-1
GUNNER'S SEAT - DOES NOT LOCK INTO POSITION.................................................................. WP 0133
Figure 1. Seat Release Handle.................................................................................................... 0133-1
GUNNER'S SEAT - SEAT DIFFICULT OR UNABLE TO UNLOCK FROM SET POSITION............. WP 0134
GUNNER'S HATCH - DOES NOT LOCK IN 15-DEGREE OR 90-DEGREE POSITION.................. WP 0135
Figure 1. Hatch Position Handle.................................................................................................. 0135-1
GUNNER'S HATCH - DOES NOT LOCK IN CLOSED POSITION.................................................... WP 0136
Figure 1. Gunner’s Hatch Seal.................................................................................................... 0136-1
Figure 2. Gunners Hatch Latch.................................................................................................... 0136-2
Figure 3. Gunners Hatch Latch.................................................................................................... 0136-2
ELEVATION CONTROL - DOES NOT ELEVATE OR DEPRESS..................................................... WP 0137
Figure 1. Mantlet and Vehicle...................................................................................................... 0137-1
Figure 2. Elevation Control.......................................................................................................... 0137-2
POWER ASSIST TRAVERSE MECHANISM - TURRET DOES NOT POWER TRAVERSE............ WP 0138
Figure 1. Traverse Control Panel................................................................................................. 0138-2
Figure 2. Driver's and Commander's Hatches............................................................................. 0138-3
Figure 3. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0138-4
Figure 4. Turret and Hull.............................................................................................................. 0138-4
Figure 5. Traverse Motor............................................................................................................. 0138-5
xxvi 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 6. Traverse Control Panel and Turret Wiring Harness..................................................... 0138-6
Figure 7. PWM Motor Controller and Turret Wiring Harness....................................................... 0138-7
Figure 8. Circuit Breaker Panel and Turret Wiring Harness........................................................ 0138-8
Figure 9. Turret Slip Ring Electrical Connectors.......................................................................... 0138-9
Figure 10. 200 Amp DCU............................................................................................................ 0138-9
Figure 11. Pushbutton Shift Selector in Neutral (N) Position..................................................... 0138-10
Figure 12. Voltmeter Gauge...................................................................................................... 0138-10
Figure 13. 200 Amp DCU.......................................................................................................... 0138-10
POWER ASSIST TRAVERSE MECHANISM - DOES NOT MANUALLY TRAVERSE...................... WP 0139
Figure 1. Turret and Hull.............................................................................................................. 0139-1
Figure 2. Manual Traverse Handle.............................................................................................. 0139-2
TURRET POWER CONTROL - TURRET POWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON

POSITION................................................................................................................................ WP 0140
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0140-2
Figure 2. Traverse Control Panel and Turret Wiring Harness..................................................... 0140-3
Figure 3. PWM Motor Controller and Turret Wiring Harness....................................................... 0140-4
Figure 4. Slip Ring Electrical Connectors.................................................................................... 0140-5
Figure 5. Slip Ring Wiring Harness.............................................................................................. 0140-5
Figure 6. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0140-6
Figure 8. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0140-7
TURRET POWER CONTROL - TURRET POWER SWITCH IS MOVED TO ON POSITION BUT RETURNS
TO OFF POSITION WHEN RELEASED.................................................................................. WP 0141
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0141-1
Figure 2. Turret Wiring Harness Connector................................................................................. 0141-2
xxvii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 6. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0141-5
Figure 8. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0141-6
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SPOTLIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH TURRET POWER
ON............................................................................................................................................ WP 0142
Figure 1. Turret Spotlight Switch................................................................................................. 0142-1
Figure 2. Spotlight Cable............................................................................................................. 0142-2
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SIGHT POWER DOES NOT OPERATE WITH TURRET POWER
ON............................................................................................................................................ WP 0143
Figure 2. Reticle and Tube Brightness Knobs............................................................................. 0143-2
Figure 4. Turret Wiring Harness.................................................................................................. 0143-4
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SIGHT POWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON

POSITION................................................................................................................................ WP 0144
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0144-2
Figure 5. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0144-4
TURRET POWER CONTROL - EXHAUST BLOWER DOES NOT OPERATE WITH TURRET POWER
ON............................................................................................................................................ WP 0145
Figure 1. Exhaust Blower Electrical Connectors.......................................................................... 0145-1
TURRET POWER CONTROL - EXHAUST BLOWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON

POSITION................................................................................................................................ WP 0146
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0146-1
xxviii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 4. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0146-3
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL - FIRING RELAY INDICATOR ILLUMINATES WHEN TURRET CONTROL
PANEL TURRET POWER SWITCH IS MOVED TO ON POSITION....................................... WP 0147
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0147-2
Figure 3. Gunner's Control Panel................................................................................................ 0147-3
Figure 4. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0147-3
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL - MACHINE GUN ARMING SWITCH DOES NOT STAY ARMED WITH
TURRET POWER ON.............................................................................................................. WP 0148
Figure 1. Power Relay Assembly Harness Connector................................................................. 0148-2
Figure 2. Gunner's Control Panel Harness Connectors............................................................... 0148-3
Figure 3. 200 AMP DCU.............................................................................................................. 0148-4
Figure 6. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0148-5
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL - LAST ROUND OVERRIDE SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN OVERRIDE
POSITION................................................................................................................................ WP 0149
Figure 1. 40-MM Ammunition Box............................................................................................... 0149-2
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - AMMUNITION BINDS IN AMMUNITION RACK............................ WP 0150
Figure 1. 40-MM Ammunition...................................................................................................... 0150-1
Figure 2. Open Ammunition Box Doors....................................................................................... 0150-2
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT CHARGE................................................................... WP 0151
Figure 1. Ammunition in Feed Slide Assembly............................................................................ 0151-1
Figure 2. 40-MM Machine Gun Charger Slide............................................................................. 0151-2
Figure 3. 40-MM Machine Gun Charger Chain and Charger Assembly...................................... 0151-3
xxix 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE........................................................................... WP 0152
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun in Fire Position........................................................................... 0152-2
Figure 4. 40-MM Machine Gun Firing Solenoid........................................................................... 0152-4
Figure 5. 40-MM Machine Gun Firing Solenoid Harness Connector........................................... 0152-5
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - MISFIRE OF 40-MM ROUND........................................................ WP 0153
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0153-2
Figure 2. 40-MM Machine Gun Ammunition................................................................................ 0153-2
Figure 3. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0153-3
Figure 4. 40-MM Machine Gun Feed Slide Assembly................................................................. 0153-3
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - WEAPON FIRES AT INTERMITTENT SPEEDS.......................... WP 0154
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0154-2
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - COVER DOES NOT CLOSE......................................................... WP 0155
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun Feed Slide Assembly................................................................. 0155-1
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - AMMUNITION BINDS IN AMMUNITION RACK............................ WP 0156
Figure 1. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun in Safe Position................................................................. 0156-2
Figure 2. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Ammunition....................................................................... 0156-2
Figure 3. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Receiver Cover................................................................. 0156-3
Figure 4. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Bellmouth Chute............................................................... 0156-4
Figure 5. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Shoulder Shaft.................................................................. 0156-5
Figure 6. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Feed Mechanism Rollers.................................................. 0156-5
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE........................................................................... WP 0157
Figure 2. M48 .50-cal. Machine Gun Ammunition....................................................................... 0157-3
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT CHARGE.................................................................... WP 0158
xxx 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE ELECTRICALLY................................................ WP 0159
Figure 2. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Solenoid............................................................................ 0159-3
Figure 3. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0159-4
Figure 4. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Solenoid Harness............................................................. 0159-4
Figure 6. Slip Ring Electrical Connectors.................................................................................... 0159-6
Figure 7. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0159-6
Figure 8. Shift Selector to Neutral Position.................................................................................. 0159-7
Figure 9. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0159-7
Figure 10. Voltmeter Gauge........................................................................................................ 0159-7
Figure 11. 200 Amp DCU............................................................................................................ 0159-8
GRENADE LAUNCHER CONTROL FAILS....................................................................................... WP 0160
Figure 4. 200 Amp DCU.............................................................................................................. 0160-5
Figure 5. Smoke Grenade Launcher Assembly Harness Connector........................................... 0160-5
Chapter 4 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
INTRODUCTION - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)................. WP 0161
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)................................................ WP 0162
Table 1. PMCS - BEFORE.......................................................................................................... 0162-1
Figure 1. Top Engine Access Covers.......................................................................................... 0162-1
Figure 2. Coolant Level Check.................................................................................................... 0162-2
Figure 3. Non-Skid Surface......................................................................................................... 0162-3
Figure 4. Armor Panels................................................................................................................ 0162-4
xxxi 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 5. Winch Cable................................................................................................................. 0162-5
Figure 6. Winch............................................................................................................................ 0162-6
Figure 7. Mirrors........................................................................................................................... 0162-6
Figure 8. Wheels and Tires.......................................................................................................... 0162-7
Figure 9. Wheel Valves and CTIS Hoses.................................................................................... 0162-8
Figure 10. Shocks and Coil Springs............................................................................................ 0162-8
Figure 11. Tie-Rods and Mounting Hardware.............................................................................. 0162-9
Figure 12. Vehicle...................................................................................................................... 0162-10
Figure 13. Engine Oil Level....................................................................................................... 0162-11
Figure 14. Transmission Oil Level............................................................................................. 0162-11
Figure 15. Hydraulic Oil Level.................................................................................................... 0162-12
Figure 16. Coolant Level............................................................................................................ 0162-12
Figure 17. Air Restriction Indicator............................................................................................ 0162-13
Figure 18. Rear Doors............................................................................................................... 0162-13
Figure 19. Rear Engine Closeout Panels.................................................................................. 0162-14
Figure 20. Engine Drive Belt...................................................................................................... 0162-14
Figure 21. Air Conditioner Belts................................................................................................. 0162-15
Figure 22. Air Conditioner Compressor Brackets...................................................................... 0162-15
Figure 23. Fuel/Water Separator and Fuel Filter....................................................................... 0162-17
Figure 24. Starter....................................................................................................................... 0162-18
Figure 25. Side Doors................................................................................................................ 0162-18
Figure 26. Hand-Held Fire Extinguishers................................................................................... 0162-19
Figure 27. Crew Seat................................................................................................................. 0162-19
Figure 28. Automatic Fire Extinguisher System (AFES)............................................................ 0162-21
Figure 29. Transfer Case Oil Level............................................................................................ 0162-22
Figure 30. Transfer Case Mounting Hardware.......................................................................... 0162-22
Figure 31. Batteries................................................................................................................... 0162-24
xxxii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 32. Air Filter.................................................................................................................... 0162-24
Figure 33. View Block Washer Reservoirs Fluid Level.............................................................. 0162-25
Figure 34. Seats........................................................................................................................ 0162-25
Figure 35. Electrical Seat Controls............................................................................................ 0162-26
Figure 36. Seat Belts................................................................................................................. 0162-27
Figure 37. View Blocks.............................................................................................................. 0162-27
Figure 38. Vehicle Lights........................................................................................................... 0162-28
Figure 39. Auxiliary Heater Control Panel................................................................................. 0162-29
Figure 40. Control Panel Gauges.............................................................................................. 0162-30
Figure 41. Warning Light Panel................................................................................................. 0162-31
Figure 42. AFES Control Panel................................................................................................. 0162-32
Figure 43. CTIS Control Panel................................................................................................... 0162-32
Figure 44. View Block Wipers.................................................................................................... 0162-33
Figure 45. 2WD/4WD Lever....................................................................................................... 0162-33
Figure 46. Brake Pedal.............................................................................................................. 0162-34
Figure 47. NBC Heater Components......................................................................................... 0162-34
Table 2. PMCS - DURING......................................................................................................... 0162-35
Figure 48. Driver's Instrument Panel......................................................................................... 0162-35
Figure 49. 2WD/4WD Shift Selector.......................................................................................... 0162-36
Figure 50. Parking Brake........................................................................................................... 0162-36
Figure 51. Winch Control Lever................................................................................................. 0162-37
Figure 52. Warning Light Panel................................................................................................. 0162-37
Figure 53. CTIS Control Panel................................................................................................... 0162-38
Table 3. PMCS - AFTER........................................................................................................... 0162-40
Figure 56. Wheel Valves and CTIS Hoses................................................................................ 0162-40
xxxiii 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 57. Shocks...................................................................................................................... 0162-40
Figure 58. View Block Wipers.................................................................................................... 0162-41
Figure 59. Washer Bottles Fluid Level....................................................................................... 0162-41
Figure 60. View Blocks.............................................................................................................. 0162-42
Figure 61. Engine Oil Level....................................................................................................... 0162-42
Figure 64. Transfer Case Oil Level............................................................................................ 0162-44
Figure 65. Air Restriction Indicator............................................................................................ 0162-44
Figure 66. Fuel Tank Level........................................................................................................ 0162-45
Figure 67. Air Tank - Inspection................................................................................................. 0162-45
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) - TURRET SYSTEMS............ WP 0163
Table 1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)........................... 0163-1
Figure 1. Spent Cartridge Bag..................................................................................................... 0163-2
Figure 2. Gunner's Seat............................................................................................................... 0163-3
Figure 3. Periscopes.................................................................................................................... 0163-4
Figure 8. Turret Override (200 Amp DCU)................................................................................... 0163-8
Figure 9. Last Round Override.................................................................................................... 0163-9
Figure 10. Exhaust Blower......................................................................................................... 0163-10
Figure 11. Smoke Grenade Launchers...................................................................................... 0163-11
Figure 12. Gunner's Sight.......................................................................................................... 0163-12
Chapter 5 - MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................................... WP 0164
xxxiv 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Table 1. Engine Lubrication......................................................................................................... 0164-3
Table 2. Transmission and Transfer Case Lubrication................................................................ 0164-4
Table 3. Axle Lubrication............................................................................................................. 0164-4
Table 4. Hydraulic Reservoir Servicing........................................................................................ 0164-5
Table 5. Radiator Servicing......................................................................................................... 0164-5
Table 6. Oil Can Point Lubrication............................................................................................... 0164-6
Table 7. Vehicle Cleaning............................................................................................................ 0164-6
GENERAL CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS........................................................................................... WP 0165
AIR CLEANER CAP AND FILTER ELEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................... WP 0166
Figure 1. Air Cleaner Access Panel............................................................................................. 0166-1
Figure 2. Air Cleaner.................................................................................................................... 0166-2
Figure 3. Air Cleaner.................................................................................................................... 0166-3
Figure 4. Air Cleaner Access Panel............................................................................................. 0166-4
HULL DRAIN PLUGS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................................... WP 0167
Figure 1. Front Hull Drain Plugs.................................................................................................. 0167-1
Figure 2. Rear Hull Drain Plugs................................................................................................... 0167-2
Figure 3. Rear Hull Drain Plugs................................................................................................... 0167-3
Figure 4. Front Hull Drain Plugs.................................................................................................. 0167-4
MANUAL TIRE INFLATION............................................................................................................... WP 0168
Figure 1. CTIS Hose Guard - Removal........................................................................................ 0168-1
Figure 2. Air Hose and Gauge - Connection................................................................................ 0168-2
Figure 3. Air Hose and Gauge - Removal.................................................................................... 0168-3
Figure 4. CTIS Hose Guard - Installation..................................................................................... 0168-3
ENGINE CLOSEOUT PANELS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................ WP 0169
Figure 1. Engine Closeout Panels - Removal.............................................................................. 0169-1
Figure 2. Engine Closeout Panels - Installation........................................................................... 0169-2
WHEEL CHOCKS INSTALLATION/REMOVAL................................................................................. WP 0170
xxxv 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 1. Wheel Chocks.............................................................................................................. 0170-1
Figure 2. Wheel Chocks on Vehicle............................................................................................. 0170-2
Figure 3. Wheel Chocks on Vehicle............................................................................................. 0170-3
Figure 4. Wheel Chocks.............................................................................................................. 0170-3
CARE, HANDLING, PRESERVATION, AND PACKING.................................................................... WP 0171
TYPES OF AMMUNITION................................................................................................................. WP 0172
Figure 1. 40-MM, MK19 MOD 3 Machine Gun - M385A1 Training Practice (TP)........................ 0172-1
Figure 2. 40-MM, MK19 MOD 3 Machine Gun - M383 High Explosive (HE)............................... 0172-2
Figure 3. 40-MM, MK19 MOD 3 Machine Gun - M677 High Explosive Tracer (HE-T)................ 0172-3
Figure 4. 40-MM, MK19 MOD 3 Machine Gun - M430 High Explosive Dual
Purpose (HEDP)................................................................................................................ 0172-4
Figure 5. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M2 Armor Piercing (AP).............................................. 0172-5
Figure 6. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M8 Armor Piercing Incendiary (API)............................ 0172-5
Figure 7. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M20 Armor Piercing Incendiary-

Tracer (API-T).................................................................................................................... 0172-5
Figure 8. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M2 Ball........................................................................ 0172-6
Figure 9. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M33 Ball...................................................................... 0172-6
Figure 10. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M1 Incendiary............................................................ 0172-6
Figure 11. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M23 Incendiary.......................................................... 0172-6
Figure 12. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M10 Tracer................................................................ 0172-7
Figure 13. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M17 Tracer................................................................ 0172-7
Figure 14. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M1 Tracer.................................................................. 0172-7
Figure 15. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M1 High-Pressure Test............................................. 0172-7
Figure 16. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M1 Blank................................................................... 0172-8
Figure 17. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M1A1 Blank............................................................... 0172-8
Figure 18. .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Gun - M2 Dummy................................................................ 0172-8
Figure 19. M257 Grenade Launcher - UK L8A1 (RP) Smoke Screen Grenade.......................... 0172-9
xxxvi 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 20. M257 Grenade Launcher - UK L8A3 (RP) Red Phosphorus Smoke
Screen Grenade............................................................................................................... 0172-10
AMMUNITION STOWAGE LOCATIONS........................................................................................... WP 0173
Figure 1. Ammunition Stowage Locations - .50-Cal. Machine Gun Ammunition......................... 0173-1
Figure 2. Ammunition Stowage Locations - Smoke Grenades.................................................... 0173-2
Chapter 6 - SUPPORTING INFORMATION
REFERENCES................................................................................................................................... WP 0174
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS.............................. WP 0175
Table 1. Usable On Codes.......................................................................................................... 0175-1
Table 2. Components of End Item............................................................................................... 0175-2
Table 3. Basic Issue Items........................................................................................................... 0175-7
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL).................................................................................... WP 0176
Table 1. Usable On Codes.......................................................................................................... 0176-1
Table 2. Additional Authorization List (AAL)................................................................................ 0176-2
EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST.................................................................................... WP 0177
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List............................................................................... 0177-2
HULL OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES.......................................................................... WP 0178
Index
xxxvii/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(contents) wpno(ASV_TOC_1)

TM 9-2320-381-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual contains instructions for safe and efficient operation of the M1117 Armored Security Vehicle (ASV),
manufactured by Textron Marine & Land Systems, U.S.A. These instructions provide the user with a general
knowledge of the equipment, characteristics, and operating procedures of the ASV. Troubleshooting and
maintenance procedures are provided at crew maintenance levels.
This manual provides operating instructions for circumstances that may be encountered during mission
operations. Emergencies, adverse weather, terrain, or other conditions may require changes to these basic
procedures.
Operating instructions for most circumstances will be provided, but the user's best guide will be knowledge of the
vehicle and its operation. In an emergency, a quick instinctive response based on that knowledge is essential.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
The table of contents provides a quick reference to assist in finding the required information.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
Warning, caution, and note headings and certain essential information are printed in BOLD type for clarity. This is
critical data to ensure personal safety, prevent damage to the vehicle, and clarify unique data or procedures used
on the ASV.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND THEORY OF OPERATION
Chapter 1 presents general information, as well as the characteristics, capabilities, and features of the ASV. Also
included in Chapter 1 is ASV data and theory of operation.
CHAPTER 2 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
Operator instructions are listed in Chapter 2 for individual equipment items in the ASV. Included are description
and location of driver's controls, fire suppression system, and the auxiliary heater system. Chapter 2 also provides
instructions for starting and shutting off the vehicle, driving procedures, and operating the NBC system.
CHAPTER 3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Chapter 3 provides troubleshooting procedures for various malfunctions that may occur during vehicle operation.
CHAPTER 4 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
Chapter 4 lists operator level preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) that are performed before
vehicle operation, while it is being operated, and after the mission is completed. The PMCS table lists the item to
be checked or serviced, the check or service procedure, and the criteria for determining whether the equipment
being checked is ready for its mission.
CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Chapter 5 lists maintenance instructions the crew can perform on the vehicle.
xxxix 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(howtouse) wpno(F00005)

TM 9-2320-381-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL - Continued
CHAPTER 6 SUPPORTING INFORMATION
Chapter 6 lists the regulations, forms, pamphlets, field manuals, technical bulletins, and technical manuals that
apply to this manual. Chapter 6 also includes Components of End Item (COEI), Addition Authorization List (AAL),
and Expendable and Durable Items List.
xl 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(howtouse) wpno(F00005)

TM 9-2320-381-10
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND

THEORY OF OPERATION
TM 9-2320-381-10 0001
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOPE
This technical manual (TM) contains operating instructions, theory of operation, troubleshooting procedures,
maintenance instructions, and supporting data for the Armored Security Vehicle (ASV).
Type of Manual: Operator.
Purpose of Equipment: The ASV is designed to support peacetime and wartime mission requirements, security
operations, battlefield circulation control, personnel transport, and military law enforcement.
Special Instructions: This manual contains instructions on how to operate the system with certain equipment
disabled. There are many redundant systems available, which have definite purposes within a mission, and can
be used for other functions in order to supplement a failed component.
MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS
Department of Army (DA) forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance are those prescribed by
DA PAM 750-8. The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual.
REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR)
If your ASV needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us
what you do not like about your equipment. Let us know why you do not like the design or performance.
All non-Aviation/Missile EIRs and PQDRs must be submitted through the Product Data Reporting and Evaluation
Program (PDREP) Web site. The PDREP site is: https://www.pdrep.csd.disa.mil/.
If you do not have Internet access, you may submit your information using an SF 368 (Product Quality Deficiency
Report). You can send your SF 368 using email, regular mail, or fax using the addresses/fax numbers specified in
DA PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual. We will send you a reply.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL
Corrosion prevention and control of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any corrosion
problems with this item be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements can be made to
prevent the problem in future items. The term “corrosion” means the deterioration of a material or its properties
due to a reaction of that material with its chemical environment. An example is the rusting of iron. Corrosion
damage in metals can be seen, depending on the metal, as tarnishing, pitting, fogging, surface residue, and/or
cracking. Plastics, composites, and rubbers can also degrade (also considered to be corrosion based on the
above definition of corrosion). Degradation is caused by thermal (heat) energy, oxidation (oxygen), solvation
(solvents), or photolytic (light, typically ultraviolet) processes. The most common exposures are excessive heat or
light. Damage from these processes will appear as cracking, softening, swelling, and/or breaking. The US Army
has defined the following nine (9) forms of corrosion used to evaluate the deterioration of metals. These shall be
used when evaluating and documenting corrosion.
UNIFORM (or general attack): Affects a large area of exposed metal surface, like rust on steel or tarnish on silver.
It gradually reduces the thickness of the metal until it fails.
CREVICE: Occurs in crevices created by rubber seals, gaskets, bolt heads, lap joints, dirt or other surface
deposits. It will develop anywhere moisture or other corrosive agents are trapped and unable to drain or
evaporate.
SELECTIVE LEACHING: One element, usually the anodic element of an alloy, corrodes away, leaving the
cathodic element. This can create holes in metal.
0001-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(ginfowp) wpno(G02001)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0001
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL - Continued
INTERGRANULAR: Metal deterioration caused by corrosion on the bonds between or across the grain
boundaries of the metal. The metal will appear to be peeling off in sheets, flaking, or being pushed apart by
layers. A particular type of intergranular corrosion is exfoliation.
PITTING: This can result from conditions similar to those for crevice corrosion. Pits can develop on various
materials due to their composition. Rifle boxes are big victims of pitting.
EROSION: Results when a moving fluid (liquid or gas) flows across a metal surface, particularly when solid
particles are present in the fluid. Corrosion actually occurs on the surface of the metal, but the moving fluid
washes away the corrosion and exposes a new metal surface, which also corrodes.
FRETTING: Occurs as a result of small, repetitive movements (e.g., vibration) between two surfaces in contact
with each other. It’s usually identified by a black powder corrosion product or pits on the surface.
GALVANIC: Occurs when two different types of metal come in contact with each other, like steel bolts on
aluminum, for example. This is a common problem on aircraft because of their mix of metals.
STRESS: Term used to describe corrosion cracking and corrosion fatigue. Where an item is not ready/available
due to one of these forms of corrosion, it shall be recorded as a corrosion failure in the inspection record and the
appropriate code (170) for corrosion shall be used when requesting/performing maintenance.
SF Form 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report, should be submitted to the address specified in DA PAM 750-8,
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual.
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
GENERAL
For detailed procedures, refer to TM 750-244-6, Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment to
Prevent Enemy Use.
Destruction orders for the vehicle must come from the unit commander. When you cannot contact your unit
commander, the vehicle commander will make the decision.
NOTE
If possible, take costly and hard to replace equipment with you when you evacuate.
One condition for destroying the vehicle is when enemy capture or abandonment of the vehicle in enemy territory
is imminent.
Destroy the vehicle where the enemy will be hurt the most.
Follow all safety precautions.
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT
For long-term storage of equipment, see SB 740-98-1.

For shipment of equipment, see TM 38-470.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS (Table 1)
Table 1. List of Abbreviations/Acronyms.
ABBREVIATION/ACRONYM DEFINITION
A/C Air Conditioning or Air Conditioner

TM 9-2320-381-10 0001
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS (Table 1) - Continued
Table 1. List of Abbreviations/Acronyms - Continued.
AEPS Army Electronic Product Support
AFES Automatic Fire Extinguishing System
Amp Ampere
AP Armor-Piercing
API Armor-Piercing Incendiary
APIT Armor-Piercing Incendiary Tracer
ASV Armored Security Vehicle
BII Basic Issue Items
BIT Built-in Test
BO Blackout
BRT Bright
C Celsius
CAGEC Commercial and Government Entity Code
CB Circuit Breaker
CG Center of Gravity
CTA Common Table of Allowances
CTIS Central Tire Inflation System
CVC Combat Vehicle Crewman
D Drive
DA Department of Army
DCA Diagnostic Connector Assembly
DCU Driver’s Control Unit
DNS Do Not Shift
DoD Department of Defense

TM 9-2320-381-10 0001
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EIR Equipment Improvement Recommendation
EMER Emergency
F Fahrenheit
FGC Functional Group Code
GFE Government Furnished Equipment
GMD Grease, Molybdenum Disulfide
GO Gear Oil
GPS Global Positioning System
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight
HE High Explosive
HED High Explosive Dual Purpose
HE-T High Explosive Tracer
HPDU Hull Power Distribution Unit
HTR Heater
HWY Highway
in. Inch
kg Kilogram
KM/H Kilometers per Hour
kph Kilometers per Hour
kpL Kilometers per Liter
L Liter
lb Pound
LH Left Hand

TM 9-2320-381-10 0001
LO Lubrication Order
m Meters
MAC Maintenance Allocation Chart
MDG Molybdenum Disulfide Grease
MEXAS Modular Expandable Armor System
MIL Military
MPH Miles Per Hour
MTOE Modified Table of Organization and Equipment
N Neutral
NBC Nuclear, Biological, or Chemical
N·M Newton Meter
NSN National Stock Number
OE Oil, Engine
OT Operational Test
P Parts
PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
Pubs Publications
PWM Pulse-Width Modulation
QDR Quality Deficiency Report (SF Form 368)
qt Quart
R Reverse
RH Right Hand
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RPSTL Repair Parts and Special Tools List

TM 9-2320-381-10 0001
SAMS Standard Army Maintenance System
STE/ICE Simplified Test Equipment for Internal Combustion

Engines
TAMMS The Army Maintenance Management System
TCM Transmission Control Module
TDA Table of Distribution and Allowances
TECH Technical
TI Technical Inspection
TIPS Tool Improvement Program Suggestion
TM Technical Manual
TMDE Test, Measurement, and Diagnostic Equipment
TP Training Practice
TWV Tactical Wheeled Vehicle
ULLS Unit Level Logistics System
X-C Cross-Country
SAFETY, CARE, AND HANDLING
Observe all warnings, safety precautions, and safety regulations in this manual. Safety precautions to be
observed during training and combat are prescribed in AR 385-10, AR 385-63, DA PAM 385-63, and TM
9-1300-200.
Instructions for general ammunition care, handling, and safety are provided in AR 385-10, DA PAM 385-63, DA
PAM 385-64, TM 9-1300-200 and TB 43-0250. Safety precautions given in the individual machine gun operation
instructions must be followed for storing, handling, and firing ammunition.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES
The ASV is designed to support both peacetime and wartime mission requirements, security operations,
battlefield circulation control, personnel transport, and military law enforcement. It will operate under all
environmental conditions, including arctic weather.
The vehicle is a four-wheel drive vehicle of exceptional maneuverability and versatility. It can drive through
barricades, climb 60% grades, travel cross-country over terrain passable only with highly specialized vehicles,
and traverse deep mud, snow, or water with equal ease.
The vehicle can ford hard bottom water crossings up to 60 inches (1.5 meters) without special preparation. It can
travel through ditches and climb vertical obstacles up to 22 inches (0.6 meters) in height.
Use of a common diesel engine and automatic transmission provide high reliability with low maintenance
requirements and reduced training time.
The vehicle is equipped with a central tire inflation system (CTIS) which allows greater tactical mobility. Radial
tires with run flat inserts also provide extended driving time if the tires become punctured.
The turret is a closely integrated weapon station with all primary and secondary sighting and weapon systems
tightly linked together. The gunner in the turret must keep closely linked with the rest of the crew. To ensure
constant communication, electrical and radio continuity is maintained by an electrical slip ring mounted on the
floor of the turret basket. The gunner's feet are protected from the slip ring by the guard plate.
The turret is constructed of armor plating which provides extra protection for the gunner sitting in the turret basket.
The turret traverses 360 degrees using electrical power and is supported by a ring gear bearing. In the event of a
power failure, the turret may be traversed manually. Weapon elevation and depression is controlled manually by
an elevation control unit.
The turret is equipped with a 24-volt spotlight for night operations and is mounted coaxially on the M48 .50-cal.
machine gun mount. Additional features include a gunner’s day/night sight (M36ASV), adjustable view
periscopes, an adjustable gunner’s seat, crash pads, ammunition box storage racks for each machine gun, and a
spent cartridge collection system for the M48 .50-cal. machine gun. The machine guns are fired electrically by 24-
volt solenoid actuated triggers. A gun selector switch on the gunner's control panel enables firing of either the 40-
mm or the M48 .50-cal. machine gun separately. In the event of a power failure, both machine guns may be fired
manually.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
Figure 1 and Table 1 illustrate the basic vehicle components. Figure 2 and Table 2 illustrate components that are
unique to the turret. Figures 3 and 4 show the dimensions of the ASV.
0002-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(descwp) wpno(G02002)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
2 7 8
3 4 5 9
6
1
10
15 11
13 12
14
18
17
20 21
26 16
19
25 22 ASV01841
24 23
Figure 1. Item Location.
Table 1. Basic Item Location.
Item Nomenclature
1 Winch Hatch
2 Commander's Hatch
3 .50-Caliber Machine Gun
4 5.56-mm Pintle Mount
5 M36ASV Day/Night Sight
6 Gunner's Hatch
7 Auxiliary Cable

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
Table 1. Basic Item Location - Continued.
8 Air Intake Grille
9 Rear Door
10 Exhaust Grilles
11 Engine Service Access Door
12 M257 Grenade Launcher
13 Air Hose
14 40-mm Machine Gun
15 Driver's Hatch
16 Fuel Cap Filler Cover
17 Turret
18 View Block
19 Door Port
20 Fuel Can
21 M13 Decon Can
22 Towing Pintle
23 Side Door
24 Tie-down Shackle
25 Towing Eye
26 Lifting Eye

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
14
1 2
13
12
11
10
4
9 5
7 ASV01419
Figure 2. Turret - Components.
Table 2. Turret Components.
Key Component Description
1 Gunner's Hatch Allows access to turret.
2 M257 Smoke Grenade Provides smoke cover in tactical situations.

Launchers
(2 Each)
3 Periscope (7 Each) Provides 360-degree field of vision.
4 Gunner's Seat Provides position for turret operator during use of ASV.
5 Power Relay Panel Provides power to turret.
6 Turret Basket Houses the gunner's seat and control components.
7 Slip Ring Transfers signals between turret components and hull.
8 M48 .50-Cal. Spent Cartridge Captures and stores spent ammunition from .50-cal. machine
Bag gun.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
Table 2. Turret Components - Continued.
Key Component Description
9 40-mm MK19 Machine Gun Primary weapon system for direct and indirect targeting.
10 M48 .50-Cal. M2HB Machine Coax weapon system for direct targeting.
Gun
11 Lifting Eye (3 Each) Aids in maintenance procedures.
12 5.56-mm M249 Machine Gun Secondary weapon system for small arms targeting.
13 Spotlight Provides illumination outside of turret and vehicle.
14 M36ASV Day/Night Sight Provides view for target acquisition during tactical operations.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
101 IN.
(2.57 m)
96.6 IN.
(2.45 m)
239 IN.
(6.07 m)
80.38 IN.
102 IN. (2.04 m)
(2.59 m)
85.25 IN.
40 40 (2.17 m)
DEGREES DEGREES
17.75 IN.
(0.45 m)
29.5 IN.
(0.75 m)
A B A B
BASELINE 63.44 IN. (1.61 m) 46.38 IN. (1.18 m)
FRAG 1 61.51 IN. (1.58 m) 47.75 IN. (1.21 m)
121.25 IN. FRAG 2 61.07 IN. (1.71 m) 42.71 IN. (1.21 m)
(3.08 m) ASV00587
Figure 3. Vehicle Dimensions.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
72 IN.
(183 cm)
24 IN.
(60.9 cm)
44 IN.
(111.7 cm)
ASV00006
Figure 4. Turret - Dimensions.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT DATA
Performance:
Maximum speed 63 mph (101 kph)

0 - 20 mph (0 - 32 kph) 4.8 seconds
0 - 50 mph (0 - 80 kph) 28.5 seconds
Maximum gradient climbable 60 percent
Maximum side slope operation 30 percent
Maximum vertical obstacle 22 in. (0.6 m)
Turning radius 55 ft (16.8 m)
Range @ 40 mph (64 kph) 430 miles (692 km)
Mileage 8.6 mpg (3.65 kpl)
Fording 60 in. (1.5 m)
Braking distance
20 - 0 mph (32 - 0 kph) Under 30 ft (9.1 m)

50 - 0 mph (80 - 0 kph) 260 ft (79.2 m)
Hull:
Material Unitized construction of welded high-hardness ballistic plate

Armor Applique Exterior and interior
Doors (4) Right door, left door, rear door, and engine access door
Hatches (4) Driver’s, commander’s, winch, and gunner's
Seats (3) Driver's, commander's, and passenger
Vision/Sighting
Hull view blocks 6
Sight point from vehicle
Front (driver’s compartment) 18.9 ft (5.8 m)

Sides (driver’s compartment) 14 ft (4.3 m)
Weight (Without Frag Kit 2):
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 29,500 lb (13,381 kg)

Curb 26,000 lb (11,793 kg)
Payload 3,360 lb (1,524 kg)
Center of gravity @ GVW 46.38 in. (1.2 m) above ground, 63.44 in. (1.6 m) rear of front axle center

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
Weight (With Frag Kit 2):
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 32,605 lb (14,789 kg)

Curb 29,245 lb (13,265 kg)
Payload 3,360 lb (1,524 kg)
Center of gravity @ GVW 47.71 in. (1.2 m) above ground, 61.09 in. (1.6 m) rear of front axle center
Dimensions:
Wheelbase 121.25 in. (3.08 m)

Track 84.3 in. (2.14 m)
Overall length 239 in. (6.07 m)
Overall width 101 in. (2.57 m)
Overall height (over turret) 102 in. (2.59 m)
Overall height (over hull) 85.25 in. (2.17 m)
Ground Clearance:
Nominal 18 in. (0.46 m)

Minimal 15 in. (0.38 m)
Engine:
Type 6-cylinder, in-line Cummins turbocharged 4-cycle diesel

Brake horsepower 260 @ 2200 rpm (governed)
Displacement 504 cubic inches (8.3 liters)
Governed speed 2200 rpm
Idle speed 950 rpm
Transmission:
Type Allison MD3560 6-speed automatic

Type Allison 3500 SP 6-speed automatic
Transfer:
Type Single speed, shift-on-the-move, in-out engagement for four-wheel drive with
neutral lock-out lever for towing
Ratio 0.94:1
Differentials (2):
Type Meritor double reduction

Ratio 3.9:1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
Suspension:
Type Independent front and rear, upper and lower control arms with coil springs at
each wheel
Shock absorbers Telescopic, one direct acting at each wheel
Wheel Drive:
Type Reduction gear planetary hub

Ratio 2:1
Tires and Wheels:
Type Radial tubeless 14.00 R20 Michelin XZL with Hutchinson run-flat inserts
Diameter 49.4 in. (1.25 m)
Tire pressures (CTIS presets) (without frag kit 2)
Highway 71 psi (4.9 bar)

Cross-country 45 psi (3.1 bar)
Mud/sand/snow 23 psi (1.6 bar)
Emergency 18 psi (1.2 bar)
Wheels 20 x 10 in. (2 piece)
Tire pressures (CTIS presets) (with frag kit 2)
Highway 85 psi (5.9 bar)

Cross-country 50 psi (3.4 bar)
Mud/sand/snow 26 psi (1.8 bar)
Emergency 22 psi (1.5 bar)
Wheels 20 x 10 in. (2 piece)
Steering:
Type TRW Model TAS-65

Assist Hydraulic
Service Brakes:
Type Drum and shoe, Meritor 4-wheel dual cylinder-hydraulic

Standard boost assist Hydraulic system with accumulator assist
Emergency boost Accumulator pressure
Accumulator (each) 2750 psi (189.6 bar)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
Parking Brake:
Type Drum and shoe

Location Transmission output shaft
Actuation Driver-operated foot pedal
Fuel System:
Fuel tanks (2) Integral within body

Capacity (each) 25 gal (94.6 L)
Fuel pump Engine-driven
Fuel pump (2) Electrical with internal strainer element
Fuel filter Dual replaceable element
Fuel requirements Diesel or JP-8 (MIL-T-83133)
Cooling System:
Operating temperature 180 - 230°F (82 - 110°C)

Capacity 50 qt (47.3 L)
Hydraulic System:
Hydraulic pump Dual, gear-type

Hydraulic Reservoir Capacity 20 qt (18.92 L)
Hydraulic System Capacity 24 qt (22.7 L)
Electrical System
Type Waterproof 24 volts, radio frequency interference suppressed

Batteries (2) 12 volts, 100 amp-hour rating, each
Alternator 260 amp regulated down to 200 amp (Serial Number 1 - 3033)
460 amp regulated down to 400 amp (Serial Number 3034 and beyond)
Headlights (2) Single bulb, dual element high/low beam
Blackout drive One
Tail lights Integral stop lights with blackout lenses
Turn signals 4-way hazard flashers with blackout marker
Spotlight 24 Volt, 100,000 candle power, 100-watt quartz halogen or 24 Volt 150,000
candle power, 2.1 Amp, 29.4 watt LED.
Fire Suppression:
Type Automatic Fire Suppression System (AFES)

Engine compartment FM200
Size 10 lb (4.5 kg)
Crew Compartment (2)
Size 3.0 lb (1.36 kg) and 5.25 lb (2.38 kg)
Operation Automatic and manual
Portable fire extinguishers (2) Dry chemical
Size 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
Bilge Pump:
Type Electric submersible

Capacity 46 gpm (174.1 lpm) at 6 ft (1.8 m) head
Winch:
Drive Hydraulic
Line pull (bare drum) 15,000 lb (6804 kgf)
Line speed (bare drum) 41 ft/min (12.5 m/min)
Air Conditioner:
Type Engine-driven compressor

Blower Electric, 24 volt
Capacity 30,000 Btu/hr
Air Flow 450 cfm
Refrigerant R134A
Oil capacity 6 oz (177.4 cc)
Heater:
Type Hot water system

Capacity 43,800 Btu/hr
Capacities:
Engine oil 20 qts (18.9 L)

Engine cooling 50 qt (47.3 L)
Fuel tanks (each) 25 gal (94.6 L)
Transmission 22 qt (20.8 L)
Transfer 2 qt (1.9 L)
Differentials (each) 9 qt (8.5 L)
Wheel ends (each) 0.8 pt (0.4 L)
Winch 1.25 pt (0.6 L)
Hydraulic reservoir 20 qt (18.9 L)
Brake accumulator (each) 3 qt (2.8 L)
Auxiliary Heater:
Fuel requirements Diesel or JP-8 (MIL-T-83133)

Capacity:
ASV037 and subsequent 32,400 Btu/hr (9.5 kw)
Operating temperature to: -40°F (-40°C)
NBC System:
Type M13A1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
Communications:
Radio set AN/VRC-91A

Intercom (4 station) AN/VIC-1
Headset CVC
Headset PICVC
Headset CAPS (TYPE I)
Headset CAPS (TYPE II)
Headset ACAPS
Headset Command and Control
Blue Force Tracking FBCB2
TURRET EQUIPMENT DATA
Hull:
Height (overall) 68 in. (172 cm)
Width or diameter 54 in. (137 cm)
Length, without armament 72 in. (184 cm)
Weight 2350 lb (1068 kg)
Gunner's hatch 1
Controls:
Power assist traverse 360 degrees continuous with manual backup
Traverse rate 45 degrees/second power
0.25 - 7 degrees/second manual
Elevation +45 degrees
Depression -8 degrees
Manual elevation rate 15 degrees/second
Armor Ballistic Steel Plate
Weapons:
Primary Type: 40-mm MK19 Mod 3
Rate of fire: 325 - 375 rounds/min
Ready rounds: 96
Coaxial Type: M48 .50-cal. M2HB
Rate of fire: 450 - 600 rounds/min
Ready rounds: 200
Secondary (pintle mount) Type: 5.56-mm M249
Grenades (8 tubes) Type: M257 Smoke
Ready rounds: 4 grenades/launcher
Firing Accuracy:
40-mm burst 2 at 5 rounds; accurate engagement at 3,281 ft. (1000 m)
M48 .50-cal. burst 2 at 10 rounds; accurate engagement at 3,281 ft. (1000 m)
Sighting:
Gunner’s day/night sight M36ASV
Adjustable periscope +60 degrees max
-10 degrees min
Sight point from vehicle:

Sides (turret gunner’s seat) 30.9 feet (9.4 m)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0002
TURRET EQUIPMENT DATA - Continued
Electrical:
Power requirement 24 Vdc
Utility light with red and white 1
light
Interior light with blue and white 1
light
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0003
THEORY OF OPERATION
GENERAL
The ASV supports the MP in conducting the five MP functions across the full spectrum of military operations. The
MP functions are area security, maneuver and mobility support, police intelligence, law and order enforcement,
and internment/resettlement operations. The ASV can also support countermortar and counter-IED patrols,
cordon and searches, and raids as part of a quick response force. In addition, the ASV assists the maneuver
commander with enhanced force protection and sustainment capabilities.
HULL COMPONENTS
Armor
The ASV hull is constructed of welded, high-hardness ballistic plate. Increased vehicle and crew protection is
provided by external bolt-on ceramic plates and an internal spall liner, providing protection against small arms fire,
grenades, and anti-personnel mines. All exposed surfaces are designed for maximum ricochet and crew
protection. The drive train is completely enclosed within the hull.
View Blocks
The ASV is equipped with six view blocks. Four large view blocks are located at the driver’s and commander’s
station. A smaller view block is located on each side of the vehicle in the crew compartment. View blocks provide
ballistic protection comparable to the hull armor system. Spall shields are built into each view block.
Doors and Hatches
Openings on sides and rear of vehicle are referred to as doors. Top openings are referred to as hatches. All
hatches and doors are watertight, and held closed by latch handles. There are two side doors, a rear door, and an
engine access door. There is a driver’s hatch, commander’s hatch, and winch hatch.
Power Train
The ASV is powered by a Cummins turbocharged diesel engine and Allison six-speed automatic transmission. A
drive shaft couples the transmission with the drive transfer unit. Output from the transfer unit drives the rear
differential when the vehicle is in two-wheel drive, and front and rear differentials when vehicle is in four-wheel
drive. Four-wheel drive can be engaged “on-the-fly” by actuating a shift lever at the driver’s station.
Differentials and Drive Shafts
Differentials manufactured by Meritor are mounted underside of the vehicle hull, and drive front and rear axle
drive shafts. Output drive shafts to each wheel allows for independent suspension.
Suspension
The ASV has an independent suspension utilizing a double wishbone spring arm, coil springs, and dampers. The
suspension components are pre-lubed and sealed and do not require lubrication services during the operational
life of the ASV.
0003-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(thrywp) wpno(G03001)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0003
Tires
Steel-belted radial tires provide maneuverability over all road conditions. Run-flat inserts allow extended driving
time under emergency conditions if the tires are punctured.
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic power for hydraulic system components is provided by an engine-driven hydraulic pump. The hydraulic
system supplies hydraulic pressure to operate the steering gear, brake hydraulics and winch control hydraulics. If
hydraulic system pressure is lost, steering can be operated manually with increased effort.
Brake System
The brake system is powered by a brake pedal modulator valve and a hydraulic accumulator which stores
pressurized hydraulic fluid providing 2750 psi (190 bar) to the wheel cylinders. Each wheel is equipped with a
Meritor Stopmaster hydraulic brake. The brake manifold separates the brake system into a front and rear circuit. A
brake load sensing valve reduces rear wheel skidding and subsequent loss of steering control during emergency
stops. A parking brake is located on the transmission output shaft.
Air System
The air system installed in the ASV includes a compressor, two air dryers, a reservoir (wet tank), a purge tank and
an air governor. This system provides air pressure to the Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS), service air
connector, winch, transfer case, and 4-wheel drive shift.
Fuel System
The fuel system consists of two integral fuel tanks located in the front left and right corners of hull. Fuel level
transmitters mounted on each tank are accessible from the driver’s compartment. Fuel gauges on the driver’s
control unit displays fuel tank levels. Each tank holds 25 gallons (94.6 liters).
Cooling System
The cooling system consists of a radiator with an integral surge tank, a coolant recovery system, a 15 psi (1.03
bar) radiator cap, two thermostats, a cooling fan, an air outlet shroud, and hoses. The cooling fan draws outside
air through the radiator core and across the engine, then blows the air through the fan shroud and out the rear of
the vehicle.
Electrical System
The ASV electrical system operates at 24-volts DC. Circuit breakers protect and isolate damaged/defective
electrical components. Power is supplied by a 200 amp (Serial Number 1 - 3033) or 400 amp (Serial Number
3034 and beyond) alternator and two 12-volt batteries. Electrical components are designed to suppress radio
frequency interference. An emergency slave receptacle is located inside the vehicle, near driver's side door. A
slave cable may be connected from another vehicle for ASV jump-starting. A master battery disconnect switch
may also be present in this location.
Bilge Pump
One electric bilge pump rated at 46 gpm (174 lpm) removes water that may enter vehicle during extended fording
operations.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0003
Winch
The winch is hydraulically operated and has a 15,000 lb (6,803 kg) nominal line pull capability. The winch control
valve is located in the driver’s compartment.
Exhaust Systems
The engine exhaust system consists of exhaust piping and a muffler that is housed within the rear hull. Exhaust
piping is covered with heat blankets. Exhaust gases exit the hull at the upper left corner of the rear plate. Auxiliary
heater exhaust exits the engine compartment next to the engine exhaust.
Towing Pintle, Towing Eyes, Lifting Eyes, and Tie-down Shackles
The ASV is equipped with a pin-locking towing pintle, four towing eyes, four lifting eyes, and four tie-down
shackles. The towing pintle is mounted on the rear of the ASV. Towing eyes are located at the front and rear of
the vehicle. Tie-down eyes are located at each lower corner of the front and rear of the vehicle. Lifting eyes are
welded at each corner on top of the vehicle hull.
Fire Extinguishing Equipment
The ASV is equipped with an electronically controlled Automatic Fire Extinguishing System (AFES). The AFES is
an advanced safety system designed to extinguish fires and secure flammable objects after a fire is extinguished.
The AFES is split between the engine compartment and the crew compartment. The AFES utilizes a TWV
controller, a manual discharge unit (MDU), six fire sensors, and a battery backup to monitor and activate the
AFES. The system can be activated automatically or manually by the crew. Two portable multi-purpose hand-held
dry chemical fire extinguishers are mounted inside the commander's side door on the radio rack behind the
commander's seat.
Auxiliary Heating System
The auxiliary heater consists of a modular heating system with fuel pump and engine coolant circulation pump,
burner/heat exchanger, and blower. The heating system is designed to support ASV operations in arctic
temperatures to -40°F (-40°C).
Nuclear Biological Chemical (NBC) System
The NBC system provides decontamination equipment to protect against nuclear, biological, or chemical attack.
NBC breather connections are provided at the commander, driver, and passenger locations.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
A support bracket for GPS units is located in the driver’s compartment on commander's side view block.
TURRET COMPONENTS
Armor
The M1117 turret hull is constructed of welded, high-hardness ballistic plate. External bolt-on ceramic plates and
an internal spall liner provide increased vehicle and crew protection, giving protection against small arms fire,
grenades, and antipersonnel mines. All exposed surfaces are designed for maximum ricochet and crew
protection.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0003
Gunner’s Sight
The gunner's sight provides day/night sighting capabilities for target acquisition from within the M1117 ASV turret.
Periscopes
Periscopes provide the gunner with a field of vision of 360 degrees, eliminating the need to traverse the turret.
They can be adjusted to view upwards or downwards, and can be closed for blackout operations.
Traverse Control
The traverse control gives the gunner both power-assisted and manual capability to continuously rotate the turret
to either the left or the right.
Elevation Control
The elevation control allows the gunner to elevate or depress the main and auxiliary weapons.
Turret Control Panel
The turret control panel provides the main electrical controls for turret operations.
Gunner’s Control Panel
The gunner's control panel houses the controls for firing the turret weapons.
Gunner’s Seat
The gunner's seat allows the gunner to adjust the seat up and down for operating above or below the gunner’s
hatch.
Utility Light
The utility light provides directional lighting inside the turret for normal and blackout operation. The light beam can
be adjusted for floodlight or spotlight operation.
Intercom
The intercom allows the gunner to communicate internally and externally using the vehicle communication
system.
Slip Ring
The slip ring provides electrical, NBC, and communications connections between the vehicle and the turret. The
slip ring also controls weapon inhibit zone operation.
40-MM Machine Gun
The 40-mm machine gun is the main armament which allows the gunner to engage direct and indirect targets to a
maximum effective range of 4,920 ft (1,500 m).
M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun
The M48 .50-cal. machine gun provides secondary support for direct targeting operations at a maximum effective
range of 6,002 ft (1,829 m).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0003
Smoke Grenade Launchers
The M257 grenade launchers will fire a salvo of eight smoke grenades to screen the M1117 during combat
operations.
Machine Gun Pintle Mount
The machine gun pintle mount provides exterior mounting for an M249 Squad Automatic Weapon (SAW) light
machine gun. The M249 has a maximum effective range of 3,281 ft (1,000 m).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0003-5/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(thrywp) wpno(G03001)

TM 9-2320-381-10
CHAPTER 2
OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
TM 9-2320-381-10 0004
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS
NOTE
Before attempting to operate the ASV, be familiar with the location and function of all
controls and indicators.
1. The driver’s main instruments and controls consist of five control panels.
2. The driver's main instruments and controls are located near the driver's station.
a. Side control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) contains the A/C and heater control panel, transmission shift
selector panel, and the four-wheel drive selector lever.
b. Automatic fire extinguishing system (AFES) TWV controller (Figure 1, Item 2) contains control
switches and system indicator lights that alert the driver to changes in system status.
c. Instrument panel (Figure 1, Item 3) houses key operating gauges. It also contains high beam indicator
light, turn signal indicator light, and four-wheel drive light.
d. The central tire inflation system (CTIS) control panel (Figure 1, Item 4) contains the controls used to
adjust and maintain tire pressures during vehicle operations.
e. Warning light panel (Figure 1, Item 5) provides a central location for system indicator lights that alert
the driver to conditions above or below normal parameters.
f. Driver's control unit (Figure 1, Item 6) contains control switches and circuit breakers for major electrical
components.
0004-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opusualwp) wpno(O00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0004
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS - Continued
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 ON 2 3
MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
IGNITION GRID MASTER TURRET ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT TL1

HEATER POWER POWER OVERRIDE HEATER/
WASH START OFF ON OFF ON HEATER/
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ENGINE STOP NBC FAN/ DOME
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON LIGHTS/
ON ON HTR. 3
FRONT CB2 CB8 INDICATORS
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
175 3.5 RUN TL4
125 225
80
25
50
75 24 32 BILGE GLOBAL INST.
4WD 175 50 16 FLAT
40 120 125 0 225 7 25
16
24 32 PUMP OFF ON POSITION OFF ON WARNING
40 120
YEL BLU GRN SYSTEM LIGHTS

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR CB4 CB10
TEMP TEMP OIL OIL VOLTS VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
TL5
CENTRAL
60 OFF ON TIRE OFF ON TRANS.
TEMP VOLTS 50 70 SAN
ON ON ON ON CB5 INFLATION
30 40 40
5040
60 80
70 CB11
30
40 80
30 50
40
90
20 30
ENGAGE AUX.
20 50
20
30 km/h
20
MPH km/h
60
50 90
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
20 MPH70
60
100 OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
10
OFF OFF OFF FIRE INHIB. RECEPTACLES
TACH FUEL 10
10
110
70
110
OFF CB6 CB12
10 60 0 120
DE-ICE NBC FAN LAMP TEST OVERRIDE
0
KILOMETERS
MILES 120
HIGH
0 00 Faria 0 0 0 00 00 00 000 0 0
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
M5550043
Figure 1. Instrument and Control Panels.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0005
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF DRIVER’S CONTROL UNIT (200 AMP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
DRIVER’S CONTROL UNIT
WARNING
Do not hold circuit breaker switches in ON position if switch trips to OFF. Manually
overriding circuit breaker protection may damage electrical equipment or cause electrical
fires. If switch fails to OFF position, report problem to maintenance personnel. Failure to
NOTE
• Figure 1 shows an overview of the driver's control unit. MASTER POWER and
TURRET POWER switches include built-in circuit breakers. All other circuit
breaker functions are controlled by circuit breakers on right side of panel.
• To operate backlighting in blackout mode, the master light switch light control lever
or panel/park selector lever must be OFF or the blackout override switch must be
OFF.
(CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 2 3 4 COVER REMOVED
FOR CLARITY)
IGNITION GRID MASTER TURRET BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1

HEATER POWER POWER OVERRIDE
START ON DE-ICE HEAT/AC G
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
NBC HEAT 3 PNL IND LIGHTS G
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
OFF OFF SEATS SPARE G
GRID HEAT
12 B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
BILGE
CB3
OFF
FUEL PUMP
CB9
OFF
B.O. SER ON ON TL4
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
UNLOCK OFF ON OFF ON TL5
CENTRAL
PANEL TIRE TRANSMISSION G
BRT
ON ON ON ON INFLATION
CB5 CB11
11 DIM
OFF ON OFF ON AIR DRYER
BIT
PARK OFF OFF OFF OFF RADIO

INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
DE-ICE NBC-FAN LAMP TEST TURRET WASH/WIPER MOT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
10 9 8 7 6 5 ASV00589_1
Figure 1. Driver's Control Unit.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0005
DRIVER’S CONTROL UNIT - Continued
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects to remove mud or dirt from view blocks. Never wipe view blocks
using bare or gloved hand. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. View block wiper switch (Figure 1, Item 1) controls operation of driver’s and commander’s view block wipers.
Move switch to WIPE position to switch wipers on, WASH to operate view block washers, and OFF to switch
system off.
CAUTION
Engine will not start unless ENGINE STOP T-handle is pushed in fully. Failure to comply
may result in damage to equipment.
2. IGNITION switch (Figure 1, Item 2) is a three-position switch used to start the engine. To start engine, move
switch from OFF to RUN to START. When switch is released from START position it will move to RUN
position. To shut down engine, pull engine stop T-handle and move ignition switch to OFF position. When
engine shuts down, push engine stop T-handle in.
3. MASTER POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 3) controls power supply to vehicle electrical components. Position
switch up for ON and down for OFF.
4. TURRET POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 4) controls power supply to the turret weapon station. Position
5. TURRET OVERRIDE switch (Figure 1, Item 5) overrides safety interlocks for weapons firing when required
by tactical situations. Switch shall be in OFF position for normal operation.
WARNING
• Firing machine guns with Turret Override switch activated will allow fired
rounds to strike the ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Turret Override will
also override hatch safety interlocks, allowing weapons to be fired with vehicle
or turret hatches open. Operation of machine guns while in override may
damage vehicle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Avoid manually firing the mounted machine gun when the gun is depressed
lower than zero degrees and positioned over the vehicle hull or when a
personnel hatch or door is open. Failure to comply will result in vehicle
damage and may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
Machine gun firing relay power is deactivated when turret is traversed in an activated
fire inhibit zone. This prevents firing rounds and striking the vehicle hull when the
machine gun is depressed below zero degrees over the back deck or when a
personnel hatch or door is open.
a. Machine gun firing is interrupted at the rear deck clearance fire inhibit zone when weapons are aimed
below zero depression. Machine gun cannot be fired electrically when commander's or driver's hatch
or door is opened (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0005
RIGHT DOOR
FIRE INHIBIT
DRIVER/COMMANDER
FIRE INHIBIT REAR DECK
FIRE INHIBIT
WHEN WEAPONS
AIMED BELOW
0 DEGREES
LEFT DOOR
FIRE INHIBIT ASV00597
Figure 2. Machine Gun Firing Inhibit Zones.
WARNING
Operating with open hatches and turret override switch in ON position can be
hazardous. Do not raise any part of body above hatch opening when turret is
traversing. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
b. If necessary to fire machine guns while in inhibit zones, move TURRET OVERRIDE switch (Figure 1,
Item 5) to ON position.
c. TURRET OVERRIDE switch (Figure 1, Item 5) is used to override the safety interlock which prevents
power traversing of turret when either driver’s or commander’s hatch is open. Move TURRET
OVERRIDE switch to ON position for emergency operations only (for example, when immediate power
is needed under hostile conditions before doors or hatches can be closed).
d. Red override indicator light illuminates when override is selected to warn the crew that turret can be
traversed or weapons can be fired with driver’s or commander’s hatches or side doors open.
6. LAMP TEST switch (Figure 1, Item 6) is used to test all indicator bulbs on instrument panel and warning
light panel. Hold the lamp test switch in ON position to test all indicator bulbs. Switch will move to OFF
position when released.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0005
CAUTION
NBC heaters are operated by temperature control switch located on each heater. Do not
operate NBC heaters with NBC fan switch in OFF position. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment.
7. NBC-FAN switch (Figure 1, Item 7) controls the NBC precleaner/particulate blower. The blower provides
filtered forced air to the protective NBC masks used during operations under threat of NBC conditions. Move
fan switch up for ON and down for OFF.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects to remove frost from view blocks. Never wipe view blocks using
bare or gloved hand. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
8. View block DE-ICE switch (Figure 1, Item 8) controls power to the view blocks that are equipped with
heating elements for cold weather operations. Position switch up for ON and down for OFF.
9. Master light switch (Figure 1, Item 10) permits selection of various exterior lighting combinations. There are
three selector levers on the master light switch: light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12), panel/park selector
lever (Figure 1, Item 11), and the lock lever (Figure 1, Item 9).
a. Light control lever has five positions.
(1) Off. Moving the light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12) to the OFF position will turn off all interior
panel and exterior lights.
(2) Stop Light. Moving the light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12) to the STOP LIGHT position will
allow front and rear directional signals to illuminate when the signal control lever is moved in the
up or down position and brake lights to illuminate when brakes are applied.
(3) Service Drive. Moving the light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12) to the SER DRIVE position will
allow front and rear directional signals to illuminate when the signal control lever is moved to the
up or down position. Brake lights illuminate when brakes are applied, and front service drive
lights illuminate in HI and LOW settings.
WARNING
All hatches should remain closed during complete blackout operations to avoid
exposure of instrument panel indicator lights to opposing forces during tactical
operations. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
(4) Blackout (BO) Mark. The BO MARKER position illuminates front and rear blackout marker lights
and blackout stop lights when brakes are applied.
(5) Blackout (BO) Drive. The BO DRIVE position illuminates front and rear blackout marker lights,
blackout stop lights when brakes are applied, and front blackout drive light.
b. The four-position panel/park selector lever (Figure 1, Item 11) controls intensity of panel lights. Move
lever to bright (BRT) to increase intensity, or move lever to dim (DIM) to decrease intensity. Moving
lever to PARK position causes brake lights to illuminate.
c. Lock lever (Figure 1, Item 9) prevents accidental light switch lever movement. To move light control
lever (Figure 1, Item 12) from the OFF position to any exterior lighting position (except BO MARK), the
lock lever must be moved to UNLOCK position. Selector levers can be moved to OFF without moving
lock lever to UNLOCK.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0005
(CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 2 COVER REMOVED
FOR CLARITY)

WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
BILGE OFF ON OFF ON TL4
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
4 3 O5550002
Figure 3. Driver’s Control Unit.
10. GRID HEATER switch (Figure 3, Item 1) controls engine grid heater for cold weather starting. Engine grid
heater is used to warm incoming air to engine. Switch must be held in ON position when operating heater.
Switch will move to OFF position when released.
11. BLACKOUT OVERRIDE switch (Figure 3, Item 2) is used during emergency operations. Commander may
override blackout conditions by lifting switch guard and moving switch to BLACKOUT OVERRIDE position.
Red indicator lamp illuminates when switch is in override position.
WARNING
Do not hold circuit breaker switches on if switch trips off. Manually overriding circuit
breaker protection may damage electrical equipment or cause electrical fire. Failure to
12. Circuit breaker switches (Figure 3, Item 3). The two stacks of circuit breaker switches on driver’s control unit
are circuit breakers for electrical system components. These switches shall be in ON position before starting
vehicle. Circuit breakers provide a built-in test (BIT) for fault isolation of defective electrical components or
circuits. If switch fails to OFF position, notify maintenance personnel. Circuit breakers are described as
follows:
a. CB1 - DE-ICE circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection for the view block de-ice circuit components.
b. CB2 - NBC FAN, NBC HEAT 3 circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection for NBC fan and NBC air
heater #3.
c. CB3 - NBC HEAT 1/2, SEATS, GRID HEAT, FUEL PUMP circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection
for NBC air heaters 1 and 2, seat switches, engine intake air grid heater, and electric fuel pump.
d. CB4 - GLOBAL POSITION SYSTEM circuit breaker provides 3/4-amp protection to GPS electrical
circuit.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0005
e. CB5 - CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker provides 5-amp protection for CTIS control panel
and electrical components.
f. CB6 - RADIO circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection for ASV communications equipment.
g. CB7 - HEAT/AC circuit breaker provides 5-amp protection for crew heater and air conditioner electrical
components.
h. CB8 - DOMELIGHTS, PNL IND LIGHTS circuit breaker provides 10-amp protection for all vehicle
interior lights and circuits. Driver may use circuit breaker as a master switch to prevent accidentally
switching on lights during blackout operations.
i. CB9 - SPARE.
j. CB10 - INHIBIT LIGHTS, WARN LIGHTS circuit breaker provides 5-amp warning and indicator light
circuit protection.
k. CB11 - TRANSMISSION circuit breaker provides 10-amp protection to electrical components and
wiring harnesses in transmission control circuit.
l. CB12 - AIR DRYER, INTERVEHICULAR AUX PWR RCPT, WASH/WIPER MOT circuit breaker
provides 15-amp protection for vehicle lighting system, auxiliary intervehicular power receptacle, and
wiper/washer motor electrical circuits.
13. BILGE PUMP switch (Figure 3, Item 4) operates the bilge pump during fording operations. Position BILGE
PUMP switch up for ON or down for OFF. Green indicator light illuminates when pump is operating.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0006
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF DRIVER’S CONTROL UNIT (400 AMP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
DRIVER’S CONTROL UNIT
WARNING
Do not hold circuit breaker switches in ON position if switch trips to OFF. Manually
overriding circuit breaker protection may damage electrical equipment or cause electrical
fires. If switch fails to OFF position, report problem to maintenance personnel. Failure to
NOTE
• Figure 1 shows an overview of the driver's control unit. MASTER POWER and
TURRET POWER switches include built-in circuit breakers. All other circuit
breaker functions are controlled by circuit breakers on right side of panel.
• To operate backlighting in blackout mode, the master light switch light control lever
or panel/park selector lever must be OFF or the blackout override switch must be
OFF.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0006
1 2 3 4 5
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL6 TL1

IGNITION GRID MASTER TURRET BLACKOUT
HEATER POWER POWER OVERRIDE HEAT
SPARE05 DE-ICE SPARE60
WASH START ON A/C
CB1 CB7 CB13 CB19
WIPE RUN OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL7 TL2
NBC FAN DOME LTS
OFF OFF OFF SPARE05 NBC HTR PNL LTS SPARE50
LAMP TEST #3 AUX PWR
ON ON ON
CB2 CB8 CB14 CB20
GRID HTR
SPARE05 SEATS FUEL PUMP SPARE30
OFF OFF OFF NBC HTR FUEL HTR
CB3 CB9 #1-#2 CB15 CB21
12 B.O.
MARKE
STOP
LIGHT
BILGE
PUMP
DE-ICE
ON
NBC-FAN
ON
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
INHIBIT
OFF ON TL9 TL4
B.O. SER SPARE05 GPS AND SPARE10

DRIVE DRIVE WARN LTS
CB4 CB10 CB16 CB22
PANEL OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL10 TL5
UNLOCK
BRT INSTR PNL
SPARE05 CTIS TRANS SPARE20
ON ALTERNATOR
CB5 CB11 CB17 CB23 BIT
DIM OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL11
11 PARK OFF SPARE05 RADIO
INTER-
VEHICLE LTS
W/W
SPARE20
TURRET
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12 CB18 CB24
M5550038
10 9 8 7 6
Figure 1. Driver's Control Unit.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects to remove mud or dirt from view blocks. Never wipe view blocks
using bare or gloved hand. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. View block wiper switch (Figure 1, Item 1) controls operation of driver’s and commander’s view block wipers.
Move switch to WIPE position to switch wipers on, WASH to operate view block washers, and OFF to switch
system off.
CAUTION
Engine will not start unless ENGINE STOP T-handle is pushed in fully. Failure to comply
2. IGNITION switch (Figure 1, Item 2) is a three-position switch used to start the engine. To start engine, move
switch from OFF to RUN to START. When switch is released from START position it will move to RUN
position. To shut down engine, pull engine stop T-handle and move ignition switch to OFF position. When
engine shuts down, push engine stop T-handle in.
3. MASTER POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 3) controls power supply to vehicle electrical components. Position
4. TURRET POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 4) controls power supply to the turret weapon station. Position
5. LAMP TEST switch (Figure 1, Item 5) is used to test all indicator bulbs on instrument panel and warning
light panel. Hold the lamp test switch in ON position to test all indicator bulbs. Switch will move to OFF
position when released.
CAUTION
NBC heaters are operated by temperature control switch located on each heater. Do not
operate NBC heaters with NBC fan switch in OFF position. Failure to comply may result in

TM 9-2320-381-10 0006
6. NBC-FAN switch (Figure 1, Item 6) controls the NBC precleaner/particulate blower. The blower provides
filtered forced air to the protective NBC masks used during operations under threat of NBC conditions. Move
fan switch up for ON and down for OFF.
7. TURRET OVERRIDE switch (Figure 1, Item 7) overrides safety interlocks for weapons firing when required
by tactical situations. Switch shall be in OFF position for normal operation.
WARNING
• Firing machine guns with Turret Override switch activated will allow fired
rounds to strike the ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Turret Override will
also override hatch safety interlocks, allowing weapons to be fired with vehicle
or turret hatches open. Operation of machine guns while in override may
damage vehicle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Avoid manually firing the mounted machine gun when the gun is depressed
lower than zero degrees and positioned over the vehicle hull or when a
personnel hatch or door is open. Failure to comply will result in vehicle
damage and may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
Machine gun firing relay power is deactivated when turret is traversed in an activated
fire inhibit zone. This prevents firing rounds and striking the vehicle hull when the
machine gun is depressed below zero degrees over the back deck or when a
personnel hatch or door is open.
a. Machine gun firing is interrupted at the rear deck clearance fire inhibit zone when weapons are aimed
below zero depression. Machine gun cannot be fired electrically when commander's or driver's hatch
or door is opened (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0006
RIGHT DOOR
FIRE INHIBIT
DRIVER/COMMANDER
FIRE INHIBIT REAR DECK
FIRE INHIBIT
WHEN WEAPONS
AIMED BELOW
0 DEGREES
LEFT DOOR
M5550040
FIRE INHIBIT
Figure 2. Machine Gun Firing Inhibit Zones.
WARNING
Operating with open hatches and turret override switch in ON position can be
hazardous. Do not raise any part of body above hatch opening when turret is
traversing. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
b. If necessary to fire machine guns while in inhibit zones, move TURRET OVERRIDE switch (Figure 1,
Item 7) to ON position.
c. TURRET OVERRIDE switch (Figure 1, Item 7) is used to override the safety interlock which prevents
power traversing of turret when either driver's or commander's hatch is open. Move TURRET
OVERRIDE switch to ON position for emergency operations only (for example, when immediate power
is needed under hostile conditions before doors or hatches can be closed).
d. Red override indicator light illuminates when override is selected to warn the crew that turret can be
traversed or weapons can be fired with driver's or commander's hatches or side doors open.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp tools to remove frost from view blocks. Never wipe view block interior
surfaces with bare or gloved hand. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0006
8. View block DE-ICE switch (Figure 1, Item 8) controls power to the view blocks that are equipped with
heating elements for cold weather operations. Position switch up for ON and down for OFF.
9. Master light switch (Figure 1, Item 10) permits selection of various exterior lighting combinations. There are
three selector levers on the master light switch: light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12), panel/park selector
lever (Figure 1, Item 11), and the lock lever (Figure 1, Item 9).
a. Light control lever has five positions.
(1) Off. Moving the light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12) to the OFF position will turn off all interior
panel and exterior lights.
(2) Stop Light. Moving the light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12) to the STOP LIGHT position will
allow front and rear directional signals to illuminate when the signal control lever is moved in the
up or down position and brake lights to illuminate when brakes are applied.
(3) Service Drive. Moving the light control lever (Figure 1, Item 12) to the SER DRIVE position will
allow front and rear directional signals to illuminate when the signal control lever is moved to the
up or down position. Brake lights illuminate when brakes are applied, and front service drive
lights illuminate in HI and LOW settings.
WARNING
All hatches should remain closed during complete blackout operations to avoid
exposure of instrument panel indicator lights to opposing forces during tactical
operations. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
(4) Blackout (BO) Mark. The BO MARKER position illuminates front and rear blackout marker lights
and blackout stop lights when brakes are applied.
(5) Blackout (BO) Drive. The BO DRIVE position illuminates front and rear blackout marker lights,
blackout stop lights when brakes are applied, and front blackout drive light.
b. The four-position panel/park selector lever (Figure 1, Item 11) controls intensity of panel lights. Move
lever to bright (BRT) to increase intensity, or move lever to dim (DIM) to decrease intensity. Moving
lever to PARK position causes brake lights to illuminate.
c. Lock lever (Figure 1, Item 9) prevents accidental light switch lever movement. To move light control
lever (Figure 1, Item 12) from the OFF position to any exterior lighting position (except BO MARK), the
lock lever must be moved to UNLOCK position. Selector levers can be moved to OFF without moving
lock lever to UNLOCK.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0006
1 2 3

IGNITION GRID MASTER TURRET BLACKOUT
HEATER POWER POWER OVERRIDE HEAT
SPARE05 DE-ICE SPARE60
WASH START ON A/C
CB1 CB7 CB13 CB19
WIPE RUN OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL7 TL2
NBC FAN DOME LTS
OFF OFF OFF SPARE05 NBC HTR PNL LTS SPARE50
LAMP TEST #3 AUX PWR
ON ON ON
CB2 CB8 CB14 CB20
GRID HTR
SPARE05 SEATS FUEL PUMP SPARE30
OFF OFF OFF NBC HTR FUEL HTR
CB3 CB9 #1-#2 CB15 CB21
BILGE DE-ICE NBC-FAN OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL9 TL4
B.O. STOP
MARKE LIGHT PUMP ON ON INHIBIT
B.O. SER SPARE05 GPS AND SPARE10
DRIVE DRIVE WARN LTS
CB4 CB10 CB16 CB22
PANEL OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL10 TL5
UNLOCK
BRT INSTR PNL
ON ALTERNATOR
CB5 CB11 CB17 CB23 BIT
DIM OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL11
INTER-
PARK OFF SPARE05 RADIO VEHICLE LTS SPARE20
W/W
TURRET
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12 CB18 CB24
M5550039
Figure 3. Driver’s Control Unit.
10. GRID HEATER switch (Figure 3, Item 1) controls engine grid heater for cold weather starting. Engine grid
heater is used to warm incoming air to engine. Switch must be held in ON position when operating heater.
Switch will move to OFF position when released.
11. BLACKOUT OVERRIDE switch (Figure 3, Item 2) is used during emergency operations. Commander may
override blackout conditions by lifting switch guard and moving switch to BLACKOUT OVERRIDE position.
Red indicator lamp illuminates when switch is in override position.
WARNING
Do not hold circuit breaker switches on if switch trips off. Manually overriding circuit
breaker protection may damage electrical equipment or cause electrical fire. Failure to
12. Circuit breaker switches (Figure 3, Item 3). The four stacks of circuit breaker switches on driver's control unit
are circuit breakers for electrical system components. These switches shall be in ON position before starting
vehicle. Circuit breakers provide a built-in test (BIT) for fault isolation of defective electrical components or
circuits. If switch fails to OFF position, notify maintenance personnel. Circuit breakers are described as
follows:
a. CB1 THROUGH CB6 - SPARE.
b. CB7 - DE-ICE circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection for the view block de-ice circuit components.
c. CB8 - NBC FAN, NBC HTR #3 circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection for NBC fan and NBC air
heater #3.
d. CB9 - GRID HTR, SEATS, NBC HTR #1 - #2 circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection for NBC air
heaters 1 and 2, seat interlock switches, and engine intake air heater.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0006
e. CB10 - GPS circuit breaker provides 3/4-amp protection to Global Positioning System electrical circuit.
f. CB11 - CTIS circuit breaker provides 5-amp protection for Central Tire Inflation System control panel
and electrical components.
g. CB12 - RADIO circuit breaker provides 20-amp protection for ASV communications equipment.
h. CB13 - HEAT/AC circuit breaker provides 5-amp protection for crew heater and air conditioner
electrical components.
i. CB14 - DOMELIGHTS, PNL LTS, AUX PWR circuit breaker provides 10-amp protection for all vehicle
interior lights and circuits. Driver may use circuit breaker as a master switch to prevent accidentally
switching on lights during blackout operations.
j. CB15 - FUEL PUMP, FUEL HTR circuit breaker provides 15 amp electric fuel pump and fuel heater
circuit protection.
k. CB16 - INHIBIT AND WARN LTS circuit breaker provides 5-amp warning and indicator light circuit
protection.
l. CB17 - INSTR PANEL, TRANS, ALTERNATOR circuit breaker provides 10-amp protection to
electrical components and wiring harnesses in instrument panel, transmission control, and alternator
circuits.
m. CB18 - INTERVEHICLE LTS, W/W circuit breaker provides 15-amp protection for vehicle lighting
system, auxiliary intervehicular power receptacle, and wiper/washer motor electrical circuits.
n. CB19 THROUGH CB24 - SPARE.
13. BILGE PUMP switch (Figure 3, Item 4) operates the bilge pump during fording operations. Position BILGE
PUMP switch up for ON or down for OFF. Green indicator light illuminates when pump is operating.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0006-7/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opusualwp) wpno(O00062)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0007
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF WARNING LIGHT PANEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
WARNING LIGHT PANEL
NOTE
• Red warning lights illuminate alerting the driver to possible problems or conditions
requiring attention.
• To operate in blackout mode, the blackout override switch must be OFF.
1. Transmission high temperature warning light (Figure 1, Item 1) illuminates if transmission oil temperature
exceeds 300°F (149°C). Normal operating temperature is 160 - 200°F (71 - 93°C).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0007
WARNING LIGHT PANEL - Continued
P
7
P
8
10
ASV00603_1
Figure 1. Warning Light Panel.
NOTE
If the transmission malfunctions or loses power, it will shift to a predetermined range.
2. Do Not Shift warning light (Figure 1, Item 2) illuminates when transmission gear shifting is being restricted
due to special or abnormal conditions detected by the Electronic Control Unit (ECU) for WTECH III
transmission or Transmission Control Module (TCM) for GEN IV transmission. Shift selector operation will
be restored when conditions causing the Do Not Shift signal are corrected.
NOTE
• During normal operation, low battery voltage may indicate problems with the
electrical charging system. Report low battery voltage to maintenance personnel.
• If operating in silent watch conditions, the engine must be started if the low battery
warning light illuminates.
3. Low battery warning light (Figure 1, Item 3) illuminates if battery voltage drops below 20 volts.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0007
CAUTION
Do not operate the vehicle if engine oil pressure is below 10 psi (0.7 bar). Notify
maintenance personnel if oil pressure is too low or the gauge is not operating. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
4. Low oil pressure warning light (Figure 1, Item 4) illuminates if engine oil pressure falls below 10 psi (0.7 bar).
5. Coolant high temperature warning light (Figure 1, Item 5) illuminates when coolant temperature reaches
230°F (110°C). Normal operating coolant temperature is 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C).
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with parking brake engaged may cause a fire. Release parking brake
before operating vehicle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
Do not attempt driving vehicle while parking brake is engaged. Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment.
6. Parking brake warning light (Figure 1, Item 6) illuminates when parking brake is applied. Parking brake must
be released before attempting to drive vehicle.
WARNING
Immediately stop the vehicle if the brake hydraulic fail light turns on. Failure to comply may
7. Low brake hydraulic pressure light (Figure 1, Item 7) illuminates if brake system hydraulic pressure drops
below 2000 psi (138 bar). Brake system accumulator maintains hydraulic pressure and allows the driver to
stop the vehicle.
8. Engine coolant low level warning light (Figure 1, Item 8) illuminates when coolant level in the coolant
recovery bottle is low.
9. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) over speed warning light (Figure 1, Item 9) flashes when vehicle speed
exceeds the limit for selected tire pressure setting. Driver may reduce speed or select higher setting on
CTIS control panel. Warning light also flashes while operating vehicle in the EMERGENCY pressure setting
mode.
CAUTION
Do not allow the fuel system to run completely dry or damage to the fuel injection pump
may occur. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
If fuel supply to the fuel injection pump is exhausted, it will be necessary to prime the
system before the engine can be restarted.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0007
10. Low fuel level warning light (Figure 1, Item 10) illuminates when fuel level drops below 2 gal (7.5 L). Add fuel
to fuel tanks as soon as possible.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0008
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF INSTRUMENT PANEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE
• Figure 1 is an overview of the instrument panel.
• To operate in blackout mode, the master light switch light control lever or
panel/park selector lever must be OFF or the blackout override switch must be
OFF.
1 4 5 6
2 3
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
Faria Faria MILES 120
000 USA USA 0000000
LEFT FUEL RIGHT FUEL
10 9 8 7
ASV00604_1
Figure 1. Instrument Panel.
1. Four-wheel drive indicator light (Figure 1, Item 1). An amber four-wheel drive indicator light above the
tachometer (Figure 1, Item 10) illuminates when four-wheel drive shift lever is moved to four-wheel drive
position and front transfer drive gears are engaged. When in four-wheel drive, vehicle speed is limited to
43 mph (69 kph) and shifting is restricted to 4th gear.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0008
INSTRUMENT PANEL - Continued
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge (Figure 1, Item 2) provides engine coolant temperature readings in both
Fahrenheit (°F) and Celsius (°C) scales. Normal operating coolant temperature should be 180 - 200°F
(82 - 93°C). Maximum coolant temperature of 230°F (110°C) should not be exceeded.
CAUTION
Do not operate vehicle if engine oil pressure is not above 10 psi (0.7 bar). Oil pressure
gauge must be reading engine oil pressure within 30 seconds after starting vehicle. If oil
pressure is too low or gauge is not operating, notify maintenance personnel. Failure to
3. Oil pressure gauge (Figure 1, Item 3) provides engine oil pressure in psi and bar. With engine at normal
operating temperature, engine oil pressure at idle speed should be 10 - 30 psi (0.69 - 2.07 bar). During
vehicle operations, oil pressure should be 45 - 85 psi (3.11 - 5.86 bar).
CAUTION
Operating vehicle with voltage reading below 24 volts could cause damage to electrical
components. If condition persists, notify maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment.
4. Battery voltmeter gauge (Figure 1, Item 4). With engine operating, the voltage indicator should register in
green zone. A reading in lower red zone (16 - 24 volts) indicates a low battery. Low battery voltage could
affect radio operation or other electrical accessory equipment.
5. Hi-beam indicator light (Figure 1, Item 5). A blue indicator light located above speedometer (Figure 1,
Item 7) illuminates when high beam headlights are switched on. High beam headlights are controlled by a
lever located on the steering column.
6. Turn signal indicator light (Figure 1, Item 6). A green indicator light located above speedometer (Figure 1,
Item 7) illuminates when turn signal lever is positioned up or down. Turn signal lever is located on the
steering column.
7. Speedometer with odometer (Figure 1, Item 7) indicates vehicle speed in both miles per hour (MPH) and
kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer records total distance traveled in miles.
8. Fuel level gauges indicate fuel level readings, for left fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 9) and right fuel tank
(Figure 1, Item 8).
9. Tachometer/hourmeter (Figure 1, Item 10) displays engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm X 100) and
total hours of engine operation. Tachometer readings are useful for engine troubleshooting procedures and
preventive maintenance actions.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0009
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF SIDE CONTROL PANEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
SIDE CONTROL PANEL
1. The climate control panel (Figure 1, Item 9) provides two push button power buttons. Front AC ON/OFF
push button (Figure 1, Item 7) and AC COMPRESSOR ON/OFF push button (Figure 1, Item 10). The
climate control panel also contains two 3-speed fan control knobs, REAR FAN CONTROL knob (Figure 1,
Item 8) and FRONT FAN CONTROL knob (Figure 1, Item 1), to operate front and rear AC-heater units.
2. Four-wheel drive shift lever (Figure 1, Item 2) is used to shift vehicle from two-wheel drive to four-wheel
drive.
a. Moving four-wheel drive shift lever (Figure 1, Item 2) down to 4WD will engage front axle, placing
vehicle in four-wheel drive. Moving four-wheel drive shift lever up to 2WD will disengage front axle. In
two-wheel drive, vehicle is driven by rear axle only.
b. When vehicle is shifted into four-wheel drive, the four-wheel drive indicator on instrument panel
illuminates.
3. Side control panel contains transmission shift selector panel (Figure 1, Item 6), four-wheel drive shift lever
(Figure 1, Item 2), and climate control panel (Figure 1, Item 9).
1 SYM
FRONT FAN CONTROL
1 2
2 S
E
M
O
N
3 L I
OFF E T
C O
T R
2WD 3
SYM SYM
MODE
10 AC
COMPRESSOR
AC
ON/OFF 7
4
SYM
REAR FAN CONTROL

4WD 5
9 OFF
1 2
3 8
6
ASV00613_1
Figure 1. Transmission Shift Selector Panel and Four-Wheel Drive Shift Lever.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0009
SIDE CONTROL PANEL - Continued
NOTE
• To operate transmission shift selector backlight in blackout mode, the master panel
light switch light control lever or the panel/park selector lever must be OFF or the
blackout override switch must be OFF.
• To operate transmission shift selector range display in blackout mode, the master
light switch light control lever must be in the BO MARKER or BO DRIVE position.
Transmission shift selector will continue to operate with the display in blackout
mode.
4. Transmission shift selector panel (Figure 1, Item 6) is used to place transmission in desired range.
NOTE
For proper shift range selection, refer to the driver's instruction plate located below
side control panel.
a. The transmission shift selector panel (Figure 1, Item 6) has six push buttons and digital display. The
keypads illuminate for night operation.
NOTE
The edge of the neutral push button has a raised lip to indicate the neutral position by
touch.
b. The three push buttons on the left side of transmission shift selector panel (Figure 1, Item 6) are
identified as R for reverse, N for neutral, and D for drive.
c. The three push buttons on the right side of transmission shift selector panel (Figure 1, Item 6) are
identified as MODE (Figure 1, Item 3), upshift (Figure 1, Item 4), and downshift (Figure 1, Item 5).
MODE button is strictly for use by maintenance personnel when performing diagnostic tests. Upshift
button is for preselecting or manual upshifting of transmission. Downshift button is for preselecting or
manual downshifting of transmission.
5. The rear AC-heater unit is equipped with REAR HEATER CONTROL (Figure 2, Item 1) and directional air
louvers (Figure 2, Item 3). Rear heater control is adjustable as desired to control temperature of air from the
louvers.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0009
1
REAR
HEATER
CONTROL
FRESH
AIR
CONTROL
ASV01494_1
Figure 2. Rear AC-Heater Controls.
WARNING
The fresh air vent control must be closed if operating vehicle in a potential NBC
contaminated environment. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
Do not force the fresh air control knob past its physical stops. Failure to comply may result
6. The rear AC-heater unit also includes a FRESH AIR CONTROL (Figure 2, Item 2). Fresh air control is
adjustable as desired to control air flow drawn from outside vehicle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0009
7. The front AC-heater unit is equipped with a FRONT HEATER CONTROL (Figure 3, Item 1) and directional
air louvers (Figure 3, Item 2). Front heater control is adjustable as desired to control temperature of air from
the louvers.
1
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
ENGAGE
SPOOL
FREE
SPOOL
2
ASV01497_1
Figure 3. Front AC-Heater Controls.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0009
NOTE
The front air conditioner unit will not provide cool air unless the rear AC rear fan control unit
is moved to ON position.
8. To cool vehicle:
SYM
1 FRONT FAN CONTROL

1 2
OFF 3
SYM SYM
AIR AC
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
5
SYM
3
REAR FAN CONTROL
1 2
3
4 OFF
O5550008
Figure 4. Climate Control Panel.
CAUTION
Do not force the fresh air control knob past its physical stops. Failure to comply may
a. Press AC ON/OFF push button (Figure 4, Item 2) and AC COMPRESSOR ON/OFF push button
(Figure 4, Item 5) on climate control panel (Figure 4, Item 4).
b. Rotate REAR FAN CONTROL knob (Figure 4, Item 3) and FRONT FAN CONTROL knob (Figure 4,
Item 1) on climate control panel (Figure 4, Item 4) to position 1 (low), position 2 (medium), or position 3
(high) as necessary for crew comfort.
NOTE
Crew heater coolant supply valve must be moved to ON position for heater operation.
9. To heat vehicle:
a. Move CREW HEATER coolant supply valve (Figure 5, Item 1) to ON position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0009
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
AIR SUPPLY
PLY
OFF DIESEL SUP TER
HEA
AUXILIARY
ON
D
COMPRESSE
ACLE
AIR RECEPT
ASV01493_1
Figure 5. Crew Heater Coolant Supply Valve.
b. Move REAR FAN CONTROL knob (Figure 6, Item 2) and FRONT FAN CONTROL knob (Figure 6,
Item 1) on climate control panel (Figure 6, Item 3) to position 1 (low), position 2 (medium), or position 3
(high) as necessary for crew comfort.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0009
SYM
1 FRONT FAN CONTROL

1 2
OFF 3
SYM SYM
AIR AC
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
SYM
2
REAR FAN CONTROL
1 2
3
3 OFF
O5550009
Figure 6. Climate Control Panel.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0010
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF DRIVER'S CONTROLS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
OPERATOR FOOT PEDALS
1. Accelerator pedal (Figure 1, Item 1) is located to the right of brake pedal (Figure 1, Item 2) and used to vary
speed of the vehicle. Pressing accelerator pedal downward actuates fuel injection pump throttle lever which
controls fuel flow to engine.
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225
80
25
50
75
3.5 RUN
RUN
24 32
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 7 25
50 16
24 32
FLAT
FLAT
16
40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
EMR
60
SAN
30 40 40 60 80
50
40 70
30
30 40 50
40
9080
20
30 km/h
30
ENGAGE
20 50
20 10
20
MPH km/h
60
50
60
100
90
CC
C C SPOOL
20 MPH 100
10 70
10 110
TACH FUEL 10
70
110
10 60 0 KILOMETERS 120
0 MILES 120
HIGH
HIGH
0 00 Faria 0 0 0 00 00 00 0
0000
USA WAY
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
BRAKE RELEASE
1
3 2 ASV01133_1
Figure 1. Driver's Controls.
2. Brake pedal (Figure 1, Item 2) is located left of accelerator pedal (Figure 1, Item 1) and used to slow and
stop the vehicle. Pushing on brake pedal causes hydraulic pressure to actuate brake shoes at each wheel
and bring vehicle to a stop.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0010
OPERATOR FOOT PEDALS - Continued
WARNING
Do not release parking brake until brake warning light on warning light panel turns off.
CAUTION
Do not attempt driving vehicle while parking brake is engaged. Failure to comply may result
3. Parking brake pedal (Figure 1, Item 3) is located left of steering column. It is foot actuated and used to hold
vehicle while parked.
a. To engage parking brake, press down parking brake pedal (Figure 1, Item 3).
b. To release parking brake, pull parking brake release handle (Figure 1, Item 4) to disengage parking
brake pedal (Figure 1, Item 3).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0011
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF STEERING COLUMN
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
STEERING COLUMN
1. The ASV is steered in a conventional manner with a steering wheel (Figure 1, Item 1) mounted to the
steering column (Figure 1, Item 3).
2. Pressing horn button (Figure 1, Item 2) at center of steering wheel activates vehicle horn. Horn is located on
vehicle exterior hull mounted next to right headlight.
3. Steering column controls include a tilt/telescoping lever (Figure 1, Item 5), directional signal control lever
(Figure 1, Item 6), and a hazard button (Figure 1, Item 4).
1
2
6 3
4
5
ASV00617_1
Figure 1. Steering Column.
a. The directional signal control lever (Figure 1, Item 6) is a three-position lever.

(1) Move directional signal control lever (Figure 1, Item 6) down for left directional signal lights,
center position for off and up for right directional signal lights. The directional signal control lever
is self-cancelling and will return to center position as turn is completed.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0011
STEERING COLUMN - Continued
(2) Directional signal control lever (Figure 1, Item 6) also controls high/low beam intensity of vehicle
headlights. Pulling directional signal control lever in toward driver turns high beams on or off. A
blue indicator on instrument panel illuminates when vehicle high beams are on.
b. Steering column tilt/telescoping lever (Figure 1, Item 5) controls angle and height of steering wheel.
(1) Pull tilt/telescoping lever (Figure 1, Item 5) to position angle of steering wheel.
(2) Push tilt/telescoping lever (Figure 1, Item 5) down to move height of steering wheel up and
down.
c. Hazard button (Figure 1, Item 4) is used to operate vehicle signal lights in emergency situations.
(1) Pull hazard button (Figure 1, Item 4) out and all directional signal lights will flash. Green turn
signal indicator light on gauge panel illuminates when hazard light button is pulled out.
(2) Push hazard button (Figure 1, Item 4) in to cancel hazard warning light operation.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0012
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF FUEL SYSTEM CONTROLS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
FUEL SYSTEM CONTROLS
1. Fuel tank selector valve (Figure 1, Item 1) is located above the instrument panel. Position fuel tank selector
valve handle (Figure 1, Item 2) to select either right fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 3) or left fuel tank (Figure 1,
Item 4) as engine’s primary fuel source.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
IGNITION GRID MASTER TURRET BLACKOUT TL1

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
CB2 CB8 INDICATORS
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
175 50 RUN BILGE TL4

125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
OFF ON POSITION OFF ON WARNING
SYSTEM LIGHTS
C/F BAR PSI EMR CB4 CB10
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40 80 ON ON ON ON CB5 CB11
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
FUEL 10 110 OFF CB6 CB12
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
4
RIGHT
FUEL
TANK
ASV00625_1
Figure 1. Fuel Tank Selector Valve.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0012
FUEL SYSTEM CONTROLS - Continued
CAUTION
Close fuel crossover valve when fueling/defueling or if there is leakage from or damage to
one of the fuel tanks. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
2. FUEL CROSSOVER VALVE (Figure 2, Item 2) is located left of instrument unit and allows equalization
between fuel tank levels or can isolate tanks if one tank becomes damaged. Position FUEL CROSSOVER
VALVE handle (Figure 2, Item 1) towards rear of vehicle for OFF (close) and towards front of vehicle for ON
(open).
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
CB2 CB8 INDICATORS
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
VE
AL
RV
VE
SSO
O F
CR OF
EL
FU
ON
ASV00626_1
Figure 2. Fuel Crossover Valve.
NOTE
Engine will not start if ENGINE STOP T-handle is not pushed in fully.
3. ENGINE STOP T-handle (Figure 3, Item 1) is located next to driver’s control unit and operates the engine
fuel shutoff valve. Pull ENGINE STOP T-handle to stop fuel flow and shut off engine. Push ENGINE STOP
T-handle in for normal operation. ENGINE STOP T-handle must be pushed in fully to allow fuel flow to
engine.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0012
FUEL SYSTEM CONTROLS - Continued
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225
80
25
50
75
3.5 RUN
RUN
24 32
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 7 25
50 16
24 32
FLAT
FLAT
16
40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
EMR
1
60
SAN
30 40 40 60 80
70
50
40
30
30 40 50
40
9080
20
30 km/h
30
ENGAGE
20 50
20 10
20
MPH km/h
60
50
60
100
90
CC
C C SPOOL
20 10 MPH
70
100
10 110
TACH FUEL 10
70
110
0
Faria 0 0 0 0000 00 00 0 0 0
MILES 120
HIGH
HIGH
0 00
USA WAY
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
ASV00627_1
Figure 3. Engine Stop T-Handle.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0013
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF WINCH CONTROL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
WINCH CONTROL
1. Winch Control Valve (Figure 1, Item 1). Located left of driver's control unit and directs hydraulic pressure to
operate winch. The winch control valve hydraulic pressure is limited by a 1500 psi (103 bar) internal relief
valve. Push control valve handle (Figure 1, Item 2) away from driver to reel winch cable out. Pull control
valve handle toward driver to reel cable in.
ENGAGE
SPOOL
FREE
SPOOL
2
3
ASV00651_1
Figure 1. Winch Control Valve.
NOTE
Free spool lever must be set to ENGAGE SPOOL to operate winch.
2. Winch Free Spool Lever (Figure 1, Item 3). Located beside the winch control valve (Figure 1, Item 1) and
controls the winch clutch to free spool for manually reeling out cable.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0014
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF VIEW BLOCK WIPERS AND RESERVOIRS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
VIEW BLOCK WIPERS AND RESERVOIRS
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects to remove frost from view blocks. Never wipe view blocks using
bare or gloved hand. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. View block wipers (Figure 1, Item 1) consist of a set of three wipers each for driver’s and commander’s
forward view blocks and two wipers for each side view block.
ASV01135
Figure 1. View Block Wipers.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0014
VIEW BLOCK WIPERS AND RESERVOIRS - Continued
2. View block washer reservoirs (Figure 2, Item 1) and (Figure 2, Item 3). The driver's view block reservoir
bottle and the commander's view block reservoir bottle are mounted on driver's side upper wall, forward of
the door. Each view block reservoir has a fill cap (Figure 2, Item 2).
M5550044
Figure 2. View Block Washer Reservoirs.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0015
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) CONTROL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) CONTROL
NOTE
• Wheel valves isolate tires from CTIS when system is idle or shut down.
OFF. CTIS will continue to operate with the display in blackout mode.
1. The ASV is equipped with a Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) and a control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) for
adjusting and controlling vehicle tire pressures during driving operations.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
40 120 0 7 PUMP OFF ON POSITION OFF ON WARNING
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
RUN 2
FLAT
EMER 3
SAND 4
X C 5
HWY 6
ASV01442_1
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Control Panel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0015
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) CONTROL - Continued
2. CTIS control panel lights illuminate indicating the selected operating mode and provide diagnostic warnings
through built-in test (BIT) functions.
WARNING
Proper tire inflation for road conditions must be maintained. Incorrect tire pressures will
affect steering and braking operation, and can cause excessive wear or destruction of tire.
3. CTIS control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) is mounted on the right side of instrument panel and provides five
operating mode selections:
CAUTION
Selecting RUN FLAT to correct a low tire pressure may cause opposite tire to
temporarily lose pressure while air pressure in CTIS lines equalize. Condition will
correct itself as tire pressure is inflated to the same level as other tires. Do not select
RUN FLAT if tire is severely damaged or good tire will also lose air pressure. Failure to
a. RUN FLAT (Figure 1, Item 2) used for increasing system pressure check intervals and for correcting a
low tire pressure problem.
CAUTION
The EMER mode is for extreme driving conditions only and should NOT be used
under normal circumstances. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
b. EMER (Emergency) (Figure 1, Item 3) for operation that requires extremely low tire pressures (deep
mud). Indicator lamp flashes when operating in this mode.
c. SAND (Sand) (Figure 1, Item 4) for off-road operations.
d. X-C (Cross-Country) (Figure 1, Item 5) for operations on secondary, unpaved roads.
e. HWY (Highway) (Figure 1, Item 6) for operations on paved surfaces.
CAUTION
Do not manually inflate tires unless air is as clean and dry as air supplied by vehicle air
compressor. If in doubt, use vehicle air supply to prevent damage to CTIS. Failure to
4. Tires may also be inflated from the on-board air supply or from an external air supply through air valves on
each wheel.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0016
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF TRANSFER CASE DRIVE LOCKOUT LEVER
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
TRANSFER CASE DRIVE LOCKOUT LEVER
CAUTION
Avoid damage to driveline components. Disconnect drive train from power pack with
lockout lever before towing. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. Transfer case manual lockout lever (Figure 2, Item 1) is located under transfer case closeout cover
(Figure 1, Item 1) and used to disconnect transfer case from power pack at transmission before towing
vehicle.
OFF OFF
ON ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
AUXILIARY PRIMARY
BATTERY BATTERY
HEATER HEATER
ASV01502_2
Figure 1. Transfer Case Closeout Cover.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0016
TRANSFER CASE DRIVE LOCKOUT LEVER - Continued
ASV01456_1
Figure 2. Transfer Case Lockout Lever.
2. Disengage transfer case manual lockout lever (Figure 2, Item 1) as follows:

a. Remove transfer case closeout cover (Figure 1, Item 1).
b. Pull transfer case manual lockout lever (Figure 2, Item 1) away from transfer case to DISENGAGE
position.
NOTE
If lockout lever cannot be placed in ENGAGE position, move vehicle slightly to align gears.
3. Engage transfer case manual lockout lever (Figure 2, Item 1) as follows:
a. Push transfer case manual lockout lever (Figure 2, Item 1) toward transfer case to ENGAGE position.
b. Install transfer case closeout cover (Figure 1, Item 1).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0017
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF HULL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (HPDU)
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
HULL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (HPDU)
1. A 24-volt trouble light may be plugged into trouble light receptacle (Figure 1, Item 1). Trouble light is useful
during repair and maintenance inside vehicle.
2. Hull power distribution unit (Figure 1, Item 3) is located on the engine closeout panel (Figure 1, Item 2) in
rear vehicle stowage area and contains distribution connectors for wiring harnesses, power studs and
Diagnostic Connector Assembly (DCA) (Figure 1, Item 4) for Simplified Test Equipment for Internal
Combustion Engines (STE/ICE).
ASV00664_1
Figure 1. Hull Power Distribution Unit.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0018
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF AUXILIARY HEATER CONTROL PANEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
AUXILIARY HEATER CONTROL PANEL
Auxiliary Heater Control (Figure 1, Item 1) is located inside the driver's door on the front face of the battery
closeout panel.
1
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
AIR SUPPLY
PLY
OFF DIESEL SUP TER
HEA
AUXILIARY
ON
D
COMPRESSE
ACLE
AIR RECEPT
ASV01464
Figure 1. Auxiliary Heater Control.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0018
AUXILIARY HEATER CONTROL PANEL - Continued
WARNING
The heater must be switched off while any fuel tank on the vehicle is being filled.
CAUTION
• If a fault arises during heater operation, the heat symbol will flash in the
display window and a three-digit fault code number will be displayed. Shut
down heater and notify maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may result
• Maintain batteries and all electrical connections to ensure serviceability.
Auxiliary heater will not start if voltage is low. Low and high voltage protection
will also automatically shut down the heater. Failure to comply may result in
NOTE
The auxiliary heater assembly includes an Electronic Control Unit (ECU) to monitor the
burner, glow plug, and system sensors.
a. The auxiliary heater control (Figure 1, Item 1) displays day and time and allows programming of heater
cycle times.
NOTE
Brief power interruptions will not affect auxiliary heater control settings. All symbols will
flash in display window after extended power loss. Clock requires resetting to ensure
proper operation of auxiliary heater. The display turns on when the vehicle is started
and turns off 10 seconds after the vehicle is shut down.
b. Adjust or change the time and weekday settings.
(1) If setting time after power loss, briefly press clock button (Figure 2, Item 8). If changing time or
weekday settings, press and hold clock button until the time setting display (Figure 2, Item 2)
flashes in display window (Figure 2, Item 10).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0018
1 2 3
10 M0 C
1 20:30
9
8
7 6 5 4
ASV01465_1
Figure 2. Auxiliary Heater Control Panel.
(2) Adjust clock to current time using raise button (Figure 2, Item 4) or lower button (Figure 2,
Item 5). The time setting (Figure 2, Item 2) is stored when display stops flashing and the 2-letter
weekday (Figure 2, Item 1) abbreviation flashes.
(3) Set current weekday using the raise button (Figure 2, Item 4) or lower button (Figure 2, Item 5).
When the display stops flashing, the selected weekday is stored.
NOTE
• The auxiliary heater control panel can program three start cycle times within a
24-hour period or one start cycle time within seven days. Only one memory
setting can be activated at any time. The heat symbol will flash when auxiliary
heater programming is activated.
• The memory display indicates the activated memory. If memory is activated,
press the preset button once and the programmed settings will be displayed
for approximately 5 seconds.
• Pressing preset button until memory display is blank will deactivate memory
programming.
c. Programming auxiliary heater to start within 24 hours.
(1) Press preset button (Figure 2, Item 7) once. Memory display (Figure 2, Item 9) should be
flashing the number 1.
(2) Press raise button (Figure 2, Item 4) to activate the timer. The time should be flashing in the
display window (Figure 2, Item 10).
(3) Press raise button (Figure 2, Item 4) to program the desired time to start heat cycle. Memory 1 is
set when time stops flashing in control panel display window (Figure 2, Item 10).
(4) Press preset button (Figure 2, Item 7) two times to program a second heat cycle start time.
(5) Press preset button (Figure 2, Item 7) three times to program a third heat cycle start time.
d. Programming auxiliary heater start cycle within 7-day period.
(1) Program a time as described in Step (c.(3)).
(2) The weekday indicator (Figure 2, Item 1) will begin to flash approximately 5 seconds after
programmed time has been set. Use raise button (Figure 2, Item 4) or lower button (Figure 2,
Item 5) to select the day for starting auxiliary heater cycle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0018
(3) The programmed time and day are stored as soon as the flashing time disappears from control
panel display window (Figure 2, Item 10).
e. Press preset button (Figure 2, Item 7) once to check the activated memory. The programmed time of
the displayed memory is shown for approximately 5 seconds.
f. To deactivate memory settings, press preset button (Figure 2, Item 7) one to four times as needed
until memory display (Figure 2, Item 9) is blank.
g. Manual operation of auxiliary heater.
(1) Briefly press heat button (Figure 2, Item 6).
(2) Heat cycle duration (Figure 2, Item 2) and heat symbol (Figure 2, Item 3) will be displayed on
auxiliary heater display window (Figure 2, Item 10).
NOTE
Auxiliary heater heat cycle duration can be adjusted from 1 to 120 minutes.
(3) Press raise button (Figure 2, Item 4) to increase duration of heat cycle.
(4) Press lower button (Figure 2, Item 5) to decrease duration of heat cycle.
h. To turn off the auxiliary heater at any time,
(1) Briefly press the heat button (Figure 2, Item 6).
NOTE
After shutdown, a cooling fan in the auxiliary heater may continue to run for a brief
period.
(2) Heat symbol (Figure 2, Item 6) disappears from auxiliary heater display window (Figure 2,
Item 10) and auxiliary heater will shut down.
i. To change permanent heat cycle default time setting, proceed as follows:
(1) If auxiliary heater is running, briefly press heat button (Figure 2, Item 6). Heat symbol (Figure 2,
Item 3) will disappear from auxiliary heater display window (Figure 2, Item 10).
(2) Press and hold lower button (Figure 2, Item 5) until the time setting display (Figure 2, Item 2)
begins to flash. Release the lower button.
(3) Adjust default time setting using raise button (Figure 2, Item 4) or lower button (Figure 2, Item 5).
New default time setting is stored when the display disappears.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0019
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF MASTER BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
MASTER BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH
WARNING
Do not use master battery disconnect switch to isolate battery power when performing
maintenance unless directed in procedures. Always disconnect battery cables when
necessary. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
Master Battery Disconnect Switch is primarily used during long term storage of the vehicle.
MASTER BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH (Figure 1, Item 1) is installed in the front of the battery box
cover. It is used to disconnect the batteries from the rest of the system.
M5550042
Figure 1. Master Battery Disconnect Switch.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0020
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF GUNNER'S CONTROLS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
GUNNER'S CONTROLS
1. The gunner’s main turret controls are located on the traverse control panel (Figure 1, Item 1), turret control
panel (Figure 1, Item 2), gunner’s control panel (Figure 1, Item 3), and elevation control unit (Figure 1,
Item 4).
350 355 0
340 345
335
4
3 2 1 ASV01445
Figure 1. Gunner's Controls - Main Turret Controls.
2. Traverse Control Panel (Figure 1, Item 1). Controls power used to traverse turret.
3. Turret Control Panel (Figure 1, Item 2). Controls power to turret, spotlight, exhaust blower, and sight.
4. Gunner's Control Panel (Figure 1, Item 3). Controls the firing of 40-mm machine gun, M48 .50-cal. machine
gun, and smoke grenades.
5. Elevation Control Unit (Figure 1, Item 4). Controls weapon elevation and depression.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0020-1/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opusualwp) wpno(OT05001)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0021
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF TURRET CONTROL PANEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
TURRET CONTROL PANEL
1. Turret control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) is equipped with four green indicator lamps (Figure 1, Item 2) and the
following control switches: TURRET POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 6), SPOTLIGHT switch (Figure 1,
Item 5), EXHAUST BLOWER switch (Figure 1, Item 4), and SIGHT POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 3).
2 2
TURRET SPOT EXHAUST SIGHT

POWER LIGHT BLOWER POWER
OFF OFF OFF OFF

6
3
5 4
ASV01443_1
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Turret Control Panel.
2. Green indicator lamps (Figure 1, Item 2) located above switches will illuminate when switches are moved to
ON position and will not be illuminated when switches are in OFF position. Intensity of light from each
indicator lamp may be adjusted.
a. Turn green indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) lens counterclockwise for bright.
b. Turn green indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) lens clockwise for dim.
0021-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opusualwp) wpno(OT05002)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0021
TURRET CONTROL PANEL - Continued
CAUTION
Panel switches are also circuit breakers. A circuit overload will cause a switch to move to
OFF position during operation. Do not hold switch in ON position, or damage to electrical
circuit or components may result. Notify maintenance personnel if switch fails to move to
OFF position. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
• Transmission circuit breaker must be in the ON position for the turret control panel
to activate.
• Switches will move to OFF position when MASTER POWER switch is deactivated.
If switches do not return to OFF position, notify maintenance personnel.
3. TURRET POWER Switch (Figure 1, Item 6). Controls main electrical power supply to turret. Move TURRET
POWER switch to ON position to activate power for operating turret electrical components. Green indicator
lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) will illuminate. When TURRET POWER switch is moved to OFF position, all
switches on turret control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) will move to OFF position. Green indicator lamp will not be
illuminated.
CAUTION
• Do not use spotlight when operating night sight. Bright artificial light will damage
sight image intensifier tube. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
• Vehicle blackout switch will not affect turret power. Power switch on spotlight
housing should be placed in OFF position to prevent inadvertent operation of turret
spotlight during blackout conditions. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
NOTE
Power switch on spotlight housing must be in ON position to allow remote operation of
turret spotlight. Ensure that switch is in ON position prior to vehicle and turret operations.
4. SPOTLIGHT Switch (Figure 1, Item 5). Controls power to turret spotlight (Figure 2, Item 1). Move
SPOTLIGHT switch on turret control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) to ON position to activate spotlight. Green
indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) will illuminate. Move SPOTLIGHT switch to OFF position to deactivate
spotlight. Green indicator lamp will not be illuminated.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0021
Figure 2. Turret Controls - Spotlight Switch.
WARNING
The exhaust blower must be operating during firing of weapons to remove toxic gas
caused by smoke and fumes. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
5. EXHAUST BLOWER Switch (Figure 1, Item 4). Controls power to exhaust blower. Move EXHAUST
BLOWER switch to ON position to activate exhaust blower. Green indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) will
illuminate. Move EXHAUST BLOWER switch to OFF position to deactivate exhaust blower. Green indicator
lamp will not be illuminated.
6. SIGHT POWER Switch (Figure 1, Item 3). Controls power to M36ASV sight system. Move SIGHT POWER
switch to ON position to activate power to M36ASV sight system. Green indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) will

TM 9-2320-381-10 0021
illuminate. Move SIGHT POWER switch to OFF position to deactivate M36ASV sight system. Green
indicator lamp will not be illuminated.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0005
WP 0006
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL
1. Gunner’s control panel is equipped with the following turret control switches: Machine gun arming switch
(Figure 1, Item 1), 40-mm LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch (Figure 1, Item 6), SMOKE GRENADES
arming switch (Figure 1, Item 5), LEFT (Figure 1, Item 4) and RIGHT (Figure 1, Item 3) smoke grenade
launch buttons, and a LAMP TEST ALL button (Figure 1, Item 2).
350 355 0
340 345
335
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ROUND ARMED LAMP TEST
ARMED ALL
2
FIRING SMOKE GRENADES

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
3
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
6
5 4 ASV01313_1
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Gunner's Control Panel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL - Continued
2. Gunner’s control panel also includes the following indicator lamps: red 40 MM ARMED indicator lamp
(Figure 2, Item 1), red .50 CAL ARMED indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 3), red SMOKE GRENADES armed
indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 4), yellow firing INHIBIT zone indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 5), red FIRING
RELAY ON indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 6), and yellow LAST ROUND indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 7).
2 3
1
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL
7

RELAY
6 ON 4
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
5 ASV01669_1
Figure 2. Turret Controls - Gunner's Control Panel.
WARNING
• Close and latch all hatches and doors before attempting to fire weapons. Failure to
• Firing machine guns with turret override activated will allow fired rounds to strike
the ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Turret override will also override the
hatch and door safety interlocks allowing weapons to be fired with the vehicle
hatches or doors open. Operation of machine guns while in override may damage
vehicle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Avoid manually firing the machine gun when the gun is depressed lower than zero
degrees and positioned over the vehicle hull or when a personnel hatch or door is
open. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
3. Machine gun arming switch (Figure 2, Item 2). Allows selection of either 40-mm machine gun or M48 .50‐
cal. machine gun for weapon firing operations.
a. Pull machine gun arming switch (Figure 2, Item 2) and move to desired weapon position. Red armed
indicator lamp (Figure 2, Items 1 or 3) will illuminate for selected weapon.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
b. Lift trigger switch guard (Figure 3, Item 1) up and press trigger switch (Figure 3, Item 2) on elevation
control handle (Figure 3, Item 3) to electronically fire weapons.
3
ASV01240_1
Figure 3. Turret Controls - Machine Gun Arming Switch.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
NOTE
Machine gun firing relay power is deactivated when the turret is traversed in an activated
fire inhibit zone. This prevents firing rounds and striking the vehicle hull when the machine
gun is depressed below zero degrees over the back deck or when a personnel hatch or
door is open.
4. Machine gun firing is interrupted at rear deck fire inhibit zone (Figure 4, Item 2) when weapons are aimed
below zero depression, at left or right door inhibit zone (Figure 4, Item 1) when turret is facing side door and
that door is open, or at commander's/driver's fire inhibit zone (Figure 4, Item 3) when turret is facing
commander’s/driver’s hatch and that hatch is open.
3
2
ASV01315_1
1
Figure 4. Turret Controls - Machine Gun Inhibit Zones.
a. Yellow INHIBIT indicator lamp (Figure 5, Item 2) will illuminate when weapon firing circuit is interrupted
in fire inhibit zones (Figure 4, Items 1, 2, and 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

1 RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
2 O5550014
Figure 5. Turret Controls - Gunner’s Control Panel.
WARNING
Do not turn turret override ON unless an immediate threat makes it necessary. Failure
NOTE
• Circuit breaker numbers and labels on 200 amp DCU are different from those
used on 400 amp DCU. Switches might be arranged slightly differently but
their functions are the same.
• For differences between 200 amp and 400 amp DCU, see (WP 0005) and
(WP 0006).
• 200 amp DCU is shown in this procedure.
b. If necessary to fire machine guns while in this position, ASV commander will move TURRET
OVERRIDE switch (Figure 6, Item 1) to ON position. Yellow INHIBIT indicator lamp (Figure 5, Item 2)
will stop illuminating. Red FIRING RELAY ON indicator lamp (Figure 5, Item 1) on gunner’s control
panel will illuminate when TURRET OVERRIDE switch is in ON position and trigger is depressed
indicating that electrical power is being sent to fire weapon.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022

ON DE-ICE HEAT/AC G
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01670_1
Figure 6. Turret Override - (200 Amp DCU).
WARNING
Smoke grenade launchers will not arm if ASV gunner’s hatch is not latched in the closed
position. Close and latch all hatches prior to firing smoke grenades. Failure to comply may
5. Smoke Grenade Launcher Controls. The SMOKE GRENADES switch (Figure 7, Item 1) is used to arm
smoke grenade launchers. When switch is moved to the armed position, both left and right smoke grenade
launchers are armed. The red indicator lamp (Figure 7, Item 2) will illuminate when switch is moved to
armed position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
1
2
350 355 0
340 345
335
SMOKE GRENADES
LEFT RIGHT
ASV00013_1
Figure 7. Turret Controls - Smoke Grenade Launcher Controls.
a. Press LEFT launcher button (Figure 7, Item 4) to fire smoke grenade launchers from left launcher
tubes.
b. Press RIGHT launcher button (Figure 7, Item 3) to fire smoke grenade launchers from right launcher
tubes.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
c. Press both launcher buttons to fire all smoke grenades. The ASV smoke grenade launcher firing
pattern is shown below (Figure 8).
8 8
32 32
56 56
80 80
115 FT. 115 FT.

(35 m) (35 m)
ASV00055
Figure 8. Turret Controls - Smoke Grenade Launcher Firing Pattern.
NOTE
Reloading can only be accomplished from outside of turret after last round of 40-mm
ammunition is fired.
6. LAST ROUND Indicator Lamp (Figure 9, Item 1). Illuminates when last round of 40-mm ammunition passes
the last flap in 40-mm ammunition box.
7. LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch (Figure 9, Item 3). Normally in OFF position to prevent firing of last round
of 40-mm ammunition. When last round of 40-mm ammunition passes ammunition indicator actuator, power
to 40-mm machine gun firing solenoid is interrupted preventing it from firing. This allows additional 40-mm
ammunition to be added to linked ammunition while inside of turret. If situation requires that all rounds be
fired, move LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch to override position. The 40 MM ARMED indicator lamp
(Figure 9, Item 2) will illuminate and remaining 40-mm ammunition may be fired.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0022
LAST 40 MM
1 ROUND ARMED 2
OVERRIDE
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
OFF
3 ASV00014_1
Figure 9. Turret Controls - Last Round Override.
NOTE
Indicator lamps will not illuminate if dimmer lens has been fully rotated clockwise or if turret
power is off.
8. Control Panel Indicator Lamps. LAMP TEST ALL button (Figure 10, Item 1). Tests indicator lamps on all
turret control panels. All indicators should illuminate when button is pressed. Replace bulb if indicator does
not illuminate. If replacement bulb still does not illuminate, notify maintenance personnel.
LAMP TEST
ALL
1
ASV00015_1
Figure 10. Turret Controls - Lamp Test All.
a. Indicator lamps will illuminate when switches are placed in armed/override position.
b. Intensity of illumination from each indicator lamp on control panel may be regulated. Rotate lens
counterclockwise to brighten and clockwise to dim.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0023
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF TURRET TRAVERSE CONTROLS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
POWERED TURRET TRAVERSE
WARNING
• Ensure all personnel are clear of the turret and basket area before operating turret.
• The turret can be traversed under power with the driver’s or commander’s hatch
open if the turret override switch at the driver's control unit is activated. Ensure all
personnel are clear of the turret. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
• Transmission circuit breaker must be in the ON position for the turret control panel
to activate.
• Turret can be traversed manually during power failure or if a more precise turret
position is necessary.
1. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 2) on turret control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) to ON position to
activate and OFF position to deactivate traverse control feature.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0023
POWERED TURRET TRAVERSE - Continued

2
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV04218_1
Figure 1. Turret Traverse Controls.
NOTE
Indicator lamps will not illuminate if dimmer lens has been fully rotated clockwise or if turret
power is off.
2. Move TRAVERSE POWER switch (Figure 2, Item 1) on traverse control panel (Figure 2, Item 3) to ON
(right) position to supply power to traverse control joystick (Figure 2, Item 4). Green power indicator lamp
(Figure 2, Item 2) will illuminate.
1 2
TRAVERSE
ON
POWER
350 355 0
340 345
335
4 O5550012
Figure 2. Turret Traverse Control - Powered Turret Traverse.
3. Move and hold traverse control joystick (Figure 2, Item 4) to left to traverse left and to right to traverse right.
Turret will rotate 360 degrees in either direction. Turret will stop traversing when joystick is released. The

TM 9-2320-381-10 0023
POWERED TURRET TRAVERSE - Continued
traverse control joystick operates the traverse function at varying speeds. Varying the amount of pressure
on the joystick will vary the speed with which the turret traverses.
END OF TASK
MANUAL TURRET TRAVERSE
WARNING
Turret must be fully stopped before engaging manual traverse. Failure to comply may
CAUTION
Once power traverse joystick is released, wait until turret is at a complete stop before
engaging manual traverse or damage to gears may result. Failure to comply may result in
1. Grasp manual traverse handle (Figure 3, Item 1) and squeeze manual traverse engage lever (Figure 3,
Item 2) to manually traverse turret.
ASV01449_1
Figure 3. Turret Traverse Controls - Manual Turret Traverse.
2. Crank manual traverse handle (Figure 3, Item 1) in desired direction.

a. Crank manual traverse handle (Figure 3, Item 1) counterclockwise to traverse left.
b. Crank manual traverse handle (Figure 3, Item 1) clockwise to traverse right.
3. Release manual traverse engage lever (Figure 3, Item 2) to permit power operation.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0024
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF ELEVATION CONTROL
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
ELEVATION CONTROL
1. Elevation control unit (Figure 1, Item 1) manually controls weapon elevation and depression using elevation
control handle (Figure 1, Item 2).
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01247_1
2
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Elevation Control.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0024
ELEVATION CONTROL - Continued
WARNING
Do not leave thumb on trigger switch when elevating or depressing mantlets or accidental
firing may occur. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
2. Ensure that trigger switch guard (Figure 2, Item 1) is in down position around trigger switch (Figure 2,
Item 2). Ensure that trigger switch guard spring is functional.
a. Grasp elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 3) and crank clockwise to elevate weapons.
b. Grasp elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 3) and crank counterclockwise to depress weapons.
ASV00018_1
Figure 2. Turret Controls - Elevation Control.
3. Elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 3) is equipped with pushbutton trigger switch (Figure 2, Item 2) for
electrical weapon firing.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0025
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - VEHICLE FUELING
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Equipment Condition (cont.)

Diesel Fuel, DF-1 (WP 0177, Table 1, Item 17) Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
Diesel Fuel, DF-2 (WP 0177, Table 1, Item 18) Fuel crossover valve closed. (WP 0012)
Turbine Fuel, Aviation (WP 0177, Table 1, Item
37)
Equipment Condition
Engine off. (WP 0030)
VEHICLE FUELING
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can be accidently ignited. Do not allow fuel to come in contact
with hot surfaces, such as exhaust manifold, pipe, or muffler. Do not smoke or allow open
flame or sparks in the vicinity while working on any part of fuel system. Failure to comply
NOTE
Driver's and commander's side fuel covers, fuel caps, and sleeves are opened and closed
the same way. Driver's side shown.
1. Remove detent pin (Figure 1, Item 3) from fuel filler cover (Figure 1, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0025
VEHICLE FUELING - Continued
4
ASV01844_1
3
Figure 1. Fuel Filler.
2. Open fuel filler cover (Figure 1, Item 2).

3. Unlock fuel cap (Figure 1, Item 1) and remove from fuel filler neck (Figure 1, Item 4).
NOTE
In order to fill fuel tanks to maximum capacity, the fuel filler sleeve must be in the raised
position.
4. Pull fuel filler sleeve (Figure 1, Item 5) up, rotate, and lock in place.
NOTE
Ensure fuel crossover valve is in the closed position.
5. Fuel vehicle as required with appropriate fuel for operating environment.
6. Rotate fuel filler sleeve (Figure 1, Item 5) and lower into fuel filler neck (Figure 1, Item 4).
7. Install fuel cap (Figure 1, Item 1) with filler cap vent (Figure 1, Item 6) facing up, near 12 o'clock position on
fuel filler neck (Figure 1, Item 4) and lock.
8. Close fuel filler cover (Figure 1, Item 2) and install detent pin (Figure 1, Item 3).
9. Open fuel crossover valve. (WP 0012)
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0026
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVER’S AND COMMANDER’S SEATS AND SEAT BELTS
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
Engine running. (WP 0030)
DRIVER’S AND COMMANDER’S SEATS
NOTE
Operation of the driver’s and commander’s seats is nearly identical. Seats move up and
down, move fore and aft, and recline as required by crew personnel.
1. Driver’s and commander’s seats can be raised for vehicle operations requiring open hatches. Seats can be
lowered for closed hatch operations and viewing through view blocks.
2. Electric SEAT CONTROL (Figure 1, Item 1) is located on ceiling next to driver's and commander's hatches.
WARNING
Ensure hands and fingers are clear of pinch points when adjusting seats up, down, or
back. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
a. Move toggle switch (Figure 1, Item 2) UP to raise seat.
b. Move toggle switch (Figure 1, Item 2) DOWN to lower seat.
1 SEAT
CONTROL
UP
2
DOWN
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5 ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01512_1
Figure 1. Electric Seat Controls.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0026
DRIVER’S AND COMMANDER’S SEATS - Continued
3. Seat actuator bypass valves (Figure 2, Item 2) on left and right sides of seat stanchion (Figure 2, Item 1)
allow raised seats to lower with engine off.
WARNING
NOTE
The seat actuator bypass valves must remain closed for normal operation. An open
valve prevents seat height adjustment.
a. Open seat actuator bypass valve (Figure 2, Item 2) to lower seat.
b. Close seat actuator bypass valve (Figure 2, Item 2) after seat lowers.
2 ASV01513_1
Figure 2. Seat Actuator Bypass Valves.
4. Controls on seat (Figure 3, Item 4) allow adjustment of seat positions.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0026
2
3 ASV01514_1
Figure 3. Seat Controls.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0026
WARNING
5. Lift seat slide lever (Figure 3, Item 3) at front of seat (Figure 3, Item 4) to adjust seat fore and aft.
CAUTION
Do not position commander’s seat in fully reclined position. Seat will rub turret basket and
interfere with traversing turret. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
6. Press release lever (Figure 3, Item 2) (left side on driver's seat, right side on commander's seat) to recline
seat back (Figure 3, Item 1) to desired position.
7. Release lever to lock seat back (Figure 3, Item 1) at various intervals.
8. Driver's side seat back (Figure 3, Item 1) fully reclines from upright position allowing access to driver’s
station.
END OF TASK
THREE-POINT SEAT BELTS
WARNING
in order to provide maximum protection. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
1. Pull shoulder strap (Figure 4, Item 1) and seat belt (Figure 4, Item 4) across body and latch into seat buckle
(Figure 4, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0026
THREE-POINT SEAT BELTS - Continued
3
4
COMMANDER’S SIDE SHOWN

DRIVER’S SIDE OPPOSITE ASV01515_1
Figure 4. Three-Point Seat Belts.
2. Adjust belts (Figure 4, Items 1 and 4) to fit snugly against body.

3. Push release button (Figure 4, Item 3) on seat belt buckle (Figure 4, Item 2) to unlatch straps (Figure 4,
Items 1 and 4).
END OF TASK
FOLLOW-ON MAINTENANCE
Shut down engine. (WP 0030)
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0027
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER'S SEAT
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
GUNNER'S SEAT
1. Turret is equipped with gunner's seat (Figure 1, Item 1).
ASV01429
Figure 1. Turret Controls - Gunner's Seat.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0027
GUNNER'S SEAT - Continued
2. Adjust gunner’s seat (Figure 2, Item 1) to align gunner's view with gun sights.
WARNING
a. Push seat release handle (Figure 2, Item 2) and move seat upwards or downwards to desired position.
ASV01430_1
Figure 2. Gunner’s Seat.
NOTE
A slight up or down movement of seat will permit the lock plunger to engage and hold
seat securely in position.
b. Release seat release handle (Figure 2, Item 2) to lock seat in position.
WARNING
in order to provide maximum protection. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
3. Gunner’s Seat Belt (Figure 3, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0027
GUNNER'S SEAT - Continued
2
ASV01431_1
Figure 3. Seat Belt.
a. Pull seat belt (Figure 3, Item 1) across body and latch into seat belt buckle (Figure 3, Item 2).
b. Adjust straps to fit snug against body.
c. Push release button (Figure 3, Item 3) on seat belt buckle (Figure 3, Item 2) to unlatch seat belt
(Figure 3, Item 1).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0028
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - INTERIOR LIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
Master Power Switch On (200 amp). (WP 0005)
INTERIOR LIGHT
1. Turret is equipped with an interior light (Figure 1, Item 1) to provide illumination during tactical and
nontactical operations.
D E C D E F
C F
B B
A A ALL
INT INT
STATION
STATION
WORK MONITOR
O/R
VOX
LIVE
PTT
INTERCOM
HEADSET VEHICLE PTT
ASV01467
Figure 1. Interior Light.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0028
INTERIOR LIGHT - Continued
2. The interior light (Figure 2, Item 1) is equipped with a three-position interior light selector switch (Figure 2,
Item 4) to control type of illumination.
1 2
ASV01466_1
5 4
a. Move interior light selector switch (Figure 2, Item 4) clockwise to operate with blue light (Figure 2,
Item 3) illumination during tactical operations.
b. Press lock button (Figure 2, Item 5) and move interior light selector switch (Figure 2, Item 4)
counterclockwise to operate with white light (Figure 2, Item 2) mode during nontactical operations.
c. Press lock button (Figure 2, Item 5) and move interior light selector switch (Figure 2, Item 4) to center
OFF position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0029
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - UTILITY LIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
UTILITY LIGHT
CAUTION
Pull utility light straight down when removing from mounting bracket. May damage bracket
if utility light pulled to the side during removal. Place utility light in its mounting bracket
when not in use. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Utility light can be removed or left mounted while in use.
1. Utility light (Figure 1, Item 2) is located below 40-mm rear mantlet cover (Figure 1, Item 1).
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01432_1
Figure 1. Utility Light.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0029
UTILITY LIGHT - Continued
2. Utility light (Figure 2, Item 1) is equipped with an ON/OFF DIMMER control switch (Figure 2, Item 2), RED/
CLEAR light control switch (Figure 2, Item 6), and an adjustable lens (Figure 2, Item 9) for spotlight
(Figure 2, Item 10) or floodlight (Figure 2, Item 11) beam.
2
11
10
3
2
9 8 5
7 4
6 ASV01433_1
Figure 2. Utility Light.
CAUTION
Ensure RED/CLEAR slide lever is in red position before turning on utility light during
blackout operations. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
a. Use ON/OFF DIMMER control switch (Figure 2, Item 2) to turn on utility light (Figure 2, Item 1). Rotate
ON/OFF DIMMER control switch clockwise (Figure 2, Item 5) to increase brightness and
counterclockwise (Figure 2, Item 4) to decrease brightness of utility light. Press BRIGHT pushbutton
(Figure 2, Item 3) for maximum brightness when performing operations that require more illumination.
b. Move RED/CLEAR light control switch (Figure 2, Item 6) to RED (Figure 2, Item 8) position when
operating in tactical or blackout conditions. Move RED/CLEAR light control switch to CLEAR (Figure 2,
Item 7) position when not operating in tactical or blackout conditions.
c. Rotate adjustable lens (Figure 2, Item 9) clockwise for floodlight beam (Figure 2, Item 11) and
counterclockwise for spotlight beam (Figure 2, Item 10).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ENGINE STARTING AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0005
WP 0006
SCOPE
NOTE
• Circuit breaker numbers and labels on 200 amp DCU are different from those used
on 400 amp DCU. Switches might be arranged slightly differently but their
functions are the same.
• For 200 amp DCU see Description and Use of Driver’s Control Unit (200 Amp).
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
This work package describes engine starting and shutdown under usual conditions.
ENGINE STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Ensure TRANSMISSION switch (Figure 1, Item 1) is in ON position.

WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
1 ASV01250_1
Figure 1. Transmission Switch (200 Amp DCU).
2. Move MASTER POWER switch (Figure 2, Item 1) to ON position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
ENGINE STARTING PROCEDURE - Continued
1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01347_1
Figure 2. Master Power Switch (200 Amp DCU).
3. Check LEFT FUEL tank gauge (Figure 3, Item 1) and RIGHT FUEL tank gauge (Figure 3, Item 2) to ensure
adequate fuel supply.
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV00609_1
2
Figure 3. Fuel Tank Gauges.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
4. Ensure parking brake (Figure 4, Item 1) is applied.
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225
80
25
50
75
3.5 RUN
RUN
24 32
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 25
50 16 FLAT
FLAT
7 24 32
16
40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
EMR
1
60 SAN
30 40 40 60 80
50
40 70
30
30 40 50
40
9080
20
30 km/h
30
90 ENGAGE
C C
50
20 50 60
20 10
20
MPH km/h 60
100 SPOOL
20 10 MPH 100
70
10 110
TACH FUEL 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
0
KILOMETERS
MILES 120
HIGH
HIGH
0 00 Faria 0 0 0 00 00 00 0
0000
USA WAY
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01411_1
Figure 4. Parking Brake.
5. Ensure ENGINE STOP T-handle (Figure 5, Item 1) is completely pushed in.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
1
P

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
175 50 3.5 RUN BILGE TL4
125 225
80
25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
40 4WD 175 50
PUMP OFF ON POSITION OFF ON WARNING
ENGINE STOP
120 1250 225 7 25 24 32
16
40 120

TEMP TEMP
C/F
OIL OIL VOLTS VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
TL5
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS 50 70 SAN INFLATION
30 40 40 60 80 ON ON ON ON CB5 CB11
50
40 70
30
30 40 50 9080
20
km/h
30
40
ENGAGE AUX.
20 50
20
30
20
MPH km/h
60
50
100
90
C C SPOOL POWER
10
20
60
10 MPH70
TACH FUEL
10 110
70
110
OFF CB6 CB12
10 OVERRIDE
10 60 0 120
DE-ICE NBC FAN LAMP TEST
KILOMETERS
0
Faria 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 0 0 0
MILES 120
HIGH
0 00
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
ASV01426_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
NOTE
Shift selector indicator will not illuminate with IGNITION switch in OFF position.
6. Move IGNITION switch (Figure 6, Item 1) to RUN position and ensure transmission is in neutral (N) position
on transmission shift selector panel (Figure 7, Item 1).
1 IGNITION GRID
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1
OVERRIDE
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01412_1
Figure 6. Ignition Switch (200 Amp DCU).
S M
E O
L N
I
E T
C O
T R
MODE
ASV01249_1
Figure 7. Transmission Shift Selector Panel.
CAUTION
To prevent starter damage, do not attempt to start engine for more than 30 seconds
continuously. If engine does not start within 30 seconds, wait 1 to 2 minutes before starting
again. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
7. Move IGNITION switch (Figure 6, Item 1) to START position and lightly depress accelerator pedal (Figure 8,
Item 1). Release ignition switch as soon as engine starts.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225
80
25
50
75
3.5 RUN
RUN
24 32
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 7 25
50 16
24 32
FLAT
FLAT
16
40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
EMR
60
SAN
30 40 40 60 80
70
50
40
30
30 40 50
40
9080
20
30 km/h
30
ENGAGE
20 50
20 10
20
MPH km/h
60
50
60
100
90
CC
C C SPOOL
20 10 MPH
70
100
10 110
TACH FUEL 10
70
110
0 120
Faria 0 0 0 0000 00 00 0 0 0
MILES HIGH
HIGH
0 00
USA WAY
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01371_2
Figure 8. Accelerator Pedal.
CAUTION
Indications of transmission malfunction exist if Do Not Shift (DNS) indicator light
illuminates, and remains illuminated after vehicle is at normal operating temperatures. Do
not operate vehicle in this condition. Maintenance personnel must be notified immediately.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment..
NOTE
Brake accumulators require up to one minute to fully recharge when starting vehicle. Brake
system warning light should turn off. Accumulator charging valve closes when system
pressure is normal.
8. Allow engine to run at fast idle, approximately 1500 rpm, while checking gauges.
CAUTION
Do not operate vehicle if engine oil pressure is below 10 psi (0.7 bar). Oil pressure
gauge must read engine oil pressure within 30 seconds after starting vehicle. If oil
pressure is too low or gauge does not operate, notify maintenance personnel. Failure
to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
With engine at normal operating temperature, engine oil pressure at idle speed should
be 10 - 30 psi (0.7 - 2.0 bar). During vehicle operations, oil pressure should be 45 - 85
psi (3.1 - 5.9 bar).
a. Oil pressure reading must be a minimum of 10 psi (0.7 bar) as indicated on OIL pressure gauge
(Figure 9, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
1 2 3
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01471_1
Figure 9. Instrument Panel.
CAUTION
Maximum coolant temperature of 230°F (110°C), as indicated by coolant high
temperature warning light, should not be exceeded. If maximum temperature is
exceeded, shut down the engine and notify maintenance personnel. Failure to comply
b. Normal operating coolant temperature should be 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C), as indicated on engine
coolant TEMP gauge (Figure 9, Item 1).
c. Ensure battery VOLTS gauge (Figure 9, Item 3) is in green zone or showing slight charge.
END OF TASK
ENGINE SHUTDOWN
NOTE
Engine should idle for three to five minutes after stopping the vehicle to allow a gradual
cool down before shutting down engine.
1. Shift transmission into neutral (N) position on transmission shift selector panel (Figure 10, Item 1).
S M
E O
L N
I
E T
C O
T R
MODE
ASV01249_1
Figure 10. Transmission Shift Selector Panel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
ENGINE SHUTDOWN - Continued
2. Apply parking brake by depressing parking brake pedal (Figure 11, Item 1).
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225
80
25
50
75
3.5 RUN
RUN
24 32
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 25
50 16 FLAT
FLAT
7 24 32
16
40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
EMR
1
60 SAN
30 40 40 60 80
50
40 70
30
30 40 50
40
9080
20
30 km/h
30
90 ENGAGE
C C
50
20 50 60
20 10
20
MPH km/h 60
100 SPOOL
20 10 MPH 100
70
10 110
TACH FUEL 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
0
KILOMETERS
MILES 120
HIGH
HIGH
0 00 Faria 0 0 0 00 00 00 0
0000
USA WAY
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01411_1
3. Pull ENGINE STOP T-handle (Figure 12, Item 1) out completely in order to shut down engine. Push
ENGINE STOP T-handle in after engine shuts down.
1 ON 2 3
MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
1
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
175 50 3.5 RUN

RUN BILGE TL4
125 225
80
25 75 24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
4WD 175 50 16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 1250 225 7 25
16
24 32
40 120
BLU GRN SYSTEM LIGHTS
ENGINE STOP
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
EMR
TL5
CENTRAL
SAN INFLATION
30 40 40 60 80 ON ON ON ON CB5 CB11
50
40 70
30
30 40 50 9080
20
km/h
30
40
90 ENGAGE AUX.
20 50
20
30
20
MPH km/h
60
50
100 C C SPOOL POWER

10
20
60
10 MPH
70
TACH FUEL
10
10
110
70
110
OFF CB6 CB12
0 120
10 60 KILOMETERS
0
Faria 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 0 0 0
MILES 120
HIGH
HIGH
0 00
USA WAY
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
ASV01293_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0030
ENGINE SHUTDOWN - Continued
4. Move IGNITION switch (Figure 13, Item 1) from RUN position to OFF position.
5. Move MASTER POWER switch (Figure 13, Item 2) to OFF position.
6. Move TRANSMISSION switch (Figure 13, Item 3) to OFF position.
1 2
IGNITION GRID MASTER TURRET BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP ENGINE BOTTLE CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
TEST FAULT SILENCE CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01470_1
Figure 13. Master Power and Ignition Switches.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0031
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
References References (cont.)

WP 0005 WP 0032
WP 0006 WP 0038
WP 0026 WP 0162
WP 0030 WP 0170
PREPARATION TO OPERATE VEHICLE
WARNING
Driver’s and commander's hatches must be fully opened and locked down when driving
with open hatches. Failure to lock hatches down in open position may result in injury or
death to personnel.
CAUTION
Do not operate vehicle with lower doors open. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
NOTE
Perform all BEFORE (B) PMCS inspections (WP 0162) before operating vehicle.
1. Remove and stow wheel chocks. (WP 0170)
2. Position driver's and commander's seats and seat belt as needed. (WP 0026)
3. Position mirrors as needed. (WP 0038)
4. Turn on lights. (200 amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 amp DCU (WP 0006))
5. Ensure that four-wheel drive lever is in two-wheel drive (2WD) position for operations on paved surfaces.
(WP 0032)
CAUTION
Do not select neutral (N) or stop engine if Do Not Shift (DNS) indicator light is illuminated.
DNS protective circuit will prevent engaging transmission to drive vehicle. Failure to comply
6. Start engine. (WP 0030)
END OF TASK

TM 9-2320-381-10 0031
DRIVING FORWARD
WARNING
Do not release parking brake until brake warning light on warning light panel turns off.
CAUTION
First gear starts are permitted in 4 wheel drive only. Do not manually override to induce a
first gear start in 2 wheel drive or excessive torque will result. Failure to comply may result
NOTE
Parking brake must be released and engine must be at idle speed before any shift
selections from neutral to drive or reverse are made.
1. Release parking brake (Figure 1, Item 3).
1
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5 RUN B.O.

FUEL CROSSOVER VALVE
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
24 32
FLAT DRIVE
16
ON OFF 40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
PANEL
TEMP VOLTS SAN
M
BRT
30 40 60
50 70
S O 20 50 30
40
20
30
40
km/h
50
60
80
90
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
DIM
E
20 10 MPH 100
N
70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0 120
HIGH
L
MILES
I 000 0000000
WAY
E T FREE
SPOOL
C O
T R
MODE
4
6
2
3 ASV01538_1
Figure 1. Driver's Controls - Driving Forward.
2. Set transmission to desired range on transmission shift selector panel (Figure 1, Item 1).
CAUTION
Shift selector digital display will flash diagnostic codes which may indicate transmission
problems or improper vehicle operation. Notify maintenance personnel if codes are
displayed. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0031
DRIVING FORWARD - Continued
NOTE
Transmission can be preselected to shift and remain in one of six ranges if necessary. The
digital indicator display above the key pad displays selected range.
3. Drive (D) button (Figure 1, Item 6) is the most commonly used selection for forward range. In two-wheel
drive, it includes five forward gears. When vehicle is idling, second gear is engaged and transmission will
automatically upshift as speed and load requires, through third, fourth, fifth, and sixth gears. In four-wheel
drive, four forward gears are available. When the vehicle is idling, first gear is engaged and transmission will
automatically upshift through second, third, and fourth gears. Downshift will also occur automatically in
relation to speed.
NOTE
Use gear preselection when unusual driving conditions are expected.
4. Preselect downshifts and upshifts by pressing the down arrow button (Figure 1, Item 5) and up arrow button
(Figure 1, Item 4) after selecting and attaining the forward drive position.
a. If expected driving condition requires steady, slow speed (i.e., crowd control, driving in sand, mud or
snow, inclines, or off-road driving), preselect a gear range that falls within governed speed for planned
driving condition. For example, if planned speed should not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h), press drive (D)
button (Figure 1, Item 6) and press UP arrow button (Figure 1, Item 4) three times. The vehicle will
only upshift to third gear.
Table 1. Maximum Governed Engine Speeds.
Transmission Gear Transfer Range
Two-Wheel Drive Four-Wheel Drive
Reverse 9 mph (14 km/h) 9 mph (14 km/h)
First N/A 9 mph (14 km/h)
Second 19 mph (30 km/h) 19 mph (30 km/h)
Third 28 mph (45 km/h) 28 mph (45 km/h)
Fourth 43 mph (69 km/h) 43 mph (69 km/h)
Fifth 57 mph (92 km/h) N/A
Sixth 62 mph (100 km/h) N/A
b. If driving conditions change, press UP arrow button (Figure 1, Item 4) three more times to enable
transmission to shift up to sixth gear as driving speed demands, or press drive (D) button (Figure 1,
Item 6) to enable vehicle to upshift automatically.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0031
DRIVING FORWARD - Continued
CAUTION
Do not depress brake pedal down while depressing accelerator pedal. Excessive torque
can damage driveline components. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Foot pressure on accelerator affects automatic shift points. When the accelerator pedal is
fully depressed, upshifts are at set governed speed of engine. With lighter pedal pressure,
upshifts occur sooner at a lower engine speed. Automatic shifts are always accurately
spaced to suit the driving situation.
5. Depress accelerator pedal (Figure 1, Item 2) slowly and steadily until desired vehicle speed is reached.
END OF TASK
STOPPING VEHICLE
1. Depress brake pedal (Figure 2, Item 2) to apply brakes. Transmission will downshift automatically.
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5 RUN B.O.

4WD 125
175
225 25
50
24 32
FLAT DRIVE
16
ON OFF 40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
PANEL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
30 40 60
50 70
40 80 DIM
40
30
ENGAGE
20 50 30
20
km/h
50
60
90
C C SPOOL
20 10 MPH 100
70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0 MILES 120
HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01538_2
2
Figure 2. Driver's Controls - Stopping Vehicle.
CAUTION
If brake hydraulic pressure warning light illuminates, stop vehicle and immediately notify
maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0031
STOPPING VEHICLE - Continued
NOTE
If brake hydraulic pressure warning light illuminates, the hydraulic accumulators will supply
enough hydraulic pressure to safely stop vehicle.
2. If brake hydraulic pressure warning light (Figure 2, Item 1) illuminates, slowly depress brake pedal (Figure 2,
Item 2) and bring vehicle to stop. Report problem to maintenance personnel immediately.
END OF TASK
REVERSING VEHICLE
CAUTION
Do not shift into reverse while vehicle is moving forward. Failure to comply may result in
NOTE
Parking brake must be released and engine must be at idle before any shift selections from
neutral to drive or reverse are made.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop by firmly and steadily depressing brake pedal (Figure 3, Item 3).
2. Press neutral button (Figure 3, Item 4) on transmission shift selector panel (Figure 3, Item 1).
3. Press reverse (R) button (Figure 3, Item 5) on transmission shift selector panel (Figure 3, Item 1).
1 P
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5 RUN B.O.

4WD 125
175
225 25
50
24 32
FLAT DRIVE
16
ON OFF 40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
PANEL
TEMP VOLTS SAN
M
BRT
30 40 60
50 70
S O 20 50 30
40
20
30
40
km/h
50
60
80
90
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
DIM
E
20 10 MPH 100
N
70
TACH 10 110
5
10 60 0 120
HIGH
L
MILES
I 000 0000000
WAY
E T FREE
SPOOL
C O
T R
1
4
MODE
ASV01538_3
3 2
Figure 3. Driver's Controls - Reversing Vehicle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0031
REVERSING VEHICLE - Continued
4. Depress accelerator pedal (Figure 3, Item 2) with slow steady pressure.
END OF TASK
DO NOT SHIFT LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHILE DRIVING
NOTE
• The Electronic Control Unit (ECU) will cause transmission to shift to a safe gear
and a hold-in-range.
• Automatic shifting is disabled.
• When mission operations do not allow immediate maintenance checks, perform
the following procedures to attempt to cancel trouble signal.
1. If the Do Not Shift (DNS) indicator light (Figure 4, Item 2) illuminates, depress brake pedal (Figure 4, Item 3)
and bring vehicle to a stop.
1
P
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5 RUN B.O.

4WD 125
175
225 25
50
24 32
FLAT DRIVE
16
ON OFF 40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
PANEL
TEMP VOLTS SAN
M
BRT
30 40 60
50 70
S O 20 50 30
40
20
30
40
km/h
50
60
80
90
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
DIM
E
20 10 MPH 100
N
70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0 120
HIGH
L
MILES
I 000 0000000
WAY
E T FREE
SPOOL
C O
T R
5 1
MODE
6
ASV01538_4
3
4
Figure 4. Driver's Controls.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal (Figure 4, Item 4).

3. Press UP arrow button (Figure 4, Item 6) and DOWN arrow button (Figure 4, Item 7) simultaneously, on
transmission shift selector panel (Figure 4, Item 1) one time.
4. Press and hold display MODE button (Figure 4, Item 5) on transmission shift selector panel (Figure 4,
Item 1) until a tone signal is heard. Release display MODE button (Figure 4, Item 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0031
DO NOT SHIFT LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHILE DRIVING - Continued
5. If condition is temporary, DNS indicator light (Figure 4, Item 2) will not illuminate again. Release parking
brake and continue vehicle operation. Notify maintenance personnel as soon as possible after mission is
complete.
6. If condition is not temporary, DNS indicator light (Figure 4, Item 2) will illuminate again. Vehicle shifting will
automatically be restricted until transmission is repaired. Notify maintenance personnel as soon as possible.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0032
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - SHIFTING TO FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
SHIFTING TO FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
CAUTION
• Do not shift vehicle into four-wheel drive at speeds higher than 28 mph (45 km/h).
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
• Do not operate vehicle in four-wheel drive on hard surfaces. Failure to comply may
NOTE
• When vehicle is in four-wheel drive transmission shifting in forward speeds is
limited to 1st through 4th gears.
• Vehicle can be shifted out of four-wheel drive at speeds from 0 - 43 mph
(0 - 69 km/h).
• Always use four-wheel drive when operating in water, mud, snow, or sand.
• Four-wheel drive can be selected on the move if vehicle is travelling less than
28 mph (45 km/h).
1. Move four-wheel drive shift lever (Figure 1, Item 1) to 4WD position to shift vehicle to four-wheel drive.
2 WD
1
4 WD
ASV00675_1
Figure 1. Four-Wheel Drive Shift Selector.
2. To return to two-wheel drive, move four-wheel drive shift lever (Figure 1, Item 1) to 2WD position and
vehicle will shift to two-wheel drive.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0033
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MANUAL DOWNSHIFTING
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
MANUAL DOWNSHIFTING
CAUTION
Downshifting should be avoided when vehicle is above maximum speed attainable in next
lower gear. Speeds are listed on driver’s instruction plate. Failure to comply may result in
NOTE
Protection against improper downshifts and reverse shifts is built into the transmission. If
downshift or reverse shift is attempted at too high a speed, the transmission hydraulic
system automatically prevents the shift until a safe speed is reached.
1. Automatic transmission may be manually downshifted by pushing the down arrow (Figure 1, Item 2) on
transmission shift selector (Figure 1, Item 1) to next lower gear.
SYM
FRONT FAN CONTROL

S M
2 E O
1 L N
OFF 3 I
E T
C O
T R
2WD
SYM SYM
MODE
AC AC
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
SYM
REAR FAN CONTROL

2 4WD
1
OFF 3
ASV01255_1
Figure 1. Transmission Shift Selector.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0033
MANUAL DOWNSHIFTING - Continued
WARNING
The drive transfer unit may disengage if the engine is allowed to overspeed beyond the
2200 rpm governed limit on downhill slopes without braking assistance. Always use brakes
to maintain vehicle at an acceptable speed for the selected drive gear. Failure to comply
2. To use engine as a braking force, press down arrow of the transmission shift selector to next lower gear. If
vehicle is exceeding maximum speed for a lower gear, use brakes to slow vehicle to an acceptable speed
and the transmission will automatically downshift to the gear selected.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0034
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVING TIPS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0039
DRIVING TIPS
1. If vehicle pulls to either side while accelerating or decelerating:

a. Check tire pressure (Table 1) and amount of wear on each tire. Contact maintenance to replace any
tires that are badly worn.
Table 1. CTIS Pressure Settings.
SETTING MPH (km/h) TIRE PRESSURE psi (bar)
Highway 63 (101) 85 (5.86) with FRAG KIT 2
Cross-Country 40 (64) 50 (3.45) with FRAG KIT 2
Mud, Snow, and Sand 12 (19) 26 (1.79) with FRAG KIT 2
Emergency 5 (8) 18 (1.24) with FRAG KIT 2
b. Ensure vehicle is not in four-wheel drive when driving on hard surfaces.

2. Because the vehicle has a very short turning radius, there may be some resistance in steering when making
a turn under power. By momentarily reducing throttle setting, wheel torque is reduced, permitting vehicle to
complete turn with minimal resistance.
3. When driving in severe off-road conditions (ie, mud, sand, or snow), tire pressures should be set as noted in
Table 1. If tires slip excessively and the vehicle begins to slow, reduce acceleration until tires stop slipping
and slowly reapply throttle.
CAUTION
Applying full throttle when vehicle is mired should not be performed because transmission
will overheat. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
For operation in extremely muddy areas, tire pressure may be temporarily lowered to
15 psi (1.03 bar) for improved traction.
4. If vehicle becomes mired it may be possible to rock vehicle to free it as follows:
a. Select drive (D) on transmission shift selector and apply a steady, light throttle.
b. Move vehicle as far forward as possible, press down on brake pedal and hold.
c. Return engine to idle and select reverse (R) on transmission shift selector.
d. Release brakes and apply a steady, slight acceleration, allowing vehicle to back up as far as possible.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0034
DRIVING TIPS - Continued
e. Repeat Steps (a) through (d) until vehicle is freed.

5. If self-recovery procedure in Step (4) does not free vehicle, use winch (WP 0039).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0035
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - LATCH HANDLES
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
GENERAL
1. Hull openings in the sides and rear are referred to as doors.

2. Openings in the hull roof are hatches.
3. All doors and hatches are held closed by latch handles.
UNLOCKED
LOCKED
LATCH
HANDLE ASV00705
Figure 1. Latch Handles.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - HATCHES, DOORS, AND DOOR PORTS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
DRIVER'S AND COMMANDER'S HATCHES
WARNING
• Any time hatches are open, they must be fully opened and locked down. Failure to
• Ensure that hands are away from hatch during opening and closing procedures.
NOTE
• The vehicle hull openings in the sides and rear are referred to as doors and
openings in the hull roof are referred to as hatches. All doors and hatches are held
closed by latch handles.
• Pivot hatch handles enable opening and closing of hatches from inside of vehicle
and lock hatches into open position. Pivot handles for each hatch are located
above and to the rear of driver's and commander's seats.
• Pivot hatches directly above driver's and commander's seats open by slightly
raising then rotating outward 180 degrees. Pivot hatches are locked down in
closed position by a hatch lock handle. Pivot hatches are locked down in open
position by a pivot hatch handle.
• Driver's and commander's pivot hatches open and close the same way. Driver's
pivot hatch shown.
1. Open driver’s pivot hatch (Figure 1, Item 2) as follows:

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
DRIVER'S AND COMMANDER'S HATCHES - Continued
ASV00710_1
Figure 1. Latch Opening and Closing.
a. Move hatch lock handle (Figure 1, Item 3) to unlock position.

b. Using hatch pivot handle (Figure 1, Item 1), raise driver’s pivot hatch (Figure 1, Item 2) and push pivot
handle to move driver’s pivot hatch to open position against hatch stop plate.
CAUTION
Turret can strike hatch in raised position. Always lock down hatches in closed or open
position. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
c. Move pivot handle (Figure 1, Item 1) to lower driver’s hatch. Rotate pivot handle over center to
securely lock driver’s hatch (Figure 1, Item 2) in down position.
2. Close driver’s pivot hatch (Figure 1, Item 2) as follows:
a. Raise driver’s pivot hatch (Figure 1, Item 2) with hatch pivot handle (Figure 1, Item 1) and move
driver’s pivot hatch to closed position.
b. Rotate hatch pivot handle (Figure 1, Item 1) over center to lower and lock driver’s pivot hatch
(Figure 1, Item 2) closed.
c. When driver’s pivot hatch (Figure 1, Item 2) is in closed position, move hatch lock handle (Figure 1,
Item 3) to locked position.
END OF TASK

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
SIDE DOORS
WARNING
Upper side door has a spring latch installed. Open upper door fully and latch against side
of hull. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
• Driver's and commander's upper and lower side doors open and close the same
way. Driver's side door shown.
• Upper half of door must be opened first.
• Top half of upper side doors are held in open position by a door spring latch and
are released by pushing the door release inside vehicle.
1. Open upper door (Figure 2, Item 1) by moving latch handle (Figure 2, Item 2) to unlocked position and
pushing upper door open until it latches against side of hull.
2. Push latch release handle (Figure 2, Item 6) to close upper door (Figure 2, Item 1). Spring assist on door will
move door away from hull and allow operator to pull upper door closed. Move latch handle (Figure 2, Item 2)
to locked position to secure door closed.
NOTE
Bottom half of lower doors are assisted open and closed by a torsion bar assembly. The
lower door in the open position is used as a step to enter and exit the side of the vehicle.
3. Open bottom half of lower door (Figure 2, Item 4) by moving latch handles (Figure 2, Item 3) to unlocked
position and pushing lower door open.
4. Close bottom half of lower door (Figure 2, Item 4) by pulling door up using torsion bar handle (Figure 2,
Item 5) and moving latch handles (Figure 2, Item 3) to locked position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
SIDE DOORS - Continued
1
2
6 4
3 O5550003
Figure 2. Side Doors.
END OF TASK

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
SIDE DOOR EMERGENCY INGRESS
1. Turn winch hatch latch (Figure 3, Item 4) unlocking winch hatch (Figure 3, Item 6).
2. Lift winch hatch handle (Figure 3, Item 5), open winch hatch (Figure 3, Item 6).
3. Remove two clamp pins (Figure 3, Item 3), clamp (Figure 3, Item 2), and emergency ingress tool (Figure 3,
Item 7) from two studs (Figure 3, Item 1).
4 5 6
2 3
O5550005
Figure 3. Winch Hatch.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
SIDE DOOR EMERGENCY INGRESS - Continued
WARNING
Upper side door has a spring latch installed. Open upper door fully and latch against side
of hull. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
Driver's and commander's side door emergency ingress functions the same way. Driver's
side door shown.
4. Using the emergency ingress tool, turn post bar (Figure 4, Item 3) on the driver side outer door port cover
(Figure 4, Item 2) in a clockwise direction until the upper side door (Figure 4, Item 1) opens.
5. Repeat step 4 for commander's side door.
3 2
O5550006
.
Figure 4. Emergency Ingress Post Bar.
END OF TASK

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
DOOR PORTS
NOTE
• Driver's and commander's door ports open and close the same way. Driver's door
port shown.
• The door port can be opened and closed with the lower and upper doors in the
closed and locked position.
1. Remove clevis pin (Figure 5, Item 2) and latch actuator rod (Figure 5, Item 3) from cover plate (Figure 5,
Item 1).
2. Door port (Figure 5, Item 4) is opened by loosening two knobs (Figure 5, Item 3) and pivoting cover plate
(Figure 5, Item 1) clockwise or counterclockwise.
1 2 3
5 4 (HIDDEN)
M5550045
Figure 5. Door Ports.
3. To lock door ports (Figure 5, Item 4), pivot cover plate (Figure 5, Item 1) closed and tighten pivoting knobs
(Figure 5, Item 3).
4. Install latch actuator rod (Figure 5, Item 3) and clevis pin (Figure 5, Item 2) on cover plate (Figure 5, Item 1).
END OF TASK

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
REAR DOOR
WARNING
Upper door is heavy. Keep hands and head clear of door opening when opening or closing
door. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
The upper half of rear door opens upward and is held open by a position handle on inside
of the door. Bottom half of the door opens downward forming a step for easy access in and
out of vehicle.
1. Open rear doors (Figure 6, Items 2 and 4) as follows:
NOTE
Upper half of rear door must be opened first. Torsion bar will assist the operator to
open the upper door until door locks into raised position.
a. Open upper door (Figure 6, Item 2) by moving latch handles (Figure 6, Item 3) to unlocked position.
WARNING
Lower rear door is heavy. Do not allow door to free fall when opening. Carefully
support door while slowly lowering. Allowing lower rear door to free fall may cause
injury to personnel or damage to gas cylinder.
NOTE
The lower door in the open position is used as a step to enter and exit the rear of the
vehicle.
b. Open lower door (Figure 6, Item 4) by moving latch handles (Figure 6, Item 5) to unlocked position and
pushing down until door rests on stop.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
REAR DOOR - Continued
2
3
5 4 O5550022
Figure 6. Rear Doors.
2. Close rear doors (Figure 6, Item 2) and (Figure 6, Item 4) as follows:
NOTE
Lower door must be closed first.
a. Pull up lower door (Figure 6, Item 4) using step (Figure 6, Item 6) to assist in closing door.
b. Lock lower door (Figure 6, Item 4) in closed position with lower latch handles (Figure 6, Item 5).
WARNING
Upper door is heavy. Keep hands and head clear of door opening when opening or
closing door. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
c. Push upper door (Figure 6, Item 2) up and push on hatch handle (Figure 6, Item 1) to unlock the upper
door. Close upper door.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0036
REAR DOOR - Continued
d. Move door latch handles (Figure 6, Item 3) in locked position to seal door (Figure 6, Item 2) closed.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0037
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ENGINE COMPARTMENT ACCESS
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Personnel (2)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ACCESS
WARNING
Engine compartment access door is heavy. Keep hands and head clear of access door
when opening or closing access door. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
The engine compartment access door allows for quick oil level checks of engine,
transmission, and hydraulic fluids, and for inspection of the air flow restriction indicator.
1. Open engine compartment access door (Figure 1, Item 1) as follows:
ASV01325_1
Figure 1. Engine Compartment Access Door.
a. With the aid of soldier No. 2, pull latch release cable (Figure 2, Item 1) from inside of vehicle to unlatch
engine compartment access door (Figure 1, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0037
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ACCESS - Continued
ASV00724_1
Figure 2. Engine Compartment Access Door Release.
b. From outside of vehicle, carefully lower unlatched engine compartment access door (Figure 1, Item 1)
to open.
2. Raise engine compartment access door (Figure 1, Item 1) to close. Door will latch in closed position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0038
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MIRRORS
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools

Wrench, Adjustable 8 in. (WP 0175, Table 3, Item
53)
MIRRORS
NOTE
Externally mounted left and right mirrors can be adjusted in two directions to provide a
clear view.
1. Adjust mirror (Figure 1, Item 2) side-to-side as follows:
1 2
5
3
4 1 ASV01317_1
Figure 1. Vehicle Mirror.
a. Loosen upper and lower lock knobs (Figure 1, Item 1) to adjust side-to-side angle of mirror (Figure 1,
Item 2).
b. Tighten both lock knobs (Figure 1, Item 1) after adjustment is complete.
2. Adjust mirror (Figure 1, Item 2) in and out as follows:
a. Loosen four mounting screws (Figure 1, Item 5) on hull mounting pads (Figure 1, Item 4) to move
mirror (Figure 1, Item 2) and support arm (Figure 1, Item 3) in or out.
b. Tighten mounting screws (Figure 1, Item 5) after adjustment is complete.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0039
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TOWING PINTLE
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
TOWING PINTLE
1. Towing pintle (Figure 1, Item 3) is located on the rear of the vehicle and used for towing equipment and
other ASV's.
1
2
ASV00746_1
Figure 1. Towing Pintle.
CAUTION
Safety pin must be in place when towing and when pintle is in closed position or pintle has
the potential to open. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
2. Open towing pintle (Figure 1, Item 3) by removing safety pin (Figure 1, Item 1) and pulling T-handle
(Figure 1, Item 2).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0040
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TOWING EYES, LIFTING EYES, AND TIE-DOWN SHACKLES
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
TOWING EYES, LIFTING EYES, AND TIE-DOWN SHACKLES
1. Towing eyes. Two towing eyes (Figure 1, Item 5) are located on underside front of vehicle hull and two rear
towing eyes (Figure 1, Item 3) are located on underside rear of vehicle hull and are used for towing vehicles.
(DRIVER’S SIDE HIDDEN)

1
2
3
4
ASV01319_1
Figure 1. Towing Eyes, Lifting Eyes, and Tie-Down Shackles.
2. Lifting eyes. Two lifting eyes (Figure 1, Item 1) are located at each corner on top front of the hull and two
lifting eyes (Figure 1, Item 2) are welded at each corner or the top rear of the hull.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0040
TOWING EYES, LIFTING EYES, AND TIE-DOWN SHACKLES - Continued
3. Tie-down shackles. Two tie-down shackles (Figure 1, Item 6) are located on underside of front vehicle hull
and two tie-down shackles (Figure 1, Item 4) are located on underside of rear hull. They are used to secure
vehicle during transport.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0041
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) OPERATION
WARNING
• Tires must have proper tire inflation for different road conditions. Incorrect tire
pressures affect steering and braking operation and cause excessive wear or
possible destruction of tire. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Flashing lights on the Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) control panel may
indicate tire damage. Driver should stop vehicle if conditions allow and check all
tires. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
Do not press RUN FLAT button repeatedly. This action may result in tire pressures that
exceed mode settings. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
• CTIS control panel warns driver when vehicle speed exceeds range for tire
pressure setting. If speed is not reduced, system will automatically inflate tire
pressure to safe setting for operating speed.
• Air exhaust and solenoid clicking sounds may be heard from the CTIS control
valve during vehicle operation.
• Engine must be operating to supply compressed air to the CTIS.
• Central tire inflation circuit breaker must be in the ON position for CTIS to operate.
OFF. CTIS will continue to operate with the display in blackout mode.
1. Determine which operating mode on Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) is
required for anticipated driving conditions. CTIS settings, maximum speeds, and tire pressures are listed in
Table 1.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0041
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) OPERATION - Continued
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
RUN 2
FLAT
EMER 3
SAND 4
X C 5
HWY 6
ASV01442_2
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Control Panel.
a. HWY (Highway) (Figure 1, Item 6) - for operations on paved surfaces.

b. X-C (Cross-Country) (Figure 1, Item 5) - for operations on secondary nonpaved roads.
c. SAND (Figure 1, Item 4) - for off-road operations.
CAUTION
The EMER mode is for extreme driving conditions only and should NOT be used
under normal circumstances. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
d. EMER (Emergency) (Figure 1, Item 3) - for operation that requires extremely low tire pressures
(i.e., deep mud). Indicator lamp flashes when operating in this mode.
CAUTION
Selecting RUN FLAT to correct a low tire pressure may cause opposite tire to
temporarily lose pressure while air pressure in CTIS lines equalize. Condition will
correct itself as tire pressure is inflated to the same level as other tires. Do not select
RUN FLAT if tire is severely damaged or good tire will also lose air pressure. Failure to
e. RUN FLAT (Figure 1, Item 2) - is used for increasing system pressure check intervals and correcting
low tire pressure caused by slow leaks.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0041
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) OPERATION - Continued
Table 1. CTIS Pressure Settings.
SETTING MPH (km/h) TIRE PRESSURE psi (bar)
Highway 63 (101) 85 (5.86) with FRAG KIT 2
Cross-Country 40 (64) 50 (3.45) with FRAG KIT 2
Mud, Snow, and Sand 12 (19) 26 (1.79) with FRAG KIT 2
Emergency 5 (8) 18 (1.24) with FRAG KIT 2
2. Press the CTIS control panel button for desired tire pressures or operating conditions.
3. The indicator light for selected operating mode will flash as the tire pressures increase or decrease. A
steady indicator light means correct operating pressure has been reached.
NOTE
CTIS control panel warns driver when vehicle speed exceeds range for tire pressure
setting. If speed is not reduced, system will automatically inflate tire pressure to safe
setting for operating speed.
4. The CTIS control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) provides the built-in test (BIT) warning signals:
a. Five flashing indicator lights. Problem detected in critical CTIS component. CTIS shuts down. Wheel
valves close and maintain current tire pressure. Report problem to maintenance personnel as soon as
possible.
b. Four flashing indicator lights. CTIS has detected one tire pressure below pressure setting. Wheel
valves close to prevent loss of air pressure from other tires. Stop vehicle as soon as possible and
inspect tires for damage. If damage is minor, select RUN FLAT to reinflate damaged tire.
c. Two steady indicator lights. CTIS did not complete pressure adjustment. System shuts down and
wheel valves close. Press desired operating mode on CTIS control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) to
reactivate system.
d. No indicator lights. System detects low voltage or a fault in the air control manifold solenoid. Wheel
valves close to prevent loss of air pressure. Report problem to maintenance personnel.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0042
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - PRIMING FUEL SYSTEM
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0005 WP 0030
WP 0006 WP 0169
PRIMING FUEL SYSTEM
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
1. Remove engine closeout panels as necessary to access fuel primer buttons. (WP 0169)
2. Ensure FUEL PUMP circuit breaker (Figure 1, Item 2) is in the ON position and listen for pump to run for
10-15 seconds.
3. Move MASTER POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 3) to ON position.
CAUTION
Do not operate electric fuel pump for more than 15 seconds. Failure to comply may result
4. Move IGNITION switch (Figure 1, Item 1) to RUN position.
1 2

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON DOMELIGHTS TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC PNL IND LIGHTS
INTERCOM G
ON ON CB2 CB8
NAV/CMPTR
OFF ON OFF ON TL3

SEATS
OFF OFF GRID HEAT ABS BRAKES G
FUEL PUMP
3 B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
ENGINE BOTTLE CB3
OFF ON
SPARE
CB9
OFF ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS
WARN LIGHTS
TL4
G

CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04642_1
Figure 1. Driver's Control Unit (200 Amp DCU).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0042
PRIMING FUEL SYSTEM - Continued
5. Check LEFT FUEL tank gauge (Figure 2, Item 1) and RIGHT FUEL tank gauge (Figure 2, Item 2) to ensure
that fuel supply is adequate.
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
2 ASV01458_1
Figure 2. Fuel Tank Gauges.
NOTE
• Step 6 applies to 400 amp systems only. Step 7 applies to 200 amp systems only.
• Hand primer button will get harder to push as pressure builds in fuel system.
6. Operate hand primer button (Figure 3, Item 4) at top of fuel filter/heater housing (Figure 3, Item 3).
NOTE
Fuel transfer pump will get harder to push as pressure builds in fuel system.
7. Operate hand primer button (Figure 3, Item 1) on fuel transfer pump (Figure 3, Item 2).
3 (400A)
1 2
4 (400A) ASV04643_1
Figure 3. Transfer Pump Priming.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0042
PRIMING FUEL SYSTEM - Continued
8. Start engine and check for leaks. (WP 0030)

9. If engine fails to start, repeat steps 2 through 8. If engine still fails to start, notify maintenance personnel.
10. Shut down engine. (WP 0030)
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0043
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - PREPARATION FOR AIR TRANSPORT
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
AIR TRANSPORT INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
• M36 sights must be bled to relieve pressure from nitrogen charge prior to air
transport. Notify maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may result in damage
to equipment.
• If vehicle armor has to be removed for shipping configuration, the armor should be
separated by wood slats when banded to pallets for shipping to prevent damage to
ceramic armor material. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
When ASV is to be shipped by air transportation, the load master for each specific aircraft will provide the
type of configuration required prior to shipment.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0044
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER'S HATCH
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
GUNNER'S HATCH
NOTE
Smoke grenade launchers will not arm if ASV gunner's hatch is not latched in the closed
position. Close and latch all hatches prior to firing smoke grenades.
1. Gunner's hatch (Figure 1, Item 1) provides access to turret.
ASV01282
Figure 1. Gunner's Hatch.
2. Gunner's hatch (Figure 1, Item 1) has a two-position lock that holds hatch open at 15-degree and 90-degree
positions.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0044
GUNNER'S HATCH - Continued
3. Open gunner's hatch (Figure 2, Item 1) by turning hatch latch handle (Figure 2, Item 2) to open position and
grasping hatch position handle (Figure 2, Item 3). Release hatch position handle when gunner's hatch is in
desired position.
2 3
1
4
ASV01469_1
Figure 2. Gunner's Hatch.
4. Interrupter switch (Figure 2, Item 4) releases when gunner's hatch (Figure 2, Item 1) is opened and causes
smoke grenade launchers to disarm.
5. Grasp hatch position handle (Figure 2, Item 3) and hatch latch handle (Figure 2, Item 2) and pull gunner's
hatch (Figure 2, Item 1) closed. Rotate hatch latch handle to locked position and release hatch position
handle to secure gunner's hatch.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0045
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER’S SIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
GENERAL
1. Turret is equipped with a gunner's M36ASV day/night sight (Figure 1, Item 1). Gunner's M36ASV day/night
sight provides frontal view for turret. Gunner’s M36ASV day/night sight permits targeting for day or night
operations.
350 355 0
340 345
335
Figure 1. Gunner's Sight.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0045
GENERAL - Continued
2. M36ASV COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.
1
3
4
10
7
9 6 ASV00025_1
Figure 2. Gunner's Sight - Components.
a. Reticle Brightness Adjusting Knob (Figure 2, Item 2). Rotate reticle brightness adjusting knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to control illumination of weapon system aiming reticles for night
operations.
b. Focus Ring (Figure 2, Item 3). Rotate focus ring to adjust night sight image into view.
c. Night Sight Diopter Ring (Figure 2, Item 4). Rotate night sight diopter ring to adjust focus of the image
in the night sight.
d. Night Sight Eyepiece (Figure 2, Item 5). Look through night sight eyepiece to view night operations.
e. Tube Brightness Adjusting Knob (Figure 2, Item 6). Rotate tube brightness adjusting knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease total illumination of thermal image.
f. Unity Window (Figure 2, Item 7). Allows periscope a wide field of view and can use for target
acquisition or backup sighting.
g. Day Sight Eyepiece (Figure 2, Item 8). Look through day sight eyepiece to view day operations.
h. Brow Pad (Figure 2, Item 9). Conforms to gunner's helmet while viewing through day sight eyepiece.
i. Day Sight Diopter Ring (Figure 2, Item 10). Rotate day sight diopter ring to adjust focus of image in
day sight.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0045
GENERAL - Continued
j. Sight Drive Arm (Figure 2, Item 1). Connects from weapon mantlet to sight assembly for elevation
control.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0046
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TURRET PERISCOPES
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
TURRET PERISCOPES
1. Turret is equipped with seven adjustable periscopes (Figure 1, Item 1) and one M36ASV gunner’s sight
(Figure 1, Item 2) to allow a 360-degree field of vision without traversing the turret.
ASV01244_1
Figure 1. Turret Periscopes.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0046
TURRET PERISCOPES - Continued
WARNING
All adjustable mirrors must be moved to the closed position during complete blackout
operations to avoid exposure of interior lights to opposing forces during tactical operations.
2. Loosen two lock knobs (Figure 2, Item 1) and move adjustment lever to pivot periscope mirror (Figure 2,
Item 2) up or down.
2
ASV01463_1
Figure 2. Turret Periscopes.
3. Tighten two lock knobs (Figure 2, Item 1) when periscope mirror (Figure 2, Item 2) is moved to desired
position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Equipment Condition (cont.)

Wrench, Adjustable 8 in. (WP 0175, Table 3, Item Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
53) Turret power off. (WP 0055)
Wrench, Allen 5/8 in. (WP 0175, Table 3, Item 56) Master power off. (WP 0055)
Materials/Parts
Washer, Lock Qty: 2 (WP 0177, Table 1, Item 8)
Personnel Required
Personnel (2)
Equipment Condition
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION
WARNING
• Ensure all doors and hatches are closed and latched before operating turret.
NOTE
The mantlet must be elevated to 15-degrees elevation or more to allow access to mantlet
cover latches. Both latches must be undone to remove mantlet cover.
1. Manually traverse turret (Figure 1, Item 1) until 40-mm mantlet (Figure 1, Item 2) is facing forward over
vehicle hull.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION - Continued
2 3
ASV03102
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun - Installation.
2. Remove front top ball lock pin, rear side adjustable ball lock pin, and ammunition chute cover
(Figure 1, Item 3) from 40-mm mantlet (Figure 1, Item 2).
3. Depress 40-mm mantlet (Figure 1, Item 2) to lowest point of elevation.
4. Unlatch rear mantlet cover latch and remove rear mantlet cover (Figure 2, Item 1).
350 355 0
340 345
335
2 ASV04312_1
Figure 2. 40-MM Machine Gun.
CAUTION
Check that rear pin is completely installed or removed, otherwise do not depress or elevate
weapons. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
5. Remove rear detent pin (Figure 2, Item 2).
6. Elevate 40-mm mantlet (Figure 1, Item 2) to 15-degrees elevation.
CAUTION
The ammunition flex chute weather boot must be completely unzipped before removal.
7. Unfasten two twist fasteners (Figure 3, Item 2) from weather boot (Figure 3, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
2
ASV01260_1
8. Separate hook and loop fastener tape on each side of weather boot (Figure 3, Item 1).
9. Remove weather boot (Figure 3, Item 1) from 40-mm ammunition flex chute (Figure 3, Item 3).
10. Release chute locks (Figure 3, Item 4) and remove 40-mm ammunition flex chute (Figure 3, Item 3).
11. Push ammunition flex chute (Figure 3, Item 3) aside from 40-mm mantlet (Figure 5, Item 3).
12. Remove mantlet cover detent pin (Figure 4, Item 3).
1
2
4 ASV01450_1
13. Unlatch two mantlet cover latches (Figure 4, Item 2) and remove mantlet cover (Figure 4, Item 5) and cover
extension (Figure 4, Item 1).
14. Remove two front detent pins (Figure 4, Item 4).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
15. Elevate weapon to clear two front mounting pins (Figure 5, Item 4).
1
2
4 3
5 ASV04966_1
16. Use Allen wrench (Figure 5, Item 5) to hold two swivel clamps (Figure 5, Item 2) and loosen jam nuts
(Figure 5, Item 1) from front mounting pins (Figure 5, Item 4).
WARNING
The 40-mm machine gun weighs approximately 100 lb (45.3 kg). Ensure you have a firm
grip on the machine gun and balanced footing on the vehicle. Failure to comply may result
in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
Two personnel are required to install the 40-mm machine gun. One person must be inside
the turret and one person must be outside the turret on the vehicle hull.
17. Have soldier No. 2 position 40-mm machine gun into 40-mm mantlet (Figure 5, Item 3).
18. Lift up and adjust 40-mm machine gun (Figure 6, Item 1), as needed, to expose the bottom of weapon.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
ASV02861_1
NOTE
Weapon safety must be in fire position to install firing solenoid. Firing solenoid must be
rotated to allow electrical connector to be attached. When the firing solenoid is installed on
the 40-mm machine gun, the electrical connection must face inside turret.
19. Install firing solenoid (Figure 6, Item 3) to receiver sear assembly (Figure 6, Item 4).
20. Connect harness connector (Figure 6, Item 2) to machine gun firing solenoid (Figure 6, Item 3).
21. Engage charger tang (Figure 7, Item 2) into charger block (Figure 7, Item 1).
ASV00032_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
NOTE
Charger block must fit over charger tang when installed in mantlet.
a. Move charger handle (Figure 8, Item 1) down from its stowed position. Crank charger handle until
charger tang (Figure 7, Item 2) is aligned with charger block (Figure 7, Item 1).
b. Have soldier No. 2 set 40-mm machine gun down in 40-mm mantlet so that charger tang (Figure 7,
Item 2) is engaged in charger block (Figure 7, Item 1).
c. Release charger handle (Figure 8, Item 1) and return it to stowed position.
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01302_1
22. Install rear detent pin (Figure 9, Item 2).
350 355 0
340 345
335
2 ASV04312_2
23. Install rear mantlet cover (Figure 9, Item 1) and latch rear mantlet cover latch.
24. Use Allen wrench (Figure 10, Item 6) to hold two swivel clamps (Figure 10, Item 2) and tighten, as needed,
jam nuts (Figure 10, Item 1) onto front mounting pins (Figure 10, Item 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
1 2
5
6 3
4 ASV04967_1
25. Install two front detent pins (Figure 10, Item 3).
CAUTION
• There must be no more than 1/16 in. (1.587 mm) end play between front mounting
pins and 40-mm machine gun. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
• Do not attempt to adjust swivel clamps unless jam nuts have been loosened.
26. Grasp weapon and check movement of 40-mm machine gun while traversing. If end play is excessive,
adjust as follows:
a. Use Allen wrench (Figure 10, Item 6) to hold swivel clamp (Figure 10, Item 2) and loosen jam nuts
(Figure 10, Item 1) on two front mounting pins (Figure 10, Item 5).
b. Use Allen wrench (Figure 10, Item 6) to loosen two swivel clamps (Figure 10, Item 2) to allow
positioning of weapon.
c. Center 40-mm machine gun in 40-mm mantlet (Figure 10, Item 4).
d. Use Allen wrench (Figure 10, Item 6) to tighten two swivel clamps (Figure 10, Item 2) until they secure
40-mm machine gun in 40-mm mantlet (Figure 10, Item 4).
e. Use Allen wrench (Figure 10, Item 6) to hold two swivel clamps (Figure 10, Item 2) and tighten jam
nuts (Figure 10, Item 1) on both front mounting pins (Figure 10, Item 5).
f. Recheck end play and adjust as necessary.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
27. Lower weapon as required and install cover extension (Figure 11, Item 1) and mantlet cover
(Figure 11, Item 4).
28. Secure cover extension (Figure 11, Item 1) and mantlet cover (Figure 11, Item 4) with two mantlet cover
latches (Figure 11, Item 2).
1 2
ASV04968_1
29. Install mantlet cover detent pin (Figure 11, Item 3).
30. Install ammunition flex chute (Figure 12, Item 4) on 40-mm machine gun in mantlet (Figure 12, Item 2).
3
ASV01260_2

TM 9-2320-381-10 0047
31. Engage chute locks (Figure 12, Item 5) on 40-mm ammunition flex chute (Figure 12, Item 4).
32. Install weather boot (Figure 12, Item 1) over ammunition flex chute (Figure 12, Item 4).
33. Connect hook and loop fastener tape on each side of weather boot (Figure 12, Item 1).
34. Fasten two twist fasteners (Figure 12, Item 3) on weather boot (Figure 12, Item 1).
35. Install ammunition chute cover (Figure 13, Item 3) on mantlet (Figure 13, Item 2) on turret (Figure 13,
Item 1).
4
2 3
5
1
ASV03102_1
a. Install adjustable ball lock pin (Figure 13, Item 5) in rear side of ammunition chute cover (Figure 13,
Item 3).
b. Install ball lock pin (Figure 13, Item 4) in front top of ammunition chute cover (Figure 13, Item 3).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN REMOVAL
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools References

Wrench, Adjustable 8 in. (WP 0175, Table 3, Item WP 0062
53)
Wrench, Allen 5/8 in. (WP 0175, Table 3, Item 56)
Equipment Condition
Materials/Parts Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
Washer, Lock Qty: 2 (WP 0177, Table 1, Item 8) Turret power off. (WP 0055)
Personnel Required
Personnel (2)
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN REMOVAL
WARNING
• Ensure the weapon safety selector is in the safe (S) position before performing
removal or installation procedures. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel.
• Ensure the weapon is cleared of ammunition before performing removal or
installation procedures. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Ensure all personnel are clear of the area before operating the turret. Failure to
• All weapons must be pointed downrange. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
1. Clear ammunition from 40-mm machine gun (Figure 1, Item 1). (WP 0062)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN REMOVAL - Continued
1
2 3
ASV01383_1
WARNING
NOTE
Ensure that bolt is in forward position on 40-mm machine gun.
2. Manually traverse turret (Figure 1, Item 3) until 40-mm machine gun (Figure 1, Item 1) is facing forward over
the vehicle hull.
3. Remove ammunition chute cover (Figure 1, Item 2).
a. Remove detent pin (Figure 1, Item 4) in front top of ammunition chute cover (Figure 1, Item 2).
b. Remove adjustable detent pin (Figure 1, Item 5) in rear side of ammunition chute cover (Figure 1,
Item 2).
CAUTION
The ammunition flex chute weather boot must be completely unzipped before removal.
4. Unfasten two twist fasteners (Figure 2, Item 2) from weather boot (Figure 2, Item 1) on ammunition flex
chute (Figure 2, Item 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
3
2
ASV01405_1
5. Separate hook fastener tape from each side of weather boot (Figure 2, Item 1) surface.
6. Remove weather boot (Figure 2, Item 1) from ammunition flex chute (Figure 2, Item 3).
7. Release chute locks (Figure 3, Item 4) and remove 40-mm ammunition flex chute (Figure 3, Item 3) from
40-mm top cover (Figure 3, Item 1) and feed throat assemblies. Push ammunition flex chute aside.
1 2
ASV00029_1
8. Elevate mantlet (Figure 3, Item 2) to 15-degrees elevation.


TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
1
2
5
2
4 ASV01394_1
10. Unlatch two mantlet cover latches (Figure 4, Item 2) and remove mantlet top cover (Figure 4, Item 5) and
extension cover (Figure 4, Item 1).
11. Remove two front detent pins (Figure 4, Item 4).
12. Use Allen wrench (Figure 5, Item 2) to hold left side swivel clamp (Figure 5, Item 1) and loosen jam nut
(Figure 5, Item 3) on weapon mount pin (Figure 5, Item 4).
2
5 4 3
ASV01397_1
13. Push weapon mount pin (Figure 5, Item 4) back flush with edge of inside mantlet (Figure 5, Item 5) on both
sides.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
14. Unlatch rear mantlet cover latch (Figure 6, Item 1) and remove rear mantlet cover (Figure 6, Item 4). Note
orientation of rear detent pin (Figure 6, Item 3).
1 2
350 355 0
340 345
335
3
3
ASV04313_1
15. Remove rear detent pin (Figure 6, Item 3).

16. Depress mantlet (Figure 6, Item 2) to zero degrees or lower.
17. With the aid of soldier No. 2, lift 40-mm machine gun (Figure 7, Item 1) and remove harness connector
(Figure 7, Item 2) from firing solenoid (Figure 7, Item 3).
ASV01400_1
18. Place weapon on FIRE. Remove firing solenoid (Figure 7, Item 3) from receiver sear assembly (Figure 7,
Item 4).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
WARNING
The 40-mm machine gun weighs approximately 100 lb (45.3 kg). Ensure a firm grip on the
machine gun and balanced footing on the vehicle. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
19. With the aid of soldier No. 2, remove 40-mm machine gun (Figure 8, Item 1) from 40-mm mantlet (Figure 8,
Item 2).
1 2
ASV01402_1
20. Install rear detent pin (Figure 9, Item 3) in 40-mm mantlet (Figure 9, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
1 2
350 355 0
340 345
335
3
3
ASV04313_2
21. Install rear mantlet cover (Figure 9, Item 4) and latch rear mantlet cover latch (Figure 9, Item 1).
22. Install two front detent pins (Figure 10, Item 4).
1
2
5
2
4 ASV01394_2
23. Install extension cover (Figure 10, Item 1) and mantlet top cover (Figure 10, Item 5) and secure with two
mantlet cover latches (Figure 10, Item 2).
25. Install weather boot (Figure 11, Item 1) over ammunition flex chute (Figure 11, Item 4).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
26. Fasten two twist fasteners (Figure 11, Item 3) on weather boot (Figure 11, Item 1). Set ammunition flex
chute (Figure 11, Item 4) in mantlet (Figure 11, Item 2).
27. Connect hook fastener tape on each side of weather boot (Figure 11, Item 1).
2
1
3
ASV01384_1
28. Install ammunition chute cover (Figure 12, Item 1) on ammunition flex chute (Figure 12, Item 4).
ASV01406_1
a. Install adjustable detent pin (Figure 12, Item 3) in rear side of ammunition chute cover (Figure 12,
Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0048
b. Install detent pin (Figure 12, Item 2) in front top of ammunition chute cover (Figure 12, Item 1).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0049
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required Equipment Condition (cont.)

Personnel (2) Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
Turret power off. (WP 0055)
M48 .50-cal. machine gun converted to ASV
References configuration. (TM 9-1005-213-23&P)
TM 9-1005-213-10
WP 0051
WP 0057
WP 0062
Equipment Condition
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION
WARNING
to personnel.
personnel.
death to personnel.
1. Set headspace and timing on M48 .50-cal. machine gun as required. (TM 9-1005-213-10)
2. Manually traverse turret until M48 .50-cal. machine gun cradle is facing over right side of vehicle hull.
(WP 0057)
3. Fully elevate mantlet. (WP 0062)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0049
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN INSTALLATION - Continued
4. Remove front detent pin (Figure 1, Item 1) and rear detent pin (Figure 1, Item 6) from M48 .50-cal. machine
gun cradle (Figure 1, Item 2) mounts.
1
4
3
5
6
ASV01838_1
Figure 1. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun.
CAUTION
The .50-cal. machine gun weighs approximately 100 lb (45.3 kg). Installation should be
handled by two personnel, one inside the turret and one outside on the vehicle. Failure to
5. With the aid of soldier No. 2, hand M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 1, Item 4), barrel end first, to gunner in
turret.
6. Guide M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 1, Item 4) barrel through mantlet opening and position M48 .50-cal.
machine gun into cradle (Figure 1, Item 2).
7. Hold M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 1, Item 4) and depress mantlet with cradle (Figure 1, Item 2) to just
above level position.
8. With the aid of soldier No. 2, align M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 1, Item 4) and install front detent pin
(Figure 1, Item 1) through front mount and M48 .50-cal. machine gun front hole (Figure 1, Item 3).
9. Install rear detent pin (Figure 1, Item 6) through rear mount and M48 .50-cal. machine gun rear hole
(Figure 1, Item 5).
CAUTION
Ensure solenoid wire is routed clear of ammunition feed path. Failure to comply may result
10. Connect power wire harness J13A connector (Figure 2, Item 2) to solenoid (Figure 2, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0049
ASV01839_1
11. Turn turret power on. (WP 0055)

12. Perform function checks.
WARNING
Ensure the M48 .50-cal. machine gun is unloaded and cleared before performing any
weapon timing adjustments. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
Headspace must be adjusted prior to performing timing checks as required.
a. Move M10 lock selector to rearward (Figure 3, Item 2) position. Charge the M48 .50-cal. machine gun,
locking bolt to rear.
M10 LOCK SELECTOR 3
2 4
1 ASV01700_1
CAUTION
Do not allow bolt to slam forward. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
b. Move M10 lock selector to forward (Figure 3, Item 1) position. Pull on charging handle (Figure 3,
Item 4) until click is heard, then ease bolt forward.
c. Move selector (Figure 3, Item 3) to fire (F) position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0049
d. Fully elevate M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 4, Item 1) and raise feed tray cover.
e. Grasp charging handle (Figure 3, Item 4) and retract bolt approximately 1/16 in. and insert NO FIRE
gauge (Figure 4, Item 3) with beveled edge against barrel notches between barrel extension (Figure 4,
Item 2) and trunnion block (Figure 4, Item 4). Release charging handle (Figure 3, Item 4) slowly.
3
1 2 4
ASV01701_1
NOTE
Turn on turret override switch if hatches are open and turn turret override switch off
when procedure is completed.
f. Move M48 .50-cal. machine gun arming switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to .50 CAL ARMED position.
1
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ROUND ARMED
ARMED
FIRING
RELAY
0
ON
345 350 355
335 340
ASV01703_1
INHIBIT
g. Raise trigger switch guard (Figure 6, Item 1) and press trigger switch (Figure 6, Item 2) on elevation

TM 9-2320-381-10 0049
1
350 355 0
340 345
335
3 2
ASV01708_1
NOTE
• The firing solenoid will make a clicking sound which should not be mistaken
for the sound made when the firing pin is released. If there is doubt that the
firing pin was released, retract bolt slightly and look at the bolt face. If the firing
pin is protruding from the front of the bolt face, the weapon has fired.
• If the firing solenoid fails to function properly, notify maintenance for Solenoid
Fails to Function Properly. If the solenoid functions, proceed to Step (h).
• If the weapon did not fire, verify timing is not early by pressing and releasing
the firing switch three more times without removing the NO FIRE gauge. If the
weapon does fire, the timing is early; perform timing adjustment procedures. If
the weapon does not fire, proceed to Step (h).
h. Retract bolt enough to remove NO FIRE gauge (Figure 7, Item 1) and insert FIRE gauge (Figure 7,
Item 2) with beveled edge against barrel notches between barrel extension (Figure 7, Item 4) and
trunnion block (Figure 7, Item 3). Release bolt slowly.
1
2
4 3
ASV01709_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0049
NOTE
If machine gun fires, timing is properly set. If machine gun does not fire, timing is late;
perform timing adjustment procedures.
i. Raise trigger switch guard (Figure 8, Item 1) and press trigger switch (Figure 8, Item 2) on elevation
350 355 0
1
340 345
335
3 2
ASV01708_2
13. Perform minor boresighting. (WP 0051)

14. Turn turret power off. (WP 0055)
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0050
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN REMOVAL
INITIAL SETUP:

Master power off. (WP 0055)
References
WP 0023
WP 0024
WP 0062
Equipment Condition
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN REMOVAL
WARNING
to personnel.
personnel.
death to personnel.
1. Clear ammunition from M48 .50-cal. machine gun. (WP 0062)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0050
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN REMOVAL - Continued
WARNING
Ensure all personnel are clear of turret and basket area before operating turret. Failure to
2. Manually traverse turret until M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 1, Item 1) is approximately at the 2 o’clock
position. (WP 0023)
ASV01722
3. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 2, Item 1) to OFF position.
350 355 0
340 345
335

OFF OFF OFF OFF
1
ASV01723_1
4. Disconnect vehicle power wire harness J13A connector (Figure 3, Item 2) from solenoid (Figure 3, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0050
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN REMOVAL - Continued
ASV01842_1
5. Elevate or depress mantlets to zero degrees on range indicator. (WP 0024)
WARNING
The M48 .50-cal. machine gun weighs approximately 100 lb (45.3 kg). Ensure a firm hold is
kept on the weapon during removal. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
6. Remove front detent pin (Figure 4, Item 1) and rear detent pin (Figure 4, Item 2) from cradle mounts.
1 2
ASV01843_1
7. Elevate mantlet fully.

8. With the aid of soldier No. 2, lift M48 .50-cal. machine gun off cradle and remove from turret.
9. Install front detent pin (Figure 4, Item 1) and rear detent pin (Figure 4, Item 2) into cradle mounts.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MINOR BORESIGHTING
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools References (cont.)

Laser Borelight Kit (Part of Boresight Kit) WP 0021
(WP 0175, Table 3, Item 18) WP 0055
Personnel Required Equipment Condition

Personnel (3) Engine off. (WP 0030)
Weapons cleared. (WP 0062)
References
TM 9-5860-226-13&P
GENERAL
WARNING
• Ensure all weapons are clear of ammunition before boresighting. Failure to comply
• Ensure all personnel are clear of the turret and basket area before operating the
turret. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
• Major boresighting is done by maintenance personnel.
• Minor boresighting can be performed by crew or maintenance personnel.
1. Perform minor boresighting when the following occur:
a. Weapons are installed.
b. Boresighting adjustments on gunner's sight or armament are disturbed.
c. Weapons consistently miss point of aim.
NOTE
• Major boresighting is required if the gunner's sight linkage has been disturbed or a
new gunner's sight has been installed.
• Notify maintenance personnel if major boresighting adjustments are required.
2. Minor boresighting aligns 40-mm and M48 .50-cal. machine guns and day and night sight reticles with their
respective positions on boresight target.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
GENERAL - Continued
NOTE
Boresighting must be performed on both day and night sights.
3. Minor boresighting is performed using the parallel method.
END OF TASK
MINOR BORESIGHTING
WARNING
The boresight kit includes a laser borelight for boresighting alignment. The visible laser
beam can cause eye injury. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. Do not stare into the laser
beam. Do not look into the laser beam through binoculars or telescopes. Do not point the
laser beam at reflective surfaces. Do not shine the laser beam into the eyes of personnel.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
• All personnel must become familiar with boresight kit procedures including all
warnings, cautions, and notes before using the boresight equipment.
(TM 9-5860-226-13&P)
• For an accurate boresight alignment, the vehicle must remain immobile, and
movement by personnel on or inside the vehicle must be restricted.
• The angle of the machine guns must match that of the vehicle or the soldier.
1. Position vehicle on level terrain before beginning procedures.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
MINOR BORESIGHTING - Continued
2. Raise sight window cover (Figure 1, Item 1).
ASV04958
Figure 1. Gunner's Sight - Minor Boresighting.
3. Erect boresight target (Figure 2, Item 3) 33 ft (10 m) from turret (Figure 2, Item 5). Ensure that 40-mm
aiming point (Figure 2, Item 4) on target is at same height as 40-mm barrel (Figure 2, Item 2) with mantlet
(Figure 2, Item 1) at zero degrees elevation.
33 FEET
1 2 (10 METERS)
4
ASV04959_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
4. Position angle meter gauge (Figure 3, Item 1) on the flat surface of ASV hull (Figure 3, Item 2) behind
driver’s hatch and record angle of vehicle front to back and side to side.
ASV04960_1
NOTE
Soldier No. 2 must be positioned on the turret between weapons to operate the borelight
and zero the borelight to the 40-mm machine gun and M48 .50-cal. machine gun. Soldier
No. 2 will have to move slightly to be out of the way during minor boresighting.
5. Adjust 40-mm machine gun mantlet (Figure 4, Item 2) to same angle of vehicle as recorded earlier, using
angle meter gauge (Figure 4, Item 1). Angle meter gauge is positioned on 40-mm machine gun barrel
(Figure 4, Item 3). Mantlet should remain at this elevation until all alignments have been made.
3
2 ASV04961_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
NOTE
Sight alignment will not be accurate if the reticle control adapter lever is not fully seated
against the eccentric screw on the sight drive arm.
6. Move reticle control adapter lever (Figure 5, Item 2) down against eccentric screw (Figure 5, Item 3) on sight
drive arm (Figure 5, Item 1).
ASV04713_1
7. With the aid of Soldier No. 3, adjust boresight target (Figure 6, Item 3) 33 ft (10 m) from turret. Ensure that
boresight target is level from left to right using angle meter gauge (Figure 6, Item 4). Adjust boresight target
height so 40-mm aiming point (Figure 6, Item 5) on target is at approximately same height as 40-mm barrel
(Figure 6, Item 2) with mantlet (Figure 6, Item 1) at zero degrees elevation.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
33 FEET
1 2 (10 METERS)
5
ASV04962_1
8. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, install AA battery in borelight (Figure 7, Item 4).
2
4 3 ASV04714_1
9. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, assemble borelight (Figure 7, Item 4) to 5.56-mm (0.22 in.) mandrel (Figure 7,
Item 1).
a. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, insert borelight (Figure 7, Item 4) and mandrel (Figure 7, Item 1) into
40-mm mandrel adapter (Figure 7, Item 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
WARNING
The boresight kit includes a laser borelight for boresighting alignment. The visible laser
beam can cause eye injury. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. Do not stare into the
laser beam. Do not look into the laser beam through binoculars or telescopes. Do not
point the laser beam at reflective surfaces. Do not shine the laser beam into the eyes
of personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
b. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, install borelight (Figure 7, Item 4), mandrel (Figure 7, Item 1), and 40-mm
mandrel adapter (Figure 7, Item 3) assembly into 40-mm machine gun barrel (Figure 7, Item 2). Turn
borelight on using low switch position.
10. With the aid of Soldier No. 3, move boresight target (Figure 8, Item 3) up or down until visible borelight
(Figure 8, Item 6) laser beam (Figure 8, Item 4) is pointed directly at 40-mm machine gun aiming point
(Figure 8, Item 2) on boresight target. Leave mantlet (Figure 8, Item 5) at zero degrees elevation. Turret
must remain in this position for remainder of boresighting procedure.
2
1
3
6
5
4
ASV04963_1
CAUTION
Do not change weapon elevation when positioning boresight target for boresighting
procedures. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
11. With the aid of Soldier No. 3, mark present position (Figure 8, Item 7) of laser point on 40-mm machine gun
aiming point (Figure 8, Item 2) of boresight target (Figure 8, Item 3).
12. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, slowly rotate borelight (Figure 8, Item 6) 180 degrees clockwise (looking from
the target towards the borelight).
13. With the aid of Soldier No. 3, mark second position (Figure 8, Item 1) of laser point on 40-mm machine gun
aiming point (Figure 8, Item 2) of boresight target (Figure 8, Item 3).
14. Use borelight (Figure 8, Item 6) adjusters to move laser point to middle of original and second positions. If
laser point is still on 40-mm machine gun aiming point (Figure 8, Item 2), borelight zeroing is complete.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
15. If laser point is not on 40-mm machine gun aiming point (Figure 8, Item 2), repeat Steps 11 through 14 until
laser point remains stationary or laser beam makes a circle less than 0.75 in. (19.05 mm).
16. Perform minor boresighting using day sight (Figure 9, Item 1).
a. Look through day sight (Figure 9, Item 1) with 40-mm machine gun aligned on boresight target
40-mm day sight aiming point (Figure 9, Item 2).
3
4
5
6
5 (4) 3 2
5.60 IN.
10.76 IN. (0.142 m)
(0.273 m)
2.25 IN.
(0.057 m) 3.375 IN.
(0.086 m)
2
12.25 IN.
(0.31 m)
12.25 IN.
CL (0.31 m)
40mm
24.13 IN.
12.875 IN. 11.25 IN.
(0.327 m) (0.613 m) (0.286 m) ASV04715_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
NOTE
Major boresighting is required if target cannot be aligned with sight adjustment knobs.
Notify maintenance personnel.
b. Align day reticle (Figure 10, Item 2) with day sight aiming point (Figure 10, Item 1) on boresight target.
1 2
CAL .50 40MM
40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40
4 6 10 14 16 1819 20
8
10 1
12
14
2
16
18
3
20
5.60 IN.
10.76 IN. (0.142 m)
(0.273 m)
2.25 IN.
(0.057 m) 3.375 IN.
(0.086 m)
1
12.25 IN.
(0.31 m)
12.25 IN.
CL (0.31 m)
40mm
24.13 IN.
12.875 IN. 11.25 IN.
ASV04717_1
(0.327 m) (0.613 m) (0.286 m)
NOTE
Azimuth and elevation adjustment knobs on both day and night sights are spring
loaded and held in position by serrations on knobs and sight assembly. Ensure
that knobs are securely seated before completing boresighting procedures.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
(1) If daysight reticle does not align with day sight butterfly on boresight target in azimuth, pull out
and rotate azimuth adjustment knob (Figure 11, Item 2) on day sight (Figure 11, Item 1) until
proper alignment is achieved.
2
3
4
5
6
5 (4) 3 2
ASV04719_1
3
(2) If daysight reticle does not align with day sight butterfly on boresight target in elevation, pull out
and rotate elevation adjustment knob (Figure 11, Item 3) on day sight (Figure 11, Item 1) until
17. Perform minor boresighting using night sight (Figure 12, Item 3).
CAUTION
Boresight filter must be properly installed before night sight switch is moved to ON
position. If night sight is boresighted during daylight hours without filter, image
intensifier tube will be severely damaged. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
a. Install night filter (Figure 12, Item 3) to sight window (Figure 12, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
2
ASV04720_1
CAUTION
• Boresight filter must be used when boresighting night sight during daylight
or artificial lighting conditions. Boresight filter must be properly installed
before night sight shutter switch is moved to ON position. Failure to follow
this caution will result in damage to image intensifier tube in night sight.
• If boresight filter is not available, boresighting should take place just after
sunset or just before sunrise. Twilight conditions will allow night sight to
be used while boresight target is still visible. Failure to comply may result
• Check that night shutter switch is moved to OFF position during daylight
operation or the image intensifier tube will be damaged. Failure to comply
(1) Rotate handle (Figure 12, Item 2) on night filter (Figure 12, Item 3) clockwise to darkest setting.
(2) Move TURRET POWER switch on gunner's control panel to ON position. (WP 0055)
(3) Move SIGHT POWER switch on gunner's control panel to ON position. (WP 0021)
(4) Move night sight switch (Figure 13, Item 1) to ON position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
OFF
ASV04721_1
(5) Rotate handle (Figure 12, Item 2) on night filter (Figure 12, Item 3) counterclockwise, one click at
a time, until target becomes visible.
NOTE
• Larger pinhole on boresight filter should be used only if necessary to see
boresight target.
• Diopter ring can be turned for a clear focus of target, if necessary.
• To aid in focusing on target, turn tube brightness and reticle brightness
adjustment knobs as required. Under most conditions, the low setting will
result in clearest image.
b. Look through night sight eyepiece (Figure 14, Item 1) with 40-mm machine gun aligned on boresight
target 40-mm aiming point (Figure 14, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
1
10.76 IN. 5.60 IN.
(0.273 m) (0.142 m)
2.25 IN. 3.375 IN.
(0.057 m) (0.086 m)
12.25 IN.
(0.31 m)
12.25 IN.
CL (0.31 m)
2
40mm
24.13 IN.
12.875 IN. 11.25 IN.
(0.327) (0.613 m) (0.286 m) ASV04722_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
NOTE
Major boresighting is required if target cannot be aligned with sight adjustment knobs.
Notify maintenance personnel.
c. Align night reticle (Figure 15, Item 2) with night sight aiming point (Figure 15, Item 1) on boresight
target.
1
4
1
8
10
2
12
14
16
18
10.76 IN. 5.60 IN.

(0.273 m) (0.142 m)
2.25 IN.
(0.057 m) 3.375 IN.
(0.086 m)
1
12.25 IN.
(0.31 m)
12.25 IN.
CL (0.31 m)
40mm
24.13 IN.
12.875 IN. 11.25 IN.
(0.327 m) (0.613 m) (0.286 m) ASV04724_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
NOTE
Azimuth and elevation adjustment knobs on both day and night sights are spring
loaded and held in position by serrations on knobs and sight assembly. Ensure
knobs are securely seated before completing boresighting procedures.
(1) If night sight reticle does not align with night sight butterfly on boresight target in elevation, pull
out and rotate elevation adjustment knob (Figure 16, Item 2) on night sight (Figure 16, Item 3)
until proper alignment is achieved.
ASV04726_1
(2) If night sight reticle does not align with night sight butterfly on boresight target in azimuth, pull out
and rotate azimuth adjustment knob (Figure 16, Item 1) on night sight (Figure 16, Item 3) until
CAUTION
Do not leave reticle light in on position when not being used. Excessive exposure to
reticle light will damage image intensifier tube. Failure to comply may result in damage
to equipment.
d. Move night sight switch (Figure 17, Item 1) to OFF position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
OFF
ASV04727_1
e. Rotate handle (Figure 18, Item 2) on night filter (Figure 18, Item 3) clockwise to darkest setting.
ASV04728_1
2
f. Remove boresight filter (Figure 18, Item 3) from sight window (Figure 18, Item 1).
18. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, turn borelight (Figure 19, Item 4) to OFF position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
2
4 3 ASV04714_1
19. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, remove borelight (Figure 19, Item 4), 5.56-mm (0.22 in.) mandrel (Figure 19,
Item 1), and 40-mm mandrel adapter (Figure 19, Item 3) assembly from 40-mm machine gun barrel
20. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, remove borelight (Figure 19, Item 4) and 5.56-mm (0.22 in.) mandrel
(Figure 19, Item 1) from 40-mm mandrel adapter (Figure 19, Item 3).
21. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, remove borelight (Figure 19, Item 4) from 5.56-mm (0.22 in.) mandrel
22. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, ensure that AA battery is installed in borelight (Figure 20, Item 1).
3
2
1
ASV04729_1
23. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, insert borelight (Figure 20, Item 1) into .50-cal. mandrel (Figure 20, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
WARNING
Ensure the machine guns are cleared and ammunition unloaded before performing the
boresighting procedure. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
24. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, insert borelight (Figure 20, Item 1) and .50-cal. mandrel (Figure 20, Item 2) into
M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 20, Item 3). Turn borelight on using low switch position.
25. With the aid of Soldier No. 3, mark present position (Figure 21, Item 5) of laser point on .50-cal. machine
gun aiming point (Figure 21, Item 3) of boresight target (Figure 21, Item 2).
2
1
ASV04965_1
CAUTION
Do not change weapon elevation when positioning boresight target for boresighting
procedures. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
26. With the aid of Soldier No. 2, slowly rotate borelight (Figure 21, Item 4) 180 degrees clockwise (looking from
the target towards the borelight).
27. With the aid of Soldier No. 3, mark second position (Figure 21, Item 1) of laser point on .50-cal. machine
gun aiming point (Figure 21, Item 3) of boresight target (Figure 21, Item 2).
28. Using borelight (Figure 21, Item 4) adjusters, move laser point to middle of original and second positions. If
laser point is still on .50-cal. machine gun aiming point (Figure 21, Item 3) of boresight target (Figure 21,
Item 2), borelight zeroing is complete.
29. If laser point is not on .50-cal. machine gun aiming point (Figure 21, Item 3), repeat Steps 22 through 28
until laser point remains stationary, or laser beam makes a circle less than 0.75 in. (19.05 mm).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
30. Loosen azimuth locking screw (Figure 22, Item 3) and rotate azimuth adjustment screw (Figure 22, Item 2)
until visible laser beam is aligned with .50-cal. machine gun aiming point (Figure 21, Item 3) on boresight
target (Figure 21, Item 2). Tighten azimuth locking screw when aligned.
1
2
4 3
ASV04731_1
31. Loosen elevation locking screw (Figure 22, Item 1) and rotate elevation adjustment screw (Figure 22,
Item 4) until visible laser beam aligns with .50-cal. aiming point (Figure 21, Item 3) on boresight target
(Figure 21, Item 2). Tighten elevation locking screw when aligned.
32. Ensure azimuth locking screw (Figure 22, Item 3) and elevation locking screw (Figure 22, Item 1) are
tightened securely.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
33. Verify boresight retention by manually rotating turret and elevating mantlet. Look through day sight and
move back onto day sight aiming point (Figure 23, Item 1) on boresight target (Figure 23, Item 3). Ensure
that 40-mm (Figure 23, Item 5), .50-cal. (Figure 23, Item 4), and night sight (Figure 23, Item 2) are still
aimed at their aiming points.
10.76 IN. 5.60 IN.

(0.273 m) (0.142 m)
2.25 IN. 3.375 IN.
(0.057 m) (0.086 m)
3
1 2
12.25 IN.
(0.31 m)
12.25 IN.
CL (0.31 m)
5 4
40mm
24.13 IN.
12.875 IN. 11.25 IN.
(0.327) (0.613 m) (0.286 m)
ASV04732_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0051
34. Turn borelight (Figure 24, Item 1) to OFF position.

35. Remove borelight (Figure 24, Item 1) and mandrel (Figure 24, Item 2) from barrel (Figure 24, Item 3).
3
2
1
ASV04729_1
36. Turn sight power off. (WP 0021)

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0052
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. AMMUNITION LOADING
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
Weapons on SAFE. (WP 0062)
M48 .50-CAL. AMMUNITION LOADING
WARNING
• Turret power must be off when loading or unloading ammunition. Failure to comply
• The machine gun may still be fired manually with machine gun arming switch and
turret power switch turned off. Ensure machine gun is safe. Failure to comply may
• Ensure weapons are pointed down range (safe direction) prior to loading
ammunition. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
Ensure all packing material has been removed from ammunition boxes or jamming may
occur. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
The maximum amount of M48 .50-cal. ammunition that can be stored in M48 .50-cal. ready
position is 200 rounds (100 rounds per box).
1. Open first ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 5) of M48 .50-cal. ammunition for placement in rear M48 .50-cal.
ammunition tray (Figure 1, Item 6). Ensure that double loop end link (Figure 1, Item 3) is at top front of rear
ammunition box. If not, remove ammunition from box and reposition so that double loop end is at top front of
box.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0052
M48 .50-CAL. AMMUNITION LOADING - Continued
1 2 3
4
5
9
8
7
ASV01327_1
Figure 1. M48 .50-Cal. Ammunition - Loading.
2. Position box (Figure 1, Item 5) in rear M48 .50-cal. ammunition tray (Figure 1, Item 6) with projectiles facing
outward. Ensure that double loop end link (Figure 1, Item 3) is positioned on guide roller (Figure 1, Item 4).
3. Open second ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 1) of M48 .50-cal. ammunition for placement in front
M48 .50-cal. ammunition tray (Figure 1, Item 9). Reposition ammunition leaving eight rounds with single
loop end link (Figure 1, Item 2) hanging from rear of front ammunition box. Layer remaining ammunition with
double loop end link (Figure 1, Item 3) at top front of front ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 5).
4. Position front ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 1) in front M48 .50-cal. ammunition tray (Figure 1, Item 9) with
projectiles facing outward. Ensure that single loop end link (Figure 1, Item 2) is positioned on guide roller
(Figure 1, Item 4).
NOTE
Round must be seated into double loop end link to ensure that M48 .50-cal. ammunition
consumed by firing can be replenished.
5. Secure front ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 1) and rear ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 5) in M48 .50-cal.
ammunition trays (Figure 1, Items 6 and 9) with retainer brackets (Figure 1, Item 7).
6. Remove one round (Figure 1, Item 8) of ammunition from double loop end link (Figure 1, Item 3) of rear
ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 5). Using removed round, connect double loop end link of rear ammunition
box and single loop end link (Figure 1, Item 2) of front ammunition box (Figure 1, Item 1) together.
7. Elevate M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 2, Item 2) using elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 3) and
open receiver cover (Figure 2, Item 1) to allow M48 .50-cal. ammunition to feed correctly.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0052
1
2
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01517_1
3
8. Feed ammunition from front ammunition box (Figure 3, Item 2) around guide roller (Figure 3, Item 1) through
bell mouth chute, and into M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 2, Item 2).
1 2
ASV01336_1
9. Place first round of ammunition into M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 2, Item 2) past belt holding pawls and
close receiver cover (Figure 2, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0052
10. Pull M10 charging handle (Figure 4, Item 2) of M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 4, Item 1).
2 ASV04949_1
11. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 5, Item 2) on turret control panel (Figure 5, Item 1) to ON position.

2
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV04946_1
Figure 5. Turret Control Panel.
12. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 6, Item 2) on gunner's control panel (Figure 6, Item 1) to .50 CAL
ARMED position. Keep weapon pointed down range (safe direction).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0052
1 2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV04947_1
13. Press pushbutton trigger switch (Figure 7, Item 1) on elevation control handle (Figure 7, Item 2).
2
ASV04948_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0052
14. Pull M10 charging handle (Figure 8, Item 2) of M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 8, Item 1). Weapon is now
ready to fire.
2 ASV04949_1
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION LOADING
INITIAL SETUP:

References
TM 9-1010-230-10
WP 0023
WP 0058
Equipment Condition
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION LOADING
WARNING
• Ensure all personnel are clear of turret and basket area before operating turret.
• Turret power must be off when loading or unloading ammunition. Failure to comply
NOTE
• Maximum amount of 40-mm ammunition that can be stored in 40-mm ammunition
box is 96 rounds.
• If 40-mm ammunition is depleted during firing, loading is performed by two
personnel, one inside turret and one outside on vehicle.
1. Manually traverse turret until weapons face forward over vehicle hull. (WP 0023)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION LOADING - Continued
1 2
ASV01561_1
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun Ammunition - Loading.
a. Remove adjustable detent pin (Figure 1, Item 4) from rear side of ammunition chute cover (Figure 1,
Item 1) and turret (Figure 1, Item 2).
b. Remove detent pin (Figure 1, Item 3) from front top of ammunition chute cover (Figure 1, Item 1) and
turret (Figure 1, Item 2).
3. Unfasten two twist fasteners (Figure 2, Item 2) on 40-mm weather boot (Figure 2, Item 1).
3 2
ASV01562_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
4. Separate hook fastener tape from each side of 40-mm weather boot (Figure 2, Item 1) surface.
5. Remove 40-mm weather boot (Figure 2, Item 1) from ammunition flex chute (Figure 2, Item 3).
6. Remove ammunition flex chute (Figure 3, Item 1) from 40-mm machine gun (Figure 3, Item 2) and
ammunition chute (Figure 3, Item 3).
1
2
ASV01563_1
7. Unlatch two detent pins (Figure 4, Items 1 and 2) from top door (Figure 4, Item 4) and bottom door
(Figure 4, Item 5) of ammunition box (Figure 4, Item 3).
1 2 3
4
ASV01567_1
8. Open ammunition box top (Figure 4, Item 4) and bottom (Figure 4, Item 5) doors.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
9. Feed 40-mm ammunition male end (Figure 5, Item 1) through ammunition chute (Figure 5, Item 2) and into
ammunition box (Figure 4, Item 3) with projectiles (Figure 6, Item 2) facing outward.
1
2
ASV01568_1
10. Raise ammunition flaps (Figure 6, Item 3) as ammunition box (Figure 6, Item 1) compartments are filled,
filling rear compartment with five rounds. Continue loading from rear to front in same manner. Each
compartment will hold 9 or 10 rounds.
ASV01569_1
3

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
11. Slide ammunition flex chute (Figure 7, Item 1) over ammunition remaining outside and connect ammunition
flex chute to ammunition chute (Figure 7, Item 3).
ASV01583_1
12. Connect opposite end of ammunition flex chute (Figure 7, Item 1) to 40-mm machine gun (Figure 7, Item 2).
NOTE
Ammunition flaps release when ammunition box front and rear doors are closed. Take care
when closing ammunition box doors.
13. Close ammunition box top door (Figure 8, Item 4) and bottom door (Figure 8, Item 5).
1 2 3 4
ASV01584_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
14. Install two detent pins (Figure 8, Items 1 and 2) in top door (Figure 8, Item 4) and bottom door (Figure 8,
Item 5) of ammunition box (Figure 8, Item 3).
1 2
3
4
2
ASV01585_1
extension cover (Figure 9, Item 1). (TM 9-1010-230-10)
17. Open receiver cover (Figure 10, Item 2) on weapon.
2
1 3
ASV01586_1
18. Position first link ammunition (Figure 10, Item 1) up between the primary and secondary pawl (Figure 10,
Item 3) position of receiver.
19. Ensure the secondary drive lever (Figure 11, Item 1) is engaged with the feed slide pin.
20. Ensure the feed slide assembly (Figure 11, Item 2) is all the way to the left and the spring is touching the top
cover.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
21. Bolt (Figure 11, Item 3) should be in the forward position.
MCUP0379
Figure 11. Secondary Drive Lever and Feed Slide Assembly.
WARNING
Before closing the machine gun receiver cover, ensure the secondary drive lever is
engaged with the feed slide pin, the feed slide assembly is all the way left, and the bolt is
forward with the spring touching the top cover. Failure to comply may result in damage to
the gun, injury or death to personnel.
22. Close receiver cover (Figure 10, Item 2) on weapon.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
23. Install extension cover (Figure 12, Item 1) and mantlet top cover (Figure 12, Item 4) and secure with two
mantlet cover latches (Figure 12, Item 2).
1 2
3
4
2
ASV01585_2
25. Position 40-mm weather boot (Figure 13, Item 1) around ammunition flex chute (Figure 13, Item 3).
26. Attach hook fastener tape from each side of 40-mm weather boot (Figure 13, Item 1) surface.
3 2
ASV01562_2
27. Fasten two twist fasteners (Figure 13, Item 2) on 40-mm weather boot (Figure 13, Item 1).
28. Move weapon safety to fire position. (WP 0058)
29. Move turret MASTER POWER switch to ON position. (WP 0055)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
30. Turn TURRET POWER switch to ON position. (WP 0055)
WARNING
Before charging the 40-mm machine gun, ensure the weapon is pointed downrange and all
non-essential personnel are out of the line of fire. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
31. Charge first round into firing chamber by rotating 40-mm charging handle (Figure 14, Item 1) clockwise.
1 ASV01587_1
32. Rotate charging handle (Figure 14, Item 1) counterclockwise until charger returns to start position after
charging weapon, all slack in chain is in front of handle, and bolt locks to the rear.
NOTE
40-mm machine gun must be charged two times before firing. Weapon will not fire if
charged only one time.
33. Press firing switch one time to allow the bolt to go forward and grab the first round of ammunition.
(WP 0058)
34. Charge weapon, rotate charging handle (Figure 14, Item 1) counterclockwise a second time until charger
returns to start position and all slack in chain is in front of handle, and bolt locks to the rear.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0053
35. Fold charging handle (Figure 14, Item 1) up to stored position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0054
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - REPLENISHING 40-MM AMMUNITION TO LAST LINK
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
Weapons on SAFE. (WP 0062)
Turret power on. (WP 0055)
REPLENISHING 40-MM AMMUNITION TO LAST LINK
WARNING
The 40-mm machine gun may still be fired manually with machine gun arming switch and
turret power switch turned off. Ensure machine gun is on safe. Failure to comply may result
NOTE
The 40-mm ammunition feed system uses a last round interrupt switch in the ammunition
box which automatically stops the 40-mm machine gun from firing when the last round
passes the switch. This allows the ammunition to be replenished inside the turret. The
switch can be overridden by the LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch on the gunner's control
panel.
1. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 1, Item 2) to OFF position. Red indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 1)
will not be illuminated.
1 2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01598_1
Figure 1. Gunner’s Control Panel.
2. Move TURRET POWER switch to OFF position on turret control panel. (WP 0055)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0054
REPLENISHING 40-MM AMMUNITION TO LAST LINK - Continued
3. Unlatch two retaining pins (Figure 2, Item 1) from upper door (Figure 2, Item 3) and lower door (Figure 2,
Item 8) of ammunition box (Figure 2, Item 2).
2
1
7
ASV04315_1
Figure 2. 40-MM Ammunition - Replenishing to Last Link.
4. Secure upper door (Figure 2, Item 3) with two retaining pins (Figure 2, Item 1).
5. Load five rounds of ammunition (Figure 2, Item 6) into ammunition box (Figure 2, Item 2) with male link
(Figure 2, Item 5) to rear of ammunition box and raise ammunition flap (Figure 2, Item 7).
6. Load each compartment in ammunition box (Figure 2, Item 2) with 9 to 10 rounds (Figure 2, Item 6) while
lifting ammunition flaps (Figure 2, Item 7) one compartment at a time as compartments are filled.
7. Connect female link (Figure 2, Item 4) of first ammunition round (Figure 2, Item 6) to male link (Figure 2,
Item 5) of remaining ammunition from 40-mm machine gun flex chute.
8. Lower upper door (Figure 2, Item 3) and raise lower door (Figure 2, Item 8) of ammunition box (Figure 2,
Item 2) and secure with two retaining pins (Figure 2, Item 1).
9. Move TURRET POWER switch to ON position on turret control panel. (WP 0055)
10. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 3, Item 2) to 40 MM ARMED position. Red indicator lamp
(Figure 3, Item 1) will illuminate.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0054
REPLENISHING 40-MM AMMUNITION TO LAST LINK - Continued
1 2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01599_1
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0055
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TURN TURRET POWER ON/OFF
INITIAL SETUP:
References Equipment Condition

WP 0005 Engine off. (WP 0030)
WP 0006 Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
TURN TURRET POWER ON
1. Ensure TRANSMISSION switch (Figure 1, Item 4) on DCU (Figure 1, Item 2) is in ON position.

2. Move MASTER POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 1) on driver's control unit (Figure 1, Item 2) to ON position.
3. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 3) on driver's control unit (Figure 1, Item 2) to ON position.
1 2 3
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
GRID
4 5 6
7
WP
CLR
MARK
8
POS
0
OFF
9
NAV
NUM
LOCK
IGNITION MASTER TURRET ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
ON DE-ICE HEAT/AC G
WASH
P
YEL YEL RED
P
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
IGNITION GRID MASTER TURRET ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1
WASH START DE-ICE HEAT/
ON AC
CB1 CB7
ENGINE STOP
WIPE RUN
OFF ON
NBC FAN/
OFF ON
DOME LIGHTS
TL2
OFF ON TL3
FRONT
HEATER
OFF OFF OFF
ON ON CB2
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS
NBC HEAT 1/2
CONTROL
OFF OFF
OFF ON
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID
HEAT FUEL PUMP CB9
SPARE
TL3

CB3

4WD 125
80
175
225 25
3.5
50
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
ENGINE BOTTLE
OFF ON GLOBAL
POSITION
OFF ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS.
TL4 GRID HEAT
WARN LIGHTS
FUEL PUMP
ON OFF 40 120
YEL BLU GRN SYSTEM

EMR CB4 CB10
CB3 CB9
C/F
TEST FAULT SILENCE
ENGINE BOTTLE
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TIRE TRANSMISSION
30 40
TEMP VOLTS
60
SAN
PANEL
BRT
CB11
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
50 70
MARKER
BILGE
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
ENGAGE OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF
C C BIT
ON
90
ON
30 50
TL4
20 50 20
km/h SPOOL PARK INTERVEHICULAR
RADIO
SER
60
TACH
20
10
10 MPH
70
100
110
OFF OFF OFF OFF FIRE INHIB.
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
AUX PWR RCPT
WASH/WIPER MOT
B.O.
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
RED
000 0000000
WAY
INHIBIT LIGHTS
FREE
SPOOL
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV02869_1
Figure 1. 200 Amp DCU.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0055
TURN TURRET POWER ON - Continued
SIGHT
1 TURRET
POWER
SPOT
LIGHT
EXHAUST
BLOWER POWER
350 355 0
340 345
335
2
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV02875_1
END OF TASK
TURN TURRET POWER OFF
1. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 3, Item 2) on turret control panel (Figure 3, Item 1) to OFF position.

335 340 345 350 355 0 1
OFF OFF OFF OFF

2
ASV02877_1
2. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 4, Item 3) on driver's control unit (Figure 4, Item 2) to OFF position.
3. Move MASTER POWER switch (Figure 4, Item 1) on driver's control unit (Figure 4, Item 2) to OFF position.
4. Move TRANSMISSION switch (Figure 4, Item 4) on DCU (Figure 4, Item 2) to OFF position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0055
TURN TURRET POWER OFF - Continued
1 2 3
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
GRID
4 5 6
7
WP
CLR
MARK
8
POS
0
OFF
9
NAV
NUM
LOCK
IGNITION MASTER TURRET ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
ON DE-ICE HEAT/AC G
WASH
P
YEL YEL RED
P
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
ON AC
CB1 CB7
ENGINE STOP
WIPE RUN
OFF ON
NBC FAN/
OFF ON
DOME LIGHTS
TL2
OFF ON TL3
FRONT
HEATER
OFF OFF OFF
ON ON CB2
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS
NBC HEAT 1/2
CONTROL
OFF OFF
OFF ON
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID
HEAT FUEL PUMP CB9
SPARE
TL3

CB3

4WD 125
80
175
225 25
3.5
50
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
ENGINE BOTTLE
OFF ON GLOBAL
POSITION
OFF ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS.
TL4 GRID HEAT
WARN LIGHTS
FUEL PUMP
ON OFF 40 120
YEL BLU GRN SYSTEM

EMR CB4 CB10
CB3 CB9
C/F
TEST FAULT SILENCE
ENGINE BOTTLE
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TIRE TRANSMISSION
30 40
TEMP VOLTS
60
SAN
PANEL
BRT
CB11
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
50 70
MARKER
BILGE
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
ENGAGE OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF
BIT
ON
90
C C
ON
30 50
TL4
20 50 20
RADIO
SER
60
TACH
20
10
10 MPH
70
100
110
OFF OFF OFF OFF FIRE INHIB.
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
AUX PWR RCPT
WASH/WIPER MOT
B.O.
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
RED
000 0000000
WAY
INHIBIT LIGHTS
FREE
SPOOL
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV02876_1
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0056
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GUNNER’S PROCEDURE
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0023
WP 0027
WP 0044
GUNNER’S PROCEDURE
WARNING
Gunners should be trained in weapon firing procedures prior to live fire use of machine
guns. Weapon selector arming switch and machine gun firing switches must be in OFF
position until target area is within range. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
CAUTION
Check that night shutter switch is off during daylight operation or the image intensifier tube
will be damaged. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. Secure gunner’s hatch in closed position. (WP 0044)
2. Position gunner’s seat for comfortable use of sight and controls and fasten seat belt. (WP 0027)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0056
GUNNER’S PROCEDURE - Continued

3
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV04204_1
WARNING
The exhaust blower must be operating during firing of weapons to remove toxic gas
caused by smoke and fumes. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
4. Move EXHAUST BLOWER switch (Figure 1, Item 2) on turret control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) to ON
position.
WARNING
Accidental firing of weapons may kill or injure personnel. Keep weapons aimed on the
target. Keep all friendly personnel clear of the line of fire. Failure to comply may result in
5. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 2, Item 3) on gunner's control panel (Figure 2, Item 1) to select
desired weapon. The 40 MM ARMED indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 2) will illuminate when armed, or
.50 CAL ARMED indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 4) will illuminate when armed.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0056
1 2 3
4
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01459_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0056
WARNING
• Keep limbs inside turret basket area when traversing turret. Failure to comply may
• Ensure driver’s and commander’s hatches are closed and all personnel are clear
of area before operating turret. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
6. Move TRAVERSE POWER switch (Figure 3, Item 1) on traverse control panel (Figure 3, Item 3) to ON
position. Indicator ON lamp (Figure 3, Item 2) will illuminate.
1 2
TRAVERSE
ON
POWER
4 O5550013
Figure 3. Traverse Control Panel.
7. Move and hold traverse control joystick (Figure 3, Item 4) left to traverse left and right to traverse right and
acquire target. (WP 0023)
WARNING
Turret must be fully stopped before engaging manual traverse. Failure to comply may
CAUTION
Once power traverse joystick is released, wait until turret is at a complete stop before
engaging manual traverse or damage to gears may result. Failure to comply may result in
8. To manually traverse turret, grasp manual traverse handle (Figure 4, Item 2) and squeeze engage lever
(Figure 4, Item 1) and manually traverse turret left and right. (WP 0023)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0056
ASV04777_1
Figure 4. Traverse Control Mechanism.
9. Elevate or depress selected and armed weapon using elevation control handle (Figure 5, Item 4) on
elevation control unit (Figure 5, Item 2) to acquire target.
ASV01462_1
Figure 5. Elevation Control Handle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0056
10. Grasp elevation control handle (Figure 5, Item 4) and crank clockwise to elevate weapon or
counterclockwise to depress weapon.
WARNING
• Firing machine guns with turret override activated will allow fired rounds to strike
ASV rear deck when weapons are armed at zero degrees depression. Turret
override will also override safety inhibits, allowing weapons to be fired with vehicle
doors and hatches open. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Avoid manually firing mounted machine gun when gun is depressed lower than
zero degrees and positioned over vehicle hull or when personnel hatch or door is
open. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Power to weapon’s firing relay is interrupted if ASV driver’s, commander’s, or side
troop doors are not closed and latched. Close and latch all hatches and doors
before attempting to fire weapons. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Machine guns will get hot during firing. Use caution when handling machine guns.
Refer to weapons manual. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Ear protection should be worn when firing weapons. Failure to comply may result
in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
• When machine guns are aimed below zero degree elevation and turret is
traversing, there is a section of the vehicle where angle of fired rounds can strike
hull. This area is called the Fire Inhibit Zone. Power to firing relay is interrupted
when turret is traversing in this area. Do not attempt to fire in this area. Failure to
• Periodically check that weapon detent pins are fully inserted in cradle mounts to
ensure weapon does not vibrate loose during firing. Failure to comply may result in
NOTE
Turret override switch is located on driver’s control unit.
11. Move trigger switch guard (Figure 5, Item 1) up to access pushbutton trigger switch (Figure 5, Item 3) on
elevation control handle (Figure 5, Item 4). Press pushbutton trigger switch to electrically fire selected and
armed weapon.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0057
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MANUAL TURRET OPERATIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
MANUAL TURRET OPERATIONS
WARNING
Electrical safety features will not operate if turret power is not available. Ensure driver's
and commander's hatches are closed and that all personnel are clear of weapons while
operating turret. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Grasp manual traverse handle (Figure 1, Item 2) and squeeze manual traverse engage lever (Figure 1,
Item 1) to manually traverse turret on acquired target.
ASV01395_1
Figure 1. Traverse Control Mechanism.
2. Manually traverse handle (Figure 1, Item 2) in desired direction.

a. Manually traverse handle (Figure 1, Item 2) counterclockwise to traverse left.
b. Manually traverse handle (Figure 1, Item 2) clockwise to traverse right.
3. Release manual traverse engage lever (Figure 1, Item 1) when target is acquired.
4. Elevate or depress weapons manually using elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 1) to acquire target.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0057
MANUAL TURRET OPERATIONS - Continued
ELEVATE
1 DEPRESS
ASV01396_1
a. Grasp elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 1) and crank clockwise to elevate weapons.
b. Grasp elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 1) and crank counterclockwise to depress weapons.
5. Release elevation control handle (Figure 2, Item 1) when target is acquired.
WARNING
If manual operation is necessary, turret weapons can be manually fired in all inhibit zones
and may strike vehicle or personnel. Ensure no personnel are in front of weapons and that
weapons are elevated to avoid striking vehicle when manually firing weapons at intended
target. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
6. Unlatch rear mantlet cover latch (Figure 3, Item 1) and remove rear mantlet cover (Figure 3, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0057
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01407_1
Figure 3. Rear Mantlet Cover.
7. Press trigger (Figure 4, Item 1) on 40-mm machine gun (Figure 4, Item 4) to engage manual firing. Release
trigger on 40-mm machine gun to disengage manual firing.
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01409_1
Figure 4. Manual Trigger Switches.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0057
8. Press trigger (Figure 4, Item 3) on M48 .50-cal. machine gun (Figure 4, Item 2) to engage manual firing.
Release trigger on M48 .50-cal. machine gun to disengage manual firing.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN FIRING
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0023 Turret power on. (WP 0055)
WP 0024 Weapon loaded. (WP 0053)
WP 0062
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN FIRING
NOTE
Use the right vertical range scale for the MK-19 40-mm machine gun.

OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV01537_1
2. Place weapon on FIRE.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN FIRING - Continued
3. Locate target through day sight eyepiece (Figure 2, Item 5) or night sight eyepiece (Figure 2, Item 4), and
turn appropriate diopter adjusting ring (Figure 2, Item 6 or 3) until target is in sharp focus. If using night
sight, turn on turret sight power and night switch.
ASV01542_1
Figure 2. Focus Using Eyepiece.
4. Estimate target range in meters:

a. If 800 meters or less, go to Step 5.
b. If 800 meters or more, go to Step 13.
WARNING
Ensure the reticle control adapter lever is down against the eccentric screw when firing
40-mm machine gun at or below 800 meters. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel.
5. If firing MK-19 40-mm machine gun at a target distance of 800 meters or less, push the reticle control
adapter lever (Figure 2, Item 2) down against the eccentric screw (Figure 2, Item 1).
a. Re-verify target and set target range by elevating or depressing weapon mantlets according to range
indicator (Figure 3, Item 1). If range to target is estimated at 500 meters, adjust weapon mantlets until
5 is indicated on range indicator.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
ASV01547_1
Figure 3. Set Target Range.
WARNING
Ensure all personnel are clear of turret and basket area before operating turret. Failure
b. Use lower right horizontal range scale (Figure 4, Item 3) of horizontal line (Figure 4, Item 2) on sight
reticle (Figure 4, Item 1) to adjust for drift. With an estimated range of 600 meters, traverse weapon
until 6 on lower right horizontal range scale is aligned with center of target.
1 CAL .50 40MM

40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40
4 6 10 14 16 1819 20
8
10 1
12
14
2
16
18
3 2
20
3
4
8
ASV01553_1
Figure 4. Sight Reticle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
6. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 5, Item 3) on gunner's control panel (Figure 5, Item 1) to 40 MM
ARMED position. Armed indicator lamp (Figure 5, Item 2) will illuminate.
1 2 3
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01555_1
position.

OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV01556_1
8. Press pushbutton trigger switch (Figure 7, Item 1) on elevation control handle (Figure 7, Item 2) and fire a
short burst of three to five rounds. Traverse (WP 0023), elevate, or depress (WP 0024) as necessary to hit
target.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
ASV01566_1
2
Figure 7. Pushbutton Trigger Switch.
NOTE
40-mm spent cartridges and links are ejected from weapon outside of turret during firing.
9. When firing is completed, move machine gun arming switch (Figure 8, Item 3) on gunner's control panel
(Figure 8, Item 1) to OFF position. Armed indicator lamp (Figure 8, Item 2) will not be illuminated.
1 2 3
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01555_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
10. Move EXHAUST BLOWER switch (Figure 9, Item 2) on turret control panel (Figure 9, Item 1) to OFF
position.

OFF OFF OFF OFF
3
2 ASV01565_1
WARNING
12. Clear MK-19 40-mm machine gun of ammunition. (WP 0062)
13. If firing MK-19 40-mm machine gun at a target distance greater than 800 meters, perform the following
steps:

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
ASV01575_1
4
a. Re-verify target and set target range by elevating or depressing weapon mantlets according to range
indicator (Figure 11, Item 1). If range to target is estimated at 1800 meters, adjust weapon mantlets
until 18 is indicated on range indicator.
ASV01547_2
Figure 11. Set Target Range.
b. Move the reticle control adapter lever (Figure 11, Item 2) up until target is on horizontal line (Figure 12,
Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
c. Use lower right horizontal range scale (Figure 12, Item 3) of horizontal line (Figure 12, Item 2) on sight
reticle (Figure 12, Item 1) to adjust for drift. With an estimated range of 1000 meters, traverse weapon
until 10 on lower right horizontal range scale is aligned with center of target.
1 CAL .50 40MM

40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40
4 6 10 14 16 1819 20
8
10 1
12
14
2
16
18
3 2
20
3
4
8
ASV01553_1
14. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 13, Item 3) on gunner's control panel (Figure 13, Item 1) to 40 MM
ARMED position. Armed indicator lamp (Figure 13, Item 2) will illuminate.
1 2 3
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01555_1
position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058

OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV01556_1
16. Press pushbutton trigger switch (Figure 15, Item 1) on elevation control handle (Figure 15, Item 2) and fire a
short burst of three to five rounds. Traverse (WP 0023), elevate, or depress (WP 0024) as necessary to hit
target.
ASV01566_1
2
Figure 15. Pushbutton Trigger Switch.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
NOTE
40-mm spent cartridges and links are ejected from weapon outside of turret during firing.
17. When firing is completed, move machine gun arming switch (Figure 16, Item 3) on gunner's control panel
(Figure 16, Item 1) to OFF position. Armed indicator lamp (Figure 16, Item 2) will not be illuminated.
1 2 3
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01555_1
position.

OFF OFF OFF OFF
3
2 ASV01565_1
19. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 17, Item 3) on turret control panel (Figure 17, Item 1) to OFF
position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0058
WARNING
20. Clear MK-19 40-mm machine gun of ammunition. (WP 0062)
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0059
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN FIRING
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0023 Turret power on. (WP 0055)
WP 0024 Weapon loaded. (WP 0052)
WP 0062
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN FIRING
WARNING
1. Place weapon on FIRE.
WARNING
Ensure reticle control adapter lever is depressed against eccentric screw when firing
M48 .50-cal. machine gun or fired rounds will strike objects where not aimed and fail to hit
desired target. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
2. Push reticle control adapter lever (Figure 1, Item 1) down against eccentric screw (Figure 1, Item 2).
ASV01608_1
Figure 1. Reticle Control Adapter Lever.
3. Locate target through unity window (Figure 2, Item 2) on gunner's sight (Figure 2, Item 1). Traverse
(WP 0023), elevate, or depress (WP 0024) weapon mantlets as necessary.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0059
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN FIRING - Continued
4
6
5 ASV01592_1
4. Sight target through day sight eyepiece (Figure 2, Item 5) or night sight eyepiece (Figure 2, Item 4) and turn
appropriate diopter adjusting ring (Figure 2, Item 6 or 3) until target is in sharp focus. If using night sight,
turn on turret sight power and night sight switch.
5. Traverse turret (WP 0023), and elevate or depress (WP 0024) weapons to align sight reticle (Figure 3,
Item 1) with target.
1
CAL .50 40MM
40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40
4 6 10 14 16 1819 20
8
10 1
12
14
2
16
18
3
20
ASV01593_1
6. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 4, Item 2) on gunner's control panel (Figure 4, Item 1) to .50 CAL
ARMED position. Red armed indicator lamp (Figure 4, Item 3) will illuminate.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0059
2
1
3
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01596_1
position.

OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV01600_1
2
8. Press pushbutton firing switch (Figure 6, Item 1) on elevation control handle (Figure 6, Item 2) and fire a
short burst to check range in elevation and azimuth. Traverse (WP 0023), elevate, or depress (WP 0024),
as necessary to hit target.,

TM 9-2320-381-10 0059
2
ASV01601_1
Figure 6. Pushbutton Firing Switch.
9. When firing is completed, move M48 .50-cal. machine gun arming switch (Figure 7, Item 2) on gunner's
control panel (Figure 7, Item 1) to OFF position. Red armed indicator lamp (Figure 7, Item 3) will not be
illuminated.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0059
1 3
2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01602_1
10. Place weapon on SAFE.

position.

OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 2 ASV01603_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0059
WARNING
Use extreme caution after completing weapons firing operations, as .50-cal. machine gun
may still be fired manually when machine gun arming switch and turret power switch are
turned off. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
13. Clear M48 .50-cal. machine gun of ammunition. (WP 0062)
WARNING
Spent cartridges are hot after firing. Use caution when emptying spent cartridge bag or
handling spent cartridges. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
14. Empty M48 .50-cal. spent cartridge bag (Figure 9, Item 2).
ASV01606_1
Figure 9. Spent Cartridge Bag.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0059
a. Loosen spent cartridge bag strap (Figure 9, Item 1).

b. Remove spent cartridge bag (Figure 9, Item 2).
c. Discard spent cartridges.
d. Install spent cartridge bag (Figure 9, Item 2).
e. Secure spent cartridge bag strap (Figure 9, Item 1).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0060
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - GRENADE LAUNCHERS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0036
WP 0055
WP 0165
GRENADE LAUNCHERS
1. Move SMOKE GRENADES arming switch (Figure 1, Item 3) on gunner's control panel (Figure 1, Item 1) to
OFF position. Ensure indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) is extinguished.
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT 2
3
ASV01452_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0060
GRENADE LAUNCHERS - Continued
2. Remove and retain launcher caps (Figure 2, Item 1) from left (Figure 2, Item 3) and right (Figure 2, Item 2)
launcher tubes and ensure tubes are free of damage and debris.
ASV02675_1
Figure 2. Launcher Caps.
3. Remove and unpack required number of grenades from ammunition container.

4. Insert grenade (Figure 3, Item 1) into launcher tube (Figure 3, Item 3) with electrical contact end (Figure 3,
Item 2) downward.
1 2
3
ASV04744_1
Figure 3. Grenade Into Launcher Tube.
5. Gently push grenade (Figure 3, Item 1) down into launcher tube (Figure 3, Item 3) so spring clip at base of
grenade engages tip plug at bottom of tube.
6. Rotate grenade (Figure 3, Item 1) 1/4-turn to ensure good electrical contact.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0060
WARNING
• Hatches should be closed to protect personnel from grenade fragments or misfires.

Firing grenade launchers with hatches open may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• All doors and hatches must be closed and latched before firing grenade launchers.
• Ensure all outside personnel are at least 164 ft (50 m) from launcher firing zone.
NOTE
The turret hatch is equipped with an interlock switch to prevent firing grenades when hatch
is open.
7. Close and latch all vehicle doors and hatches. (WP 0036)
8. Turn on turret power. (WP 0055)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0060
WARNING
A safety condition exists if grenade indicator lamps do not illuminate. If this condition
exists, immediately turn turret power off and notify maintenance personnel. Failure to
9. Move SMOKE GRENADES arming switch (Figure 4, Item 3) up to armed position on gunner's control panel
(Figure 4, Item 1). Indicator lamp (Figure 4, Item 2) will illuminate.
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT 2
3
ASV01452_1
10. Left (Figure 5, Item 2) and right (Figure 5, Item 1) grenade launchers are now armed.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0060
ASV04745_1
Figure 5. Grenade Launchers.
11. Determine desired firing pattern: right, left, or both. Refer to Figure 6.
8 8
32 32
56 56
80 80
115 FT. 115 FT.

(35 m) (35 m)
ASV00055
Figure 6. Firing Pattern.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0060
WARNING
Do not launch grenades into dry brush or grass areas. Doing so may create a fire. Failure
12. Fire smoke grenades by pushing LEFT launcher button (Figure 7, Item 1) for left grenade launchers
(Figure 8, Item 4) or RIGHT launcher button (Figure 7, Item 2) for right grenade launchers (Figure 8, Item 1).
SMOKE GRENADES
LEFT RIGHT
ASV01454_1
Figure 7. Grenade Launcher Buttons.
NOTE
Clean grenade launcher barrels as soon as possible after firing grenades. Refer to General
Cleaning Instructions (WP 0165) for cleaning procedure.
13. Install new barrel caps (Figure 8, Item 2) on grenade launcher barrels (Figure 8, Item 3) when grenade
launchers (Figure 8, Items 1 and 4) are not in use.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0060
1 2
3
2
3
ASV04352_1
Figure 8. Grenade Launcher Barrel Caps.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0061
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - UNLOADING SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1300-200 Turret power off. (WP 0055)
UNLOADING SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS
WARNING
• Removal of grenades from the launcher must only be performed by qualified,

trained personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Do not remove misfired grenades that remain in the launcher barrel for at least five
minutes following the misfiring. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Ensure all doors and turret hatches are closed and latched prior to grenade
unloading. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Ensure that SMOKE GRENADES arming switch (Figure 1, Item 3) on gunner's control panel
(Figure 1, Item 1) is in OFF position and red armed indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 2) is not illuminated.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0061
UNLOADING SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS - Continued
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND 2
OVERRIDE
3
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01617_1
WARNING
Ensure vehicle is facing away from structures and personnel while unloading smoke
grenades. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
2. Unload left (Figure 2, Item 4) and right (Figure 2, Item 1) smoke grenade launchers by removing grenades
from eight launcher barrels (Figure 2, Item 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0061
UNLOADING SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS - Continued
1 2 3
ASV01618_1
Figure 2. Smoke Grenade Launcher Caps.
3. Install barrel caps (Figure 2, Item 2) to eight grenade launcher barrels (Figure 2, Item 3).
4. Place misfired smoke grenades into grenade shipping containers and move container 328 ft. (100 m) away
from personnel, structures, and equipment.
5. Dispose of misfired smoke grenades. Refer to TM 9-1300-200.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - WEAPONS CLEARING
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Equipment Condition

Wood Block, 1 in. x 1 in. x 6 in. Engine off. (WP 0030)
Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
References
TM 9-1005-213-10
TM 9-1010-230-10
WP 0054
WP 0058
WEAPONS CLEARING
WARNING
to personnel.
death to personnel.
1. Clear 40-mm machine gun.
a. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 1, Item 2) to unarmed position. Indicator lamp (Figure 1,
Item 1) will not be illuminated.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
WEAPONS CLEARING - Continued
1 2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL
350 355 0
340 345
335

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01624_1
b. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 2, Item 1) on turret control panel (Figure 2, Item 2) to OFF
position.
1 2

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV01625_1
c. Unlatch rear mantlet cover latch (Figure 3, Item 2) and remove rear mantlet cover (Figure 3, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01604_1
d. Move M48 .50-cal. (Figure 4, Item 1) and 40-mm machine gun (Figure 4, Item 2) safety selectors to
safe (S) position.
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV04773_1
Figure 4. Machine Gun Safety Selectors.
e. Manually elevate weapons and traverse turret until 40-mm machine gun is aimed safely downrange.
(WP 0058)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
f. Remove mantlet cover detent pin (Figure 5, Item 3).
1 2
4
2
ASV04955_1
Figure 5. Mantlet Cover Detent Pin.
g. Unlatch two mantlet cover latches (Figure 5, Item 2) and remove mantlet top cover (Figure 5, Item 4)
and extension cover (Figure 5, Item 1).
h. Remove ammunition chute cover (Figure 6, Item 1).
2 3
1
ASV01610_1
1
Figure 6. Ammunition Chute Cover.
(1) Remove detent pin (Figure 6, Item 3) from front top of ammunition chute cover (Figure 6, Item 1)
and turret (Figure 6, Item 2).
(2) Remove adjustable detent pin (Figure 6, Item 4) from rear side of ammunition chute cover
(Figure 6, Item 1) and turret (Figure 6, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
i. Unfasten two twist fasteners (Figure 7, Item 2) from weather boot (Figure 7, Item 1) on ammunition
flex chute (Figure 7, Item 3).
3 2
ASV01920_1
Figure 7. Weather Boot and Ammunition Flex Chute.
j. Separate hook fastener tape from each side of weather boot (Figure 7, Item 1) surface.
k. Remove weather boot (Figure 7, Item 1) from ammunition flex chute (Figure 7, Item 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
WARNING
The charger handle must be held fully clockwise until the weapon is cleared. Failure to
l. Open 40-mm machine gun receiver top cover (Figure 8, Item 1).
350 355 0
340 345
335
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01619_1
3
Figure 8. Machine Gun Receiver Top Cover and Charger Handle.
m. Remove charger handle (Figure 8, Item 3) from stowed position and turn fully clockwise bringing bolt
back to until the round/spent brass is directly over opening in bottom of mantlet (Figure 8, Item 2).
n. Unlatch chute locks (Figure 9, Item 4) and remove ammunition flex chute (Figure 9, Item 1) from
40-mm machine gun.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
2 3
ASV01620_1
Figure 9. Ammunition Flex Chute.
o. Remove remaining linked ammunition (Figure 9, Item 2) from 40-mm machine gun. Refer to 40-mm
machine gun operator’s manual, TM 9-1010-230-10. (WP 0054)
NOTE
Soldier No. 2 must be ready to catch live or spent cartridge from bottom of 40-mm
machine gun mantlet.
p. Place screwdriver or similar blunt tool through top opening in 40-mm machine gun.
q. Position tool against live round as close to rim as possible. Have soldier No. 2 ready to catch round
and push live round from lower bolt face.
r. Close 40-mm machine gun receiver top cover (Figure 9, Item 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
s. Release charger handle (Figure 10, Item 1) and return to stowed position.
1
ASV01621_1
Figure 10. Charger Handle.
t. Remove remaining 40-mm ammunition (Figure 11, Item 2) from 40-mm ammunition box (Figure 11,
Item 1). (WP 0054)
350 355 0
340 345
335
2
ASV01622_1
Figure 11. Ammunition Box.
u. Install extension cover (Figure 12, Item 1) and mantlet top cover (Figure 12, Item 4) and secure with
two mantlet cover latches (Figure 12, Item 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
1 2
4
2
ASV04955_1
Figure 12. Mantlet Top Cover.
v. Install mantlet cover detent pin (Figure 12, Item 3).

w. Connect ammunition flex chute (Figure 13, Item 4) to machine gun and secure with chute locks
4
2
3
ASV01611_1
x. Install weather boot (Figure 13, Item 1) over ammunition flex chute (Figure 13, Item 4).
y. Fasten two twist fasteners (Figure 13, Item 2) on weather boot (Figure 13, Item 1).
z. Connect hook fastener tape on each side of weather boot (Figure 13, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
aa. Install ammunition chute cover (Figure 14, Item 1) on turret (Figure 14, Item 2).
2 3
1
ASV01610_1
1
ab. Install adjustable detent (Figure 14, Item 4) pin in rear side of ammunition chute cover
(Figure 14, Item 1) and turret (Figure 14, Item 2).
ac. Install detent pin (Figure 14, Item 3) in front top of ammunition chute cover (Figure 14, Item 1) and
ad. Perform weapon after-operation PMCS. Refer to TM 9-1005-213-10.
2. Clear M48 .50-cal. machine gun.
WARNING
• Ensure the weapon safety selector is in the safe (S) position before
performing removal or installation procedures. Failure to comply may result in
• Ensure all personnel are clear of the area before operating the turret. Failure
• All weapons must be pointed downrange. Failure to comply may result in
a. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 15, Item 1) to unarmed position. Red indicator (Figure 15,
Item 2) will not be illuminated.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
1 2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01628_1
b. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 16, Item 1) on turret control panel (Figure 16, Item 2) to OFF
position.
1 2

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV01625_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
c. Move safety selector (Figure 17, Item 1) to safe (S) position.
ASV01630_1
Figure 17. Safety Selector.
WARNING
Firing machine guns with Turret Inhibit Override selected will allow fired rounds to
strike ASV deck in certain azimuth positions. Operation of machine guns while in
override may damage vehicle or injure personnel. Failure to comply may result in
d. Manually elevate weapons and traverse turret until M48 .50-cal. machine gun is aimed safely
downrange. (WP 0058)
e. Open M48 .50-cal. machine gun cover (Figure 18, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
ASV04314_1
Figure 18. Ammunition Belt.
f. Lift cartridge extractor (Figure 18, Item 3) and remove ammunition belt (Figure 18, Item 2) from
feedway.
g. Move cartridge extractor (Figure 18, Item 3) down and close cover (Figure 18, Item 1).
h. Remove remaining rounds from M48 .50-cal. machine gun ammunition boxes (Figure 19, Item 1).
ASV01632_1
Figure 19. Machine Gun Ammunition Box.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
i. Ensure M10 manual charger lock selector (Figure 20, Item 1) is in forward position and pull charger
handle (Figure 20, Item 2) one time to cycle bolt and remove any live round from chamber.
1
2
ASV03199_1
Figure 20. Charge Lock Selector and Charger Handle.
NOTE
Bellmouth chute not shown for clarity.
j. Open M48 .50-cal. machine gun cover (Figure 21, Item 1).
ASV01631_1
Figure 21. Machine Gun Cover.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
k. Move M10 manual charger lock selector (Figure 22, Item 1) to rearward position.
1
ASV01634_1
2
Figure 22. Charge Lock Selector.
NOTE
The machine gun cover is shown closed for clarity.
l. Pull charger handle (Figure 22, Item 2) down until bolt locks in place to rear.
NOTE
If a round is stuck on the bolt face, use a 1 in. x 1 in. x 6 in.
(25 mm x 25 mm x 152 mm) block of wood to push the round down off the bolt face.
m. Inspect face of bolt to ensure no ammunition is stuck on bolt.
n. Move M10 lock selector (Figure 23, Item 4) to forward position and pull back on M10 manual charger
handle (Figure 23, Item 2) until click is heard, then ease bolt forward.
4 3 ASV01635_1
Figure 23. Lock Selector and Charger Handle.
o. Move safety selector (Figure 23, Item 3) to fire (F) position.

p. Press trigger (Figure 23, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0062
NOTE
Bellmouth chute not shown for clarity.
q. Close M48 .50-cal. machine gun cover (Figure 24, Item 1).
ASV01631_1
Figure 24. Machine Gun Cover.
r. Perform weapon after-operation PMCS. Refer to TM 9-1005-213-10.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0063
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM (AFES)
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
WARNING
• Do not breathe FM-200 chemical agent or fumes from fire. Failure to comply may
• FM-200 can freeze exposed flesh. Do not let FM-200 chemical agent contact
exposed skin or eyes. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Crew compartment is protected by an automatic fire suppression system. In the
event of a crew compartment fire, hand-held fire extinguishers are also available
for use. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. The AFES is controlled and monitored by a Tactical Wheeled Vehicle (TWV) controller (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. The TWV controller (Figure 1, Item 1) monitors six fire sensors (Figure 1, Item 5) in the crew compartment
(Figure 1, Item 6) and engine compartment (Figure 1, Item 9).
3. The AFES status is communicated to the operator via yellow TROUBLE LEDs (Figure 1, Item 4) and a
green AFES ON LED (Figure 1, Item 2).
4. The AFES is working normally when the green AFES ON LED (Figure 1, Item 2) is illuminated steady.
5. When AFES activates, either automatically or manually, the yellow TROUBLE LED (Figure 1, Item 4) for the
compartment which discharged will illuminate steady.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0063
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM - Continued
CAUTION
TROUBLE LED light will turn on if there is low pressure in the crew or engine compartment
fire extinguisher bottles or a fault in the fire detection circuits. If TROUBLE LED turns on,
report problem to maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
6. If the AFES ON LED (Figure 1, Item 2) is blinking or is not illuminated, or any yellow TROUBLE LEDs
(Figure 1, Item 4) are illuminated or blinking there is a fault in the system. Report the fault to maintenance
personnel.
7. The AFES for the crew compartment (Figure 1, Item 6) and/or the engine compartment (Figure 1, Item 9)
can be activated manually by manual discharge switches (Figure 1, Items 3 and 14) on the TWV controller
(Figure 1, Item 1) or the Manual Discharge Unit (MDU) (Figure 1, item 13).
8. When AFES activates in the crew compartment (Figure 1, Item 6), two fire extinguisher bottles (Figure 1,
Items 15 and 16) will discharge their contents through two discharge nozzles (Figure 1, Items 12 and 17)
into the crew compartment.
9. When AFES activates in the engine compartment (Figure 1, Item 9), the fire extinguisher bottle (Figure 1,
Item 7) will discharge its contents through three discharge nozzles (Figure 1, Items 8, 10 and 11) into the
engine compartment.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0063
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM - Continued
1 2
3
5 6 7 8
5
17 12
16 5 11 5 10 O5550010
15 CREW
MANUAL
14 DISCHARGE
ENGINE
13
Figure 1. Automatic Fire Extinguisher System (AFES) Components.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0064
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - HAND-HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
HAND-HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
WARNING
Do not get ABC dry chemical extinguishing agent in eyes or on bare skin. Chemical agent
may cause mild skin irritation, moderate eye irritation, and possible gastric distress. Wash
affected area immediately with running water. Carefully remove contaminated clothing to
avoid eye contamination. Immediately flush eyes under gentle running water for at least 15
minutes. If chemical is inhaled, move victim to fresh air. Use respirator as needed to
support breathing. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Hand-Held Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. Located inside the commander’s side door behind the
commander's seat. These extinguishers can be used on Class A, B, and C fires. Class A fires result from
fires caused by ordinary combustible materials. Class B fires result from fires caused by flammable liquids.
Class C fires result from fires caused by energized electrical equipment.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0064
HAND-HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHERS - Continued
5
2
ASV00657_1
Figure 1. Hand-Held Fire Extinguisher.
2. To extinguish fire:
NOTE
Fire extinguisher will completely discharge in 10 seconds.
a. Remove extinguisher (Figure 1, Item 4) from holding bracket (Figure 1, Item 3).
b. Hold extinguisher (Figure 1, Item 4) upright and remove lock pin (Figure 1, Item 6).
c. Aim nozzle (Figure 1, Item 1) at base of fire and squeeze handle (Figure 1, Item 2).
d. Spray in a quick side-to-side sweeping motion.
3. Notify maintenance personnel after use or if charge indicator (Figure 1, Item 5) is not in green zone.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0065
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - COMPRESSED AIR RECEPTACLE
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
Engine on. (WP 0030)
NOTE
Engine must be running in order for air pressure to be available at compressed air
receptacle.
COMPRESSED AIR RECEPTACLE
Compressed air receptacle (Figure 1, Item 1) is located inside driver's door on front face of battery closeout
panel and provides a quick disconnect with 110 - 120 psi (7.6 - 8.3 bar) air pressure to connect external air
hose for tire inflation.
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
AIR SUPPLY
PLY
OFF DIESEL SUP TER
HEA
AUXILIARY
ON
D
COMPRESSE
ACLE
AIR RECEPT
ASV01239_2
Figure 1. Compressed Air Receptacle.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0066
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - SLAVE RECEPTACLE
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0069
SLAVE RECEPTACLE
SLAVE RECEPTACLE (Figure 1, Item 1) is located inside driver's door on front face of battery closeout
panel and used for starting vehicle with weak batteries by connecting slave cable from one vehicle to
another. Refer to SLAVE RECEPTACLE starting procedure. (WP 0069)
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
AIR SUPPLY
PLY
OFF DIESEL SUP TER
HEA
AUXILIARY
ON
D
COMPRESSE
ACLE
AIR RECEPT
ASV01474_2
Figure 1. Slave Receptacle.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0067
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - LIKE-VEHICLE TOWING
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required

Chain Assembly (WP 0176, Table 2) Personnel (4)
Tow bar, Medium (WP 0176, Table 2)
Equipment Condition
Materials/Parts Engine off. (WP 0030)
Wire, Nonelectrical (WP 0177, Table 1, Item 39) Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
LIKE-VEHICLE TOWING
WARNING
• The vehicle parking brake is inoperative when the drive transfer unit is disengaged
or drive shafts are disconnected. Wheels must be chocked to prevent movement.
• Do not perform U-turns. Avoid all sharp turns, reduce speed and use as large a
radius as possible while turning. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• If turning while vehicle is in reverse, make slow gentle turns only. If vehicle starts
to jackknife, stop, pull forward, and slowly begin backing up. Failure to comply may
• Like-vehicle towing is not always recommended due to the necessity for greatly
increased braking distances. This procedure shall only be used when crew death,
injury, or equipment loss/damage cannot be avoided by any other means. No
personnel shall ride in a vehicle being towed. Like-vehicle towing must be limited
to distances of 10 miles or less. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• The vehicle is equipped with an electronic automatic shift transmission which shifts
to the next higher gear when engine exceeds preset rpm. This means that when
towing a heavy load, the engine/transmission will not provide sufficient down grade
braking. Service brakes must be used to control vehicle speed. Failure to comply

TM 9-2320-381-10 0067
LIKE-VEHICLE TOWING - Continued
CAUTION
• A vehicle that has sustained damage to the suspension, steering or drive line
components that prevents it from freely moving forward while in neutral gear must
be transported via flatbed or lowboy trailer. The evacuation vehicle must have a
load carrying capability of at least 30,000 pounds. Units should contact their local
transportation support unit for assistance in these cases. Failure to comply may
• Driver in towing vehicle must avoid sudden braking, steering, and acceleration. Do
not tow vehicle on grades greater than 8 percent. Failure to comply may result in
• Use of towbars that are not approved for use with the vehicle is strictly prohibited.
Always inspect towbar for damage prior to use. Failure to comply may result in
• Prior to towing, either the disabled vehicle's drive transfer unit must be disengaged
or the drive shafts must be disconnected. Failure to comply may result in damage
to equipment.
Table 1. Like-Vehicle Towing Equipment.
NSN Description Qty
4910-01-365-9304 Motor Vehicle Towbar 1
5340-01-023-9801 Heavy-duty Clevis End 2
5325-00-024-0528 1-inch Clevis Pin 2
4010-00-443-4845 Tow Safety Chain 2
9505-00-293-4208 Nonelectrical Wire (Or similar, A/R

used to secure safety chain
hooks to chain to prevent
them from unhooking.)
2540-00-318-0326 Safety Chain Shackles 2
5340-01-022-4686 Light-duty Clevis End 2
5315-00-624-0543 3/4-inch Clevis Pin 2
1. Set vehicle towbar (Figure 1, Item 2) length to sixth hole lock position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0067
1
2
9 3
8
4
7
6 5 ASV01320_1
Figure 1. Vehicle Towbar.
WARNING
• When connecting vehicles prior to towing, a guide must be positioned between

both vehicles. Since this guide is outside of the driver's sight, another ground guide
is required who must be positioned so that both the driver and the between-vehicle
guide are visible. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Towbar weighs approximately 70 lb (31.75 kg). Assistance is required when fitting
towbar to vehicles. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
2. Install two heavy-duty clevis ends (Figure 1, Item 7) to both towing eyes (Figure 1, Item 5) located on
underside front of vehicle hull.
3. Install two 1 in. (25.40 mm) clevis pins (Figure 1, Item 6) and two quick-release pins (Figure 1, Item 4) to two
heavy-duty clevis ends (Figure 1, Item 7).
4. With aid of soldier, align clevis end (Figure 1, Item 7) with towbar (Figure 1, Item 2).
5. Insert two clevis pins (Figure 1, Item 3) and two retaining pins (Figure 1, Item 8) to secure two heavy-duty
clevis ends (Figure 1, Item 7) to towbar (Figure 1, Item 2).
6. With the aid of soldier No. 2, align towing vehicle with towing eye (Figure 1, Item 1) of towbar (Figure 1,
Item 2).
7. Attach towbar (Figure 1, Item 2) to towing pintle (Figure 1, Item 9) and secure.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0067
CAUTION
• Safety chains must be used in addition to the towbar during towing operations.
When properly attached, safety chains will retain a towed vehicle if the towbar fails
or becomes disconnected. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
• When installing safety chains leave sufficient slack for vehicle turns but not enough
for chains to come into contact with road surfaces. Failure to comply may result in
8. Install safety chains.
a. Cross chains under towbar (Figure 1, Item 2).
b. Fasten crossed chains to tie-down shackles of towing vehicle first, then attach chains to tie-down
shackles (Figure 2, Item 1) of disabled vehicle.
1
ASV01321_1
Figure 2. Tie-Down Shackles - Location.
c. Secure chain hooks with safety wire.

9. Remove wheel chocks. (WP 0170)
10. Release parking brake (Figure 3, Item, 1) on disabled vehicle and move lockout lever (Figure 4, Item 1)
towards front of vehicle and away from transfer case to the disengaged position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0067
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225
80
25
50
75
3.5 RUN
24 32
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 7 25
50 16
24 32
FLAT
16
40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
60
30 40 40 60 80
5040 70
30
30 40 50 80
90
40
20
km/h
30
ENGAGE
20 50
20 10
30
20
MPH km/h
60
50
60
100
90
C C SPOOL
20 10 MPH70 100
10 110
TACH FUEL 10
70
110
0 MILES 120
HIGH
0 00 Faria 0 0 0 00 0
0 00 00 0 0 0
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01272_1
1
TRAN
ENGA SFER
GE CASE
DISE
NGAG
E
ASV00661_1
Figure 4. Transfer Case Lockout Lever.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0067
CAUTION
Like-vehicle towing cannot be performed if disabled vehicle steering wheel does not freely
move while transmission is in neutral. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
11. Manually rotate steering wheel to ensure that steering wheel will rotate freely during towing.
WARNING
The towing vehicle has the burden of braking and stopping the disabled vehicle as well as
itself. Speed restrictions apply and must be followed. Failure to comply may result in injury
or death to personnel.
12. The following are maximum speed limits while towing another vehicle:
a. Highway/hard packed level road surfaces is 20 mph (32 km/h).
b. Highway/hard packed hilly road surfaces is 15 mph (24 km/h).
c. Other road surfaces or cross country is 10 mph (16 km/h).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - WINCHING OPERATIONS
INITIAL SETUP:

Block, Snatch (WP 0175, Table 3, Item 7) Engine started. (WP 0030)
Cable, Tow (WP 0175, Table 3, Item 22) Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
Personnel Required
Personnel (2)
References
FM 4-30.31
WP 0013
WINCHING OPERATIONS WITHOUT A SNATCH BLOCK
WARNING
• Never operate winch with less than four wraps of cable on winch drum. Failure to
• Always wear gloves when handling winch cables. Failure to comply may result in
injury to personnel.
• Clear area of all personnel while winching operations are in progress. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
• If winching operation requires pulling at high side angles, remove service lights
and guard bracket assembly from front hull. Failure to comply may result in
• When using winch to pull out a vehicle trapped in mud, allow winch to pull vehicle.
Using vehicle to assist while winching may cause wheels to dig deeper. Failure to
• Winch cable must be kept tight on winch drum while winding or unwinding cable
from winch. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
For additional information on vehicle self-recovery refer to FM 4-30.31.
1. Move winch free spool engagement lever (Figure 1, Item 3) to FREE SPOOL position. (WP 0013)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
WINCHING OPERATIONS WITHOUT A SNATCH BLOCK - Continued
ENGAGE
SPOOL
1 4
2 FREE
SPOOL
3
5
8
7
6 ASV01864_1
Figure 1. Vehicle Winching Without Snatch Block.
2. Guide winch cable (Figure 1, Item 5) out of winch compartment (Figure 1, Item 7).
3. Attach auxiliary cable (Figure 1, Item 1) to a stationary item (Figure 1, Item 8).
4. Attach winch cable (Figure 1, Item 5) to auxiliary cable (Figure 1, Item 1).
WARNING
At least four wraps of cable must be left on winch drum to prevent excessive load on the
cable anchor clamp and to avoid a potential safety hazard. Failure to comply may result in
5. Move winch free spool engagement lever (Figure 1, Item 3) to ENGAGE SPOOL position allowing hydraulic
operation of winch.
NOTE
• At 2300 rpm the line speed of the cable is 12 ft (3.7 m) per minute on the first layer
of cable.
• Ensure that first layer of cable winds onto winch drum without cross winding and
that each additional layer starts back across drum without cross winding.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
WINCHING OPERATIONS WITHOUT A SNATCH BLOCK - Continued
6. Pull winch control valve lever (Figure 1, Item 4) and accelerate engine until desired line speed is reached
and winch cable (Figure 1, Item 5) is reeled in.
7. Remove auxiliary cable (Figure 1, Item 1) from stationary item (Figure 1, Item 8).
NOTE
Local policy may dictate stowing of the hook at another location on the vehicle hull.
8. Secure winch cable (Figure 1, Item 5) as follows:
a. Secure hook (Figure 1, Item 2) through vehicle tie-down shackle (Figure 1, Item 6).
b. Reel in winch cable (Figure 1, Item 5) until cable is taut.
END OF TASK
SNATCH BLOCK INSTALLATION
WARNING
Always wear gloves when handling winch cables. Failure to comply may result in injury to
personnel.
NOTE
• A snatch block is furnished with the vehicle which enables increased pulling
capacity for heavy winching operations. The snatch block is not required for all
winching operations.
• For additional information on vehicle self-recovery, refer to FM 4-30.31.
1. Rotate hook (Figure 2, Item 2) down 90 degrees until clevis (Figure 2, Item 3) is disengaged from locking
mechanism (Figure 2, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
SNATCH BLOCK INSTALLATION - Continued
2
ASV01856_1
Figure 2. Snatch Block.
2. Remove clevis (Figure 3, Item 2) from locking mechanism (Figure 3, Item 1).
ASV01857_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
3. Install cable (Figure 4, Item 2) in snatch block (Figure 4, Item 1).
2
ASV01858_1
Figure 4. Snatch Block With Cable.
4. With hook (Figure 5, Item 3) rotated down 90 degrees, install clevis (Figure 5, Item 2) on locking mechanism
(Figure 5, Item 1).
3
ASV01859_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
5. Rotate hook (Figure 6, Item 3) up until clevis (Figure 6, Item 2) is locked in place by locking mechanism
(Figure 6, Item 1).
2
1
3 ASV01860_1
END OF TASK
WINCHING OPERATIONS WITH A SNATCH BLOCK
WARNING
• When attaching winch cable hook and snatch block hook, position hook throat
(open part) upward. If the hook straightens out due to overloading, it will be forced
toward the ground and not upward. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel.
• Never operate winch with less than four wraps of cable on winch drum. Failure to
• Always wear gloves when handling winch cables. Failure to comply may result in
• Clear area of all personnel while winching operations are in progress. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
WINCHING OPERATIONS WITH A SNATCH BLOCK - Continued
CAUTION
• If winching operation requires pulling at high side angles, remove service lights
and guard bracket assembly from front hull. Failure to comply may result in
• When using winch to pull out a vehicle trapped in mud, allow winch to pull vehicle.
Using vehicle to assist while winching may cause wheels to dig deeper. Failure to
• Winch cable must be kept tight on winch drum while winding or unwinding cable
from winch. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
For additional information on vehicle self-recovery refer to FM 4-30.31.
1. Move winch free spool engagement lever (Figure 7, Item 2) to FREE SPOOL position. (WP 0013)
ENGAGE
SPOOL
1 FREE
3
SPOOL
2
4
8
4
7
6
5 ASV00687_1
Figure 7. Vehicle Winching With Snatch Block.
2. Guide winch cable (Figure 7, Item 4) out of winch compartment (Figure 7, Item 7). Keep winch cable tight in
snatch block (Figure 7, Item 9) and on winch drum to prevent crossing coils.
3. Attach auxiliary cable (Figure 7, Item 1) to a stationary item (Figure 7, Item 8).
4. Attach snatch block (Figure 7, Item 9) to auxiliary cable (Figure 7, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
WINCHING OPERATIONS WITH A SNATCH BLOCK - Continued
WARNING
At least four wraps of cable must be left on winch drum to prevent excessive load on the
cable anchor clamp and to avoid a potential safety hazard. Failure to comply may result in
5. Move winch free spool engagement lever (Figure 7, Item 2) to ENGAGE SPOOL position allowing hydraulic
operation of winch.
NOTE
• At 2300 rpm the line speed of the cable is 12 ft (3.7 m) per minute on the first layer
of cable.
• Ensure that first layer of cable winds onto winch drum without cross winding and
that each additional layer starts back across drum without cross winding.
6. Pull winch control valve lever (Figure 7, Item 3) and accelerate engine until desired line speed is reached
and winch cable (Figure 7, Item 4) is reeled in.
7. Remove auxiliary cable (Figure 7, Item 1) from stationary item (Figure 7, Item 8).
NOTE
• Local policy may dictate stowing of the hook at another location on the vehicle hull.
• Snatch block must be removed before winch cable can be secured.
8. Secure winch cable (Figure 7, Item 4) as follows:
a. Secure hook (Figure 7, Item 6) through vehicle tie-down shackle (Figure 7, Item 5).
b. Reel winch cable (Figure 7, Item 4) in until cable is taut.
END OF TASK
SNATCH BLOCK REMOVAL
WARNING
Always wear gloves when handling winch cables. Failure to comply may result in injury to
personnel.
1. With hook (Figure 8, Item 3) rotated down 90 degrees, remove clevis (Figure 8, Item 2) from locking

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
SNATCH BLOCK REMOVAL - Continued
3
ASV01859_1
2. Remove cable (Figure 9, Item 2) from snatch block (Figure 9, Item 1).
2
ASV01858_1
Figure 9. Snatch Block With Cable.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0068
SNATCH BLOCK REMOVAL - Continued
3. With hook (Figure 10, Item 2) rotated down 90 degrees, install clevis (Figure 10, Item 3) on locking
2
ASV01856_1
4. Rotate hook (Figure 11, Item 3) up until clevis (Figure 11, Item 2) is locked in place by locking mechanism
2
1
3 ASV01866_1
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0069
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - SLAVE RECEPTACLE STARTING
INITIAL SETUP:

Personnel (2) Master Battery Disconnect Switch in the ON
position. (WP 0019)
References
WP 0005
WP 0006
WP 0030
STARTING VEHICLE USING SLAVE RECEPTACLE
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
1. Start assist vehicle.
2. Move assist vehicle into position beside disabled vehicle so slave receptacles are side by side.
3. Shut off engine and turn off all power on assist vehicle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0069
STARTING VEHICLE USING SLAVE RECEPTACLE - Continued
CAUTION
Ensure communications equipment of both vehicles is turned off before attempting to slave
start vehicle or damage to electrical and/or communication systems may occur. Failure to
4. Move disabled vehicle MASTER POWER switch (Figure 1, Item 1) on driver’s control unit (Figure 1, Item 2)
to OFF position.
1 2

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01258_1
5. Remove cover (Figure 2, Item 2) on SLAVE RECEPTACLE (Figure 2, Item 1) from both disabled and assist
vehicles.
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
2
AIR SUPPLY
PLY
OFF DIESEL SUP TER
HEA
AUXILIARY
ON
D
COMPRESSE
ACLE
AIR RECEPT
ASV01239_1
Figure 2. Slave Receptacle.
6. Remove slave cable from stowage and connect to SLAVE RECEPTACLE (Figure 2, Item 1) of both
vehicles.
7. Start engine of assist vehicle and hold throttle pedal so that vehicle rpm gauge reads above 1000 rpm.
(Refer to operator manual of assist vehicle.)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0069
STARTING VEHICLE USING SLAVE RECEPTACLE - Continued
8. Move MASTER POWER switch (Figure 3, Item 1) on driver's control unit (Figure 3, Item 2) of disabled
vehicle to ON position and start engine. (WP 0030)
1 2

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01258_1
9. Remove slave cable from SLAVE RECEPTACLE (Figure 2, Item 1) of both vehicles as soon as disabled
vehicle is running smoothly. Stow slave cable.
10. Install cover (Figure 2, Item 2) on SLAVE RECEPTACLE (Figure 2, Item 1) of both vehicles.
11. Move assist vehicle and shut off engine.
12. Check VOLTS gauge (Figure 4, Item 1) of disabled vehicle for 24-volts. If read out is less than 24-volts,
notify maintenance personnel.
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV00612_1
Figure 4. Voltmeter Gauge.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - STARTING VEHICLE IN ARCTIC WEATHER CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:

Cover, Engine Grille (WP 0175, Table 3, Item 63) WP 0005
WP 0006
References
TM 4-33.31
CAUTION
Vehicle must be properly prepared by maintenance personnel for arctic weather
operations. Change oil in engine, transmission, transfer case, winch, differentials, hydraulic
system and wheel ends. Oil filters must be replaced during all oil changes. Auxiliary heater
must be run for 15 minutes to prime system with arctic fuel. Failure to comply may result in
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
• Personnel operating equipment in cold weather conditions must be familiar with
procedures and techniques described in TM 4-33.31.
• Arctic weather starting procedure is used to aid starting of vehicle when ambient
temperature is below -25°F (-32°C).
1. Perform the following preliminary checks for arctic operation.
a. Ensure that oils are replaced for arctic operation by maintenance personnel.
b. Ensure that filters are replaced for arctic operation by maintenance personnel.
WARNING
Engine must be shut down. Rotating fan, pulleys, and belts create a hazardous
condition. Do not put hands near fan, pulleys, and belts while engine is running.
0070-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opunuwp) wpno(O00046)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
NOTE
If cooling fan does not rotate, notify maintenance personnel.
c. Ensure cooling fan rotates.
d. Ensure that fuel has been drained and vehicle is filled with arctic diesel fuel oil.
e. Ensure that air purge tanks have been drained. If water is present, replace CTIS desiccant cartridges.
2. Install and secure cooling air intake cover (Figure 1, Item 1) over engine air intake grille.
ASV01559_1
Figure 1. Cooling Air Intake Cover.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
3. Move AUXILIARY BATTERY HEATER valve handle (Figure 2, Item 1) and PRIMARY BATTERY HEATER
valve handle (Figure 2, Item 2) to ON position.
1
2
OFF OFF
ON ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
AUXILIARY PRIMARY
BATTERY BATTERY
HEATER HEATER
ASV01480_1
Figure 2. Battery Heater Valves.
CAUTION
Diesel supply auxiliary heater valve handle must be in the ON position for auxiliary heater
operations. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
4. Move DIESEL SUPPLY AUXILIARY HEATER valve handle (Figure 3, Item 2) to ON position.
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
AIR SUPPLY
PLY
OFF DIESEL SUP TER
HEA
AUXILIARY
ON
D
COMPRESSE
ACLE
AIR RECEPT
2
ASV01474_1
Figure 3. Diesel Supply and Crew Heater Valves.
5. Move CREW HEATER valve handle (Figure 3, Item 1) to OFF position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
CAUTION
Do not run auxiliary heater if engine temperature is above 185°F (85°C). Failure to comply
NOTE
Auxiliary heater will automatically run through its programmed cycle when heat button is
pressed. Monitor auxiliary heater display panel. Report any malfunctions to maintenance
personnel.
6. Press heat button (Figure 4, Item 4).
2
1
3
M0 C
3 20:30
4 ASV01476_2
Figure 4. Auxiliary Heater Display Panel.
7. Heating symbol (Figure 4, Item 3) and heat cycle duration time (Figure 4, Item 1) will appear in auxiliary
heater display panel (Figure 4, Item 2).
CAUTION
Do not hold grid heater switch in the ON position for more than 30 seconds. Failure to
8. Move GRID HEATER switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to ON position and hold for 20 - 30 seconds.

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01434_1
Figure 5. Grid Heater Switch (200 Amp DCU).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
CAUTION
To prevent starter damage, do not attempt to start engine for more than 30 seconds
continuously. If engine does not start within 30 seconds, wait 1 to 2 minutes before starting
again. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
CAUTION
Do not start heater blowers until engine has been started. Failure to comply may result in
9. Move IGNITION switch to START position and lightly depress accelerator pedal. Release IGNITION switch
as soon as engine starts.
CAUTION
Do not start heater blowers until engine has been started. Failure to comply may result in
10. If engine does not start or if engine temperature does not reach 160°F (71°C) within 10 minutes, shut down
the engine and allow auxiliary heater to continue warming engine and batteries for 15 minutes and repeat
Step 9.
CAUTION
If transmission oil temperature is between -24°F and 19°F (-31°C and -7°C), shifting will be
limited to first and reverse gears only. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
NOTE
Operating auxiliary heater will help warm transmission oil faster when shifting is limited to
first gear due to low temperatures.
11. Allow transmission to idle in neutral (N) to warm up transmission oil.
12. With engine running, move CREW HEATER valve handle (Figure 6, Item 1) to ON position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
AIR SUPPLY
PLY
OFF DIESEL SUP TER
HEA
AUXILIARY
ON
D
COMPRESSE
ACLE
AIR RECEPT
ASV01474_2
Figure 6. Crew Heater Valve.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
13. Rotate REAR HEATER CONTROL switch knob (Figure 7, Item 1) on rear blower panel to full hot position.
REAR
HEATER
CONTROL
FRESH
AIR
CONTROL
ASV01688_1
Figure 7. Rear Heater Control.
14. Rotate FRONT HEATER CONTROL switch knob (Figure 8, Item 1) to full hot position.
1
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
ENGAGE
SPOOL
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01438_1
Figure 8. Front Heater Control.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
CAUTION
Do not use sharp tools to remove frost from view blocks. Never wipe view block interior
surfaces with bare or gloved hand. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
15. Rotate FRONT FAN CONTROL switch knob (Figure 9, Item 1) and REAR FAN CONTROL switch knob
(Figure 9, Item 2) on side climate control panel (Figure 9, Item 3) to position 3 (high) speed.
SYM
FRONT FAN CONTROL

1 1 2
OFF 3
SYM SYM
AC AC ENGINE STOP
WIPE
OFF
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225
80
25
50
75
3.5
24
RUN
RUN
32
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 7 25
50 16
24 32
FLAT
FLAT
16
40 120
YEL BLU GRN

C/F
C/F
BAR PSI EMR
EMR
60
SAN
30 40 40 60 80
70
30
50
40
30 40 50
40
9080
20
30 km/h
30
ENGAGE
20 50
20 10
20
MPH km/h
60
50
60
100
90
C
CCC SPOOL
20 10 MPH
70
100
10 110
TACH FUEL 10
70
110
0
Faria 0 0 0 0000 00 00 0 0 0
MILES 120 HIGH
HIGH
000
USA WAY
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
SYM
REAR FAN CONTROL

3 1 2
OFF 3
ASV01484_1
2
Figure 9. Front and Rear Fan Controls.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
16. Move view block DE-ICE switch (Figure 10, Item 1) to ON position. Move view block DE-ICE switch to OFF
position when view blocks are clear.

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
1 ASV01485_1
Figure 10. View Block DE-ICE Switch (200 Amp DCU).
17. When battery voltmeter gauge (Figure 11, Item 1) is reading in the green zone (no less than 24 volts), move
AUXILIARY BATTERY HEATER valve handle (Figure 11, Item 3) and PRIMARY BATTERY HEATER valve
handle (Figure 11, Item 2) to OFF position.
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
3 2
OFF OFF
ON ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
AUXILIARY PRIMARY
BATTERY BATTERY
HEATER HEATER
ASV01486_1
Figure 11. Battery Heater Valves.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0070
CAUTION
Do Not Shift (DNS) warning indicator light will illuminate if transmission oil temperature is
below 32°F (0°C). Transmission will not shift out of neutral (N) until oil temperature is
above 31°F (-0.55°C). Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Transmission should be warm enough to allow shifting into first gear within 10 minutes of
idling engine.
18. Allow transmission time to idle in neutral (N) to warm up transmission oil.
CAUTION
If coolant temperature gauge reads below 160°F (71°C), do not allow engine to idle for
periods in excess of 10 minutes. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
A temperature regulating switch cycles the auxiliary heater to regulate the coolant
temperature between 154°F (68°C) and 185°F (85°C).
19. Adjust cooling air intake cover to maintain 180°F (82°C) coolant temperature during arctic weather
conditions.
20. Traverse front of turret to 180-degree position, facing over rear of vehicle to reduce arctic air flow into
vehicle while driving.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - TIRE CHAINS INSTALLATION/REMOVAL
INITIAL SETUP:

Chains, Tire (WP 0176, Table 2) Engine on. (WP 0030)
Personnel Required
Personnel (2)
TIRE CHAINS INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Tire chains should only be used for severe icy driving conditions. Tire chains must be used
as a four-wheel set only. Avoid making tight turns when tire chains are installed to tires.
Only gradual turns should be performed. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
NOTE
• Maximum speed limit for vehicles driven with chains in city or on highway is 10
mph (16 km/h).
• Maximum speed limit for vehicles driven with chains off-road is 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Tire chains on driver's side are installed the same way. Commander's side is
shown.
1. Spread tire chain assemblies on the ground with inner fastener hooks (Figure 1, Item 1) and outer locking
hooks (Figure 1, Item 2) positioned to rear of vehicle under all four tires.
ASV01385_1
Figure 1. Tire Chains on Ground.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
TIRE CHAINS INSTALLATION - Continued
2. Select SAND mode (Figure 2, Item 1) on Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) control panel (Figure 2,
Item 2) to deflate tires.
1 ON 2 3MENU
RUN
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
P
FLAT
P
GRID MASTER TURRET BLACKOUT

EMER
IGNITION TL1
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225
80
25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 7 25
50
16
40 120

C/F
TL5
CENTRAL
SAND
30 40 40 60 80 ON ON ON ON CB5 CB11
5040 70
30
30 40 50 80
90
20
km/h
30
40
ENGAGE AUX.
20 50
20
30
20
MPH km/h
60
50 90
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
20 MPH70
60
10
TACH FUEL
10
10
110
70
110
OFF CB6 CB12
0 120
10 60 KILOMETERS
0 120
MILES HIGH
000 Faria 0 0 0 00 0
0 00 000 0 0
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
2
HWY
ASV00655_1
Figure 2. CTIS Control Panel Sand Mode.
WARNING
Do not remove chocks that are wedged under a tire or while transmission is in Neutral. The
vehicle could roll once chock is removed. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
3. Remove wheel chocks. (WP 0170)
4. With aid of soldier No. 2 guiding vehicle, slowly drive vehicle over tire chains (Figure 3, Item 1) until wheels
are positioned past center point of tire chain assemblies.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
1 ASV01386 _1
Figure 3. Vehicle on Tire Chains.
5. With aid of soldier No. 2, wrap tire chain (Figure 4, Item 1) around each tire.
ASV01387_1
Figure 4. Tire Chains on Tire.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
6. Ensure chain links are positioned evenly on each side of tire.

7. With aid of soldier No. 2, secure inside chain ends on each tire by hooking inner fastener hook (Figure 5,
Item 2) to chain link (Figure 5, Item 1).
2
ASV01388_1
Figure 5. Tire Chains.
8. With aid of soldier No. 2, insert outer locking hook (Figure 6, Item 2) to link on chain (Figure 6, Item 1) on
each tire.
ASV01389_1
Figure 6. Tire Chains Link.
CAUTION
Tighten chains by hand. Tightening with tools could lead to overtightening. Failure to
comply could result in damage to equipment.
9. With aid of soldier No. 2, rotate outer locking hook (Figure 7, Item 2) toward sliding lock ring (Figure 7,
Item 1). Secure sliding lock ring for tight fit on each tire.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
1
1
2
ASV01390_1
Figure 7. Tire Chains Sliding Lock Ring.
10. Select HWY mode (Figure 8, Item 2) on CTIS control panel (Figure 8, Item 1) to inflate tires.
1 ON 2 3MENU
RUN
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
P
FLAT
P

EMER
IGNITION TL1
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
SAND
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
HWY 2
ASV01472_1
Figure 8. CTIS Control Panel - Hwy Mode.
11. Drive vehicle forward approximately 15 ft (4.6 m) and retighten chain assemblies to remove as much slack
as possible.
12. Secure loose chain linkage to chain assembly using lock wire or other field expedient method.
CAUTION
Tighten chains by hand. Tightening with tools could lead to overtightening. Failure to
comply could result in damage to equipment.
13. Drive vehicle one to two miles (1.5 - 3 km), stop vehicle, and tighten chains. Check that chain links are
positioned evenly on each side of tire.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
14. When operational conditions allow, check tire chains occasionally for slippage and adjust as necessary.
END OF TASK
TIRE CHAINS REMOVAL
CAUTION
Remove tire chains when not needed for icy driving terrain. Prolonged usage may damage
vehicle or drivetrain.
NOTE
Tire chains on driver's side are removed the same. Commander's side is shown.
1. With the aid of soldier No. 2, position vehicle so the inner fastener hook and outer locking hook on tire
chains are at 4 o'clock position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
TIRE CHAINS REMOVAL - Continued
2. Select SAND mode (Figure 9, Item 1) on CTIS control panel (Figure 9, Item 2) to deflate tires.
1 ON 2 3MENU
RUN
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
P
FLAT
P

EMER
IGNITION TL1
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225
80
25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
40 4WD
120 1250
175
225 7 25
50
16
40 120

C/F
TL5
CENTRAL
SAND
30 40 40 60 80 ON ON ON ON CB5 CB11
5040 70
30
30 40 50 80
90
20
km/h
30
40
ENGAGE AUX.
20 50
20
30
20
MPH km/h
60
50 90
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
20 MPH70
60
10
TACH FUEL
10
10
110
70
110
OFF CB6 CB12
0 120
10 60 KILOMETERS
0 120
MILES HIGH
000 Faria 0 0 0 00 0
0 00 000 0 0
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
2
HWY
ASV00655_1
Figure 9. CTIS Control Panel - Sand Mode.
3. Unlatch outer locking hook (Figure 10, Item 2) from sliding lock ring (Figure 10, Item 1) and disassemble
locking hook from connecting chain link (Figure 10, Item 3) on each tire.
1 1
2 3 2
3 ASV01392_1
Figure 10. Tire Chain Sliding Lock Ring.
4. Unhook inner fastener hook (Figure 11, Item 2) from connecting chain link (Figure 11, Item 1) and move
chain assembly off each tire.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0071
TIRE CHAINS REMOVAL - Continued
2
ASV01388_1
Figure 11. Tire Chain.
5. Drive vehicle off of tire chains.

6. Select HWY mode (Figure 12, Item 2) on CTIS control panel (Figure 12, Item 1) to inflate tires.
1 ON 2 3MENU
RUN
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
P
FLAT
P

EMER
IGNITION TL1
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
SAND
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
HWY 2
ASV01472_1
Figure 12. CTIS Control Panel - Hwy Mode.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0072
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL (NBC) SYSTEM
OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:

FM 3-11.5 Master power on. (WP 0030)
WP 0005
WP 0006
NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL (NBC) SYSTEM OPERATION
WARNING
• Fresh air control slide lever must be moved to OFF position when operating
vehicle under threat of NBC conditions. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
• NBC contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions as
described in FM 3-11.5 and must be disposed of by trained personnel. Do not
open NBC filter boxes if NBC contamination is suspected. Failure to comply may
• After exposure to NBC contaminants, all air filters shall be handled with extreme
caution. Residual toxic agents and radioactive materials can be extremely
dangerous. Servicing personnel must wear protective clothing, including hoods,
masks, gloves, and boots. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• All contaminated air filters must be placed into double lined plastic bags and
moved immediately to a temporary segregation area away from the work site. The
temporary segregation area must be marked with the appropriate NBC warning
signs. Final disposal of contaminated air filters must be in accordance with local
standard operating procedures. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• If contaminated by radioactive dust, the Company NBC team will measure
radiation before removal to determine the extent of safety procedures required.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0072
NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL (NBC) SYSTEM OPERATION - Continued
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
If operating vehicle under potential threat of NBC conditions, perform the following:
a. Move NBC-FAN switch (Figure 1, Item 1) on driver’s control unit (Figure 1, Item 2) to ON position.

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01259_1
2 1
Figure 1. NBC Fan Switch (200 Amp DCU).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0072
NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL (NBC) SYSTEM OPERATION - Continued
b. Put on individual masks (Figure 2, Item 1) and tighten head straps.
2 3
1
4
5
ASV00703_1
Figure 2. NBC System - Components.
c. Remove hose (Figure 2, Item 3) from protective dust cap (Figure 2, Item 4).
d. Plug hose (Figure 2, Item 3) into NBC mask canister coupling (Figure 2, Item 2).
e. Turn heater control (Figure 2, Item 5) to WARMER and adjust to desired warmth as necessary.
f. When all clear, move NBC-FAN switch (Figure 1, Item 1) on driver’s control unit (Figure 1, Item 2) to
OFF position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0072-3/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opunuwp) wpno(O00050)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0073
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - DRIVER’S NIGHT VISION GOGGLES
INITIAL SETUP:
References
TM 11-5855-262-10-2
DRIVER’S NIGHT VISION
CAUTION
• Driver’s night vision goggles must only be used in low or no light condition. Failure
to comply may result in damage to equipment.
• Night vision goggles are a precision instrument. Handle them with care at all times.
NOTE
• Night vision driving can be performed above hatch or viewing through view block.
• Follow local policies on vehicle operation using Night Vision Goggles (NVG).
1. Push lock lever (Figure 1, Item 2) up and place light control lever (Figure 1, Item 1) on master light switch
(Figure 1, Item 3) to BO DRIVE position when operating vehicle and wearing NVG.
OFF
BO STOP
MARK LIGHT
3 BO
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE
PANEL 2
BRT
DIM
PARK
OFF
ASV01310_1
Figure 1. Master Light Switch.
2. Refer to Night Vision Goggles Operators Manual, TM 11-5855-262-10-2, for NVG operating instructions.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0074
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - HIGH ALTITUDE OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
HIGH ALTITUDE OPERATION
1. When operating vehicle at high altitudes, engine loses horsepower because air is thinner than at sea level.
Horsepower loss is about three percent for each 1,000 ft. (305 m) altitude above sea level.
2. At high altitudes, exhaust from engine can become smoky. To reduce excessive exhaust smoke, use low
gears whenever possible. Shift gears as needed to avoid excessive exhaust smoke.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0075
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - CROSSING VERTICAL OBSTACLES
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
CROSSING VERTICAL OBSTACLES
NOTE
The ASV may cross vertical obstacles up to 22 in. (55.8 cm) in height.
1. Slowly approach obstacle at 90 degrees with vehicle in first gear and in four-wheel drive.
ASV01268
Figure 1. ASV Crossing Vertical Obstacles.
WARNING
All personnel and equipment must be secured to prevent injury or damage when vehicle is
forced against an obstacle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
• The vehicle will be forced upward when the skid plate mounted on the lower front
hull contacts an obstacle.
• Full throttle must be maintained throughout the entire climbing maneuver.
2. Apply full throttle as front wheels make contact with obstacle and drive vehicle onto or over obstacle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0075
CROSSING VERTICAL OBSTACLES - Continued
ASV01269
3. Apply full throttle to allow momentum of vehicle to pull rear wheels onto or over obstacle.
ASV01270
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0076
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - FORDING OPERATIONS
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0005 Hatches, doors, and door ports closed and
WP 0006 latched. (WP 0036)
Hull drain plugs installed. (WP 0167)
FORDING OPERATIONS
WARNING
Fording operations should not be attempted unless water crossing is known to be less than
60 inches (1.52 m) (Figure 1) and water bed is firm. If crossing depth and water bed are
unknown, proceed with extreme caution. If vehicle begins to sink, or water enters hull, stop
the vehicle and shift to reverse and back out of water crossing. Failure to comply may
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0076
FORDING OPERATIONS - Continued
60 IN.
(1.52 m)
ASV00679
Figure 1. Fording Depth.
1. Perform the following checks prior to fording operations:

a. Ensure that hull drain plugs (Figure 2) are installed at all locations. (WP 0167)
ASV01180
HULL DRAIN PLUG LOCATIONS
Figure 2. Hull Drain Plug - Locations.
b. Select four-wheel drive on side control panel (Figure 3, Item 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0076
1 ON 2 3
MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
ENGINE STOP NBC FAN/
OFF OFF OFF DOME LIGHTS
ON ON NBC HEAT 3 PNL IND LIGHTS
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 HEAT FUEL PUMP CB9
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
ENGINE BOTTLE
MARKER
3.5 RUN BILGE OFF ON OFF ON TL4
80
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
24 32 PUMP POSITION INHIBIT LIGHTS.
16
ON OFF 40 120
BLU GRN SYSTEM WARN LIGHTS
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
PANEL TIRE TRANSMISSION
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
30 40 60 ON ON ON ON CB5 CB11
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
ENGAGE OFF ON OFF BIT
20 50 30
20
km/h
50 90
C C SPOOL PARK INTERVEHICULAR
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
OFF OFF OFF FIRE INHIB. AUX PWR RCPT
TACH 10
70
110
OFF CB6 CB12 WASH/WIPER MOT
10 60 0 MILES 120
HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01675_1
4 3 2
Figure 3. Driver's Controls (200 Amp DCU).
c. Ensure that weatherstrip seals around all access hatches and doors are serviceable.
WARNING
Turret hatch must remain open during fording operations as an escape hatch. Failure
d. Ensure that all vehicle doors and hatches are closed and secured except turret hatch.
e. Ensure that door ports are closed and securely locked.
f. Ensure that all equipment is stowed and secured (strapped, tied, etc.) in its designated stowage
location.
g. Move BILGE PUMP switch (Figure 3, Item 1) to ON position.
h. Select SAND tire pressure setting on Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) control panel
(Figure 3, Item 3).
2. Observe the following safety precautions during fording operations:
a. Do not close turret hatch. Turret hatch MUST remain open.
b. Do not use seat belts at driver’s, commander's, or personnel stations.
c. Do not wear field pack, ammunition pouches, etc.
3. Entering the water.
a. Select an entry point with a gradual slope and 90-degrees to shoreline extending into water.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0076
CAUTION
Vehicle must enter water with wheels straight. Failure to comply may result in damage
to equipment.
b. Enter water slowly at a 90-degree angle to shoreline, at approximately 1 to 3 mph (1.6 to 4.8 kph).
c. If vehicle is on an obstruction, proceed as follows:
(1) Release accelerator pedal (Figure 3, Item 2).
(2) Depress brake pedal (Figure 3, Item 4) and stop vehicle.
(3) Set transmission shift selector on side control panel (Figure 3, Item 5) to Reverse (R) position.
(4) Release brake pedal (Figure 3, Item 4).
(5) Apply accelerator pedal (Figure 3, Item 2) to back away from obstruction, and attempt to drive
around it.
4. Leaving water.
a. When possible, select an exit point with a gradual slope and 90 degrees to shoreline.
b. Drive vehicle straight toward shore maintaining throttle speed to prevent vehicle from becoming mired.
NOTE
During fording operations transmission will downshift automatically to lower range as
required.
c. As front wheels begin climbing up shoreline, continue to apply throttle as required to maintain forward
motion.
5. Perform the following steps after fording operations:
a. Select two-wheel or four-wheel drive on side control panel (Figure 3, Item 3) as required for operating
conditions.
b. Move BILGE PUMP switch (Figure 3, Item 1) to OFF position.
c. Select correct tire pressure on CTIS control panel (Figure 3, Item 3) for driving conditions.
d. Apply brakes and stop vehicle several times to dry service brake linings.
NOTE
Hull drain plugs are only to be installed if fording operations are expected.
e. Remove hull drain plugs to drain any water that entered vehicle. (WP 0167)
f. As soon as possible after any fording operations, return vehicle to maintenance for service.
NOTE
Differential oil will appear milky in color if contaminated.
g. Loosen front and rear differential drain plugs and inspect for signs of water. If signs of water are found,
return vehicle to maintenance for service.
CAUTION
Salt water increases rusting and corrosion. All traces of salt water and salt deposits
must be removed from all parts of vehicle. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0076
h. If vehicle was operated in salt water, thoroughly wash interior and exterior of vehicle and flush bilge
pump with fresh water.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
STOPPAGE IMMEDIATE ACTIONS
INITIAL SETUP:

Set, .50 Cal. Cleaning Rod (TM 9-1005-213-10) WP 0005
WP 0006
WP 0052
Personnel Required WP 0053
Personnel (2) WP 0058
WP 0059
References
TM 9-1010-230-10
STOPPAGE IMMEDIATE ACTIONS
WARNING
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
1. 40-mm Machine Gun.
a. In event of stoppage while firing 40-mm machine gun, keep 40-mm machine gun aimed safely
downrange.
b. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 1, Item 2) on gunner's control panel (Figure 1, Item 3) to
unarmed position. Indicator lamp (Figure 1, Item 1) will not be illuminated.
0077-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opunuwp) wpno(OT02006)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
STOPPAGE IMMEDIATE ACTIONS - Continued
1 2 3
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL
350 355 0
340 345
335

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01923_1
c. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 2, Item 2) on turret control panel (Figure 2, Item 1) to OFF
position. Indicator lamp (Figure 2, Item 3) will not be illuminated.

3
350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
2
ASV01924_1
d. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 3, Item 2) on DCU (Figure 3, Item 3) to OFF position. Indicator
lamp (Figure 3, Item 1) will not be illuminated.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
1 2 3
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
P
ON DE-ICE HEAT/AC G
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
WASH START
HEATER
ON
POWER POWER OVERRIDE DE-ICE HEAT/
AC OFF OFF
ENGINE STOP
WIPE RUN
CB1
OFF ON
CB7
OFF ON TL2 NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

G
OFF NBC FAN/ DOME LIGHTS
OFF OFF
PNL IND LIGHTS

NBC HEAT 3 PNL IND LIGHTS
NBC HEAT 3
ON ON CB2
FRONT CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
ON ON
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
CB2 CB8
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
ENGINE BOTTLE
MARKER
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
4WD 175 50 FLAT DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP INHIBIT LIGHTS.
125 225 25
16
24 32 POSITION
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
C/F
TEST FAULT SILENCE
TEMP OIL VOLTS
SAN
PANEL
UNLOCK OFF ON CENTRAL
TIRE
OFF ON
TRANSMISSION
TL5
OFF ON TL3
TEMP VOLTS INFLATION
NBC HEAT 1/2
BRT
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
90 ENGAGE OFF ON OFF BIT
20 50 30 50
C C SPOOL INTERVEHICULAR
SEATS
20
PARK
km/h
OFF OFF SPARE

60
RADIO
G
20 100
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0
GRID HEAT
120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01926_1
Figure 3. Driver’s Control Unit (200 Amp).
e. Unlatch rear mantlet cover latch (Figure 4, Item 2) and remove rear mantlet cover (Figure 4, Item 1).
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01927_1
f. Move machine gun safety selector (Figure 5, Item 1) to safe (S) position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
350 355 0
340 345
335
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01928_1
Figure 5. Gun Safety Selector.
g. Remove front top detent pin (Figure 6, Item 1), rear side adjustable ball lock pin (Figure 6, Item 2), and
ammunition chute cover (Figure 6, Item 3) from turret (Figure 6, Item 4).
4
3
ASV01931_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
h. Unfasten two twist fasteners (Figure 7, Item 4) from weather boot (Figure 7, Item 1) on ammunition
flex chute (Figure 7, Item 5).
2
3
1
5
4
ASV01937_1
i. Separate hook fastener tape from each side of weather boot (Figure 7, Item 1) surface.
j. Remove weather boot (Figure 7, Item 1) from ammunition flex chute (Figure 7, Item 5).
k. Unlatch two mantlet cover latches (Figure 7, Item 3) and open mantlet top cover (Figure 7, Item 2).
l. Unlatch chute locks (Figure 8, Item 1) and remove ammunition flex chute (Figure 8, Item 2) from
40-mm machine gun.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
ASV01938_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
WARNING
Do not allow bolt to slam forward when receiver cover is open. Be prepared to catch
dropped/ejected live round. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
If the bolt will not go to the rear, the gunner will rotate the charging handle clockwise
as far as possible and will maintain pressure on the handle in order to prevent the bolt
from going forward when the feed tray is opened.
m. If round did not fire, rotate charger handle (Figure 9, Item 1) clockwise until 40-mm machine gun bolt
fully retracts to rear.
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01721_1
1
Figure 9. Charger Handle.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
WARNING
• Do not allow bolt to slam forward when receiver cover is open. A round could
fire. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Do not allow top cover to slam shut from raised position. Failure to comply
n. While holding charger handle in position to keep 40-mm machine gun bolt to rear, have qualified
personnel open 40-mm machine gun receiver cover (Figure 10, Item 1) and locate and clear
malfunction.
ASV01726_1
Figure 10. Gun Receiver Cover.
WARNING
Keep head and body clear of muzzle and barrel when inspecting 40-mm machine gun
for obstructions. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
o. Have qualified personnel carefully check for obstructions in 40-mm machine gun barrel.
(1) If bore is obstructed, have authorized personnel remove obstruction from bore in accordance
with TM 9-1010-230-10.
(2) If 40-mm machine gun is clear, reload (WP 0053), charge, and attempt to fire (WP 0058).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
2. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun.
WARNING
• The machine gun may still be fired manually with machine gun arming switch
and turret power switch turned off. Ensure machine gun is in safe position.
• Do not open the receiver cover immediately. Instead, wait 10 seconds before
taking action. The danger of a cookoff exists when the barrel is hot. Personnel
injury or death can result if a round cooks off while the receiver cover is being
opened. When opening the receiver cover on a hot gun, the gunner should
turn away until the receiver cover is fully opened. Keep muzzle of the weapon
down range on the target at all times. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
CAUTION
If the bolt cannot be retracted, keep the muzzle pointed down range. Allow 5 minutes
for cooling. Call an armorer for assistance. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
NOTE
• The steps below are for cold or hot procedures.
• The procedures listed below will assist in reducing most stoppages of the
M48 .50-cal. machine gun without performing a detailed analysis for cause of
malfunction.
• The M48 .50-cal. machine gun is considered cold if it has had less than
150 rounds fired in 2 minutes.
a. Wait five minutes to allow for possible cookoff of round.
b. Move manual charger lock selector (Figure 11, Item 1) to rearward position.
1
ASV04970_1
2
Figure 11. Manual Charger Lock Selector.
c. Pull down on charging handle (Figure 11, Item 2) locking bolt to rear.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
d. If live round or spent round casing ejects, aim M48 .50-cal. machine gun on target and attempt to fire.
If .50-cal. machine gun fires, continue normal operations. If M48 .50-cal. machine gun does not fire,
troubleshoot as follows:
(1) Fully retract and release bolt assembly (Figure 12, Item 1). Bolt assembly should return to
battery position.
3
2
1
ASV01818_1
Figure 12. Charging Handle, Bolt Assembly, and Receiver Cover.
(2) If no ejection occurs, lock bolt (Figure 12, Item 1) to rear, open receiver cover
(Figure 12, Item 3), and inspect chamber (Figure 12, Item 2).
WARNING
Keep head and body clear of muzzle and barrel when removing round or case
from M48 .50-cal. machine gun chamber. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
NOTE
If chamber is clear, qualified personnel rods barrel of M48 .50-cal. machine gun
until rod enters the barrel far enough for gunner to observe it.
(3) With bolt assembly (Figure 12, Item 1) rear and receiver cover (Figure 12, Item 3) open, have
qualified personnel gently tap round/casing out of chamber (Figure 12, Item 2) using cleaning
rod (Figure 12, Item 5) through barrel (Figure 12, Item 4).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0077
e. Elevate mantlet to gain access to M48 .50-cal. feed tray.

f. Open M48 .50-cal. feed tray cover (Figure 13, Item 2) and remove ammunition from weapon.
1
3 ASV04971_1
Figure 13. Charger Lock Selector and Feed Tray Cover.
g. Move manual charger lock selector (Figure 13, Item 1) to forward position.
h. Pull charging handle (Figure 13, Item 3) down and back and slowly ease bolt forward.
NOTE
If weapon does not fire, notify armorer.
i. Reload weapon according to loading procedures (WP 0052), charge weapon, and attempt to fire
weapon (WP 0059).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0077-11/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(opunuwp) wpno(OT02006)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - WEAPONS MALFUNCTION
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required

Wood Block, 1 in. x 1 in. x 6 in. Personnel (2)
GENERAL
WARNING
Never open the cover on a hot weapon. An open cover cookoff could occur. Failure to
A weapon malfunction is any failure of the weapon to function properly when the weapon is fired. This work
package describes weapon misfires, hangfires, cookoffs, and stoppages. These malfunctions are normally the
result of improper weapon or ammunition maintenance or the use of unauthorized ammunition. The descriptions
below apply to each specific type of malfunction rather than the occurrence of the malfunction in a specific
weapon. Immediate action is the quick response taken by the gunner to repair the weapon or correct the weapon
stoppage. Immediate action is performed by the gunner, but each trained crewman must know how to perform
immediate action.
1. A misfire is the failure of a chambered round to ignite when the firing mechanism is actuated. Such failure
can be due to an ammunition defect or faulty firing mechanism in the weapon. A misfire can also result from
failure to feed, failure to charge, or failure to lock. Only qualified personnel can unload smoke grenades after
a misfire.
2. A hangfire is a delay in igniting the propellant charge after the firing pin strikes the primer and is similar to a
misfire. After a misfire occurs, keep weapon aimed downrange and allow a five-second interval for a
possible hangfire.
3. A cookoff is the igniting of a round, caused by the heat of a hot barrel, and not caused by actuating the firing
mechanism. A cookoff may be avoided by immediately firing ammunition loaded in a hot machine gun or by
unloading the weapon.
4. A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of operation caused by faulty action of the machine gun,
ammunition, weapon feed system, or ejection system. Any stoppage must be handled as a misfire.
END OF TASK

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
UNCONTROLLED AUTOMATIC FIRE (MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN)
WARNING
to personnel.
personnel.
death to personnel.
• The charger handle must be held fully clockwise until the weapon is cleared.
1. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 1, Item 1) on gunner's control panel (Figure 1, Item 2) to OFF
position.
1 2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
335 340 345 350 355 0 ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV04802_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
UNCONTROLLED AUTOMATIC FIRE (MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN) - Continued

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
2
ASV04803_1
3. Move 40-mm machine gun charger handle (Figure 3, Item 1) downward, rotate charger handle clockwise
until bolt retracts fully, and hold charger handle in place.
350 355 0
340 345
335
1 ASV04799_1
Figure 3. 40-MM Machine Gun - Gun Charger Handle.
4. Keep weapon aimed downrange.

5. Unlatch rear mantlet cover latch (Figure 4, Item 2) and remove rear mantlet cover (Figure 4, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV04800_1
Figure 4. 40-MM Machine Gun - Rear Mantlet Cover.
6. Move safety selector (Figure 5, Item 3) to safe (S) position.
1 2
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV04801_1
Figure 5. 40-MM Machine Gun - Top Cover Latch.
7. Release 40-mm machine gun receiver top cover latch (Figure 5, Item 2) and raise cover (Figure 5, Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
NOTE
The charger handle is held in place inside the turret while soldier No. 2 works outside the
turret.
1 2
4
2
ASV04956_1
Figure 6. 40-MM Machine Gun - Mantlet Top Cover.
extension cover (Figure 6, Item 1).
2 3
1
1 ASV04805_1
Figure 7. 40-MM Machine Gun - Ammunition Chute Cover.
a. Remove detent pin (Figure 7, Item 3) from front top of ammunition chute cover (Figure 7, Item 1) and

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
b. Remove adjustable detent pin (Figure 7, Item 4) from rear side of ammunition chute cover (Figure 7,
Item 1) and turret (Figure 7, Item 2).
11. Unfasten two twist fasteners (Figure 8, Item 2) from weather boot (Figure 8, Item 1) on ammunition flex
chute (Figure 8, Item 3).
3 2
ASV04806_1
Figure 8. 40-MM Machine Gun - Ammunition Flex Chute.
12. Separate hook fastener tape from each side of weather boot (Figure 8, Item 1) surface.
13. Remove weather boot (Figure 8, Item 1) from ammunition flex chute (Figure 8, Item 3).
14. While maintaining pressure on charger handle (Figure 9, Item 2), press trigger switch (Figure 9, Item 1).
Allow bolt to slowly come forward until round/spent brass is directly over opening in bottom of mantlet.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
350 355 0
340 345
335
350 355 0
340 345
335
2 ASV04807_1
Figure 9. 40-MM Machine Gun - Trigger Switch.
15. Open 40-mm machine gun receiver top cover (Figure 10, Item 3).
2 3
ASV04808_1
Figure 10. 40-MM Machine Gun - Receiver Top Cover.
16. Unlatch chute locks (Figure 10, Item 4) and remove ammunition flex chute (Figure 10, Item 1) from 40-mm
machine gun.
17. Remove remaining linked ammunition (Figure 10, Item 2) from 40-mm machine gun.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
NOTE
Soldier No. 2 must be ready to catch live round from bottom of 40-mm machine gun
mantlet.
18. Place screwdriver or similar blunt tool through top opening in 40-mm machine gun.
19. Position tool against live round as close to rim as possible. Have soldier No. 2 ready to catch round and
push live round from lower bolt face.
20. Close 40-mm machine gun receiver top cover (Figure 10, Item 3).
21. Release charger handle (Figure 11, Item 1) and return to stowed position.
1
ASV04809
Figure 11. 40-MM Machine Gun - Charger Handle.
22. Notify maintenance personnel that there was a runaway gun/uncontrolled automatic firing
END OF TASK

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
UNCONTROLLED AUTOMATIC FIRE (M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN)
WARNING
turret power switch turned off. Ensure machine gun is in safe position. Failure to
• Do not open the receiver cover immediately. Instead, wait 10 seconds before
taking action. The danger of a cookoff exists when the barrel is hot. Personnel
injury or death can result if a round cooks off while the receiver cover is being
opened. When opening the receiver cover on a hot gun, the gunner should turn
away until the receiver cover is fully opened. Keep muzzle of the weapon down
range on the target at all times. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Never attempt to break the ammunition belt with the hands. Use the charger to
prevent the gun from firing. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Weapons can still be fired manually when all power is off. Ensure all personnel are
clear of the area before clearing weapons. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
death to personnel.
CAUTION
If the bolt cannot be retracted, keep the muzzle pointed down range. Allow 5 minutes for
cooling. Call an armorer for assistance. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
NOTE
If the charger cable breaks during downward movement, unlatch the top cover latch and
raise the cover. This will stop the ammunition feed and weapon firing.
1. Move machine gun arming switch (Figure 12, Item 1) on gunner's control panel (Figure 12, Item 2) to OFF
position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
UNCONTROLLED AUTOMATIC FIRE (M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN) - Continued
1 2
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
335 340 345 350 355 0 ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV04802_1
2. Move TURRET POWER switch (Figure 13, Item 2) on turret control panel (Figure 13, Item 1) to OFF
position.

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
2
ASV04803_1
3. Pull M48 .50-cal. machine gun charger handle (Figure 14, Item 2) downward until bolt retracts fully and hold
charger handle in place.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
ASV04810_1
1
Figure 14. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Charger Handle.
4. Keep weapon aimed downrange.

5. Move M10 manual charger lock selector (Figure 14, Item 1) to rearward position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
6. Release M48 .50-cal. machine gun receiver top cover latch (Figure 15, Item 2) and raise cover (Figure 15,
Item 1).
1 2
ASV04811_1
Figure 15. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Safety Selector.
7. Move safety selector (Figure 15, Item 3) to safe (S) position.

8. Open M48 .50-cal. machine gun cover (Figure 16, Item 1).
ASV04812_1
Figure 16. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Cover.
9. Lift cartridge extractor (Figure 17, Item 3) and remove ammunition belt (Figure 17, Item 2) from feedway.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
ASV04813_1
Figure 17. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Cartridge Extractor and Ammunition Belt.
10. Move cartridge extractor (Figure 17, Item 3) down and close cover (Figure 17, Item 1).
11. Push remaining rounds from M48 .50-cal. machine gun into ammunition boxes (Figure 18, Item 1).
ASV04814_1
Figure 18. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun - Ammunition Boxes.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0078
NOTE
If a round is stuck on the bolt face, use a 1 in. x 1 in. x 6 in. (25 mm x 25 mm x 152 mm)
block of wood to push the round down off the bolt face.
12. Inspect face of bolt to ensure no ammunition is stuck on bolt.
13. Notify maintenance personnel of M48 .50-cal. machine gun automatic firing uncontrolled.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0079
STOWAGE AND DECAL LOCATIONS
INTRODUCTION
This work package provides operator reference for stencils, stowage, data plate, and decal locations.
Stowage locations are illustrated to assist personnel in identifying inventory and assigned stowage locations for
Basic Issue Items (BII) and On Vehicle Equipment (OVE).
Stowage straps for securing BII are listed in Table 1.
Table 1. BII Stowage Straps.
BII Strap Part # Length Qty

(inches)
Flags 136249-2 12 2
Thermal Blankets 136249-5 30 1
Engine Intake Cover 136249-5 30 1
Wheel Chock 136249-5 30 1
Hand Bilge Pump 136249-5 30 2
First Aid Kit 136249-5 30 1
Tool Bag 136249-7 42 1
Vehicle Tarp 136249-9 57 2
Pioneer Kit 136249-5 30 1
Reflectors 136249-5 30 2
Tire Repair Kit 136249-5 30 1
Snatch Block 136249-2 12 1
Snatch Block 136249-7 42 1
Air Hose 136249-7 42 2
Sorbent Pillow 136249-5 30 1
Tow Cable 136249-2 12 1
Flex Neck Funnel 136249-2 12 1
0079-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(stowagewp) wpno(O00060)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0079
Exterior stencils and stowage locations - side views are indicated in Figure 1.
WARNING
DO NOT OVERFILL FUEL TANK
FUEL IN FILLER NECK. MAY CAUSE
LEAKAGE AND FIRE HAZARD
LIFT CAMMO (UNDER DRIVER’S AND COMMANDER’S FILLER CAP)
HERE POLES
LIFT HERE
JP-8 OR DIESEL
VEHICLES WITH FRAG 2: VEHICLES WITH FRAG 2:

MAXIMUM TIRE MAXIMUM TIRE
PRESSURE 85 PSI CAMMO NETS PRESSURE 85 PSI
VEHICLES WITHOUT FRAG 2: VEHICLES WITHOUT FRAG 2:
PRESSURE 71 PSI PRESSURE 71 PSI
LIFT
HERE
LIFT
HERE
JP-8 OR DIESEL
VEHICLES WITH FRAG 2: VEHICLES WITH FRAG 2:
VEHICLES WITHOUT FRAG 2: VEHICLES WITHOUT FRAG 2:
ASV01374
Figure 1. Side Exterior Stencil - Locations.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0079
Exterior stencil locations - front and rear are indicated in Figure 2.
TIE
TIE TIE TIE DOWN
DOWN DOWN DOWN
TOW EYE
TOW EYE ASV01805
Figure 2. Tow Eye - Locations.
Exterior stencils and stowage locations - top view is indicated in Figure 3.
WARNING SPARE BARREL

DO NOT EXIT (CREW COMPARTMENT CEILING)
THROUGH OR
OPEN HATCHES
WHILE TURRET IS
OPERATIONAL
(INSIDE OF DRIVER’S
AND COMMANDER’S
HATCHES)
WARNING
DO NOT EXIT THROUGH FUEL
OR OPEN HATCHES WHILE CAN
AUX. M13
TURRET IS OPERATIONAL CABLE DECON
(INSIDE OF DRIVER’S AND
COMMANDER’S UPPER DOORS) ASV01806
Figure 3. Top Exterior Stencil - Locations.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0079
Interior stencils and stowage locations - top view is indicated in Figure 4.
4-21
FIRE GRENADES
EXTINGUISHER
S.A.W. TOOL KIT
FIRST AID PAMPHLET BAG ASV01807

KIT
Figure 4. Interior Stencil - Locations.
Interior decal and data plate locations - cutaway side views are indicated in Figure 5.
THERMAL
BLANKETS ENGINE INTAKE
FIRE COVER
CHOCK BILGE
EXTINGUISHER AT4 AT4 PUMP
FLAGS
REFLECTOR
PIONEER BAG
FLEX
NECK
FUNNEL
TIRE
REPAIR
SLAVE KIT
TARPAULIN CABLE
40 MM 40 MM SNATCH
AMMO STOWAGE AMMO STOWAGE BLOCK ASV01810
Figure 5. Interior Decal and Data Plate - Locations.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0079
Interior decal and data plates - rear crew compartment is indicated in Figures 6 and 7.
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION
DATA
PLATES
DRIVER
INSTRUCTION
40 MM PLATE
AMMO STOWAGE ASV03303
Figure 6. Crew Compartment Decal and Data Plate - Locations.
.50 CAL
AMMO STOWAGE
40 MM .50 CAL
AMMO STOWAGE 40 MM
AMMO STOWAGE
CREW BATTERY
HEATER CONTROLS
RIFLE
BATTERY
ACID
CREW HEATER
ON/OFF
SLAVE RECEPTACLE
AIR SUPPLY
40 MM
AMMO STOWAGE DIESEL SUPPLY
40 MM AUX HEATER
RIFLE AMMO ON/OFF
STOWAGE
REFRIGERANT
RIFLE ASV01812
Figure 7. Rear Crew Compartment Decal and Data Plate - Locations.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0079
Interior decal and data plates - rear tunnel is indicated in Figure 8 and 9.
CAUTION HIGH INTENSITY NOISE

HEARING PROTECTION REQUIRED
RIFLE
ASV01826_1
Figure 8. Interior Rear Tunnel Decal and Data Plate - Location.
24 VOLT
CAUTION HIGH AUX PLUG
INTENSITY NOISE
HEARING PROTECTION
REQUIRED
DANGER
FAN ROTATING
WITH ENGINE RUNNING STE-ICE
KEEP CLEAR CONNECTOR
OF FAN
ENGINE FUEL
PRIMER BEHIND
THIS COVER O5550023
Figure 9. Interior Rear Tunnel Decal and Data Plate - Location.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10
CHAPTER 3
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
TM 9-2320-381-10 0080
TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM INDEX - OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM INDEX
Malfunction/Symptom Troubleshooting Procedure
AIR CONDITIONER
1. Air Conditioner Blows Warm Air ......................................................... ............................................... WP 0132
AUXILIARY HEATER (ASV037 AND SUBSEQUENT)

2. Auxiliary Heater Does Not Operate .................................................... ............................................... WP 0081
BRAKES
3. Low Brake Hydraulic Pressure Indicator Light Illuminates
When Brake Pedal Is Pressed ........................................................... ............................................... WP 0085
4. Parking Brake Does Not Hold ............................................................ ............................................... WP 0084
5. Parking Brake Drags and Overheats ................................................................................................. WP 0083
6. Vehicle Pulls to One Side When Brakes Are Applied ........................................................................ WP 0082
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

7. Air Pressure Low ................................................................................ ............................................... WP 0091
CTIS
8. CTIS Does Not Operate ..................................................................... ............................................... WP 0086
9. Five Flashing CTIS Indicator Lights ................................................... ............................................... WP 0087
10. Four Flashing CTIS Indicator Lights .................................................................................................. WP 0088
11. No CTIS Indicator Lights .................................................................... ............................................... WP 0090
12. Two Steady CTIS Indicator Lights ..................................................................................................... WP 0089
DIFFERENTIALS
13. Continuous Differential Gear Noise ................................................................................................... WP 0092
ENGINE
14. Engine Cranks But Does Not Start .................................................................................................... WP 0094
15. Engine Does Not Crank ..................................................................................................................... WP 0093
16. Engine Fails To Start After Holding GRID HEATER Switch in
ON Position for 20 - 30 Seconds ....................................................................................................... WP 0100
17. Engine Overheats .............................................................................................................................. WP 0097
0080-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(tsindxwp) wpno(T00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0080
TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM INDEX - Continued
18. Engine Stalls ...................................................................................... ............................................... WP 0095

19. Engine Does Not Develop Full Power ................................................ ............................................... WP 0096
20. Excessive Engine Oil Consumption ................................................... ............................................... WP 0098
21. Excessive Fuel Consumption ............................................................. ............................................... WP 0099
EXHAUST FUMES
22. Exhaust Fumes in Vehicle ................................................................................................................. WP 0101
GAUGE PANEL
23. Oil Pressure Gauge Is Erratic ............................................................................................................ WP 0102
HEATER
24. Heater Blows Cold Air ........................................................................ ............................................... WP 0104
25. Heater Does Not Operate .................................................................................................................. WP 0103
NBC SYSTEM
26. Low or No Air Flow to NBC Mask ...................................................................................................... WP 0105
27. NBC System - NBC Circuit Breakers Will Not Remain in ON
Position .............................................................................................................................................. WP 0107
28. NBC System - NBC Heater Blows Cold Air ....................................................................................... WP 0106
STARTING SYSTEM
29. Starter Does Not Engage Normally .................................................... ............................................... WP 0108
STEERING
30. Steering Difficulty ............................................................................... ............................................... WP 0109
31. Vehicle Drifts From Side to Side ........................................................ ............................................... WP 0110
32. Wheel Wobble .................................................................................... ............................................... WP 0111
TRANSMISSION
33. Do Not Shift (DNS) Light Flashes Intermittently ................................. ............................................... WP 0113
34. Do Not Shift (DNS) Light Does Not Turn Off at Start-Up and
Vehicle Does Not Shift Into Drive ....................................................... ............................................... WP 0112
35. No Response to Transmission Shift Selections With Vehicle
In Gear ............................................................................................... ............................................... WP 0117

TM 9-2320-381-10 0080
36. Transmission Does Not Shift Properly or Makes Abnormal Noise ..... ............................................... WP 0118
37. Transmission Oil Blowing Out of Fill Tube or Overheats ................................................................... WP 0119
38. Transmission Shifts Roughly ............................................................................................................. WP 0116
39. Transmission Does Not Make a Specific Shift ................................... ............................................... WP 0115
40. Transmission Does Not Shift Into Drive or Reverse .......................................................................... WP 0114
WARNING LIGHT PANEL

41. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Warning Light Flashes ............................................................. WP 0131
42. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Warning Light Illuminates ......... ............................................... WP 0127
43. Do Not Shift (DNS) Light Illuminates After Start-Up and Does
Not Shift Out of Neutral ...................................................................... ............................................... WP 0130
44. Do Not Shift (DNS) Light Illuminates at Start-Up ............................................................................... WP 0129
45. High Coolant Temperature Warning Light Illuminates ....................................................................... WP 0123
46. Low Brake Hydraulic Pressure Light Illuminates ................................ ............................................... WP 0126
47. Low Battery Voltage Warning Light Illuminates ................................................................................. WP 0122
48. Low Coolant Level Warning Light Illuminates .................................... ............................................... WP 0124
49. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Illuminates ...................................................................................... WP 0120
50. Low Fuel Level Warning Light Illuminates ......................................................................................... WP 0128
51. Parking Brake Warning Light Illuminates ........................................... ............................................... WP 0125
52. Transmission High Temperature Warning Light Illuminates .............................................................. WP 0121
ELEVATION CONTROL
53. Does Not Elevate or Depress ............................................................................................................ WP 0137
GRENADE LAUNCHERS
54. Grenade Launcher Control Fails ........................................................ ............................................... WP 0160
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL

55. Firing Relay Indicator Illuminates When Turret Control Panel
Turret Power Switch Is Moved to ON Position ................................... ............................................... WP 0147
56. Last Round Override Switch Does Not Remain in Override Position ................................................ WP 0149
57. Machine Gun Arming Switch Does Not Stay Armed With
Turret Power On ................................................................................................................................ WP 0148

TM 9-2320-381-10 0080
GUNNER'S HATCH
58. Does Not Lock in Closed Position ...................................................... ............................................... WP 0136
59. Does Not Lock in 15-Degree or 90-Degree Position .......................... ............................................... WP 0135
GUNNER'S SEAT
60. Does Not Lock Into Position ............................................................... ............................................... WP 0133
61. Seat Difficult or Unable To Unlock From Set Position ....................................................................... WP 0134
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN

62. Ammunition Binds in Ammunition Rack ............................................. ............................................... WP 0156
63. Does Not Charge ............................................................................................................................... WP 0158
64. Does Not Fire ..................................................................................... ............................................... WP 0157
65. Does Not Fire Electrically ................................................................... ............................................... WP 0159
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN

66. Ammunition Binds in Ammunition Rack ............................................. ............................................... WP 0150
67. Cover Does Not Close ....................................................................................................................... WP 0155
68. Does Not Charge ............................................................................................................................... WP 0151
69. Does Not Fire ..................................................................................... ............................................... WP 0152
70. Misfire of 40-MM Round ..................................................................... ............................................... WP 0153
71. Weapon Fires at Intermittent Speeds ................................................................................................ WP 0154
POWER ASSIST TRAVERSE MECHANISM

72. Does Not Manually Traverse ............................................................................................................. WP 0139
73. Turret Does Not Power Traverse ....................................................... ............................................... WP 0138
TURRET POWER CONTROL

74. Exhaust Blower Does Not Operate With Turret Power On ................................................................ WP 0145
75. Exhaust Blower Switch Does Not Remain in ON Position ................. ............................................... WP 0146
76. Sight Power Does Not Operate With Turret Power On ...................... ............................................... WP 0143
77. Sight Power Switch Does Not Remain in ON Position ....................... ............................................... WP 0144
78. Spotlight Does Not Illuminate With Turret Power On ......................... ............................................... WP 0142
79. Turret Power Switch Does Not Remain in ON Position ..................................................................... WP 0140

TM 9-2320-381-10 0080
80. Turret Power Switch Is Moved to ON Position but Returns to

OFF Position When Released ........................................................................................................... WP 0141
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0080-5/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(tsindxwp) wpno(T00002)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0081
AUXILIARY HEATER DOES NOT OPERATE
INITIAL SETUP:

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
AUXILIARY HEATER DOES NOT OPERATE
STEP 1
Does auxiliary heater function properly when heater is turned off, then on?
Cycle auxiliary heater from ON position to OFF, then back to ON (Figure 1). (WP 0070)
AUXILIARY HEATER
CONTROL PANEL
M0 C
3 20:30
ASV04710
CONDITION/INDICATION
Does auxiliary heater function properly when heater is turned off, then on?
DECISION
Yes - Problem is solved.
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that auxiliary heater does not operate.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0081-1/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(diagnosticwp) wpno(T00039)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0082
VEHICLE PULLS TO ONE SIDE WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED
INITIAL SETUP:

Gauge, Tire Pressure (WP 0175, Table 3, Item WP 0041
27) WP 0168
Hose, Air (WP 0175, Table 3, Item 29)
Equipment Condition
References Engine off. (WP 0030)
WP 0031
VEHICLE PULLS TO ONE SIDE WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED
STEP 1
Are all vehicle tires inflated to appropriate and same pressure?
1. Refer to Vehicle Data for proper tire pressures (WP 0002) and Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) presets.
(WP 0041)
2. Using air pressure gauge and air hose, check all tires for proper air pressure and ensure all tires have same
air pressure reading (Figure 1). (WP 0168)
VALVE STEM
ASV01702_1
Figure 1. Valve Stem.
0082-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(diagnosticwp) wpno(T00030)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0082
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that vehicle pulls to one side when brakes are applied.
No - Properly inflate tire(s). (WP 0168) Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does vehicle pull to one side when
brakes are applied?) If tire(s) cannot be properly inflated, notify maintenance personnel that tires will not hold
air pressure.
STEP 2
Does vehicle pull to one side when brakes are applied?
2. Drive vehicle and apply brakes. (WP 0031)
Does vehicle pull to one side when brakes are applied?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that vehicle pulls to one side when brakes are applied.
No - Problem is solved.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0083
PARKING BRAKE DRAGS AND OVERHEATS
INITIAL SETUP:

PARKING BRAKE DRAGS AND OVERHEATS
STEP 1
Is parking brake fully released?
Pull parking brake release lever completely out and verify parking brake foot pedal is completely up (fully
disengaged) (Figure 1).
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE LEVER ENGINE STOP
WIPE
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 10 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
BRA
KE
REL
EAS
E
PARKING BRAKE
FOOT PEDAL ASV01503_1
Figure 1. Parking Brake Release Lever.
Is parking brake fully released?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is parking brake dragging and overheating?)
No - Parking brake will not fully disengage. Notify maintenance personnel that parking brake malfunctioned.
STEP 2
Is parking brake dragging and overheating?
Drive vehicle. (WP 0031)
Is parking brake dragging and overheating?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0083
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that parking brake drags or overheats.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0084
PARKING BRAKE DOES NOT HOLD
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0010
WP 0016
WP 0031
PARKING BRAKE DOES NOT HOLD
STEP 1
Is lockout lever in TRANSFER CASE ENGAGE position?
1. Remove transfer case closeout cover (Figure 1). (WP 0016)
OFF OFF
ON ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
AUXILIARY PRIMARY
BATTERY BATTERY
HEATER HEATER
ASV01502_1
TRANSFER CASE
CLOSEOUT COVER
Figure 1. Transfer Case Closeout Cover.
2. Move lockout lever towards rear of vehicle to TRANSFER CASE ENGAGE position (Figure 2). (WP 0016)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0084
TRAN
ENGA SFER
GE CASE
DISE
NGAG
E
LOCKOUT LEVER
ASV01948
Figure 2. Lockout Lever.
Is lockout lever in TRANSFER CASE ENGAGE position?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that parking brake does not hold.
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does parking brake hold after moving lockout lever to TRANSFER CASE ENGAGE
position?)
STEP 2
Does parking brake hold after moving lockout lever to TRANSFER CASE ENGAGE position?
NOTE
It may be necessary to apply pressure to lockout lever until lockout lever plunger bottoms
at the end of its travel. If lockout lever cannot be engaged, move vehicle slightly to align
gears and retry to engage lockout lever.
2. With aid of soldier No. 2, toggle shift selector in and out of drive (D) (Figure 3) (WP 0031) while moving
lockout lever to TRANSFER CASE ENGAGE position (Figure 4). (WP 0016)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0084
S M
E O
L N
I
E T
C O
T R
MODE
ASV01243
DRIVE
Figure 3. Shift Selector.
TRAN
ENGA SFER
GE CASE
DISE
NGAG
E
LOCKOUT LEVER
ASV01948
Figure 4. Lockout Lever.
3. Apply parking brake. (WP 0010)
Does parking brake hold after moving lockout lever to TRANSFER CASE ENGAGE position?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that parking brake does not hold.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0085
PRESSED
INITIAL SETUP:

PRESSED
STEP 1
Does vehicle have proper amount of hydraulic oil?
WARNING
Do not operate vehicle when low brake pressure indicator light illuminates. Failure to
Check hydraulic oil level. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low brake hydraulic pressure indicator light
illuminates when brake pedal is pressed.
No - If low, add hydraulic oil to FULL mark on dipstick. (WP 0164) Shut down engine. Verify problem is solved.
(Step 2 - Does low brake hydraulic pressure indicator light illuminate when brake pedal is pressed?)WP 0164
STEP 2
Does low brake hydraulic pressure indicator light illuminate when brake pedal is pressed?
2. Depress brake pedal (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0085
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 10 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01680
BRAKE PEDAL
Figure 1. Brake Pedal.
3. Ensure low brake hydraulic pressure indicator light does not illuminate (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0085
R
N
D
LOW BRAKE
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE LIGHT
ASV01679_1
Figure 2. Low Brake Hydraulic Pressure Indicator Light.
Does low brake hydraulic pressure indicator light illuminate when brake pedal is pressed?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low brake hydraulic pressure indicator light
illuminates when brake pedal is pressed.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0086
CTIS DOES NOT OPERATE
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0041
WP 0070
CTIS DOES NOT OPERATE
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch in ON position?
NOTE
If operating in arctic conditions, vehicle must be at normal operating temperature.
(WP 0070)
Verify CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch is in ON position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0086
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
WP
CLR
5
MARK
8
3MENU
POS
0
6
OFF
9
NAV
NUM
LOCK
(COVER REMOVED)
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SPARE
GRID
OFF OFF SEATS GRID
TURRET
ON OFF
4WD
YEL
40
125
80
175
225
C/F
120
25
3.5
50
16
24 32
BLU GRN
RUN
FLAT
EMR
B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
OFF
CB4
ON GLOBAL
POSITION
SYSTEM
OFF
CB10
ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS.
WARN LIGHTS
TL4
IGNITION MASTER ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1

HEATER POWER
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
POWER
UNLOCK OFF ON CENTRAL OFF ON
30 40
TEMP VOLTS
40
50
60
40
70
80
SAN
ENGAGE
PANEL
BRT
DIM
ON ON ON ON CB5
TIRE
INFLATION
CB11
OFF
TRANSMISSION
ON AIR DRYER.
OVERRIDE
HEAT/AC
30
90 OFF ON BIT
30
C C
DE-ICE
50
20 50 20
RADIO
G
60
20 100
MPH AUX PWR RCPT
ON
OFF OFF OFF
WASH
10
OFF FIRE INHIB.

TACH 10
70
110
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12 WASH/WIPER MOT
10 60
0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
CENTRAL TIRE
INFLATION ASV01823_1
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation Circuit Breaker Switch (200 Amp DCU).
Is CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch in ON position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does CTIS operate normally?)
No - Move CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 -
Does CTIS operate normally?)
STEP 2
Does CTIS operate normally?
Operate CTIS. (WP 0041)
Does CTIS operate normally?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that CTIS does not operate.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0087
FIVE FLASHING CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0070
FIVE FLASHING CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Are all five central tire inflation system (CTIS) control panel indicator lights flashing?
NOTE
• The CTIS may take up to 6 minutes to adjust to correct tire pressure.
• If operating in arctic conditions, vehicle must be at normal operating temperatures.
(WP 0070)
1. Move CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch to ON position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0087

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
WP
CLR
5
MARK
8
3MENU
POS
0
6
OFF
9
NAV
NUM
LOCK
(COVER REMOVED)
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SPARE
GRID
OFF OFF SEATS GRID
TURRET
ON OFF
4WD
YEL
40
125
80
175
225
C/F
120
25
3.5
50
16
24 32
BLU GRN
RUN
FLAT
EMR
B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
OFF
CB4
ON GLOBAL
POSITION
SYSTEM
OFF
CB10
ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS.
WARN LIGHTS
TL4
IGNITION MASTER ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1

HEATER POWER
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
POWER
UNLOCK OFF ON CENTRAL OFF ON
30 40
TEMP VOLTS
40
50
60
40
70
80
SAN
ENGAGE
PANEL
BRT
DIM
ON ON ON ON CB5
TIRE
INFLATION
CB11
OFF
TRANSMISSION
ON AIR DRYER.
OVERRIDE
HEAT/AC
30
90 OFF ON BIT
30
C C
DE-ICE
50
20 50 20
RADIO
G
60
20 100
MPH AUX PWR RCPT
ON
OFF OFF OFF
WASH
10
OFF FIRE INHIB.

TACH 10
70
110
10 60
0 120
MILES HIGH
000 00000 00
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
CENTRAL TIRE
INFLATION ASV01823_2
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation Circuit Breaker Switch (200 Amp DCU).
3. Observe CTIS control panel and CTIS indicator lights (Figure 2).
CTIS
CONTROL
PANEL
RUN
FLAT
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
EMER
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON SPARE
SAND
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
CTIS
PANEL
HWY
INDICATOR
LIGHTS
ASV01825_1
Figure 2. Central Tire Inflation System Control Panel.
Are all five central tire inflation system (CTIS) control panel indicator lights flashing?
DECISION
Yes - Move CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch to OFF position. Problem not found. Notify
maintenance personnel that five flashing CTIS indicator lights illuminate.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0088
FOUR FLASHING CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0041
WP 0070
WP 0162
FOUR FLASHING CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Are vehicle tires free of damage?
NOTE
• If operating in arctic conditions, the vehicle must be at normal operating
temperatures. (WP 0070)
Visually inspect all vehicle tires for damage. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that four flashing CTIS indicator lights illuminate.
No - If tire holds air, start engine (WP 0030) and select RUN FLAT mode to inflate tire. (WP 0041) Notify
maintenance personnel that a tire has an air leak. If tire will not hold air, move CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION
circuit breaker switch to OFF position. Drive on run flat tire insert if necessary. (WP 0041) Notify maintenance
personnel that a tire will not hold air pressure.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0089
TWO STEADY CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0162
TWO STEADY CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
STEP 1
NOTE
• If operating in arctic conditions the vehicle must be at normal operating
temperatures. (WP 0070)
1. Visually inspect all vehicle tires for damage. (WP 0162)
3. Observe CTIS control panel for two steady indicator lights (Figure 1).
CTIS
CONTROL
PANEL
RUN
FLAT
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
EMER
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON SPARE
SAND
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
CTIS
PANEL
HWY
INDICATOR
LIGHTS
ASV01825_2

TM 9-2320-381-10 0089
DECISION
Yes - Select desired CTIS mode of operation to activate system. (WP 0041) Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 -
Does CTIS operate correctly?)
No - If tire will hold air, select RUN FLAT mode to inflate tire. (WP 0041) Shut down engine. (WP 0030) Notify
maintenance personnel that a tire has an air leak. If tire is damaged and will not hold air, move CENTRAL
TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch to OFF position. Drive on run flat tire insert if necessary. (WP 0041)
Shut down engine. (WP 0030) Notify maintenance personnel that a tire is damaged.
STEP 2
Does CTIS operate correctly?
1. Observe CTIS control panel for two steady indicator lights (Figure 2).
CTIS
CONTROL
PANEL
RUN
FLAT
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
EMER
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON SPARE
SAND
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
CTIS
PANEL
HWY
INDICATOR
LIGHTS
ASV01825_2
2. Ensure CTIS operates. (WP 0041)

DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that two steady CTIS indicator lights illuminate.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0090
NO CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0041
WP 0070
WP 0122
NO CTIS INDICATOR LIGHTS
STEP 1
Are vehicle batteries properly charged?
1. Turn MASTER POWER on. (200 Amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU (WP 0006))
2. Observe voltmeter gauge reading to verify that voltmeter reading is in the green zone (no less than 24 volts)
(Figure 1).
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS

VOLTMETER
30 40
TEMP OIL VOLTS
50
60 70
GAUGE
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01490
3. Turn MASTER POWER off. (200 Amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU (WP 0006))
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that CTIS indicator lights do not operate.
No - Troubleshoot vehicle batteries. (WP 0122) Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does CTIS operate correctly?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0090
STEP 2
NOTE
If operating in arctic conditions, the vehicle must be at normal operating temperatures.
(WP 0070)
2. Operate CTIS. (WP 0041)
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that CTIS indicator lights do not operate.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0091
AIR PRESSURE LOW
INITIAL SETUP:

AIR PRESSURE LOW
STEP 1
Does central tire inflation system (CTIS) inflate tires from SAND mode to HWY mode in less than 6
minutes when engine is operated at 1000 rpm or more?
NOTE
When any mode is selected on CTIS control panel, mode selected will flash. When proper
pressure is reached, lamp will remain illuminated.
2. Select SAND mode on CTIS control panel (Figure 1). (WP 0041)
1 ON 2 3MENU
RUN
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
P
FLAT
P

EMER
IGNITION TL1
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
SAND
50 70 SAN INFLATION
SAND
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
HWY
HWY
ASV01693_1
Figure 1. CTIS Control Panel.
3. Depress accelerator pedal until rpm is more than 1000 rpm (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0091
TACHOMETER
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
P
TEMP OIL VOLTS
P 30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 10 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01694_1
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL
Figure 2. Accelerator Pedal and Tachometer.
4. Select HWY mode on CTIS panel (Figure 3).

5. Monitor flashing HWY mode on CTIS panel (Figure 3).
1 ON 2 3MENU
RUN
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
P
FLAT
P

EMER
IGNITION TL1
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
SAND
50 70 SAN INFLATION
SAND
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
HWY
HWY
ASV01693_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0091
Does central tire inflation system (CTIS) inflate tires from SAND mode to HWY mode in less than 6 minutes
when engine is operated at 1000 rpm or more?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that air pressure is low.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0092
CONTINUOUS DIFFERENTIAL GEAR NOISE
INITIAL SETUP:

Gauge, Tire Pressure (WP 0175, Table 3, Item Engine off. (WP 0030)
27) Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
References
WP 0002
WP 0041
CONTINUOUS DIFFERENTIAL GEAR NOISE
STEP 1
NOTE
Refer to Equipment Data (WP 0002) for proper tire pressure and central tire inflation
system (CTIS) presets. (WP 0041)
Using air pressure gauge, check all tires at valve stem (Figure 1) for proper inflation, and verify all tires have
same pressure reading (Figure 1).
VALVE STEM
ASV01702_2

TM 9-2320-381-10 0092
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does correct tire pressure eliminate differential noise?)
No - Properly inflate tire(s). (WP 0041) If tire(s) cannot be properly inflated, notify maintenance personnel that
tire(s) cannot be properly inflated. Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does correct tire pressure eliminate differential
noise?)
STEP 2
Does correct tire pressure eliminate differential noise?
Operate vehicle to original point of failure.
Does correct tire pressure eliminate differential noise?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that there is differential gear noise.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0093
ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0069
WP 0162
ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Does engine crank with IGNITION switch in START position?
1. Move MASTER POWER switch to ON position (Figure 1).
2. Move TRANSMISSION circuit breaker switch to ON position (Figure 1).
3. Move IGNITION switch to RUN position (Figure 1).
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (COVER REMOVED)

IGNITION
SWITCH IGNITION GRID
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1
OVERRIDE
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
TRANSMISSION
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
LIGHT
CIRCUIT
MARKER
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
MASTER PANEL
BRT
UNLOCK
ON ON ON
OFF ON
CENTRAL
TIRE
INFLATION
OFF ON
TRANSMISSION
TL5
G
BREAKER
ON
POWER DIM
PARK OFF OFF OFF OFF

CB5
OFF ON
RADIO
CB11
OFF ON AIR DRYER
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
BIT
SWITCH DE-ICE NBC-FAN LAMP TEST TURRET

ASV04862_1
Figure 1. DCU (200 Amp).
4. Verify push button shift selector is in neutral (N) position (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0093
S M
E O
L N
I
E T
C O
T R
MODE
NEUTRAL
ASV01489
Figure 2. Push Button Shift Selector in Neutral Position.
5. Move IGNITION switch to START position (Figure 3) and attempt to start engine. (WP 0030)
6. Release IGNITION switch to RUN position and then move to OFF position (Figure 3).
IGNITION WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
ENGINE FIRE BLACKOUT
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
DE-ICE
OFF ON
HEAT/AC
TL1
G
SWITCH WIPE
OFF
RUN
OFF OFF
CB1
OFF ON
NBC FAN
CB7
OFF ON
DOMELIGHTS
TL2

ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04221_1
Does engine crank with IGNITION switch in START position?
DECISION
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is battery properly charged to crank engine?)
STEP 2
Is battery properly charged to crank engine?
1. Verify all switches are in OFF position, except MASTER POWER switch.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0093
IGNITION MASTER
POWER
SWITCH SWITCH
ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01275_1
(Figure 5).
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS

VOLTMETER
30 40
TEMP OIL VOLTS
50
60 70
GAUGE
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01490
4. Turn IGNITION switch to OFF position (Figure 6).

5. Turn MASTER POWER switch to OFF position (Figure 6).
6. Turn TRANSMISSION circuit breaker switch to OFF position (Figure 6).

IGNITION
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
TRANSMISSION
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
LIGHT
CIRCUIT
MARKER
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
MASTER PANEL
BRT
UNLOCK
ON ON ON
OFF ON
CENTRAL
TIRE
INFLATION
OFF ON
TRANSMISSION
TL5
G
BREAKER
ON
POWER DIM

CB5
OFF ON
RADIO
CB11
OFF ON AIR DRYER
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
BIT

ASV04862_1
Is battery properly charged to crank engine?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0093
DECISION
Yes - Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does engine crank?)
No - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are battery and cable terminals free of damage, corrosion, and loose fastening
hardware?)
STEP 3
Are battery and cable terminals free of damage, corrosion, and loose fastening hardware?
WARNING
• Avoid battery electrolyte contact with skin, eyes, and clothing. Wear proper eye
protection, gloves, and apron when working around batteries. If battery electrolyte
spills, take the following immediate action to stop burning effects:
• External - If battery electrolyte contacts skin, immediately flush affected area with
cold running water. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Eyes - If battery electrolyte contacts eyes, immediately flush eyes with cold water
for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention. IMPORTANT - If only one
eye is affected, ensure the affected eye is always kept lower than the unaffected
eye, during both flushing and transport. This will help keep the affected eye from
draining into and contaminating the unaffected eye. Failure to comply may result in
• Internal - If battery electrolyte is ingested, drink large amounts of water or milk.
Follow with milk of magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil and seek immediate
medical attention. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Clothing or vehicle - Immediately flush area with cold water and neutralize battery
electrolyte with baking soda or household ammonia solution. Failure to comply
1. Remove battery closeout panel.
2. Inspect battery and cable terminals for damage, corrosion, and loose fastening hardware (Figure 7).
BATTERY AND CABLE

TERMINALS
ASV01253_1
Figure 7. Battery and Cable Terminals.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0093
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are electrolyte levels of battery cells at proper level?)
No - Disconnect and clean battery and/or cable terminals (WP 0165) and tighten any loose cable and terminal
hardware. (WP 0162) Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does engine crank?)
STEP 4
Are electrolyte levels of battery cells at proper level?
NOTE
If the vehicle is equipped with a "maintenance free" type battery that does not have
removable vent caps, do not perform this step.
Inspect electrolyte levels of battery cells. (WP 0162)
Are electrolyte levels of battery cells at proper level?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Does vehicle start when slaved to another vehicle?)
No - If battery electrolyte levels are low, add distilled water to full mark in battery. (WP 0162) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 6 - Does engine crank?)
STEP 5
Does vehicle start when slaved to another vehicle?
Slave vehicle to another vehicle. (WP 0069)
Does vehicle start when slaved to another vehicle?
DECISION
Yes - Vehicle started. Notify maintenance personnel that vehicle had to be slaved to start.
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that vehicle will not start.
STEP 6
Does engine crank?
1. Verify MASTER POWER switch is in ON position (Figure 8).

IGNITION
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
TRANSMISSION
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
LIGHT
CIRCUIT
MARKER
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
MASTER PANEL
BRT
UNLOCK
ON ON ON
OFF ON
CENTRAL
TIRE
INFLATION
OFF ON
TRANSMISSION
TL5
G
BREAKER
ON
POWER DIM

CB5
OFF ON
RADIO
CB11
OFF ON AIR DRYER
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
BIT

ASV04862_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0093
4. Verify push button shift selector is in neutral (N) position (Figure 9).
S M
E O
L N
I
E T
C O
T R
MODE
NEUTRAL
ASV01489
Figure 9. Push Button Shift Selector.
5. Move IGNITION switch to START position (Figure 10) and attempt to start engine.
6. Release IGNITION switch to RUN position and then move to OFF position (Figure 10).
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
IGNITION OFF OFF SEATS SPARE G

GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
SWITCH
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01263_1
Does engine crank?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine does not crank.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0094
ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0162
ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START
STEP 1
Is ENGINE STOP T-handle in full forward position?
Verify ENGINE STOP T-handle is in full forward position (Figure 1).
ENGINE
STOP
T-HANDLE
ENGINE STOP
FWD HTR CTL

COLD HOT
PUSH HANDLE IN
COMPLETELY TO
START ENGINE
ASV01496
Is ENGINE STOP T-handle in full forward position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Do one or both fuel tanks have sufficient fuel for starting vehicle?)
No - Push ENGINE STOP T-handle to full forward position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does engine start?)
STEP 2
Do one or both fuel tanks have sufficient fuel for starting vehicle?
NOTE
Low fuel level warning light will turn on when fuel level drops to 2 gal (7.5 L).
Verify fuel tanks have sufficient fuel for starting vehicle. (WP 0025)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0094
Do one or both fuel tanks have sufficient fuel for starting vehicle?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are air cleaner and intake tube free of debris and foreign objects?)
No - Move fuel system controls to fuel tank with sufficient fuel to start vehicle, (WP 0012) or refuel vehicle.
(WP 0025) Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does engine start?)
STEP 3
Are air cleaner and intake tube free of debris and foreign objects?
Inspect air cleaner and intake tube for debris and foreign objects (Figure 2).
AIR RESTRICTION
GAUGE
AIR CLEANER INTAKE TUBE ASV01285_1
Figure 2. Air Cleaner and Intake Tube.
Are air cleaner and intake tube free of debris and foreign objects?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - After fuel/water separator is drained of possible water contaminants, does engine
start?)
No - Remove debris and/or foreign objects. (WP 0165) Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does engine start?)
STEP 4
After fuel/water separator is drained of possible water contaminants, does engine start?
1. Check fuel/water separator for water. (WP 0162)
2. Attempt to start engine. (WP 0030)
After fuel/water separator is drained of possible water contaminants, does engine start?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine cranks but does not start.
STEP 5
Does engine start?
Attempt to start engine. (WP 0030)
Does engine start?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0094
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine cranks but does not start.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0095
ENGINE STALLS
INITIAL SETUP:

ENGINE STALLS
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Does engine stall after moving fuel crossover valve and fuel selection valve handle to correct positions
for vehicle operation?
MASTER
IGNITION POWER
SWITCH SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
G
ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS
TL3
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
BREAKER
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04675_1
4. Observe both LEFT FUEL and RIGHT FUEL gauges (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0095
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
FUEL GAUGE FUEL GAUGE

LEFT TANK RIGHT TANK ASV01428
Figure 2. Left and Right Fuel Gauges.
5. Open fuel crossover valve (Figure 3).
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
CB2 CB8 INDICATORS
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
CLOSE
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
VE
AL
RV
VE
SO
OS F
CR OF
EL
FU
ON
OPEN
FUEL
CROSSOVER
VALVE
ASV01522_1
Figure 3. Fuel Crossover Valve.
6. Rotate fuel selection valve handle (Figure 4) to fuel tank with most fuel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0095
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
80 3.5
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
WIPE
WASH
OFF
IGNITION
RUN
START
OFF
GRID
HEATER
ON
OFF
MASTER
POWER
ON
OFF
TURRET
POWER
ON
OFF
BLACKOUT
OVERRIDE
OFF
CB1
OFF
CB2
OFF
CB3
ON
ON
ON
HEATER/
AC
NBC FAN/
HTR. 3
NBC HTR.
1/2
OFF
CB7
OFF
CB8
CB9
ON
ON
SPARE
HEATER/
AC
DOME
LIGHTS/
INDICATORS
TL1
TL2
TL3
SELECTOR
VALVE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
LEFT HANDLE
FUEL
TANK
RIGHT
FUEL
TANK
ASV01521_1
Figure 4. Fuel Selection Valve Handle.
Does engine stall after moving fuel crossover valve and fuel selection valve handle to correct positions for
vehicle operation?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does air restriction gauge indicate a restriction?)
STEP 2
Does air restriction gauge indicate a restriction?
Check air restriction gauge (Figure 5).
AIR RESTRICTION
GAUGE
Figure 5. Air Restriction Gauge.
DECISION
Yes - Clean or replace air filter element. (WP 0166) Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does engine stall?)
No - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are fuel line fittings and connectors free of leakage?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0095
STEP 3
Are fuel line fittings and connectors free of leakage?
Inspect fuel line fittings and connectors for leaks (Figure 6).
FUEL LINE FITTINGS ASV01287_1
Figure 6. Fuel Line Fittings.
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine stalls.
No - Notify maintenance personnel of fuel leaks.
STEP 4
Does engine stall?
Operate vehicle through various ranges and loads, and monitor engine operation.
Does engine stall?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine stalls.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0096
ENGINE DOES NOT DEVELOP FULL POWER
INITIAL SETUP:

ENGINE DOES NOT DEVELOP FULL POWER
STEP 1
Are air cleaner, intake tube, and air induction grille free of debris and foreign objects?
1. Inspect air cleaner and intake tube for debris and foreign objects (Figure 1).
2. Check air restriction gauge (Figure 1).
AIR RESTRICTION
GAUGE
Figure 1. Air Cleaner and Intake Tube.
3. Visually inspect air induction grille for debris and foreign objects (Figure 2).
AIR INDUCTION
GRILLE
ASV04649
Figure 2. Air Induction Grille.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0096
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are exhaust pipes and muffler free of dents and restrictions?)
No - Remove debris and/or foreign objects. (WP 0165) Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does engine develop
and maintain full power?)
STEP 2
Are exhaust pipes and muffler free of dents and restrictions?
WARNING
Exhaust components can become very hot during vehicle operation. Allow parts to cool
and do not touch these parts with bare hands or allow body to contact exhaust
components. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
Inspect exhaust pipes and muffler for dents and restrictions (Figure 3).
INSULATION
EXHAUST
MUFFLER
PIPE
INSULATION
ASV01609_1
Figure 3. Exhaust Pipes and Muffler.
Are exhaust pipes and muffler free of dents and restrictions?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are fuel line fittings and connectors free of leakage?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel of dents and/or restrictions.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0096
STEP 3
Inspect fuel line fittings and connectors for leaks (Figure 4).
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine does not develop full power.
No - Notify maintenance personnel of fuel leakage.
STEP 4
Does engine develop and maintain full power?
Operate vehicle through normal conditions and various speeds. (WP 0031)
Does engine develop and maintain full power?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine does not develop full power.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0097
ENGINE OVERHEATS
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0164
ENGINE OVERHEATS
STEP 1
Does engine cooling system have proper amount of coolant?
WARNING
An overheated engine is very hot and under extreme pressure. Allow engine to cool down
and use extreme caution when removing radiator cap since pressurized steam can present
a safety hazard. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
Maintenance must test dry chemical additive (DCA4) content levels in cooling system if
more than 6 qts. (5.6 liters) of coolant is added to radiator. Low or high DCA4 content may
damage engine. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Check engine coolant level. (WP 0162)
Does engine cooling system have proper amount of coolant?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does engine have proper amount of engine oil?)
No - Fill recovery bottle to proper level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does engine maintain
appropriate operating temperature?)
STEP 2
Does engine have proper amount of engine oil?
Check engine oil dipstick to verify level is appropriate for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0097
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are air induction grille and air intake grille free of debris and foreign objects?)
No - Fill engine oil to proper level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does engine maintain
STEP 3
Are air induction grille and air intake grille free of debris and foreign objects?
Inspect air induction grille and air intake grille for debris and foreign objects (Figure 1).
AIR INTAKE
GRILLE
AIR INDUCTION
GRILLE
ASV04691
Figure 1. Air Induction Grille and Air Intake Grille.
Are air induction grille and air intake grille free of debris and foreign objects?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are engine cooling fan and drive belt free of damage and loose or missing
hardware?)
No - Remove debris and/or foreign objects. (WP 0165) Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does engine maintain
STEP 4
Are engine cooling fan and drive belt free of damage and loose or missing hardware?
Inspect engine cooling fan and drive belt for cracks, excessive wear, and loose or missing hardware
(Figure 2). (WP 0162)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0097
ENGINE COOLING
FAN
DRIVE
BELT
ASV01750_2
Figure 2. Engine Cooling Fan and Drive Belt.
Are engine cooling fan and drive belt free of damage and loose or missing hardware?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Are all crew and passenger compartment closeout panels installed and is engine
service access door closed?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that engine cooling fan and/or drive belt is damaged and/or has loose or
missing hardware.
STEP 5
Are all crew and passenger compartment closeout panels installed and is engine service access door
closed?
CAUTION
The cooling air flow requires a vacuum in the engine compartment in order to work
efficiently. Engine closeout panels should not be removed during vehicle operation or
cooling capacity is reduced. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Verify all crew and passenger compartment closeout panels are installed and that engine service access
door is closed (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0097
ENGINE SERVICE
ACCESS DOOR
ASV01339
Figure 3. Engine Service Access Door.
Are all crew and passenger compartment closeout panels installed and is engine service access door closed?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 6. (Step 6 - Does engine maintain appropriate operating temperature?)
No - Install all crew and passenger compartment closeout panels that were removed and/or close engine service
access door. If closeout panels and/or engine service access door show signs of damage, notify maintenance
personnel of damage.
STEP 6
Does engine maintain appropriate operating temperature?
Operate vehicle through various ranges and loads and monitor engine temperature. (WP 0031)
Does engine maintain appropriate operating temperature?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine overheats.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0098
EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
INITIAL SETUP:

EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
STEP 1
Does engine and/or engine bay show signs of oil leakage?
Inspect engine and engine bay for signs of oil leakage. (WP 0162)
Does engine and/or engine bay show signs of oil leakage?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that engine leaks or engine bay has signs of oil leakage.
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does engine have proper amount of engine oil?)
STEP 2
Check engine oil dipstick to verify level is appropriate for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Does engine oil show signs of contamination?)
No - Fill oil to proper level. (WP 0164) If engine oil level is too high, oil must be drained to proper level. Notify
maintenance personnel that oil level is too high.
STEP 3
Does engine oil show signs of contamination?
CAUTION
Running engine while coolant or fuel leaks into crankcase could result in destruction of the
engine. Do not run engine with diluted oil in crankcase. Failure to comply may result in
NOTE
• Oil containing coolant will have a creamy brown appearance.
• Oil containing fuel will be thin, runny, and smell like fuel.
Remove engine oil dipstick and visually inspect for coolant or fuel contaminants (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0098
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
ASV01345_1
Figure 1. Engine Oil Dipstick.
Does engine oil show signs of contamination?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that engine oil is contaminated.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that engine has excessive oil consumption.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0099
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0166
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
STEP 1
Is vehicle being driven per operating instructions and within maximum tolerances?
1. Refer to Driving Procedures for proper vehicle operation. (WP 0031)
2. Refer to Vehicle Data for vehicle tolerances and normal fuel consumption ranges. (WP 0002)
Is vehicle being driven per operating instructions and within maximum tolerances?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does air restriction gauge indicate a restriction?)
No - Ensure vehicle is driven properly and within tolerance. (WP 0031) Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is
engine fuel consumption normal and within tolerance?)
STEP 2
Check air restriction gauge (Figure 1).
AIR RESTRICTION
GAUGE
Figure 1. Air Restriction Gauge.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0099
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are air cleaner, intake tube, and air induction grille free of debris and foreign
objects?)
No - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are fuel line fittings and connectors free of leakage?)
STEP 3
1. Inspect air cleaner and intake tube for debris and foreign objects (Figure 2).
AIR RESTRICTION
GAUGE
Figure 2. Air Restriction Gauge and Intake Tube.
2. Visually inspect air induction grille for debris and foreign objects (Figure 3).
AIR INDUCTION
GRILLE
ASV04649
Figure 3. Air Induction Grille.
DECISION
Yes - Clean or replace air filter element. (WP 0166) Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is engine fuel consumption
normal and within tolerance?)
No - Remove debris and/or foreign objects from air cleaner, intake tube, and/or air induction grille. (WP 0165)
Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is engine fuel consumption normal and within tolerance?)
STEP 4
Inspect fuel line fittings and connectors for leaks (Figure 4). (WP 0162)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0099
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel of excessive fuel consumption.
No - Notify maintenance personnel of fuel leakage.
STEP 5
Is engine fuel consumption normal and within tolerance?
Monitor engine fuel consumption while operating vehicle through various ranges and loads. (WP 0004)
Is engine fuel consumption normal and within tolerance?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that there is excessive fuel consumption.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0100
SECONDS
INITIAL SETUP:

SECONDS
STEP 1
Does engine fail to start after holding GRID HEATER switch in ON position for 20 - 30 seconds?
Start engine using cold weather starting procedures. (WP 0070)
Does engine fail to start after holding GRID HEATER switch in ON position for 20 - 30 seconds?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that engine fails to start after holding grid heater switch in
ON position for 20 - 30 seconds.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0101
EXHAUST FUMES IN VEHICLE
INITIAL SETUP:

EXHAUST FUMES IN VEHICLE
WARNING
Exhaust fumes are extremely dangerous. Evacuate vehicle if possible. If not possible to
evacuate, ventilate thoroughly. Replace defective parts as soon as possible. Failure to
STEP 1
Are engine cooling fan and drive belt tightly secured and free of damage?
Inspect engine cooling fan and drive belt for damage and loose fit (Figure 1). (WP 0162)
ENGINE COOLING
FAN
DRIVE
BELT
ASV01750_3
Are engine cooling fan and drive belt tightly secured and free of damage?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0101
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are exhaust pipes and muffler free of dents, restrictions, and loose clamps?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that engine cooling fan and/or drive belt is not secured tightly or has damage.
STEP 2
Are exhaust pipes and muffler free of dents, restrictions, and loose clamps?
WARNING
Exhaust components can become very hot during vehicle operation. Allow parts to cool
and do not touch these parts with bare hands or allow body to contact exhaust
components. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
Inspect exhaust pipes and muffler for dents, loose clamps, and restrictions (Figure 2).
INSULATION
EXHAUST
PIPE
MUFFLER
CLAMP
INSULATION
ASV01609_2
Figure 2. Exhaust Pipes and Muffler.
Are exhaust pipes and muffler free of dents, restrictions, and loose clamps?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that exhaust fumes are in vehicle.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that exhaust pipes and/or muffler has dents, restrictions, or loose clamps.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0102
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE IS ERRATIC
INITIAL SETUP:

OIL PRESSURE GAUGE IS ERRATIC
CAUTION
Do not operate vehicle if engine oil pressure is below 10 psi (0.7 bar). Oil pressure gauge
must read engine oil pressure within 30 seconds after starting vehicle. If oil pressure is too
low or gauge does not operate, notify maintenance personnel. Failure to comply may result
STEP 1
Is low oil pressure light illuminated?
2. Observe low oil pressure light (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0102
1 ON 2 3
MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
LOW
OIL PRESSURE P
ASV01733_1
Figure 1. Low Oil Pressure Light.
Is low oil pressure light illuminated?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does engine have proper amount of engine oil?)
No - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - After increasing engine speed to 2000 rpm, does oil pressure gauge indicate 45 - 85
psi?)
STEP 2
Check engine oil dipstick to verify oil level is at proper level for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that low oil pressure light is illuminated, the oil pressure gauge is erratic, and
engine oil level is at proper level.
No - Fill engine oil to proper level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - After increasing engine speed to
2000 rpm, does oil pressure gauge indicate 45 - 85 psi?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0102
STEP 3
After increasing engine speed to 2000 rpm, does oil pressure gauge indicate 45 - 85 psi?
NOTE
With engine at normal operating temperature, engine oil pressure at idle speed should be
10 - 30 psi (0.69 - 2.07 bar). During vehicle operations, oil pressure should be 45 - 85 psi
(3.11 - 5.86 bar).
2. Depress accelerator pedal (Figure 2) to increase engine idle to 2000 rpm.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
ENGINE BOTTLE
MARKER
80
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL ASV01740
Figure 2. Accelerator Pedal.
3. Observe oil pressure gauge (Figure 3).
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT
ON ON CB2
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS 80 3.5
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
80 3.5 RUN
FLAT
OFF
BILGE
OFF
CB3
OFF ON
SEATS GRID
HEAT FUEL PUMP
GLOBAL
CB9
OFF ON
SPARE
TL4
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
4WD
40
125
175
225
120
25
50
16
WARN LIGHTS
16
YEL BLU GRN
CB4
SYSTEM
CB10 40 120 0 7
BLU GRN
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
OFF ON OFF ON TL5
CENTRAL
30 40
TEMP VOLTS
30
40
50
30
60
40
70
50
80
90
SAN
C C
ENGAGE
ON ON ON ON CB5
OFF ON
TIRE
INFLATION
CB11
OFF
TRANSMISSION
ON AIR DRYER. BIT

YEL
C/F
20 50
SPOOL INTERVEHICULAR
BAR PSI
20
km/h
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
HIGH
TEMP OIL VOLTS
MILES
000 00 00000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01739_1
Figure 3. Oil Pressure Gauge.
4. Release accelerator pedal (Figure 2), and shut down engine. (WP 0030)
After increasing engine speed to 2000 rpm, does oil pressure gauge indicate 45 - 85 psi?
DECISION
Yes - Problem is solved. Release accelerator pedal (Figure 2), and shut down engine. (WP 0030)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that the oil pressure gauge is not operating properly.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0103
HEATER DOES NOT OPERATE
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0005 Engine on. (WP 0030)
HEATER DOES NOT OPERATE
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is HEAT/AC circuit breaker switch in ON position?
Ensure HEAT/AC circuit breaker switch is in ON position (Figure 1).

HEATER/AC (COVER REMOVED)
ENGINE FIRE TL1
ON DE-ICE HEAT/AC G
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01706_1
Figure 1. Heat/AC Circuit Breaker Switch (200 Amp DCU).
Is HEAT/AC circuit breaker switch in ON position?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0103
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are FWD HTR CTL and REAR HEATER CONTROL selectors in mid-range or higher
position?)
No - Move HEAT/AC circuit breaker switch to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does heater
operate?)
STEP 2
Are FWD HTR CTL and REAR HEATER CONTROL selectors in mid-range or higher position?
1. Visually inspect FWD HTR CTL selector (Figure 2).
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
ENGINE STOP
FREE
SPOOL
FWD HTR CTL

COLD HOT
FORWARD HEATER
CONTROL
ASV01704_1
Figure 2. Forward Heater Control Selector.
2. Visually inspect REAR HEATER CONTROL selector (Figure 3).
REAR HEATER
CONTROL
REAR TEMP
HEATER COLD HOT
CONTROL
FRESH
AIR INSIDE OUTSIDE
CONTROL AIR AIR
ASV01707_1
Figure 3. Rear Heater Control Selector.
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are FRONT FAN CONTROL and REAR FAN CONTROL switches in 0 position?)
No - Move FWD HTR CTL and REAR HEATER CONTROL selectors to mid-range or higher positions. Verify
problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does heater operate?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0103
STEP 3
Are FRONT FAN CONTROL and REAR FAN CONTROL switches in 0 position?
Visually inspect FRONT FAN CONTROL and REAR FAN CONTROL switches (Figure 4).
FRONT FAN CONTROL
FRONT FAN 0
1 2
3 P
CONTROL
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
AC AC
10
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF FREE

SPOOL
REAR FAN CONTROL
1 2
REAR FAN
0
3
CONTROL
ASV01715_1
Figure 4. Front and Rear Fan Control Switches.
Are FRONT FAN CONTROL and REAR FAN CONTROL switches in 0 position?
DECISION
Yes - Move FRONT FAN CONTROL and REAR FAN CONTROL switches from 0 position to positions 1, 2, or 3.
Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does heater operate?)
No - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Is CREW HEATER supply valve in ON position?)
STEP 4
Is CREW HEATER supply valve in ON position?
Visually inspect CREW HEATER supply valve (Figure 5).
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
LY
DIESEL SUPP ER SLAVE REC
EPTACLE
CREW HEATER
HEAT
AUXILIARY
ON AIR SUPP
LY
SUPPLY VALVE
OFF
SED
COMPRES
CLE
AIR RECEPTA
ASV02011_1
Figure 5. Crew Heater Supply Valve.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0103
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that heater does not operate.
No - Move CREW HEATER supply valve to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does heater
operate?)
STEP 5
Does heater operate?
2. Observe engine temperature gauge (Figure 6) for normal operating temperatures of 180 - 190°F (82 - 88°C).
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
P TEMP OIL VOLTS

P
TEMP OIL VOLTS

WIPE 30 40 60
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
OFF
50 70
CONTROL
40
125
80
175
225
120 0
25
3.5
50
75
7
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
40 80
C/F BAR PSI EMR 40
30
TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
30
20
10
40
20
10
30
40
km/h
MPH
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
20 50 30 50 90
FUEL
Faria
0 KILOMETERS
0000000
120
HIGH
20
km/h
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01705_1
Figure 6. Engine Temperature Gauge.
3. Move FWD HTR CTL selector to mid-range or higher position (Figure 7).
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
ENGINE STOP
FREE
SPOOL
FWD HTR CTL

COLD HOT
FORWARD HEATER
CONTROL
ASV01704_1
4. Move REAR HEATER CONTROL selector to mid-range or higher position (Figure 8).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0103
REAR HEATER
CONTROL
REAR TEMP
HEATER COLD HOT
CONTROL
FRESH
AIR INSIDE OUTSIDE
CONTROL AIR AIR
ASV01707_1
5. Move FRONT FAN CONTROL and REAR FAN CONTROL switches to position 1, 2, or 3 (Figure 9).
FRONT FAN CONTROL
FRONT FAN 0
1 2
3 P
CONTROL
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
AC AC
10
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY

SPOOL
REAR FAN CONTROL
1 2
REAR FAN
0
3
CONTROL
ASV01715_1
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that heater does not operate.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0104
HEATER BLOWS COLD AIR
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
HEATER BLOWS COLD AIR
STEP 1
Visually inspect CREW HEATER supply valve (Figure 1).
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
LY
DIESEL SUPP ER SLAVE REC
EPTACLE
CREW HEATER
HEAT
AUXILIARY
ON AIR SUPP
LY
SUPPLY VALVE
OFF
SED
COMPRES
CLE
AIR RECEPTA
ASV02011_2
Figure 1. Crew Heater Supply Valve.
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are FWD HTR CTL and REAR HEATER CONTROL selectors in mid-range or higher
position?)
No - Move CREW HEATER supply valve to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does heater
operate?)
STEP 2
1. Visually inspect FWD HTR CTL selector (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0104
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
ENGINE STOP
FREE
SPOOL
FWD HTR CTL

COLD HOT
FORWARD HEATER
CONTROL
ASV01704_2
2. Visually inspect REAR HEATER CONTROL selector (Figure 3).
REAR HEATER
CONTROL
REAR TEMP
HEATER COLD HOT
CONTROL
FRESH
AIR INSIDE OUTSIDE
CONTROL AIR AIR
ASV01707_2
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that heater blows cold air.
No - Move FWD HTR CTL and REAR HEATER CONTROL selectors to mid-range or higher position. Verify
problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does heater operate?)
STEP 3
2. Observe engine temperature gauge (Figure 4) for normal operating temperatures of 180 - 190°F (82 - 88°C).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0104
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
P TEMP OIL VOLTS

P
TEMP OIL VOLTS

WIPE 30 40 60
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
OFF
50 70
CONTROL
40
125
80
175
225
120 0
25
3.5
50
75
7
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
40 80
C/F BAR PSI EMR 40
30
TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
30
20
10
40
20
10
30
40
km/h
MPH
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
20 50 30 50 90
FUEL
Faria
0 KILOMETERS
0000000
120
HIGH
20
km/h
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01705_2
3. Move FWD HTR CTL selector to mid-range or higher position (Figure 5).
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
ENGINE STOP
FREE
SPOOL
FWD HTR CTL

COLD HOT
FORWARD HEATER
CONTROL
ASV01704_2
4. Move REAR HEATER CONTROL selector to mid-range or higher position (Figure 6).
REAR HEATER
CONTROL
REAR TEMP
HEATER COLD HOT
CONTROL
FRESH
AIR INSIDE OUTSIDE
CONTROL AIR AIR
ASV01707_2
5. Move FRONT FAN CONTROL and REAR FAN CONTROL switches to 1, 2, or 3 position (Figure 7).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0104
FRONT FAN CONTROL
FRONT FAN 0
1 2
3 P
CONTROL
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
AC AC
10
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY

SPOOL
REAR FAN CONTROL
1 2
REAR FAN
0
3
CONTROL
ASV01715_2
6. Observe heater discharge air temperature.

DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that heater blows cold air.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0105
LOW OR NO AIR FLOW TO NBC MASK
INITIAL SETUP:
References Equipment Condition (cont.)

WP 0005 Power on vehicle. (WP 0030)
WP 0072
Equipment Condition
LOW OR NO AIR FLOW TO NBC MASK
STEP 1
Are applicable NBC circuit breaker switches and NBC-FAN switch in ON position?
NOTE
• For 200 amp DCU perform step 1.
1. Verify NBC FAN NBC HEAT 3 and NBC HEAT 1/2 SEATS GRID HEAT FUEL PUMP circuit breaker
switches are in ON position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0105
NBC HEAT 1/2 NBC FAN GRID HTR SEATS

NBC FAN SEATS GRID HEAT
NBC HEAT 3 FUEL PUMP NBC HTR #3 NBC HTR #1 - #2
OFF ON OFF ON SPARE05 DE-ICE HEAT SPARE60

TL1 A/C
DE-ICE HEAT/AC G CB1 CB7 CB13 CB19
CB1 CB7 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TL7 TL2
OFF ON OFF ON NBC FAN DOME LTS
TL2 SPARE05 NBC HTR PNL LTS SPARE50
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS #3 AUX PWR
CB2 CB8 CB14 CB20
OFF ON TL3 GRID HTR
NBC HEAT 1/2 SPARE05 SEATS FUEL PUMP SPARE30
SEATS SPARE NBC HTR FUEL HTR
G
GRID HEAT #1-#2 CB15
FUEL PUMP CB3 CB9 CB21
OFF ON OFF ON TL4 INHIBIT
GLOBAL SPARE05 GPS AND SPARE10
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G WARN LTS
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM CB4 CB10 CB16 CB22
CB4 CB10
OFF ON OFF ON TL5 INSTR PNL
CENTRAL
TIRE TRANSMISSION G ALTERNATOR
INFLATION
CB5 CB11 CB5 CB11 CB17 CB23 BIT
BIT OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON TL11
AIR DRYER INTER-
INTERVEHICULAR SPARE05 RADIO VEHICLE LTS SPARE20
RADIO AUX PWR RCPT W/W
WASH/WIPER MOT
CB6 CB12 CB6 CB12 CB18 CB24
200 AMP 400 AMP M5550041
Figure 1. NBC Circuit Breaker Switches.
2. Verify NBC FAN NBC HTR #3 and GRID HTR SEATS NBC HTR #1 - #2 circuit breaker switches are in ON
position (Figure 1).
3. Verify NBC-FAN switch is in ON position. (Figure 2)

WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01574_3
NBC-FAN
SWITCH
Figure 2. NBC-FAN Switch (200 Amp DCU shown).
Are applicable NBC circuit breaker switches and NBC-FAN switch in ON position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are NBC hoses free from kinks and damage?)
No - Move applicable NBC circuit breaker switches and/or NBC-FAN switch to ON position. (200 Amp DCU
(WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU (WP 0006)) Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does NBC mask have proper air
flow?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0105
STEP 2
Are NBC hoses free from kinks and damage?
Visually inspect NBC hoses for kinks and damage (Figure 3).
NBC
HOSES
ASV01580
Figure 3. NBC Hoses.
Are NBC hoses free from kinks and damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is NBC hose properly connected to mask canister coupling and heater outlet fitting?)
No - Eliminate kinks. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does NBC mask have proper air flow?) If damaged, notify
maintenance personnel that NBC hoses are damaged.
STEP 3
Is NBC hose properly connected to mask canister coupling and heater outlet fitting?
Visually check NBC hose connections to mask canister coupling and heater outlet fitting (Figure 4).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0105
MASK
CANISTER
COUPLING
HEATER
OUTLET
FITTING
ASV01579_1
Figure 4. NBC Hose Connections.
Is NBC hose properly connected to mask canister coupling and heater outlet fitting?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Is mask canister free of damage?)
No - Connect NBC hose to mask canister coupling and/or heater outlet fitting. (WP 0072) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 5 - Does NBC mask have proper air flow?)
STEP 4
Is mask canister free of damage?
Visually inspect mask canister for damage (Figure 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0105
MASK CANISTER
ASV01578
Figure 5. Mask Canister.
Is mask canister free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that there is low or no air flow to NBC mask.
No - Mask canister must be replaced.
STEP 5
Does NBC mask have proper air flow?
Operate NBC system and verify mask has proper air flow. (WP 0072)
Does NBC mask have proper air flow?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that there is low or no air flow to NBC mask.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0106
NBC SYSTEM - NBC HEATER BLOWS COLD AIR
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0072
NBC SYSTEM - NBC HEATER BLOWS COLD AIR
STEP 1
Are applicable NBC circuit breaker switches in ON position?
NOTE
1. Verify NBC FAN NBC HEAT 3 and NBC HEAT 1/2 SEATS GRID HEAT FUEL PUMP circuit breaker
switches are in ON position (Figure 1).


TL1 A/C
CB2 CB8 CB14 CB20
OFF ON TL3 GRID HTR
G
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G WARN LTS
WARN LIGHTS
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
INFLATION
OFF ON OFF ON TL11
AIR DRYER INTER-
WASH/WIPER MOT
200 AMP 400 AMP M5550041

TM 9-2320-381-10 0106
Are applicable NBC circuit breaker switches in ON position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is NBC heater control in WARMER position?)
No - Move applicable NBC circuit breaker switches to ON position. (200 Amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU
(WP 0006)) Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does NBC heater operate correctly?)
STEP 2
Is NBC heater control in WARMER position?
Verify NBC heater control is placed in correct position for warm air (Figure 2).
NBC HEATER
CONTROL
ASV01518
Figure 2. NBC Heater Control.
Is NBC heater control in WARMER position?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that NBC heater blows cold air.
No - Rotate NBC heater control to WARMER position. (WP 0072) Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does NBC
heater operate correctly?)
STEP 3
Does NBC heater operate correctly?
Operate NBC system and verify NBC heater operates correctly. (WP 0072)
Does NBC heater operate correctly?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0106
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that NBC heater blows cold air.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0107
NBC SYSTEM - NBC CIRCUIT BREAKERS WILL NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:

NBC SYSTEM - NBC CIRCUIT BREAKERS WILL NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
STEP 1
Do NBC circuit breakers trip to OFF position when NBC system is operated?
NOTE
1. Ensure that NBC FAN NBC HEAT 3 and NBC HEAT 1/2 SEATS GRID HEAT FUEL PUMP circuit breaker
switches are ON (Figure 1).


TL1 A/C
CB2 CB8 CB14 CB20
OFF ON TL3 GRID HTR
G
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G WARN LTS
WARN LIGHTS
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
INFLATION
OFF ON OFF ON TL11
AIR DRYER INTER-
WASH/WIPER MOT
200 AMP 400 AMP M5550041
3. Operate NBC system. (WP 0072)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0107
4. Observe NBC system circuit breakers.
Do NBC circuit breakers trip to OFF position when NBC system is operated?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that NBC circuit breakers will not remain in ON position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0108
STARTER DOES NOT ENGAGE NORMALLY
INITIAL SETUP:

STARTER DOES NOT ENGAGE NORMALLY
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is battery voltmeter reading within green zone (no less than 24 volts)?
1. Verify all switches are in OFF position, except MASTER POWER switch and TRANSMISION circuit breaker
(Figure 1).
IGNITION MASTER
POWER
SWITCH SWITCH
ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
ENGINE BOTTLE CB3
OFF ON
GLOBAL
CB9
OFF ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS
TL4 TRANSMISSION
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01275_2
(Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0108
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS

VOLTMETER
30 40
TEMP OIL VOLTS
50
60 70
GAUGE
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01490
4. Move IGNITION switch to OFF position (Figure 1).

5. Move MASTER POWER switch to OFF position (Figure 1).
6. Move TRANSMISSION circuit breaker to OFF position (Figure 1).
Is battery voltmeter reading within green zone (no less than 24 volts)?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that starter does not engage normally.
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are battery and cable terminals free of damage, corrosion, and loose fastening
hardware?)
WARNING
STEP 2
Inspect battery and cable terminals for damage, corrosion, and loose fastening hardware (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0108
BATTERY/CABLE
TERMINALS
ASV01253
Figure 3. Battery/Cable Terminals.
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are starter connections and wiring free from damage, corrosion, and loose fastening
hardware?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that battery or battery cable is damaged and/or corroded and/or has loose
hardware.
STEP 3
Are starter connections and wiring free from damage, corrosion, and loose fastening hardware?
1. Remove lower center closeout panel to access engine compartment. (WP 0169)
2. Visually inspect starter connections and wiring for damage, corrosion, and loose fastening hardware
(Figure 4).
STARTER
MOTOR
O5550025
Figure 4. Starter Motor.
3. Install lower center closeout panel. (WP 0169)
Are starter connections and wiring free from damage, corrosion, and loose fastening hardware?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0108
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that starter does not engage normally.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that starter connections are loose, corroded, or damaged.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0109
STEERING DIFFICULTY
INITIAL SETUP:

27) WP 0041
Hose, Air (WP 0175, Table 3, Item 29) WP 0162
WP 0164
WP 0168
Materials/Parts
Lubricating Oil, Engine OE/HDO 10 (WP 0177,
Table 1, Item 24) Equipment Condition
References
WP 0002
STEERING DIFFICULTY
STEP 1
Is vehicle difficult to steer in TWO-WHEEL DRIVE mode?
CAUTION
• Do not shift vehicle into four-wheel drive at speeds higher than 28 mph (45 km/h).
• Do not operate vehicle in four-wheel drive on hard surfaces. Failure to comply may
If vehicle is in four-wheel drive (4 WD), move drive selector lever to two-wheel drive (2 WD) (Figure 1) and
operate vehicle (Figure 1). (WP 0031)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0109
2 WD
4 WD
DRIVE SELECTOR
LEVER
ASV01492
Figure 1. Drive Selector Lever.
Is vehicle difficult to steer in TWO-WHEEL DRIVE mode?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are vehicle tires properly inflated and free of damage?)
STEP 2
Are vehicle tires properly inflated and free of damage?
NOTE
Refer to Equipment Data (WP 0002) for proper tire pressure and Central Tire Inflation
System (CTIS) pressures. (WP 0041)
Use air pressure gauge and air hose to check all tires for proper inflation and verify all tires have same
pressure reading. (WP 0168)
Are vehicle tires properly inflated and free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are vehicle wheels, steering linkages, and axles free of foreign objects that may
cause binding and steering difficulty?)
No - Properly inflate tire(s). (WP 0168) If tire(s) require further repair, notify maintenance personnel that tire repair
is required. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is vehicle difficult to steer?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0109
STEP 3
Are vehicle wheels, steering linkages, and axles free of foreign objects that may cause binding and
steering difficulty?
Visually inspect wheels, steering linkages, and axles for foreign objects that may cause binding and steering
difficulty (Figure 2).
STEERING LINKAGE ASV01684_1
Figure 2. Steering Linkage.
Are vehicle wheels, steering linkages, and axles free of foreign objects that may cause binding and steering
difficulty?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Does vehicle have proper amount of hydraulic oil?)
No - Remove foreign objects. If unable to remove foreign objects, notify maintenance personnel that foreign
objects cannot be removed. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is vehicle difficult to steer?)
STEP 4
Visually inspect hydraulic oil dipstick to verify oil level is appropriate for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that there is steering difficulty.
No - Fill hydraulic oil to proper level. (WP 0164) If hydraulic oil level is too high, oil must be drained to proper
level. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is vehicle difficult to steer?)
STEP 5
Is vehicle difficult to steer?
1. Operate vehicle. (WP 0031)
Is vehicle difficult to steer?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that steering is difficult.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0110
VEHICLE DRIFTS FROM SIDE TO SIDE
INITIAL SETUP:

27) WP 0168
Equipment Condition
References Engine off. (WP 0030)
WP 0031
VEHICLE DRIFTS FROM SIDE TO SIDE
STEP 1
NOTE
Refer to Equipment Data (WP 0002) for proper tire pressure and central tire inflation
system (CTIS) presets. (WP 0041)
Use air pressure gauge and air hose to check all tires for proper inflation and verify all tires have same
pressure reading (Figure 1). (WP 0168)
VALVE STEM
ASV01702_3

TM 9-2320-381-10 0110
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does vehicle steering linkage have loose components or missing hardware?)
No - Properly inflate tire(s). (WP 0168) If tire(s) cannot be properly be inflated, notify maintenance personnel that
tire is damaged. Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does vehicle drift from side to side?)
STEP 2
Does vehicle steering linkage have loose components or missing hardware?
Visually inspect steering linkage components for loose and missing hardware (Figure 2).
STEERING LINKAGE ASV01684_2
Figure 2. Steering Linkage.
Does vehicle steering linkage have loose components or missing hardware?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that there is loose or missing hardware.
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that vehicle drifts from side to side.
STEP 3
Does vehicle drift from side to side?
Does vehicle drift from side to side?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that vehicle drifts from side to side.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0111
WHEEL WOBBLE
INITIAL SETUP:

WHEEL WOBBLE
STEP 1
Are vehicle wheels free of dirt, mud, snow, or debris?
Visually inspect all wheels for dirt, mud, snow, or debris
Are vehicle wheels free of dirt, mud, snow, or debris?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are vehicle wheels free of missing, damaged, or loose lug nuts, studs, warped or
bent rims, or tire damage?)
No - Remove debris from wheels. Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does vehicle have wheel wobble?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0111
STEP 2
Are vehicle wheels free of missing, damaged, or loose lug nuts, studs, warped or bent rims, or tire
damage?
Visually inspect all wheels for missing, damaged, or loose lug nuts, studs, warped or bent rims, or tire
damage (Figure 1). (WP 0162)
LUG NUT
STUD
ASV01504_1
Figure 1. Lug Nuts and Studs.
Are vehicle wheels free of missing, damaged, or loose lug nuts, studs, warped or bent rims, or tire damage?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel of wheel wobble.
No - Notify maintenance personnel of missing, damaged, or loose wheel hardware or damaged rims.
STEP 3
Does vehicle have wheel wobble?
Does vehicle have wheel wobble?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel of wheel wobble.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0112
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT DOES NOT TURN OFF AT START-UP AND VEHICLE DOES NOT SHIFT INTO
DRIVE
INITIAL SETUP:

DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT DOES NOT TURN OFF AT START-UP AND VEHICLE DOES NOT SHIFT INTO
DRIVE
STEP 1
Is engine temperature within normal operating temperature or ambient temperature above 32°F (0°C)?
NOTE
Do Not Shift (DNS) warning indicator light will illuminate if transmission oil temperature is
below 32°F (0°C). Transmission will not shift out of neutral (N) until oil temperature is
above 31°F (-0.55°C).
Run engine until normal operating temperature reaches 160 - 200°F (71 - 93°C). (WP 0070)
Is engine temperature within normal operating temperature or ambient temperature above 32°F (0°C)?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does Do Not Shift (DNS) light turn off and does vehicle operate correctly?)
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that vehicle will not reach normal operating temperature
and Do Not Shift (DNS) light does not turn off.
STEP 2
Does Do Not Shift (DNS) light turn off and does vehicle operate correctly?
Operate vehicle through various ranges and loads. (WP 0031)
Does Do Not Shift (DNS) light turn off and does vehicle operate correctly?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that Do Not Shift (DNS) light does not turn off at start-up
and vehicle does not shift into drive.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0113
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT FLASHES INTERMITTENTLY
INITIAL SETUP:

DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT FLASHES INTERMITTENTLY
STEP 1
Is DNS light flashing intermittently?
1. Verify vehicle and switch positions are in correct positions for operating vehicle. (WP 0031)
2. Verify Do Not Shift (DNS) light is flashing intermittently (Figure 1).
DO NOT SHIFT
LIGHT
R
N
D
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
125 225 25
16
24 32 POSITION
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 70 OFF CB6 CB12 WASH/WIPER MOT
P
10 110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01351_1
Figure 1. Do Not Shift Light.
Is DNS light flashing intermittently?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that Do Not Shift (DNS) light flashes intermittently.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0114
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT SHIFT INTO DRIVE OR REVERSE
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0010
WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0164
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT SHIFT INTO DRIVE OR REVERSE
STEP 1
Is parking brake disengaged?
Ensure parking brake pedal is disengaged. (WP 0010)
Is parking brake disengaged?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is engine at appropriate idle (900 - 1000 rpm) for transmission shift(s)?)
No - Release parking brake. (WP 0010) Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does transmission shift into drive and
reverse?)
STEP 2
Is engine at appropriate idle (900 - 1000 rpm) for transmission shift(s)?
2. Observe tachometer and verify engine idle is between 900 - 1000 rpm (Figure 1).
TACHOMETER
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01365
Figure 1. Tachometer.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0114
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Does transmission have proper amount of transmission oil?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that engine idle is too low or too high.
STEP 3
Does transmission have proper amount of transmission oil?
1. Allow engine to warm to normal operating temperature.
2. Check transmission oil dipstick to verify oil level is appropriate for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission will not shift into drive or reverse.
No - Fill oil to proper level. (WP 0164) Shut down engine. (WP 0030) If transmission oil level is too high, oil must
be drained to proper level. Notify maintenance personnel that oil must be drained.
STEP 4
Does transmission shift into drive and reverse?
2. Verify transmission shifts into drive and reverse. (WP 0031)
Does transmission shift into drive and reverse?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission will not shift into drive or reverse.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0115
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT MAKE A SPECIFIC SHIFT
INITIAL SETUP:

Personnel (2) Engine on. (WP 0030)
References
WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0164
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT MAKE A SPECIFIC SHIFT
STEP 1
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Will transmission make a specific shift after cooling transmission oil?)
No - If transmission oil level is low, fill transmission to appropriate level with proper transmission oil. (WP 0164)
Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does transmission operate correctly?) If transmission is overfilled, notify
maintenance personnel of transmission overfill condition.
STEP 2
Will transmission make a specific shift after cooling transmission oil?
1. Run engine at 1200 - 1500 rpm for 2 - 3 minutes. (WP 0030)
NOTE
• The Do Not Shift (DNS) warning indicator will illuminate if transmission oil
temperature is below 32°F (0°C). Transmission will not shift out of neutral until oil
temperature is above 31°F (-0.55°C).
• If transmission oil temperature is between -24°F and 19°F (-31°C and -7°C),
shifting will be limited to first and reverse gears only.
• If transmission oil temperature is above normal operating temperature, running the
engine at an increased rpm will allow transmission oil to flow through transmission
cooler and lower transmission oil temperature.
2. Attempt to shift transmission to desired gear. (WP 0031)
Will transmission make a specific shift after cooling transmission oil?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0115
DECISION
No - Notify maintenance personnel that transmission will not make a specific shift.
STEP 3
Does transmission operate correctly?
1. Operate vehicle through normal operations and verify transmission operates correctly. (WP 0031)
DECISION
No - Notify maintenance personnel that transmission will not make a specific shift.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0116
TRANSMISSION SHIFTS ROUGHLY
INITIAL SETUP:

Personnel (2) Engine on. (WP 0030)
References
WP 0162
WP 0164
TRANSMISSION SHIFTS ROUGHLY
STEP 1
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is engine at appropriate idle (900 - 1000 rpm) for transmission shift(s)?)
No - Fill oil to proper level. (WP 0164) If transmission oil is too high, oil must be drained to proper level. Notify
maintenance personnel that transmission oil level is too high.
STEP 2
2. Observe tachometer and verify engine idle is between 900 - 1000 rpm (Figure 1).
TACHOMETER
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01365
Figure 1. Tachometer.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0116
DECISION
Yes - Problem is in transmission. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission shifts roughly.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that engine idle is too low or too high.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0117
NO RESPONSE TO TRANSMISSION SHIFT SELECTIONS WITH VEHICLE IN GEAR
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0016
WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0164
NO RESPONSE TO TRANSMISSION SHIFT SELECTIONS WITH VEHICLE IN GEAR
STEP 1
3. Check transmission oil dipstick to verify transmission oil level is appropriate for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is transfer case drive lockout lever engaged?)
No - Fill oil to proper level. (WP 0164) If transmission oil level is too high, oil must be drained to proper level.
Notify maintenance personnel that transmission oil level is too high. (WP 0164)
STEP 2
Is transfer case drive lockout lever engaged?
1. Remove transfer case closeout panel.
2. Verify transfer case drive lockout lever is engaged. (WP 0016)
Is transfer case drive lockout lever engaged?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel of no response to transmission shift selections.
No - Engage transfer case drive lockout lever. (WP 0016) Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Does transmission shift
correctly?)
STEP 3
Does transmission shift correctly?
2. Operate vehicle to verify transmission shifts correctly. (WP 0031)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0117
Does transmission shift correctly?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission has no response to shift selections.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0118
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT SHIFT PROPERLY OR MAKES ABNORMAL NOISES
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0164
TRANSMISSION DOES NOT SHIFT PROPERLY OR MAKES ABNORMAL NOISES
STEP 1
Is transmission oil level within normal range?
NOTE
• Governed engine speeds correspond to maximum speed of respective
transmission gear. See vehicle operation in Driving Procedures (WP 0031) for
maximum governed engine speeds.
• Engine is governed to different maximum speeds for load/no-load configuration.
When vehicle does not have a load, engine governed maximum speed is 2750
rpm. When vehicle has a load, engine governed maximum speed is 2000 rpm.
3. Visually inspect transmission oil dipstick to verify oil level is at normal level for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
Is transmission oil level within normal range?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does transmission operate correctly?)
No - Fill oil to proper level. (WP 0164) If transmission oil level is too high, oil must be drained to proper level.
Notify maintenance personnel that oil level is too high.
STEP 2
Operate vehicle while paying close attention to how transmission engages and shifts. (WP 0031)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0118
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is transmission noise within normal range and level?)
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission does not engage or shift properly.
STEP 3
Is transmission noise within normal range and level?
Operate vehicle while paying close attention to transmission noise. (WP 0031)
Is transmission noise within normal range and level?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission has abnormal noise.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0119
TRANSMISSION OIL BLOWING OUT OF FILL TUBE OR OVERHEATS
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0164
TRANSMISSION OIL BLOWING OUT OF FILL TUBE OR OVERHEATS
STEP 1
Is transmission oil fill cap secured tightly?
Ensure that transmission fill cap is secured tightly (Figure 1).
TRANSMISSION
FILL CAP AND
DIPSTICK
ASV01408_1
Figure 1. Transmission Fill Cap.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0119
Is transmission oil fill cap secured tightly?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does transmission have correct amount of transmission oil?)
No - If unable to securely tighten transmission oil fill cap, notify maintenance personnel that transmission oil fill
cap is damaged. Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does oil blow out of fill tube?)
STEP 2
Does transmission have correct amount of transmission oil?
2. Operate to normal operating temperature.
3. Check transmission oil dipstick to verify oil level is at normal level for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
Does transmission have correct amount of transmission oil?
DECISION
Yes - Oil level OK. Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is oil free from aeration, contamination, and abnormal color?)
No - Fill oil to proper level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does oil blow out of fill tube?) If oil level
is too high, oil must be drained to proper level. Notify maintenance personnel that oil level is too high.
STEP 3
Is oil free from aeration, contamination, and abnormal color?
NOTE
• Contaminated oil viscosity is deteriorated and may appear cloudy, light in color,
and foamy.
• Oil containing coolant has a creamy brown appearance.
• Oil containing fuel is thin, runny, and smells like fuel.
Visually inspect oil for signs of contamination and abnormal color.
Is oil free from aeration, contamination, and abnormal color?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that oil blows out of fill tube.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that oil is contaminated and discolored.
STEP 4
Does oil blow out of fill tube?
Operate vehicle through various ranges and loads. (WP 0031)
Does oil blow out of fill tube?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission oil is blowing out of fill tube.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0120
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0164
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
STEP 1
Check engine oil dipstick to verify oil level is at proper level for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does oil pressure gauge indicate proper pressures while low oil pressure light is
illuminated?)
No - Fill engine oil to proper level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Is engine oil pressure correct and
low oil pressure warning light off?)
STEP 2
Does oil pressure gauge indicate proper pressures while low oil pressure light is illuminated?
CAUTION
NOTE
• Low oil pressure warning light illuminates if oil pressure drops below 10 psi
(0.7 bar).
• At idle, engine oil pressure should be 10 - 30 psi (0.7 - 2.0 bar).
• While driving, engine oil pressure should be 45 - 85 psi (3.1 - 5.9 bar).
2. Note engine oil pressure (Figure 1).
3. Note low oil pressure warning light (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0120
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT
ON ON CB2
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
80 3.5 RUN
FLAT
OFF
BILGE
OFF
CB3
OFF ON
SEATS GRID
HEAT FUEL PUMP
GLOBAL
CB9
OFF ON
SPARE
TL4
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
4WD
40
125
175
225
120
25
50
16
WARN LIGHTS
16
YEL BLU GRN
CB4
SYSTEM
CB10 40 120 0 7
BLU GRN
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
OFF ON OFF ON TL5
CENTRAL
30 40
TEMP VOLTS
30
40
50
30
60
40
70
50
80
90
SAN
C C
ENGAGE
ON ON ON ON CB5
OFF ON
TIRE
INFLATION
CB11
OFF
TRANSMISSION
ON AIR DRYER. BIT

YEL
C/F
20 50
BAR PSI
20
km/h
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
HIGH
TEMP OIL VOLTS
MILES
000 00 00000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01739_2
1 ON 2 3
MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
LOW
OIL PRESSURE P
ASV01733_2
Figure 2. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light.
4. Raise engine rpm to 2000 rpm and note engine oil pressure. (WP 0031)
5. Note low oil pressure warning light (Figure 2).
Does oil pressure gauge indicate proper pressures while low oil pressure light is illuminated?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0120
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low oil pressure warning light is illuminated.
No - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is engine oil pressure correct and low oil pressure warning light off?)
STEP 3
Is engine oil pressure correct and low oil pressure warning light off?
CAUTION
NOTE
• Low oil pressure warning light illuminates if oil pressure drops below 10 psi
(0.7 bar).
• At idle, engine oil pressure should be 10 - 30 psi (0.7 - 2.0 bar).
• While driving, engine oil pressure should be 45 - 85 psi (3.1 - 5.9 bar).
2. Note engine oil pressure (Figure 3).
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT
ON ON CB2
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
80 3.5 RUN
FLAT
OFF
BILGE
OFF
CB3
OFF ON
SEATS GRID
HEAT FUEL PUMP
GLOBAL
CB9
OFF ON
SPARE
TL4
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
4WD
40
125
175
225
120
25
50
16
WARN LIGHTS
16
YEL BLU GRN
CB4
SYSTEM
CB10 40 120 0 7
BLU GRN
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
OFF ON OFF ON TL5
CENTRAL
30 40
TEMP VOLTS
30
40
50
30
60
40
70
50
80
90
SAN
C C
ENGAGE
ON ON ON ON CB5
OFF ON
TIRE
INFLATION
CB11
OFF
TRANSMISSION
ON AIR DRYER. BIT

YEL
C/F
20 50
BAR PSI
20
km/h
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
HIGH
TEMP OIL VOLTS
MILES
000 00 00000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01739_2
3. Observe low oil pressure warning light during idle and while driving.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0120
1 ON 2 3
MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
LOW
OIL PRESSURE P
ASV01733_2
Figure 4. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light.
4. Operate vehicle and note engine oil pressure. (WP 0031)
Is engine oil pressure correct and low oil pressure warning light off?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low oil pressure warning light is illuminated.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0121
TRANSMISSION HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0031
WP 0162
WP 0164
TRANSMISSION HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
STEP 1
3. Visually inspect transmission oil dipstick to verify oil level is at normal level for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is gear selection correct for current driving conditions?)
No - Shut down engine. (WP 0030) Fill transmission oil to proper level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step
4 - Does transmission high temperature warning light remain illuminated during operation?) If transmission
fluid is overfilled or foamy, notify maintenance personnel that transmission fluid is overfilled.
STEP 2
Is gear selection correct for current driving conditions?
Ensure gear selection is correct for current driving conditions. (WP 0031)
Is gear selection correct for current driving conditions?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is vehicle free from foreign objects that may cause transmission to experience
excessive loads?)
No - Select proper gear. (WP 0031) Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does transmission high temperature
warning light remain illuminated during operation?)
STEP 3
Is vehicle free from foreign objects that may cause transmission to experience excessive loads?
Inspect undercarriage of vehicle, tires, and wheel wells for any foreign objects that may cause excessive
loads. (WP 0162)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0121
Is vehicle free from foreign objects that may cause transmission to experience excessive loads?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission high temperature warning light
illuminated.
No - Remove foreign object(s). Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does transmission high temperature warning
light remain illuminated during operation?)
STEP 4
Does transmission high temperature warning light remain illuminated during operation?
1. Ensure transmission high temperature warning light is off (Figure 1).
TRANSMISSION
HIGH
TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT
R
N
D
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01734_1
Figure 1. Transmission High Temperature Warning Light.
Does transmission high temperature warning light remain illuminated during operation?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0121
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that transmission high temperature warning light
illuminates.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0122
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0030
WP 0162
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
STEP 1
Does voltmeter read within green zone (no less than 24 volts)?
2. Observe voltmeter reading (Figure 1).
GREEN
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
24
32
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP ENGINE BOTTLE
MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
FLAT
16
DRIVE DRIVE
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50 90
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
- +
VOLTS
ASV01737_1
Figure 1. Voltmeter.
Does voltmeter read within green zone (no less than 24 volts)?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low battery voltage warning light illuminates.
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are battery electrolyte levels normal for vehicle operation?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0122
WARNING
NOTE
If the vehicle is equipped with a “maintenance free” type battery that does not have
removable vent caps, do not perform Step 2.
STEP 2
Are battery electrolyte levels normal for vehicle operation?
Ensure battery electrolyte levels are at proper levels for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
Are battery electrolyte levels normal for vehicle operation?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Does voltmeter read within green zone (no less than 24 volts) with engine running?)
No - If battery electrolyte levels are low, add distilled water to full mark in battery. (WP 0162) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 4 - Is low battery voltage warning light off and voltmeter reading within green zone (no less than
24 volts)?)
STEP 3
Does voltmeter read within green zone (no less than 24 volts) with engine running?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0122
GREEN
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
24
32
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
3.5 RUN MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
FLAT
16
DRIVE DRIVE
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
30
20 50 20
km/h
50
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
- +
VOLTS
ASV01737_1
Does voltmeter read within green zone (no less than 24 volts) with engine running?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low battery voltage warning light illuminates.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that battery requires servicing or replacement.
STEP 4
Is low battery voltage warning light off and voltmeter reading within green zone (no less than 24 volts)?
GREEN
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
24
32
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
FLAT
16
DRIVE DRIVE
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50 90
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
- +
VOLTS
ASV01737
3. Visually inspect low battery voltage warning light.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0122
R
N
D
LOW BATTERY
VOLTAGE
WARNING LIGHT
ASV01738_1
Figure 4. Low Battery Voltage Warning Light.
Is low battery voltage warning light off and voltmeter reading within green zone (no less than 24 volts)?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low battery voltage warning light illuminates.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0123
HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0162
WP 0164
WP 0169
HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
STEP 1
Is engine temperature gauge in normal range of 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C)?
CAUTION
Shut down engine if engine temperature exceeds 230°F (110°C). Failure to comply may
2. Allow engine to warm to normal operating temperatures.
3. Observe engine temperature gauge (Figure 1).
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
P TEMP OIL VOLTS

P
TEMP OIL VOLTS

WIPE 30 40 60
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
OFF
50 70
CONTROL
40
125
80
175
225
120 0
25
3.5
50
75
7
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
40 80
C/F BAR PSI EMR 40
30
TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
30
20
10
40
20
10
30
40
km/h
MPH
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
20 50 30 50 90
FUEL
Faria
0 KILOMETERS
0000000
120
HIGH
20
km/h
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01705_3
Is engine temperature gauge in normal range of 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C)?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that high coolant temperature warning light illuminates.
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are engine closeout panels secure?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0123
STEP 2
Are engine closeout panels secure?
Verify engine closeout panels are secure. (WP 0169)
Are engine closeout panels secure?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are radiator intake grille and intake side of air conditioner condenser free from
foreign objects and dirt that could cause high coolant temperatures?)
No - Secure engine closeout panels. (WP 0169) Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Is high coolant temperature
warning light off and engine temperature gauge in normal range of 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C) with engine
running?)
STEP 3
Are radiator intake grille and intake side of air conditioner condenser free from foreign objects and dirt
that could cause high coolant temperatures?
Inspect radiator grille and intake side of air conditioner condenser (Figure 2).
AIR INTAKE
GRILLE
AIR CONDITIONING
CONDENSER
ASV01752_1
Figure 2. Air Intake Grille and Air Conditioning Condenser.
Are radiator intake grille and intake side of air conditioner condenser free from foreign objects and dirt that
could cause high coolant temperatures?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0123
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Is coolant level in radiator overflow recovery bottle at normal level?)
No - Remove foreign object(s) from radiator grille. If foreign objects are found on the intake side of air conditioner
condenser, notify maintenance personnel that air conditioner condenser has foreign objects. Verify problem is
solved (Step 6 - Is high coolant temperature warning light off and engine temperature gauge in normal range
of 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C) with engine running?)
STEP 4
Is coolant level in radiator overflow recovery bottle at normal level?
Verify coolant is at normal level. (WP 0162)
Is coolant level in radiator overflow recovery bottle at normal level?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Are engine cooling fan and drive belt free of missing hardware or damage?)
No - Fill recovery bottle to normal level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Is high coolant temperature
warning light off and engine temperature gauge in normal range of 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C) with engine
running?)
STEP 5
Are engine cooling fan and drive belt free of missing hardware or damage?
Inspect engine cooling fan and drive belt (Figure 3).
ENGINE COOLING
FAN
DRIVE
BELT
ASV01750_4
Are engine cooling fan and drive belt free of missing hardware or damage?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that high coolant temperature warning light illuminates.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that cooling fan and/or belt is missing or damaged.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0123
STEP 6
Is high coolant temperature warning light off and engine temperature gauge in normal range of 180 -
200°F (82 - 93°C) with engine running?
CAUTION
2. Allow engine temperature gauge to reach normal operating temperature of 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C)
(Figure 4).
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
P TEMP OIL VOLTS

P
TEMP OIL VOLTS

WIPE 30 40 60
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
OFF
50 70
CONTROL
40
125
80
175
225
120 0
25
3.5
50
75
7
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
40 80
C/F BAR PSI EMR 40
30
TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
30
20
10
40
20
10
30
40
km/h
MPH
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
20 50 30 50 90
FUEL
Faria
0 KILOMETERS
0000000
120
HIGH
20
km/h
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01705_3
3. After reaching normal temperature, continue to run engine for 10 minutes.

4. Observe high coolant temperature warning light (Figure 5).
R
N
D
HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT
ASV01751_1
Figure 5. High Coolant Temperature Warning Light.
Is high coolant temperature warning light off and engine temperature gauge in normal range of 180 - 200°F
(82 - 93°C) with engine running?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0123
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that high coolant temperature warning light illuminates.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0124
LOW COOLANT LEVEL WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

References
WP 0162
WP 0164
LOW COOLANT LEVEL WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
STEP 1
Does engine cooling system have normal amount of coolant for normal vehicle operation?
Check engine coolant level. (WP 0162)
Does engine cooling system have normal amount of coolant for normal vehicle operation?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does engine temperature gauge approach or exceed 200°F (93°C)?)
No - Add engine coolant to FULL mark on recovery bottle. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Is low
coolant level warning light off?)
STEP 2
Does engine temperature gauge approach or exceed 200°F (93°C)?
CAUTION
1. Start engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature. (WP 0030)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0124
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
P TEMP OIL VOLTS

P
TEMP OIL VOLTS

WIPE 30 40 60
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
OFF
50 70
CONTROL
40
125
80
175
225
120 0
25
3.5
50
75
7
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
40 80
C/F BAR PSI EMR 40
30
TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
30
20
10
40
20
10
30
40
km/h
MPH
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
20 50 30 50 90
FUEL
Faria
0 KILOMETERS
0000000
120
HIGH
20
km/h
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01705_3
Does engine temperature gauge approach or exceed 200°F (93°C)?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low coolant level warning light illuminates.
No - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is low coolant level warning light off?)
STEP 3
Is low coolant level warning light off?
1. Start engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature. (WP 0030)
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
P TEMP OIL VOLTS

P
TEMP OIL VOLTS

WIPE 30 40 60
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
OFF
50 70
CONTROL
40
125
80
175
225
120 0
25
3.5
50
75
7
16
24 32
RUN
FLAT
40 80
C/F BAR PSI EMR 40
30
TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
30
20
10
40
20
10
30
40
km/h
MPH
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
C C
ENGAGE
SPOOL
20 50 30 50 90
FUEL
Faria
0 KILOMETERS
0000000
120
HIGH
20
km/h
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01705_3
Is low coolant level warning light off?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low coolant level warning light illuminates.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0125
PARKING BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0010
PARKING BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
STEP 1
Is parking brake pedal disengaged?
Ensure parking brake is disengaged. (WP 0010)
Is parking brake pedal disengaged?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that parking brake warning light illuminates.
No - Disengage parking brake pedal. (WP 0010) Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - After disengaging parking
brake, is parking brake warning light off?)
STEP 2
After disengaging parking brake, is parking brake warning light off?
1. Move MASTER POWER switch to ON position. (200 Amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU (WP 0006))
2. Move IGNITION switch to RUN position. (200 Amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU (WP 0006))
3. Observe parking brake warning light (Figure 1).
R
N
D
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING LIGHT
ASV01794_1
Figure 1. Parking Brake Warning Light.
4. Move IGNITION switch to OFF position. (200 Amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU (WP 0006))
5. Move MASTER POWER switch to OFF position. (200 Amp DCU (WP 0005)) (400 Amp DCU (WP 0006))

TM 9-2320-381-10 0125
After disengaging parking brake, is parking brake warning light off?
DECISION
No - Problem not solved. Notify maintenance personnel that parking brake warning light illuminates.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0126
LOW BRAKE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

LOW BRAKE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE LIGHT ILLUMINATES
STEP 1
Is hydraulic reservoir filled to normal level?
WARNING
Do not operate vehicle when low brake pressure indicator light illuminates. Failure to
Check hydraulic reservoir oil dipstick to verify oil level is normal for vehicle operation. (WP 0162)
Is hydraulic reservoir filled to normal level?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low brake hydraulic pressure light illuminates.
No - Fill reservoir to normal level. (WP 0164) Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Is low brake hydraulic pressure
light off?)
STEP 2
Is low brake hydraulic pressure light off?
NOTE
Allow engine to idle for one minute prior to observing low brake hydraulic pressure light.
2. Observe low brake hydraulic pressure light (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0126
R
N
D
LOW BRAKE
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE LIGHT
ASV01679_2
Figure 1. Low Brake Hydraulic Pressure Light.
Is low brake hydraulic pressure light off?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that low brake hydraulic pressure light illuminates.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0127
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0006
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is CTIS warning light illuminated?
MASTER
1 ON
BRT
2 3MENU
POWER
SWITCH
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 00 00000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL

WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
CENTRAL
TIRE
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
BILGE
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE
PUMP
OFF
CB4
ON
GLOBAL
POSITION
SYSTEM
OFF
CB10
ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS
WARN LIGHTS
TL4
G INFLATION
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04208_1
2. Ensure CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION circuit breaker switch is in ON position (Figure 1).
3. Observe CTIS warning light (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0127
R
N
D
P
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION
SYSTEM (CTIS)
P
WARNING LIGHT
ASV01795_1
Figure 2. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Warning Light.
1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
WP
CLR
5
MARK
8
3MENU
POS
0
6
OFF
ZEROIZE
9
NAV
NUM
LOCK
MASTER POWER WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
BLACKOUT
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
DE-ICE
OFF ON
HEAT/AC
TL1
G
SWITCH
Rockwell
P
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
P
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
WASH
IGNITION GRID
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
BLACKOUT
OVERRIDE HEATER/ HEATER/
TL1
ON ON CB2 CB8
START ON OFF ON AC OFF ON
AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
OFF ON
HTR. 3
TL3
ON ON CB2 INDICATORS
FRONT CB8
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
NBC HEAT 1/2

OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5

125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP OFF ON POSITION OFF ON
SEATS
40 120 0 7
WARNING
OFF OFF SPARE

SYSTEM LIGHTS
G
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TL5
CENTRAL
OFF ON TIRE OFF ON TRANS.
GRID HEAT
60
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
FUEL PUMP
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
HIGH
CB3 CB9
Faria 00 00000
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04944_1
Is CTIS warning light illuminated?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not solved. Notify maintenance personnel that CTIS warning light is illuminated.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0128
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0025
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Do LEFT and RIGHT FUEL tanks indicate at least 1/4 full?

IGNITION
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
B.O.
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
BILGE
CB3
OFF ON
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
CB9
OFF ON TL4
TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
CB4
POSITION
SYSTEM
CB10
INHIBIT LIGHTS
WARN LIGHTS
G
BREAKER
MASTER PANEL
BRT
UNLOCK
ON ON ON ON
OFF ON
CENTRAL
TIRE
INFLATION
OFF ON
TRANSMISSION
TL5
G
POWER DIM

CB5
OFF ON
RADIO
CB11
OFF ON AIR DRYER
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
BIT

ASV04862_2
2. Move TRANSMISSION switch to ON position (Figure 1).

4. Observe left and right fuel tank gauges (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0128
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
P 50 70
40 80
40
P 30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
16 FLAT
LEFT TANK RIGHT TANK

40 120 0 7
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
FUEL GUAGE FUEL GUAGE

40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 10 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01791_1
Figure 2. Left and Right Fuel Tank Gauges.
Do LEFT and RIGHT FUEL tanks indicate at least 1/4 full?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that low fuel level warning light illuminates.
No - Refuel vehicle. (WP 0025) Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Is low fuel level warning light off?)
STEP 2
Is low fuel level warning light off?
2. Observe low fuel level warning light (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0128
R
N
D
LOW FUEL
LEVEL WARNING
LIGHT
ASV01792_1
Figure 3. Low Fuel Level Warning Light.
Is low fuel level warning light off?
DECISION
No - Notify maintenance personnel that low fuel level warning light illuminates.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0129
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT ILLUMINATES AT START-UP
INITIAL SETUP:

DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT ILLUMINATES AT START-UP
STEP 1
Does Do Not Shift (DNS) light turn off after shutting down and restarting engine?
2. Observe DNS light (Figure 1).
DO NOT SHIFT
LIGHT
R
N
D
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
125 225 25
16
24 32 POSITION
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
P
10 110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01351_1
Does Do Not Shift (DNS) light turn off after shutting down and restarting engine?
DECISION
Yes - Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does DNS light turn off when vehicle is operated?)
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that Do Not Shift (DNS) light illuminates at start-up.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0129
STEP 2
Does DNS light turn off when vehicle is operated?
2. Test drive vehicle. (WP 0031)
3. Observe DNS light (Figure 2).
DO NOT SHIFT
LIGHT
R
N
D
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
125 225 25
16
24 32 POSITION
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
P
10 110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01351_1
Does DNS light turn off when vehicle is operated?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that Do Not Shift (DNS) light illuminates at start-up.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0130
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT ILLUMINATES AFTER START-UP AND DOES NOT SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
DO NOT SHIFT (DNS) LIGHT ILLUMINATES AFTER START-UP AND DOES NOT SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL
STEP 1
Is outside temperature at or below 32°F (0°C)?
CAUTION
Indications of transmission malfunction exist if Do Not Shift (DNS) indicator light
illuminates, and remains illuminated after vehicle is at normal operating temperatures. Do
not operate vehicle in this condition. Maintenance personnel must be notified immediately.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment..
Verify outside temperature.
Is outside temperature at or below 32°F (0°C)?
DECISION
Yes - Operate engine to normal operating temperature 180 - 200°F (82 - 93°C). (WP 0030) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 2 - Is DNS light off after engine and transmission warmed up?)
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that Do Not Shift (DNS) light illuminates after start-up, and
does not shift out of neutral.
STEP 2
Is DNS light off after engine and transmission warmed up?
Observe DNS light (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0130
DO NOT SHIFT
LIGHT
R
N
D
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
125 225 25
16
24 32 POSITION
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
P
10 110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
ASV01351_1
Is DNS light off after engine and transmission warmed up?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that Do Not Shift (DNS) light illuminates after engine has
reached normal operating temperatures, and does not shift out of neutral.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0131
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) WARNING LIGHT FLASHES
INITIAL SETUP:

CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION SYSTEM (CTIS) WARNING LIGHT FLASHES
STEP 1
Is CTIS warning light flashing during vehicle operation?
NOTE
Ensure CTIS is in proper mode for desired speed and terrain conditions. (WP 0041)
2. Set CTIS mode for desired speed and terrain conditions.
3. Operate vehicle at desired speed. (WP 0031)
4. Observe CTIS warning light (Figure 1).
R
N
D
P
CENTRAL TIRE INFLATION
SYSTEM (CTIS)
P
WARNING LIGHT
ASV01795_1
Figure 1. Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS) Warning Light.
Is CTIS warning light flashing during vehicle operation?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0131
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that CTIS warning light is flashing.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0132
AIR CONDITIONER BLOWS WARM AIR
INITIAL SETUP:

AIR CONDITIONER BLOWS WARM AIR
STEP 1
Is radiator air intake grille cover free from damage or foreign objects that could block air flow across
radiator?
Visually inspect air intake grille cover for damage or foreign objects (Figure 1).
AIR INTAKE
GRILLE
ASV01696
Figure 1. Air Intake Grille.
Is radiator air intake grille cover free from damage or foreign objects that could block air flow across radiator?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that air conditioner blows warm air.
No - Remove foreign objects from air intake grille cover. If damage has occurred, notify maintenance personnel
that air intake grille cover is damaged. Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does air conditioner blow warm
air?)
STEP 2
Does air conditioner blow warm air?
2. Operate air conditioner. (WP 0009)
Does air conditioner blow warm air?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0132
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that air conditioner blows warm air.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0133
GUNNER'S SEAT - DOES NOT LOCK INTO POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
GUNNER'S SEAT - DOES NOT LOCK INTO POSITION
STEP 1
Does locking pin move into lock position?
WARNING
Push and then release seat release handle while visually inspecting locking pin to determine if it moves into
lock position (Figure 1).
PUSH TO
RELEASE
LOCKING
PIN
SEAT
RELEASE
HANDLE
ASV01516
Figure 1. Seat Release Handle.
0133-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(diagnosticwp) wpno(TT00006)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0133
Does locking pin move into lock position?
DECISION
Yes - Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does gunner's seat adjust properly?)
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that gunner's seat does not lock into position.
STEP 2
Does gunner's seat adjust properly?
WARNING
Push seat release handle and adjust seat to desired height and then release. Gunner's seat should lock in
PUSH TO
RELEASE
SEAT
RELEASE
HANDLE
ASV00019
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that gunner's seat does not lock into position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0134
GUNNER'S SEAT - SEAT DIFFICULT OR UNABLE TO UNLOCK FROM SET POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
GUNNER'S SEAT - SEAT DIFFICULT OR UNABLE TO UNLOCK FROM SET POSITION
STEP 1
Is locking pin caught in locked position?
WARNING
Push seat release handle and visually inspect locking pin to determine if it moves into unlock position
(Figure 1).
PUSH TO
RELEASE
LOCKING
PIN
SEAT
RELEASE
HANDLE
ASV01516

TM 9-2320-381-10 0134
Is locking pin caught in locked position?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that gunner's seat difficult or unable to unlock from set
position.
No - Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does gunner's seat adjust properly?)
STEP 2
WARNING
Push seat release handle and adjust seat to desired height and release. Gunner's seat should lock into
PUSH TO
RELEASE
SEAT
RELEASE
HANDLE
ASV00019

TM 9-2320-381-10 0134
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that gunner's seat difficult or unable to unlock from set
position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0134-3/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(diagnosticwp) wpno(TT00007)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0135
GUNNER'S HATCH - DOES NOT LOCK IN 15-DEGREE OR 90-DEGREE POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
GUNNER'S HATCH - DOES NOT LOCK IN 15-DEGREE OR 90-DEGREE POSITION
STEP 1
Does gunner's hatch lock in 15-degree or 90-degree position?
Pull down on hatch position handle and inspect for corrosion or damage (Figure 1).
HATCH
POSITION
HANDLE
ASV01288
Figure 1. Hatch Position Handle.
Does gunner's hatch lock in 15-degree or 90-degree position?
DECISION
No - Notify maintenance personnel that gunner's latch handle has corrosion or damage.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0136
GUNNER'S HATCH - DOES NOT LOCK IN CLOSED POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
GUNNER'S HATCH - DOES NOT LOCK IN CLOSED POSITION
STEP 1
Is gunner's hatch seal free from obstructions?
Inspect gunner's hatch seal for obstructions (Figure 1).
GUNNER’S HATCH
SEAL ASV01289
Figure 1. Gunner’s Hatch Seal.
Is gunner's hatch seal free from obstructions?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is gunner's hatch latch handle free from corrosion?)
No - Clear obstructions and verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does gunner's hatch lock in closed position?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0136
STEP 2
Is gunner's hatch latch handle free from corrosion?
Visually inspect gunner's hatch latch handle for corrosion (Figure 2).
GUNNER’S HATCH OPEN

LATCH
LOCK ASV01290
Figure 2. Gunners Hatch Latch.
Is gunner's hatch latch handle free from corrosion?
DECISION
Yes - Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does gunner's hatch lock in closed position?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that gunner’s hatch latch has corrosion.
STEP 3
Does gunner's hatch lock in closed position?
Close gunner's hatch and lock in closed position (Figure 3).
GUNNER’S HATCH OPEN

LATCH
LOCK ASV01290
Figure 3. Gunners Hatch Latch.
Does gunner's hatch lock in closed position?
DECISION
No - Notify maintenance personnel that gunner's hatch does not lock in closed position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0137
ELEVATION CONTROL - DOES NOT ELEVATE OR DEPRESS
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
ELEVATION CONTROL - DOES NOT ELEVATE OR DEPRESS
STEP 1
Is obstruction present between mantlets and vehicle hull?
Inspect between mantlets and vehicle hull for any obstructions (Figure 1).
AREA BETWEEN
MANTLET AND
VEHICLE HULL
ASV01558
Figure 1. Mantlet and Vehicle.
Is obstruction present between mantlets and vehicle hull?
DECISION
Yes - Remove obstruction. Verify problem is solved. (Step 4 - Does elevation control operate?)
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are mounting screws and nuts loose on elevation drive arm and upper support
bracket areas?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0137
STEP 2
Are mounting screws and nuts loose on elevation drive arm and upper support bracket areas?
Inspect for loose mounting screws and nuts in elevation drive arm and upper support bracket areas
(Figure 2).
ELEVATION
CONTROL
UPPER
SUPPORT SCREW
BRACKET
ELEVATION
DRIVE
ARM
ASV01323
Figure 2. Elevation Control.
Are mounting screws and nuts loose on elevation drive arm and upper support bracket areas?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance that mounting screws and nuts are loose. (Step 4 - Does elevation control operate?)
No - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is elevation control damaged?)
STEP 3
Is elevation control damaged?
Inspect elevation control for damage (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0137
ELEVATION
CONTROL
UPPER
SUPPORT SCREW
BRACKET
ELEVATION
DRIVE
ARM
ASV01323
Is elevation control damaged?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel of damage to elevation control.
No - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Does elevation control operate?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0137
STEP 4
Does elevation control operate?
1. Crank elevation control handle clockwise to elevate (Figure 4).
ELEVATION
CONTROL
UNIT
ELEVATE
DEPRESS
ELEVATION
CONTROL
ASV01324
HANDLE
2. Crank elevation control handle counterclockwise to depress.
Does elevation control operate?
DECISION
No - Notify maintenance personnel that elevation control does not elevate or depress.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
POWER ASSIST TRAVERSE MECHANISM - TURRET DOES NOT POWER TRAVERSE
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0023
WP 0055
POWER ASSIST TRAVERSE MECHANISM - TURRET DOES NOT POWER TRAVERSE
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is TRAVERSE POWER switch set to ON position?
WARNING
2. Verify TRAVERSE POWER switch is set to ON position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
TRAVERSE POWER
POWER INDICATOR
SWITCH LAMP
TRAVERSE
ON
POWER
350 355 0
340 345
335
O5550016
TRAVERSE CONTROL PANEL
Figure 1. Traverse Control Panel.
Is TRAVERSE POWER switch set to ON position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are driver's and commander's hatches closed and latched?)
No - Move TRAVERSE POWER switch to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 11 - Does turret power
assist traverse operate?)
STEP 2
Are driver's and commander's hatches closed and latched?
Verify driver's and commander's hatches are completely closed and latched (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
COMMANDER’S
HATCH
DRIVER’S
HATCH
ASV01333
Figure 2. Driver's and Commander's Hatches.
Are driver's and commander's hatches closed and latched?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Does turret power traverse with TURRET OVERRIDE switch in override position?)
No - Close and latch driver's and commander's hatch. Verify problem is solved. (Step 11 - Does turret power
assist traverse operate?)
STEP 3
Does turret power traverse with TURRET OVERRIDE switch in override position?
WARNING
1. Move TURRET OVERRIDE switch to override position (Figure 3).
2. Verify turret power traverse operation. (WP 0023)
3. Move TURRET OVERRIDE switch to OFF position (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
1 ON
BRT
4
2
5
3MENU
OFF OFF OFF

NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
G
Rockwell
P
NBC HEAT 3 PNL IND LIGHTS
P ON ON CB2 CB8
ENGINE STOP
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
WIPE
WASH
OFF
IGNITION
RUN
START
OFF
GRID
HEATER
ON
OFF
MASTER
POWER
ON
TURRET
POWER
ON
OVERRIDE
OFF
CB1
OFF
CB2
ON
ON
HEATER/
AC
NBC FAN/
HTR. 3
NBC HTR.
OFF
CB7
OFF
CB8
ON
ON
HEATER/
AC
DOME
LIGHTS/
INDICATORS
TL1
TL2
TL3
OFF OFF
OFF ON NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
SPARE
TL3
G
TURRET
OVERRIDE
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
TEMP
C/F
OIL
BAR PSI
VOLTS
EMR
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CB4
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
CB10 LIGHTS
TL5
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
BILGE
50 70 SAN INFLATION
OFF OFF
40
30
ON ON TL4
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
60
C C SPOOL POWER
SER
20 100
B.O.
MPH
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
PUMP
KILOMETERS
HIGH
DRIVE DRIVE
GLOBAL
Faria 00 00000
USA WAY
INHIBIT LIGHTS
FREE
SPOOL
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04179_1
4. Move TURRET POWER switch to OFF position. (WP 0055)
Does turret power traverse with TURRET OVERRIDE switch in override position?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that turret does not power traverse.
No - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are there obstructions between turret and hull?)
STEP 4
Are there obstructions between turret and hull?
Visually check for obstructions between turret and hull (Figure 4).
TURRET
HULL ASV01656
Figure 4. Turret and Hull.
Are there obstructions between turret and hull?
DECISION
Yes - Remove all obstructions. If obstructions caused damage, notify maintenance personnel that turret does not
power traverse. Verify problem is solved. (Step 11 - Does turret power assist traverse operate?)
No - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to traverse motor?)
STEP 5
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to traverse motor?
Verify turret wiring harness is properly connected to traverse motor (Figure 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
350 355 0
340 345
335
TRAVERSE
MOTOR ASV01627_1
Figure 5. Traverse Motor.
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to traverse motor?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 6. (Step 6 - Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to traverse control panel?)
No - Tightly connect turret wiring harness to traverse motor. Verify problem is solved. (Step 11 - Does turret
power assist traverse operate?)
STEP 6
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to traverse control panel?
Verify turret wiring harness is tightly connected to traverse control panel (Figure 6).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
TRAVERSE CONTROL
PANEL
SPOT EXHAUST SIGHT

LIGHT BLOWER POWER
TRAVERSE
ON
350 355 0
340 345
335
O5550017
TURRET WIRING
HARNESS
Figure 6. Traverse Control Panel and Turret Wiring Harness.
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to traverse control panel?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 7. (Step 7 - Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to pulse-width modulation (PWM) motor
controller?)
No - Tightly connect turret wiring harness to traverse control panel. Verify problem is solved. (Step 11 - Does
turret power assist traverse operate?)
STEP 7
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to pulse-width modulation (PWM) motor controller?
Verify turret wiring harness is tightly connected to PWM motor controller (Figure 7).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
PWM MOTOR
CONTROLLER
ON
350 355 0
340 345
335
O5550019
TURRET WIRING
HARNESS
Figure 7. PWM Motor Controller and Turret Wiring Harness.
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to pulse-width modulation (PWM) motor controller?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 8. (Step 8 - Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to circuit breaker panel?)
No - Tightly connect turret wiring harness to PWM motor controller. Verify problem is solved. (Step 11 - Does
turret power assist traverse operate?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
STEP 8
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to circuit breaker panel?
Verify turret wiring harness is tightly connected to circuit breaker panel (Figure 8).
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL
O5550021
TURRET WIRING
HARNESS
Figure 8. Circuit Breaker Panel and Turret Wiring Harness.
Is turret wiring harness tightly connected to circuit breaker panel?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 9. (Step 9 - Are slip ring electrical connections tightly connected?)
No - Tightly connect turret wiring harness to circuit breaker panel. Verify problem is solved. (Step 11 - Does turret
power assist traverse operate?)
STEP 9
Are slip ring electrical connections tightly connected?
Inspect turret slip ring electrical connections for loose connections (Figure 9).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
SLIP RING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
SLIP RING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
ASV01359_1
Figure 9. Turret Slip Ring Electrical Connectors.
Are slip ring electrical connections tightly connected?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 10. (Step 10 - Are vehicle batteries properly charged?)
No - If loose, tightly connect connector(s). Verify problem is solved.
STEP 10

IGNITION
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
OFF OFF SEATS SPARE
G
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
TEST FAULT SILENCE CB4

POSITION
SYSTEM
CB10
INHIBIT LIGHTS
WARN LIGHTS
G
BREAKER
MASTER PANEL
BRT
UNLOCK
ON ON ON ON
OFF ON
CENTRAL
TIRE
INFLATION
OFF ON
TRANSMISSION
TL5
G
POWER DIM

CB5
OFF ON
RADIO
CB11
OFF ON AIR DRYER
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
BIT

ASV04201_1

4. Verify pushbutton shift selector is in neutral (N) position (Figure 11).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
S M
E O
L N
I
E T
C O
T R
MODE
NEUTRAL
ASV01489_1
Figure 11. Pushbutton Shift Selector in Neutral (N) Position.
5. Observe voltmeter gauge reading (Figure 12).
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS

VOLTMETER
30 40
TEMP OIL VOLTS
50
60 70
GAUGE
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01490
6. Ensure that voltmeter gauge reads in green zone (24 - 32 vdc) (Figure 12).
8. Move TRANSMISSION switch to OFF position (Figure 13).

ENGINE FIRE TL1
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF OFF
OFF ON NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
SPARE
TL3
G
B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
ENGINE BOTTLE CB3
OFF ON
GLOBAL
POSITION
CB9
OFF ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS
WARN LIGHTS
TL4
G
BREAKER SWITCH
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01488_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0138
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that turret does not power traverse.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that batteries may require servicing or charging.
STEP 11
Does turret power assist traverse operate?
1. Move TURRET POWER switch to ON position. (WP 0055)
WARNING
2. Verify turret power traverse operation is restored. (WP 0023)
Does turret power assist traverse operate?
DECISION
No - Notify maintenance personnel that turret does not power traverse.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0139
POWER ASSIST TRAVERSE MECHANISM - DOES NOT MANUALLY TRAVERSE
INITIAL SETUP:

POWER ASSIST TRAVERSE MECHANISM - DOES NOT MANUALLY TRAVERSE
WARNING
STEP 1
Are turret manual traverse controls used correctly?
Manually traverse turret. (WP 0023)
Are turret manual traverse controls used correctly?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are obstructions present between turret and hull?)
No - Go to Turret Traverse Control (WP 0023) for proper operation of controls. Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 -
Does turret traverse manually?)
STEP 2
Are obstructions present between turret and hull?
Visually inspect for obstructions between turret and hull (Figure 1).
TURRET
HULL ASV01656
Figure 1. Turret and Hull.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0139
Are obstructions present between turret and hull?
DECISION
Yes - Remove obstruction(s). Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does turret traverse manually?)
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that traverse mechanism does not manually traverse.
STEP 3
Does turret traverse manually?
1. Grasp handle and squeeze engage lever to manually traverse turret (Figure 2).
MANUAL TRAVERSE
HANDLE
MANUAL
TRAVERSE
ENGAGE
LEVER ASV00017
Figure 2. Manual Traverse Handle.
2. Crank manual traverse handle in desired direction.
Does turret traverse manually?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that traverse mechanism does not manually traverse.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0140
TURRET POWER CONTROL - TURRET POWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0055
TURRET POWER CONTROL - TURRET POWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is MASTER POWER switch set to ON position?
CAUTION
Each switch in the turret acts as a circuit breaker. If a switch suddenly moves to the OFF
position, it is the result of an overloaded circuit and maintenance personnel must be
notified immediately. Do not hold the switch in the ON position as it will cause damage to
circuits and/or equipment. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Turret switches will move to OFF position when MASTER POWER switch is moved to OFF
position.
2. Verify MASTER POWER switch is in ON position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0140
TURRET POWER SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
DE-ICE HEAT/AC
MASTER POWER WASH START ON G
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS TEST FAULT SILENCE
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF RECEPTACLES
CB3 CB9
70
FUEL 10 110 OFF FIRE INHIB.

CB6 CB12
ENGINE BOTTLE
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 00 000 00
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04193_2
Is MASTER POWER switch set to ON position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is turret wiring harness connector free of damage and tightly secured to traverse
control panel receptacle?)
No - Move MASTER POWER switch to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does turret control panel
TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?)
STEP 2
Is turret wiring harness connector free of damage and tightly secured to traverse control panel
receptacle?
Ensure turret wiring harness connector is free of damage and tightly secured to traverse control panel
receptacle (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0140
TRAVERSE CONTROL
PANEL
SPOT EXHAUST SIGHT

LIGHT BLOWER POWER
TRAVERSE
ON
350 355 0
340 345
335
O5550018
TURRET WIRING
HARNESS
Figure 2. Traverse Control Panel and Turret Wiring Harness.
Is turret wiring harness connector free of damage and tightly secured to traverse control panel receptacle?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is turret wiring harness free of damage and tightly secured to pulse-width modulation
(PWM) motor controller?)
No - Tightly connect turret wiring harness connector to traverse control panel connector receptacle. Verify
problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does turret control panel TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?)
STEP 3
Is turret wiring harness free of damage and tightly secured to pulse-width modulation (PWM) motor
controller?
Verify turret wiring harness is tightly connected to PWM motor controller (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0140
PWM MOTOR
CONTROLLER
ON
350 355 0
340 345
335
O5550020
TURRET WIRING
HARNESS
Figure 3. PWM Motor Controller and Turret Wiring Harness.
Is turret wiring harness free of damage and tightly secured to pulse-width modulation (PWM) motor controller?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are slip ring electrical connections tightly secured?)
No - Tightly connect turret wiring harness connector to PWM motor controller. Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 -
Does turret control panel TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0140
STEP 4
Are slip ring electrical connections tightly secured?
Visually inspect slip ring electrical connections (Figure 4).
SLIP RING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
SLIP RING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
ASV01359_1
Figure 4. Slip Ring Electrical Connectors.
Are slip ring electrical connections tightly secured?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Does slip ring turret wiring harness show signs of damage?)
No - Tightly secure slip ring electrical connectors. Verify problem is solved. (Step 6 - Does turret control panel
TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?)
STEP 5
Does slip ring turret wiring harness show signs of damage?
Visually inspect slip ring turret wiring harness for signs of damage (Figure 5).
SLIP RING
WIRING
HARNESS
ASV01819
Figure 5. Slip Ring Wiring Harness.
Does slip ring turret wiring harness show signs of damage?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0140
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that there is damage to wiring harness.
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that TURRET POWER switch on turret control panel does
not stay on.
STEP 6
Does turret control panel TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?
NOTE
Turret switches will move to OFF position when MASTER POWER switch is moved to OFF
position.
TURRET POWER SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

CB6 CB12
ENGINE BOTTLE
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 00 000 00
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04193_2
2. Move driver's control unit TURRET POWER switch to ON position (Figure 6).
3. Move turret control panel TURRET POWER switch to ON position (Figure 7).
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
TURRET
POWER TURRET
SWITCH CONTROL
PANEL
ASV04176_1
4. Verify turret control panel TURRET POWER switch position (Figure 8).
5. Move turret control panel TURRET POWER switch to OFF position (Figure 8).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0140
6. Move driver's control unit TURRET POWER switch to OFF position (Figure 8).

ENGINE FIRE TL1
HEAT/AC
MASTER POWER WASH START ON DE-ICE G

YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
SWITCH ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC HEAT 3
NBC HEAT 1/2

CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET UNLOCK
GRN
OFF ON
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
CB10
OFF ON TL5
TIRE G
POWER
PANEL TRANSMISSION
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
OFF OFF OFF
SWITCH
PARK OFF INTERVEHICULAR
RADIO AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04183_1
Does turret control panel TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that TURRET POWER switch on turret control panel does
not stay on.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0141
TURRET POWER CONTROL - TURRET POWER SWITCH IS MOVED TO ON POSITION BUT RETURNS TO
OFF POSITION WHEN RELEASED
INITIAL SETUP:

TURRET POWER CONTROL - TURRET POWER SWITCH IS MOVED TO ON POSITION BUT RETURNS TO
OFF POSITION WHEN RELEASED
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to turret power control panel receptacle?
1. Ensure TURRET POWER switch on driver's control unit is in OFF position (Figure 1).

ENGINE FIRE TL1
HEAT/AC

YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
SWITCH ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC HEAT 3
NBC HEAT 1/2

CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET UNLOCK
GRN
OFF ON
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
CB10
OFF ON TL5
TIRE G
POWER
PANEL TRANSMISSION
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
OFF OFF OFF
SWITCH
RADIO AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04183_2
2. Ensure MASTER POWER switch on driver's control unit is in OFF position (Figure 1).
3. Ensure turret wiring harness connector is tightly secured to turret power control panel receptacle (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0141
VIEW ROTATED
90 DEGREES
TURRET
FOR CLARITY
POWER
CONTROL
TURRET WIRING RECEPTACLE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01652_1
Figure 2. Turret Wiring Harness Connector.
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to turret power control panel receptacle?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle free of
corrosion?)
No - Tightly secure turret wiring harness connector to turret control panel receptacle. Verify problem is solved.
(Step 5 - Does TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?)
STEP 2
Are turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle free of corrosion?
1. Disconnect turret wiring harness connector from turret control panel receptacle (Figure 3).
TURRET
TURRET CONTROL
WIRING PANEL
HARNESS
SIGICL
RET1
O
EXHOWE F
BL F
TL
SPO 2
R
TURWER F
PO OF
F
OF
F
OF
ASV01668
2. Visually inspect turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle for signs of corrosion.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0141
3. Connect turret wiring harness connector to turret control panel receptacle.
Are turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle free of corrosion?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to power relay assembly?)
No - If corrosion or damage is present, notify maintenance personnel that turret control panel receptacle and
harness connector have corrosion or damage. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does TURRET POWER
switch remain set to ON position?)
STEP 3
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to power relay assembly?
Verify turret wiring harness connector is tightly secured to power relay assembly (Figure 4).
POWER RELAY
POWER RELAY
CONNECTOR M5550052
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to power relay assembly?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are turret wiring harness connector and power relay assembly connector free from
signs of corrosion?)
No - Tightly connect turret wiring harness connector to power relay assembly. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 -
Does TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0141
STEP 4
Are turret wiring harness connector and power relay assembly connector free from signs of corrosion?
1. Disconnect turret wiring harness connector from power relay assembly (Figure 5).
POWER RELAY
POWER RELAY
CONNECTOR M5550052
2. Visually inspect turret wiring harness connector and power relay assembly connector for signs of corrosion.
3. Connect turret wiring harness connector to power relay assembly.
Are turret wiring harness connector and power relay assembly connector free from signs of corrosion?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that TURRET POWER switch returns to OFF position
when released.
No - If corrosion or damage is present, notify maintenance personnel that power relay assembly connector or
harness connector have corrosion or damage. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does TURRET POWER
switch remain set to ON position?)
STEP 5
Does TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?
NOTE
Turret switches will move to OFF position if MASTER POWER switch is moved to OFF
position.
1. Move MASTER POWER switch on driver's control unit to ON position (Figure 6).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0141
TURRET POWER SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF SPARE
OFF ON SPARE
OFF G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ENGINE BOTTLE
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 00 000 00
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04065_3
2. Move TURRET POWER switch on driver's control unit to ON position (Figure 6).
3. Move TURRET POWER switch on turret control panel to ON position (Figure 7).
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
TURRET
POWER TURRET
SWITCH CONTROL
PANEL
ASV04176_1
NOTE
Read the following test carefully to determine the condition of the stated fault.
4. Verify turret control panel TURRET POWER switch position (Figure 7).
5. Move TURRET POWER switch on turret control panel to OFF position (Figure 7).
6. Move MASTER POWER switch on driver's control unit to OFF position (Figure 8).
7. Move TURRET POWER switch on driver's control unit to OFF position (Figure 8).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0141

ENGINE FIRE TL1
HEAT/AC

YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
SWITCH ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC HEAT 3
NBC HEAT 1/2

CB8
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET UNLOCK
GRN
OFF ON
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
CB10
OFF ON TL5
TIRE G
POWER
PANEL TRANSMISSION
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
OFF OFF OFF
SWITCH
RADIO AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04183_2
Does TURRET POWER switch remain set to ON position?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that TURRET POWER switch returns to OFF position
when released.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0142
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SPOTLIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH TURRET POWER ON
INITIAL SETUP:

TURRET POWER CONTROL - SPOTLIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH TURRET POWER ON
STEP 1
Is turret spotlight cable secured tightly, free of corrosion, and toggle switch in ON position?
1. Verify turret spotlight switch is in ON position (Figure 1).
TURRET SPOTLIGHT
SWITCH
ON
OFF
MTURR0126_1
Figure 1. Turret Spotlight Switch.
2. Visually inspect turret spotlight cable for secure fit and signs of corrosion (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0142
SPOTLIGHT CABLE
SPOTLIGHT
ASV01353_1
Figure 2. Spotlight Cable.
Is turret spotlight cable secured tightly, free of corrosion, and toggle switch in ON position?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that spotlight does not illuminate with TURRET POWER
on.
No - Move turret spotlight switch to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does spotlight operate
properly?) If corrosion or damage is present, notify maintenance personnel that spotlight cable has corrosion
or damage.
STEP 2
Does spotlight operate properly?
2. Verify spotlight functions properly. (WP 0021)
Does spotlight operate properly?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0142
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that spotlight does not illuminate with TURRET POWER
on.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0143
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SIGHT POWER DOES NOT OPERATE WITH TURRET POWER ON
INITIAL SETUP:

Laser Borelight Kit (Part of Boresight Kit) Engine off. (WP 0030)
(WP 0175, Table 3, Item 18) Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
References
WP 0045
WP 0051
WP 0055
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SIGHT POWER DOES NOT OPERATE WITH TURRET POWER ON
STEP 1
Is SIGHT POWER switch in ON position?
CAUTION
• Boresight filter must be used when troubleshooting night sight during daylight or
artificial lighting conditions. Boresight filter must be properly installed before night
sight shutter switch is moved to ON position. Failure to follow this caution will result
in damage to image intensifier tube in night sight. Failure to comply may result in
• If boresight filter is not available, troubleshooting should take place just after
sunset or just before sunrise. Twilight conditions will allow night sight to be used
while target is still visible. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
• Check that night shutter switch is moved to OFF position during daylight operation
or the image intensifier tube will be damaged. Failure to comply may result in
1. Install night filter to night window. (WP 0051)
3. Move SIGHT POWER switch to ON position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0143
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF

SIGHT
POWER
SWITCH
ASV04173_1
Is SIGHT POWER switch in ON position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are RETICLE and TUBE brightness knobs adjusted for sight operation?)
No - Move SIGHT POWER switch to ON position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is sight power restored?)
STEP 2
Are RETICLE and TUBE brightness knobs adjusted for sight operation?
Ensure RETICLE and TUBE brightness knobs are adjusted for sight operation (Figure 2). (WP 0045)
RETICLE
BRIGHTNESS
ADJUSTING
KNOB
TUBE BRIGHTNESS
ADJUSTING KNOB ASV01657
Figure 2. Reticle and Tube Brightness Knobs.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0143
Are RETICLE and TUBE brightness knobs adjusted for sight operation?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to turret control panel receptacle?)
No - Adjust RETICLE and TUBE brightness knobs for proper operation. (WP 0045) Verify problem is solved.
(Step 5 - Is sight power restored?)
STEP 3
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to turret control panel receptacle?
Ensure turret wiring harness connector is tightly secured to turret control panel receptacle (Figure 3).
VIEW ROTATED
90 DEGREES
TURRET
FOR CLARITY
POWER
CONTROL
TURRET WIRING RECEPTACLE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01652_1
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to turret control panel receptacle?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle free from
signs of corrosion?)
No - Tightly secure turret wiring harness connector to turret control panel receptacle. Verify problem is solved.
(Step 5 - Is sight power restored?)
STEP 4
Are turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle free from signs of corrosion?
2. Disconnect turret wiring harness connector from turret control panel (Figure 4).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0143
TURRET
TURRET CONTROL
WIRING PANEL
HARNESS
SIGICL
RET1
O
EXHOWE F
BL F
TL
SPO 2
R
TURWER F
PO OF
F
OF
F
OF
ASV01668
Figure 4. Turret Wiring Harness.
3. Visually inspect turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle for signs of corrosion.
4. Connect turret wiring harness connector to turret control panel.
Are turret wiring harness connector and turret control panel receptacle free from signs of corrosion?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that sight power does not operate with turret power on.
No - If corrosion or damage is present, notify maintenance personnel that turret control panel receptacle or
harness connector has corrosion or damage. Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Is sight power restored?)
STEP 5
Is sight power restored?
1. If in OFF position, move TURRET POWER switch to ON position (Figure 5). (WP 0055)
2. Move SIGHT POWER switch to ON position (Figure 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0143
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF

SIGHT
POWER
SWITCH
ASV04173_1
3. Verify sight operation.

5. Remove night filter from sight window. (WP 0051)
Is sight power restored?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that sight power does not operate with turret power on.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0144
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SIGHT POWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:

Laser Borelight Kit (Part of Boresight Kit) Engine off. (WP 0030)
(WP 0175, Table 3, Item 18) Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
References
WP 0005
WP 0006
WP 0051
TURRET POWER CONTROL - SIGHT POWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Does SIGHT POWER switch remain set to ON position?
CAUTION
• Boresight filter must be used when troubleshooting night sight during daylight or
artificial lighting conditions. Boresight filter must be properly installed before night
sight shutter switch is moved to ON position. Failure to follow this caution will result
in damage to image intensifier tube in night sight. Failure to comply may result in
• If boresight filter is not available, troubleshooting should take place just after
sunset or just before sunrise. Twilight conditions will allow night sight to be used
while target is still visible. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
• Check that night shutter switch is moved to OFF position during daylight operation
or the image intensifier tube will be damaged. Failure to comply may result in
1. Install night filter to sight window. (WP 0051)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0144
NOTE
position.
TURRET POWER SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

CB6 CB12
ENGINE BOTTLE
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 00 000 00
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04193_3
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
TURRET
POWER TURRET
SWITCH CONTROL
PANEL
ASV04176_1
5. Move SIGHT POWER switch on turret control panel to ON position (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0144
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF

SIGHT
POWER
SWITCH
ASV04173_1
NOTE
6. Verify SIGHT POWER switch position (Figure 3).
7. Move SIGHT POWER switch on turret control panel to OFF position (Figure 3).
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
TURRET EXHAUST TURRET

POWER BLOWER CONTROL
SWITCH SWITCH PANEL
ASV01664_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0144

ENGINE FIRE TL1
MASTER WIPE
WASH
RUN
START ON
YEL YEL RED
CB1
OFF ON
DE-ICE
CB7
OFF ON
HEAT/AC G
TL2
OFF OFF OFF
POWER ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC FAN
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
DOMELIGHTS
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
SWITCH
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
POWER ON ON ON INFLATION
BRT
ON
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR

OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
AUX PWR RCPT
WASH/WIPER MOT
ASV04183_4
11. Remove night filter from sight window. (WP 0051)
Does SIGHT POWER switch remain set to ON position?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that SIGHT POWER switch does not remain in ON
position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0145
TURRET POWER CONTROL - EXHAUST BLOWER DOES NOT OPERATE WITH TURRET POWER ON
INITIAL SETUP:

TURRET POWER CONTROL - EXHAUST BLOWER DOES NOT OPERATE WITH TURRET POWER ON
STEP 1
Are exhaust blower electrical connectors properly connected and tightly secured?
WARNING
• Remove all jewelry such as rings, ID tags, bracelets, etc., prior to working on or
around vehicle. Jewelry and tools can catch on equipment, contact positive
electrical circuits, and cause a direct short, severe burns, or electrical shock.
• Ensure electrical power is off prior to working on all electrical connections. Failure
Ensure exhaust blower electrical connectors are connected correctly and tightened securely (Figure 1).
EXHAUST
BLOWER
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01673_1
Figure 1. Exhaust Blower Electrical Connectors.
Are exhaust blower electrical connectors properly connected and tightly secured?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0145
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that exhaust blower does not operate with turret power
on.
No - Properly connect and/or tightly connect exhaust blower connectors. Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 - Does
exhaust blower operate?)
STEP 2
Does exhaust blower operate?
2. Move EXHAUST BLOWER power switch to ON position (Figure 2).
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF

EXHAUST
BLOWER
SWITCH
ASV04169_1
3. Verify exhaust blower operation.

4. Move EXHAUST BLOWER power switch to OFF position (Figure 2).
Does exhaust blower operate?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that exhaust blower does not operate with turret power on.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0146
TURRET POWER CONTROL - EXHAUST BLOWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
TURRET POWER CONTROL - EXHAUST BLOWER SWITCH DOES NOT REMAIN IN ON POSITION
STEP 1
Does EXHAUST BLOWER switch remain set to ON position?
CAUTION
Each switch in the turret acts as a circuit breaker. If a switch suddenly moves to the OFF
position, it is the result of an overloaded circuit and maintenance personnel must be
notified immediately. Do not hold the switch in the ON position as it will cause damage to
circuits and/or equipment. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
position.
TURRET POWER SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

CB6 CB12
ENGINE BOTTLE
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 00 000 00
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04193_4

TM 9-2320-381-10 0146
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF

SWITCH SWITCH PANEL
ASV04176_2
4. Move EXHAUST BLOWER switch to ON position (Figure 2).

5. Verify EXHAUST BLOWER switch position (Figure 2).
6. Move EXHAUST BLOWER switch to OFF position (Figure 3).
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF

SWITCH SWITCH PANEL
ASV01664_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0146

ENGINE FIRE TL1
MASTER WIPE
WASH
RUN
START ON
YEL YEL RED
CB1
OFF ON
DE-ICE
CB7
OFF ON
HEAT/AC G
TL2
OFF OFF OFF
POWER ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC FAN
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
DOMELIGHTS
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
SWITCH
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
ON
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR

OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
AUX PWR RCPT
WASH/WIPER MOT
ASV04183_4
Does EXHAUST BLOWER switch remain set to ON position?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that EXHAUST BLOWER switch does not remain in ON
position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0147
PANEL TURRET POWER SWITCH IS MOVED TO ON POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0006 Weapons cleared. (WP 0062)
Equipment Condition
PANEL TURRET POWER SWITCH IS MOVED TO ON POSITION
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Does FIRING RELAY ON indicator illuminate when turret control panel TURRET POWER switch is moved
to ON position?
WARNING
The firing relay indicator on the weapon control illuminating when turret power is turned on
indicates a safety hazard. The machine guns may fire when armed. Turret power must be
turned off and maintenance personnel notified. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0147
TURRET POWER SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

CB6 CB12
ENGINE BOTTLE
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 00 000 00
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04193_5
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
TURRET
POWER TURRET
SWITCH CONTROL
PANEL
ASV04176_1
4. Move gunner’s control panel MACHINE GUN ARMING SWITCH to OFF position (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0147
MACHINE GUN 335 340 345 350 355 0
ARMING SWITCH
FIRING
RELAY
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ON ROUND ARMED ARMED
LAMP TEST
ALL
INDICATOR
LIGHT FIRING SMOKE GRENADES
RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT GUNNER’S

CONTROL
PANEL ASV01676_1
Figure 3. Gunner's Control Panel.
NOTE
5. Observe gunner's control panel FIRING RELAY ON indicator (Figure 3).

ENGINE FIRE TL1
MASTER WIPE
WASH
RUN
START ON
YEL YEL RED
CB1
OFF ON
DE-ICE
CB7
OFF ON
HEAT/AC G
TL2
OFF OFF OFF
POWER ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC FAN
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
DOMELIGHTS
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
SWITCH
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
ON
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR

OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
AUX PWR RCPT
WASH/WIPER MOT
ASV04183_5
Does FIRING RELAY ON indicator illuminate when turret control panel TURRET POWER switch is moved to
ON position?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0147
DECISION
Yes - Move turret control panel TURRET POWER switch to OFF position. Problem not found. Notify maintenance
personnel that firing relay indicator illuminates when turret control panel TURRET POWER switch is moved to
ON position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0148
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL - MACHINE GUN ARMING SWITCH DOES NOT STAY ARMED WITH TURRET
POWER ON
INITIAL SETUP:

Equipment Condition
GUNNER'S CONTROL PANEL - MACHINE GUN ARMING SWITCH DOES NOT STAY ARMED WITH TURRET
POWER ON
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to power relay assembly receptacle?
Ensure turret wiring harness connector is tightly secured to power relay assembly receptacle (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0148
POWER RELAY
POWER RELAY
CONNECTOR M5550053
Figure 1. Power Relay Assembly Harness Connector.
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to power relay assembly receptacle?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to gunner's control panel
receptacle?)
No - Tightly secure turret wiring harness connector to power relay assembly receptacles. Verify problem is solved.
(Step 3 - Does machine gun arming switch remain in armed position with turret control panel TURRET
POWER switch in ON position?)
STEP 2
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to gunner's control panel receptacle?
Ensure turret wiring harness connector is tightly secured to gunner's control panel receptacle (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0148
TURRET
WIRING
HARNESS
L S T
ALP TE
M
LA
S
ME AL
DE
D
AR 0 C
NA
.5
RE
EG
OK
SM
ME M
D
AR40 M
HT
RIG
350 355 0
340 345
335
UN T
D
ROLAS
FT
ON LAY G
LE
RE IRIN
F
IT
HIB
IN
ER UN T
RID D
OV RO LAS
E
GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL ASV01830_1
Figure 2. Gunner's Control Panel Harness Connectors.
Is turret wiring harness connector tightly secured to gunner's control panel receptacle?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that machine gun arming switch does not stay armed with
turret power on.
No - Tightly secure turret wiring harness connector to gunner's control panel. Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 -
Does machine gun arming switch remain in armed position with turret control panel TURRET POWER switch
in ON position?)
WARNING
The firing relay indicator on the weapon control illuminating when turret power is turned on
indicates a safety hazard. The machine guns may fire when armed. Turret power must be
turned off and maintenance personnel notified. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
STEP 3
Does machine gun arming switch remain in armed position with turret control panel TURRET POWER
switch in ON position?
NOTE
Turret switches will move to OFF position if turret power switch is moved to OFF position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0148
TURRET POWER SWITCH

ENGINE FIRE TL1
DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

CB6 CB12
ENGINE BOTTLE
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 00 000 00
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04193_ 6
Figure 3. 200 AMP DCU.
GREEN
INDICATOR
LAMP

350 355 0
340 345
335
OFF OFF OFF OFF
TURRET
POWER TURRET
SWITCH CONTROL
PANEL
ASV04176_1
4. Move 40-mm/.50-Cal. machine gun arming switch to 40-MM ARMED or .50 CAL ARMED position
(Figure 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0148
MACHINE GUN
ARMING SWITCH
GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
350 355 0
340 345
335
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01682_1
NOTE
5. Verify machine gun arming switch position.
6. Move machine gun arming switch to OFF position.

ENGINE FIRE TL1
MASTER WIPE
WASH
RUN
START ON
YEL YEL RED
CB1
OFF ON
DE-ICE
CB7
OFF ON
HEAT/AC G
TL2
OFF OFF OFF
POWER ON ON CB2
OFF ON
NBC FAN
NBC HEAT 3
CB8
DOMELIGHTS
PNL IND LIGHTS G
TL3
SWITCH
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET
GRN SYSTEM
CENTRAL
BRT
ON
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR

OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
AUX PWR RCPT
WASH/WIPER MOT
ASV04183_6
Does machine gun arming switch remain in armed position with turret control panel TURRET POWER switch
in ON position?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that machine gun arming switch does not stay armed with
turret power on.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0149
POSITION
INITIAL SETUP:

POSITION
WARNING
STEP 1
Is LAST ROUND indicator light illuminated?
NOTE
LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch will not remain in override position unless LAST ROUND
indicator light illuminates.
1. Visually inspect 40-mm ammunition box and ensure ammunition is down to last round (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0149
AMMUNITION BOX
40-MM AMMUNITION
ASV01678
Figure 1. 40-MM Ammunition Box.

3. Observe LAST ROUND indicator light (Figure 2).
LAST ROUND
INDICATOR LAMP
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ROUND ARMED LAMP TEST 335 340 345 350 355 0
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT

GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST ROUND
ASV01683_1
OVERRIDE SWITCH
Is LAST ROUND indicator light illuminated?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0149
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch remain in override position?)
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch does not remain in
override position.
STEP 2
Does LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch remain in override position?
2. Move LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch to override position (Figure 3).
LAST ROUND
INDICATOR LAMP
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED LAMP TEST
335 340 345 350 355 0
ROUND ARMED ALL GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE ASV04172_1
NOTE
3. Verify LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch position (Figure 3).
4. Move LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch to OFF position (Figure 3).
Does LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch remain in override position?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch does not remain in
override position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0150
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - AMMUNITION BINDS IN AMMUNITION RACK
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0062
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - AMMUNITION BINDS IN AMMUNITION RACK
STEP 1
Is 40-mm ammunition in ammunition box is loaded correctly and free of damage?
1. Ensure that ammunition is loaded correctly. (WP 0053)
2. Visually inspect 40-mm ammunition for misaligned, dented, and short rounds (Figure 1).
AMMUNITION BOX
40-MM AMMUNITION
ASV01678
Figure 1. 40-MM Ammunition.
Is 40-mm ammunition in ammunition box is loaded correctly and free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Do any 40-mm ammunition box ammunition flaps stick in upright position?)
No - Properly load 40-mm ammunition and/or replace damaged or short round. (WP 0053) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 3 - Does 40-mm machine gun feed?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0150
STEP 2
Do any 40-mm ammunition box ammunition flaps stick in upright position?
WARNING
Ensure the weapon is clear of ammunition before performing maintenance or removal

procedures. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Clear the weapon of ammunition. (WP 0062)
2. Open top and bottom ammunition box doors (Figure 2).
AMMUNITION
BOX TOP
DOOR
AMMUNITION ASV02486
BOTTOM FLAPS
DOORS
Figure 2. Open Ammunition Box Doors.
3. Place all ammunition flaps in upright position.

4. Close bottom doors and ensure all ammunition flaps fall forward.
Do any 40-mm ammunition box ammunition flaps stick in upright position?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun does not feed.
solved. (Step 3 - Does 40-mm machine gun feed?)
STEP 3
Does 40-mm machine gun feed?
Ensure that 40-mm machine gun feeds. (WP 0058)
Does 40-mm machine gun feed?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun does not feed.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0151
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT CHARGE
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1010-230-10 Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
WP 0053
WP 0055
Equipment Condition
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT CHARGE
STEP 1
Is 40-mm ammunition in feed slide assembly loaded correctly and free of damage?
1. Verify TURRET POWER switch at driver's control unit is in OFF position. (WP 0055)
2. Ensure that ammunition in feed slide assembly is loaded correctly and free of damage (Figure 1).
(WP 0053)
40-MM
AMMUNITION
FEED SLIDE
ASSEMBLY
ASV00049
Figure 1. Ammunition in Feed Slide Assembly.
Is 40-mm ammunition in feed slide assembly loaded correctly and free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is charger slide engaged?)
No - Properly load 40-mm ammunition in feed throat assembly and/or replace damaged ammunition. (WP 0053)
Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does 40-mm machine gun charge?)
STEP 2

TM 9-2320-381-10 0151
Is charger slide engaged?

Ensure that charger slide in 40-mm machine gun charging system is in engaged position (Figure 2).
(WP 0047)
CHARGING
SYSTEM
ASV01350
Figure 2. 40-MM Machine Gun Charger Slide.
Is charger slide engaged?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Are charger chain and charger assembly free of damage?)
No - Move charger slide to engaged position. (WP 0047) Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does 40-mm machine
gun charge?)
STEP 3
Are charger chain and charger assembly free of damage?
Visually inspect charger chain and charger assembly for damage (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0151
CHARGER CHAIN
CHARGER ASSEMBLY
ASV00050
Figure 3. 40-MM Machine Gun Charger Chain and Charger Assembly.
Are charger chain and charger assembly free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Are 40-mm machine gun bolt and backplate assembly serviceable and free of
damage?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel of damage to charger chain or assembly.
STEP 4
Are 40-mm machine gun bolt and backplate assembly serviceable and free of damage?
WARNING
Do not allow bolt to slam forward when receiver cover is open. Be prepared to catch
dropped/ejected live round. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
Ensure that 40-mm machine gun bolt and backplate assembly are clean, lubricated, and free of damage.
(TM 9-1010-230-10)
Are 40-mm machine gun bolt and backplate assembly serviceable and free of damage?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0151
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun does not charge.
No - Service bolt and/or backplate. Replace if damaged. Machine Gun, 40-MM, MK19, MOD 3 (TM
9-1010-230-10) Verify problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does 40-mm machine gun charge?)
WARNING
STEP 5
Does 40-mm machine gun charge?
Ensure that 40-mm machine gun will charge. (WP 0053)
Does 40-mm machine gun charge?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun does not charge.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0152
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0005 WP 0057
WP 0006 WP 0058
WP 0022
WP 0047
Equipment Condition
WP 0053
WP 0055
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE
WARNING
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is 40-mm machine gun safety lever in “F” or fire position?
2. Ensure machine gun safety lever is in “F” fire position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0152
SAFE FIRE
SWITCH
350 355 0
340 345
335
ASV01852
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun in Fire Position.
Is 40-mm machine gun safety lever in “F” or fire position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Are 40-mm machine gun switches in firing positions?)
No - Move 40-mm machine gun safety switch to “F” fire position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 9 - Does 40-mm
machine gun fire electrically?)
STEP 2
Are 40-mm machine gun switches in firing positions?
Ensure 40-mm machine gun switches are in correct positions for firing. (WP 0058)
Are 40-mm machine gun switches in firing positions?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is 40-mm machine gun charged?)
No - Move 40-mm machine gun switches to firing positions. (WP 0058) Verify problem is solved. (Step 9 - Does
40-mm machine gun fire electrically?)
STEP 3
Is 40-mm machine gun charged?
Ensure that weapon is charged. (WP 0053)
Is 40-mm machine gun charged?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Does an inhibit condition exist that prohibits firing of 40-mm machine gun?)
No - Charge weapon. (WP 0053) Verify problem is solved. (Step 9 - Does 40-mm machine gun fire electrically?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0152
STEP 4
Does an inhibit condition exist that prohibits firing of 40-mm machine gun?
Ensure that turret is not directed in an inhibit firing zone and no condition exists that causes inhibit indicator
lamp to illuminate (Figure 2). (WP 0058)
LAST ROUND
INDICATOR LAMP
GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND 355 0
350
OVERRIDE 335 340 345
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
INHIBIT
INDICATOR LAMP
ASV01717_1
Does an inhibit condition exist that prohibits firing of 40-mm machine gun?
DECISION
Yes - Correct inhibit condition or traverse turret out of inhibit zone. (WP 0022) Verify problem is solved. (Step 9 -
Does 40-mm machine gun fire electrically?)
No - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Is LAST ROUND indicator lamp illuminated?)
STEP 5
Is LAST ROUND indicator lamp illuminated?
Observe LAST ROUND indicator lamp (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0152
LAST ROUND
INDICATOR LAMP
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ROUND ARMED LAMP TEST 335 340 345 350 355 0
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT

GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST ROUND
ASV01683_1
OVERRIDE SWITCH
Is LAST ROUND indicator lamp illuminated?
DECISION
Yes - Move LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch up to override position and/or reload 40-mm ammunition.
(WP 0053) Verify problem is solved. (Step 9 - Does 40-mm machine gun fire electrically?)
No - Go to Step 6. (Step 6 - Is firing solenoid properly connected and tightly secured to 40-mm machine gun?)
STEP 6
Is firing solenoid properly connected and tightly secured to 40-mm machine gun?
Visually inspect firing solenoid and ensure it is properly connected and tightly secured to 40-mm machine
gun (Figure 4). (WP 0047)
40-MM
MACHINE
GUN
SOLENOID
ELECTRICAL
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
FIRING
SOLENOID ASV00031
Figure 4. 40-MM Machine Gun Firing Solenoid.
Is firing solenoid properly connected and tightly secured to 40-mm machine gun?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0152
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 7. (Step 7 - Is solenoid electrical harness connector tightly secured to firing solenoid?)
No - Tightly connect firing solenoid to weapon. (WP 0047) Verify problem is solved. (Step 9 - Does 40-mm
machine gun fire electrically?)
STEP 7
Is solenoid electrical harness connector tightly secured to firing solenoid?
Visually inspect solenoid electrical harness connector and ensure it is secured tightly to firing solenoid
(Figure 5). (WP 0047)
40-MM
MACHINE
GUN
SOLENOID
ELECTRICAL
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
FIRING
SOLENOID ASV00031
Figure 5. 40-MM Machine Gun Firing Solenoid Harness Connector.
Is solenoid electrical harness connector tightly secured to firing solenoid?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 8. (Step 8 - Does weapon fire manually?)
No - Properly connect solenoid electrical harness connector to firing solenoid. (WP 0047) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 9 - Does 40-mm machine gun fire electrically?)
STEP 8
Does weapon fire manually?
Attempt to fire weapon manually. (WP 0057)
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun does not fire electrically.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun does not fire.
STEP 9
Does 40-mm machine gun fire electrically?
Ensure that 40-mm machine gun fires electrically. (WP 0058)
Does 40-mm machine gun fire electrically?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0152
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun does not fire electrically.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0153
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - MISFIRE OF 40-MM ROUND
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0006 Stoppage immediate action performed.
WP 0053 (WP 0077)
WP 0058
WP 0062
Equipment Condition
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - MISFIRE OF 40-MM ROUND
WARNING
Perform STOPPAGE IMMEDIATE ACTION procedure for 40-mm machine gun (WP 0077)
prior to any troubleshooting of misfired 40-mm rounds. Failure to comply may result in
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is 40-mm ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?
1. Ensure weapon on SAFE. (WP 0062)
2. Ensure MASTER POWER switch to OFF position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0153

DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 00 00000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01581_7

4. Visually inspect 40-mm ammunition for misaligned, dented, and short rounds (Figure 2).
AMMUNITION BOX
40-MM AMMUNITION
ASV01678
Figure 2. 40-MM Machine Gun Ammunition.
Is 40-mm ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is feed slide assembly seated fully to the left?)
solved. (Step 3 - Does 40-mm machine gun fire?)
STEP 2
Is feed slide assembly seated fully to the left?
1. Ensure weapon is on SAFE. (WP 0062)
2. Ensure TURRET POWER switch on driver's control unit is in OFF position (Figure 3).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0153

WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
TURRET UNLOCK
GRN
CB4
OFF ON
SYSTEM
CENTRAL
CB10
OFF ON TL5
TIRE G
POWER
PANEL TRANSMISSION
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
OFF OFF OFF
SWITCH
RADIO AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04183_7
3. Ensure that feed slide assembly is seated fully to the left (Figure 4). (WP 0053)
40-MM
AMMUNITION
FEED SLIDE
ASSEMBLY
ASV00049
Figure 4. 40-MM Machine Gun Feed Slide Assembly.
Is feed slide assembly seated fully to the left?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Does 40-mm machine gun fire?)
No - Ensure the feed slide assembly is all the way to the left. (WP 0053) Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does
40-mm machine gun fire?)
WARNING
STEP 3
Does 40-mm machine gun fire?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0153
2. Ensure that 40-mm machine gun fires. (WP 0058)
Does 40-mm machine gun fire?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Perform stoppage immediate action procedure (WP 0077) for 40-mm machine gun.
Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun misfired.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0154
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - WEAPON FIRES AT INTERMITTENT SPEEDS
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1010-230-10 Engine off. (WP 0030)
WP 0006
WP 0058
WP 0062
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - WEAPON FIRES AT INTERMITTENT SPEEDS
WARNING
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Are 40-mm machine gun bore and chamber free of dirt and foreign objects?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0154

DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75 24 32 GLOBAL INST.
16 FLAT PUMP
40 120 0 7
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 00 00000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01581_8
2. Clear the weapon. (WP 0062)

3. Ensure that weapon bore and chamber are free of dirt and foreign objects. (TM 9-1010-230-10)
Are 40-mm machine gun bore and chamber free of dirt and foreign objects?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that MK-19 40-mm machine gun fires at intermittent
speeds.
No - Clean 40-mm machine gun bore and/or chamber. (TM 9-1010-230-10) Verify problem is solved. (Step 2 -
Does 40-mm machine gun fire normally?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0154
STEP 2
Does 40-mm machine gun fire normally?
Ensure that 40-mm machine gun fires normally. (WP 0058)
Does 40-mm machine gun fire normally?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun fires at intermittent speeds.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0155
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - COVER DOES NOT CLOSE
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1010-230-10 Engine off. (WP 0030)
MK-19 40-MM MACHINE GUN - COVER DOES NOT CLOSE
WARNING
• Wait 10 seconds before taking action. The danger of a cookoff exists when the
barrel is hot. Personnel injury or death can result if a round cooks off while the
receiver cover is open. Keep muzzle of the weapon down range on the target at all
times. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
STEP 1
Is feed slide assembly in proper position and is ammunition properly loaded?
Ensure that feed slide assembly is positioned as far left as possible and that ammunition is straight and
seated firmly in the feeder (Figure 1). (WP 0053)
40-MM
AMMUNITION
FEED SLIDE
ASSEMBLY
ASV00049
Figure 1. 40-MM Machine Gun Feed Slide Assembly.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0155
Is feed slide assembly in proper position and is ammunition properly loaded?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is 40-mm machine gun bolt in forward position?)
No - Properly position feed slide assembly and ensure that ammunition is loaded correctly. (WP 0053) Verify
problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does 40-mm machine gun top cover close?)
STEP 2
Is 40-mm machine gun bolt in forward position?
Ensure that bolt is in forward position. (TM 9-1010-230-10)
Is 40-mm machine gun bolt in forward position?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun cover does not close.
No - Notify maintenance personnel that machine gun bolt will not go forward.
STEP 3
Does 40-mm machine gun top cover close?
Close 40-mm machine gun top cover. (WP 0053)
Does 40-mm machine gun top cover close?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that 40-mm machine gun cover does not close.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0156
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - AMMUNITION BINDS IN AMMUNITION RACK
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1005-213-10 Engine off. (WP 0030)
WP 0059
WP 0062
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - AMMUNITION BINDS IN AMMUNITION RACK
WARNING
STEP 1
Is M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charged?
Verify M48 .50-Cal. machine gun safety selector is in “S” position. (WP 0062)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0156
CHARGING HANDLE ASV04695
Figure 1. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun in Safe Position.
Is M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charged?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is M48 .50-Cal. ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?)
No - Charge weapon. (WP 0052) Verify problem is solved. (Step 7 - Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun feed?)
STEP 2
Is M48 .50-Cal. ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?
1. Ensure ammunition is loaded correctly. (WP 0052)
2. Visually inspect M48 .50-Cal. ammunition for misaligned, dented, and short rounds (Figure 2).
M48 .50-CAL. AMMUNITION
ASV01714
Figure 2. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Ammunition.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0156
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is M48 .50-Cal. receiver cover closed and latched?)
No - Properly load M48 .50-Cal. ammunition, or replace damaged or short round. (WP 0052) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 7 - Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun feed?)
STEP 3
Is M48 .50-Cal. receiver cover closed and latched?
Ensure that M48 .50-Cal. receiver cover is closed and latched (Figure 3). (WP 0052)
.50-CAL
RECEIVER
COVER
ASV04316
Figure 3. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Receiver Cover.
Is M48 .50-Cal. receiver cover closed and latched?
DECISION
Yes - Verify problem is solved. (Step 7 - Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun feed?)
No - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Is bellmouth chute on M48 .50-Cal. machine gun free of damage?)
STEP 4
Is bellmouth chute on M48 .50-Cal. machine gun free of damage?
Visually inspect bellmouth chute on M48 .50-Cal. machine gun for damage (Figure 4).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0156
BELLMOUTH
CHUTE ASV01716
Figure 4. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Bellmouth Chute.
Is bellmouth chute on M48 .50-Cal. machine gun free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Is guide roller assembly damaged or binding?)
No - Notify armorer of damage to bellmouth chute.
STEP 5
Is guide roller assembly damaged or binding?
WARNING
Ensure the weapon is clear of ammunition before performing maintenance or removal

procedures. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Clear weapon. (WP 0062)
2. Remove ammunition boxes and ammunition from rollers.
3. Inspect shoulder shafts for gouges, nicks, or missing pieces (Figure 5).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0156
GUIDE
SPACER
ROLLER
ASSEMBLY
SHOULDER
SHAFTS
ASV02517
Figure 5. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Shoulder Shaft.
4. Verify guide spacer and shoulder shafts spin freely.
Is guide roller assembly damaged or binding?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-Cal. guide roller assembly is damaged.
No - Go to Step 6. (Step 6 - Are feed mechanism rollers damaged or binding?)
STEP 6
Are feed mechanism rollers damaged or binding?
1. Inspect rollers for gouges, nicks, or missing pieces (Figure 6).
ROLLERS
FEED MECHANISM
COVER
ASV02518
Figure 6. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Feed Mechanism Rollers.
2. Verify rollers spin freely.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0156
Are feed mechanism rollers damaged or binding?
DECISION
Yes - Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-Cal. feed mechanism rollers are damaged.
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-Cal. machine gun rollers do not feed
machine gun.
STEP 7
Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun feed?
Ensure that M48 .50-Cal. machine gun will feed. (WP 0059)
Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun feed?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-Cal. machine gun rollers do not feed
machine gun.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0157
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1005-213-10 Wheels chocked. (WP 0170)
WP 0022 M48 charged. (WP 0052)
WP 0057
WP 0059
WP 0062
WP 0159
Equipment Condition
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE
WARNING
STEP 1
Does an inhibit condition exist prohibiting firing of M48 .50-cal. machine gun?
Ensure that turret is not directed in an inhibit firing zone and no condition exists causing inhibit indicator light
to illuminate (Figure 1). (WP 0022)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0157
GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
350 355 0
340 345
335
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
INHIBIT
INDICATOR LAMP
ASV04774_1
Does an inhibit condition exist prohibiting firing of M48 .50-cal. machine gun?
DECISION
Yes - Correct inhibit condition or traverse turret out of inhibit zone. (WP 0022) Verify that problem is solved. (Step
5 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire?)
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is M48 .50-Cal. ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?)
STEP 2
1. Ensure M48 .50-cal. machine gun safety selector is in “S” position. (WP 0052)
3. Visually inspect M48 .50-cal. ammunition for misaligned, dented, and short rounds (Figure 2).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0157
ASV01714
Figure 2. M48 .50-cal. Machine Gun Ammunition.
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is trigger actuator slide on weapon properly lubricated?)
No - Properly load M48 .50-cal. ammunition, or replace damaged or short round. (WP 0052) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 5 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire?)
STEP 3
Is trigger actuator slide on weapon properly lubricated?
Ensure that trigger actuator slide on M48 .50-cal. machine gun is properly lubricated. (TM 9-1005-213-10)
Is trigger actuator slide on weapon properly lubricated?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire manually?)
No - Properly lubricate trigger actuator slide. (TM 9-1005-213-10) Verify problem is solved.
(Step 5 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire?)
STEP 4
Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire manually?
Ensure M48 .50-cal. machine gun fires manually. (WP 0057)
Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire manually?
DECISION
Yes - Go to M48 .50-cal machine gun - Does not fire electrically. (WP 0159)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50 cal machine gun does not fire.
STEP 5
Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire?
Ensure that M48 .50-cal. machine gun fires. (WP 0059)
Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire?

TM 9-2320-381-10 0157
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-cal. machine gun does not fire.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0158
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT CHARGE
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1005-213-10 Engine off. (WP 0030)
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT CHARGE
WARNING
STEP 1
Is M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charger and charging handle properly installed, clean, and free of damage?
Ensure that .50-Cal machine gun charger and charging handle are properly installed, clean and free of
damage (Figure 1). (TM 9-1005-213-10 )
.50-CAL.
MACHINE GUN
CHARGER
ASV01731
CHARGING
HANDLE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0158
Is M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charger and charging handle properly installed, clean, and free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is M48 .50-Cal. ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?)
No - Properly install charger and charging handle. (TM 9-1005-213-10) Verify problem is solved. (Step 3 - Does
M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charge?) If charger or charging handle are damaged, notify maintenance
personnel that charger or charging handle is damaged.
STEP 2
1. Ensure ammunition is loaded correctly. (WP 0052)
2. Visually inspect M48 .50-Cal. ammunition for misaligned, dented, and short rounds (Figure 2).
ASV01714
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-Cal. machine gun does not charge.
No - Properly load M48 .50-Cal. ammunition, or replace damaged or short round. (WP 0052) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 3 - Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charge?)
STEP 3
Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charge?
Ensure that M48 .50-Cal. machine gun will charge. (WP 0052)
Does M48 .50-Cal. machine gun charge?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-Cal. machine gun does not charge.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE ELECTRICALLY
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1005-213-10 WP 0059
WP 0005 WP 0062
WP 0006
WP 0022
Equipment Condition
WP 0049
WP 0052
Turret power on. (WP 0055)
M48 .50-CAL. MACHINE GUN - DOES NOT FIRE ELECTRICALLY
WARNING
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Is 40-mm/M48 .50-cal. machine gun arming switch in .50-CAL ARMED position?
Verify 40-mm/.50 Cal machine gun arming switch is in .50-CAL ARMED position (Figure 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159
GUNNER’S 40 MM OFF .50 CAL

CONTROL
PANEL LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ROUND ARMED
ARMED
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ARMED ALL
350 355 0
340 345
335

RELAY
ON FIRING
LAST
ROUND
RELAY
OVERRIDE ON
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
MACHINE GUN
ARMING
SWITCH
INHIBIT ASV02764_1
Is 40-mm/M48 .50-cal. machine gun arming switch in .50-CAL ARMED position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Is weapon set to fire "F" position?)
No - Move 40-mm/.50-Cal machine gun arming switch to .50-CAL ARMED position. Verify problem is solved.
(Step 10 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire electrically?)
STEP 2
Is weapon set to fire "F" position?
Verify weapon is set to "F" position.
Is weapon set to fire "F" position?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Is solenoid on M48 .50-cal. machine gun properly installed and free of damage?)
No - Set weapon to fire "F" position. Verify problem is solved. (Step 10 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire
electrically?)
STEP 3
Is solenoid on M48 .50-cal. machine gun properly installed and free of damage?
WARNING
• Remove all jewelry such as rings, ID tags, bracelets, etc., prior to working on or
around vehicle. Jewelry and tools can catch on equipment, contact positive
electrical circuits, and cause a direct short, severe burns, or electrical shock.
• Ensure electrical power is off prior to working on all electrical connections. Failure

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159
Ensure solenoid is free of damage and properly installed (Figure 2). (WP 0049)
SOLENOID
TURRET
ELECTRICAL
ASV01880 WIRING HARNESS
Figure 2. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Solenoid.
Is solenoid on M48 .50-cal. machine gun properly installed and free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Is turret electrical wiring harness connector tightly secured to solenoid receptacle?)
No - Properly install solenoid to M48 .50-Cal. machine gun. (TM 9-1005-213-10) Verify problem is solved. (Step
10 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire electrically?) If solenoid is damaged, notify maintenance personnel
that solenoid is damaged.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159
STEP 4
Is turret electrical wiring harness connector tightly secured to solenoid receptacle?
1. Move TURRET POWER switch to OFF position (Figure 3).

WASH
YEL YEL RED
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
TURRET
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
POWER
WARN LIGHTS
GRN SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
TIRE G
SWITCH
PANEL TRANSMISSION
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01637_1
2. Ensure turret electrical wiring harness connector is tightly secured to solenoid receptacle (Figure 4).
(WP 0049)
SOLENOID
TURRET
ELECTRICAL
ASV01880 WIRING HARNESS
Figure 4. M48 .50-Cal. Machine Gun Solenoid Harness.
Is turret electrical wiring harness connector tightly secured to solenoid receptacle?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 5. (Step 5 - Does weapon fire manually?)
No - Secure turret wiring harness connector to M48 .50-cal. machine gun solenoid. (TM 9-1005-213-10) Verify
problem is solved. (Step 10 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire electrically?)
STEP 5
Verify weapon fires manually. (WP 0057)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 6. (Step 6 - Does inhibit condition exist preventing firing of weapon?)
No - Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-cal. machine gun will not fire.
STEP 6
Does inhibit condition exist preventing firing of weapon?
2. Verify all hatches and doors are closed completely and weapon is not pointed in an inhibit zone. (WP 0022)
Does inhibit condition exist preventing firing of weapon?
DECISION
Yes - Close all hatches and doors completely and aim weapon in safe zone for firing. Verify problem is solved.
(Step 10 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire electrically?)
No - Go to Step 7. (Step 7 - Is M48 .50-cal. ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?)
STEP 7
Is M48 .50-cal. ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?
3. Visually inspect M48 .50-cal. ammunition for misaligned, dented, and short rounds (Figure 5).
ASV01714_1
Is M48 .50-cal. ammunition loaded correctly and free of damage?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 8. (Step 8 - Are slip ring electrical connectors tightly secured?)
No - Properly load M48 .50-cal. ammunition, or replace damaged or short round. (WP 0052) Verify problem is
solved. (Step 10 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire electrically?)
STEP 8
Are slip ring electrical connectors tightly secured?
Visually inspect turret slip ring electrical connectors for loose connection (Figure 6).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159
SLIP RING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
SLIP RING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
ASV01359_2
Figure 6. Slip Ring Electrical Connectors.
Are slip ring electrical connectors tightly secured?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 9. (Step 9 - Are vehicle batteries properly charged?)
No - If loose, tightly secure connector(s). Verify problem is solved. (Step 10 - Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire
electrically?)
STEP 9

IGNITION
HEATER
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
MASTER PANEL
BRT
UNLOCK
ON ON ON ON
OFF ON
CENTRAL
TIRE
INFLATION
OFF ON
TRANSMISSION
TL5
G
POWER DIM

CB5
OFF ON
RADIO
CB11
OFF ON AIR DRYER
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
BIT
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT BREAKER ASV04201_2
3. Verify pushbutton shift selector is in neutral (N) position (Figure 8).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159
S M
E O
L N
I
E T
C O
T R
MODE
NEUTRAL
ASV01489_2
Figure 8. Shift Selector to Neutral Position.
IGNITION
WASH
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
OFF OFF OFF
SWITCH
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O. STOP CB3 CB9
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV04221_3
5. Observe voltmeter gauge reading (Figure 10).
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS

VOLTMETER
30 40
TEMP OIL VOLTS
50
60 70
GAUGE
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV01490_2
6. Ensure that voltmeter gauge reads in green zone (24 - 32 vdc).

8. Move TRANSMISSION switch to OFF position (Figure 11).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0159

IGNITION IGNITION GRID
HEATER
MASTER TURRET BLACKOUT OFF ON OFF ON TL1
POWER POWER OVERRIDE
SWITCH WIPE
WASH
RUN
START ON
CB1
OFF ON
DE-ICE
CB7
OFF ON
HEAT/AC G
TL2
OFF OFF OFF
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
ON ON CB2 CB8
OFF OFF
OFF ON NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS SPARE
TL3
G
MASTER POWER
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
B.O.
DRIVE
B.O.
MARKER
STOP
LIGHT
SER
DRIVE
BILGE
PUMP
CB3
OFF ON
GLOBAL
CB9
OFF ON
INHIBIT LIGHTS
TL4 BREAKER SWITCH
SWITCH UNLOCK
CB4
OFF ON
POSITION
SYSTEM
CB10
OFF ON
WARN LIGHTS
G
TL5
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01488_2
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-cal. machine gun does not fire electrically.
No - Start vehicle to charge batteries. (WP 0030) If batteries do not charge, notify maintenance personnel that
batteries do not charge.
STEP 10
Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire electrically?
Ensure that M48 .50-cal. machine gun fires electrically. (WP 0059)
Does M48 .50-cal. machine gun fire electrically?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that M48 .50-cal. machine gun does not fire electrically.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0160
GRENADE LAUNCHER CONTROL FAILS
INITIAL SETUP:

TM 9-1300-200 Engine off. (WP 0030)
WP 0006
WP 0060
GRENADE LAUNCHER CONTROL FAILS
NOTE
(WP 0005)
(WP 0006)
STEP 1
Does smoke grenade(s) fire after a 20-second waiting period?
1. Wait 20 seconds after first attempt to fire smoke grenade.
2. Ensure SMOKE GRENADE arming switch is in ON position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0160
GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
350 355 0
340 345
335
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
SMOKE GRENADE
ARM/OFF SWITCH
ASV04747_1
3. Attempt to fire smoke grenade. (WP 0060)
Does smoke grenade(s) fire after a 20-second waiting period?
DECISION
No - Go to Step 2. (Step 2 - Does smoke grenade fire after reseating in launcher tube?)
STEP 2
Does smoke grenade fire after reseating in launcher tube?
WARNING
• Removal of grenades from launcher tubes is dangerous and must be performed by

qualified trained personnel. A grenade that was fired, but remained in launcher
tube, must NOT be removed for a period of at least five minutes. Keep turret
hatches closed during this time. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Ensure all doors and turret hatches are closed and latched prior to grenade
unloading. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0160
NOTE
• A hangfire is a temporary failure or delay in the action of the propellant charge.
• A misfire is the failure of a grenade to launch from discharger tube or smoke
grenade canister to eject from the grenade tube.
• A dud is a grenade that has fired its payload from a grenade tube but one or more
of the canisters have failed to burn or explode. A dud is a grenade that failed to
disperse its payload once it was launched.
1. Wait 5 minutes before proceeding to next step.
2. Ensure SMOKE GRENADE arming switch is in OFF position.
GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
350 355 0
340 345
335
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
SMOKE GRENADE
ARM/OFF SWITCH
ASV04747_1
3. Ensure smoke grenade is firmly seated in launcher tube.

4. Turn smoke grenade slightly to ensure proper electrical contact.
5. Move SMOKE GRENADE arming switch to ON position.
6. Attempt to fire smoke grenade. (WP 0060)
Does smoke grenade fire after reseating in launcher tube?
DECISION
No - Go to Step 3. (Step 3 - Does smoke grenade fire from different grenade discharger tube?)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0160
STEP 3
Does smoke grenade fire from different grenade discharger tube?
1. Move SMOKE GRENADE arming switch to OFF position.
2. Wait 5 minutes before proceeding to next step.
GUNNER’S
CONTROL
PANEL
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL
ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
350 355 0
340 345
335
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
SMOKE GRENADE
ARM/OFF SWITCH
ASV04747_1
NOTE
When moving grenade, ensure to hold grenade away from body and pointed down range.
3. Move grenade to different grenade launcher tube.
4. Move SMOKE GRENADE arming switch to ON position.
5. Attempt to fire grenade from different grenade launcher.
Does smoke grenade fire from different grenade discharger tube?
DECISION
Yes - Go to Step 4. (Step 4 - Is turret electrical harness connector tightly secured to smoke grenade launcher
assembly receptacle?)
No - Place misfired smoke grenades into grenade shipping container and move container 328 ft. (100m) away
from personnel, structures, and equipment. Dispose of misfired smoke grenade. (TM 9-1300-200)
STEP 4
Is turret electrical harness connector tightly secured to smoke grenade launcher assembly receptacle?
1. Move TURRET POWER switch on driver's control unit to OFF position.
2. Move MASTER POWER switch on driver's control unit to OFF position.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0160
TURRET POWER SWITCH

DE-ICE HEAT/AC
WIPE RUN CB1 CB7

1 ON
BRT
4
7
2
8
3MENU
9 OFF ON OFF ON TL2

OFF
WP POS NAV
OFF
CLR 0
OFF
NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
SWITCH
Rockwell
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS

P
P
ON ON CB2 CB8
WASH
IGNITION
START
GRID
HEATER
ON
MASTER
POWER
TURRET
POWER
OVERRIDE
OFF ON
HEATER/
AC OFF ON HEATER/
AC
TL1
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
SEATS
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF OFF SPARE

OFF ON SPARE
G
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
GRID HEAT
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
FUEL PUMP
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
CB3 CB9
70

CB6 CB12
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 00 00000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
B.O. SER
DRIVE DRIVE
PUMP GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
CENTRAL
BRT
CB5 CB11 BIT
DIM
INTERVEHICULAR
AUX PWR RCPT
OVERRIDE CB6 CB12
ASV01581_10
3. Ensure that turret electrical harness connector is tightly secured to smoke grenade launcher assembly
receptacle.
SMOKE GRENADE
LAUNCHER
ASSEMBLY
TURRET
ELECTRICAL
HARNESS
ASV01801
Figure 5. Smoke Grenade Launcher Assembly Harness Connector.
Is turret electrical harness connector tightly secured to smoke grenade launcher assembly receptacle?
DECISION
Yes - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that grenade launcher control fails.
No - Tightly secure turret electrical harness connector to smoke grenade launcher assembly receptacle. Verify
problem is solved. (Step 5 - Does smoke grenade fire?)
STEP 5
Does smoke grenade fire?
Attempt to fire smoke grenade. (WP 0060)
Does smoke grenade fire?
DECISION
No - Problem not found. Notify maintenance personnel that grenade launcher control fails.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10
CHAPTER 4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0161
INTRODUCTION - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION
NOTE
• Tools supplied on the vehicle are to be used for Preventive Maintenance Checks
and Services (PMCS). Rags are also required for removing dirt and grease.
• PMCS intervals should be performed more frequently when operating under
unusual conditions.
This section contains operator level (PMCS) requirements for the Armored Security Vehicles (ASV). The PMCS
tables contain checks and services necessary to ensure that the vehicle is ready for operation. Maintenance is
performed at specified intervals using the PMCS tables.
Inspecting for good condition is generally a visual inspection to determine if components are safe or serviceable.
Components in good condition are: not bent or twisted, chafed or burned, broken or cracked. There should be no
signs of excessive wear, fraying, dents, collapsing, tears, cuts, or deterioration.
Damage is any condition that affects safety or prevents a part or assembly from functioning normally, or would
render the vehicle unserviceable for mission requirements.
MAINTENANCE RECORDS AND FORMS
Every mission begins and ends with paperwork. There is not much of it, but it must be kept up. The completed
forms and records have several uses. They are permanent record of services, repairs, and modifications made to
the vehicle. They are reports to maintenance personnel, and to the Commander. They serve as a checklist to
track previous vehicle malfunctions and repair actions. For the information needed on forms and records, refer to
DA PAM 750-8.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
• Cleanliness: Dirt, grease, oil, and debris can conceal serious problems. Use solvent cleaning compound
on all metal surfaces and soapy water on rubber.
• Bolts, Nuts, and Screws: Check for loose bolts, nuts, and screws, as well as for those that are missing,
bent, or broken, and tighten or replace as necessary. If parts cannot be checked with a tool, look for signs
of chipped paint, bare metal, or rust around bolt heads.
• Welds: Look for loose or chipped paint, rust, or gaps where parts are welded together. If a damaged weld
is discovered, have it repaired.
• Electric Wires and Connectors: Look for cracked or broken insulation, bare wires, and loose or broken
connectors. Tighten loose connectors, and ensure wires are in good working condition.
• Hydraulic Lines and Fittings: Look for signs of wear, damage, and leaks. Ensure clamps and fittings are
tight. Wet spots, as well as stains around fittings and connectors can indicate leaks.
• Armor and Spall Liners: Look for cracks and damage. Cracks may be indicated by chipping paint. Look
for loose mounting nuts. Tighten loose nuts.
0161-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(pmcsintrowp) wpno(I01001)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0161
FLUID LEAKAGE
It is necessary to know how fluid leakage affects the status of fuel, oil, coolant, and the hydraulic systems.
NOTE
Equipment operation is allowable with minor leakage (Class I or Class II). Fluid capacity
must be considered when inspecting an item or system. If leakage class is questionable,
notify the supervisor. When operating with Class I or Class II leaks, continue to check fluid
levels as required in the PMCS. Class III leaks should be repaired per applicable
procedure.
• Class I: Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not sufficient enough to form drops.
• Class II: Leakage of fluid sufficient enough to form drops, but not sufficient enough to cause drops to drip
from item being inspected.
• Class III: Leakage of fluid sufficient enough to form drops that fall from the item being inspected.
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
• During adverse weather or unusually dusty conditions, lubrication servicing may be required on a daily
basis.
• After fording operations, lubricate all lubrication points below fording line.
• Lubrication instructions are contained in the Field Level Maintenance PMCS table. All lubrication
instructions are mandatory.
PMCS COLUMN DESCRIPTION
The PMCS table columns are described as follows:
Item Number
The order that PMCS should be performed, used when recording results of PMCS and DA Form 2404 and
completing the TM Number column on DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance (Electronic)
Worksheet.
Interval
Lists the interval at which the check or service is to be performed.
Item to be Inspected
Lists the item being checked or serviced.
Procedures
Description of the procedure for the check or service.
Equipment Not Ready or Available If
Gives a description of a condition that renders the vehicle not mission capable.
0161-2 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(pmcsintrowp) wpno(I01001)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0161
For each service interval, perform all checks and services listed and all checks and services associated with any
lower service intervals.
• Before: Do the Before (B) PMCS just before operating the vehicle. Pay attention to the CAUTIONS and
WARNINGS.
• During: Do the During (D) PMCS while vehicle or its component system are in operation. Pay attention to
the CAUTIONS and WARNINGS.
• After: Do the After (A) PMCS after operating the vehicle. Pay attention to the CAUTIONS and
WARNINGS.
Always perform PMCS in the same order, every time. Once practiced, problems can be spotted quickly. If
malfunctions occur, attempt to repair using instructions in the Troubleshooting section of this Technical Manual. If
there appears to be a problem or malfunction that cannot be repaired immediately, complete either DA Form
5988-E or DA Form 2404.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0161-3/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(pmcsintrowp) wpno(I01001)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
INITIAL SETUP:

Wrench, Adjustable 8 in. (WP 0175, Table 3, Item WP 0070
53) WP 0166
WP 0169
Personnel Required
Personnel (2)
References
WP 0030
Table 1. PMCS - BEFORE.
ITEM TO BE EQUIPMENT
ITEM CHECKED OR NOT READY/
NO. INTERVAL SERVICED PROCEDURE AVAILABLE IF:
1 Before Top Engine Check top engine access covers (Figure 1, Items 1 Top engine access
Access Covers and 2) for loose, missing, or broken hardware and covers are loose, missing,
cracks. or damaged.
1
2
ASV02174
Figure 1. Top Engine Access Covers.
0162-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(pmcswp) wpno(I01002)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Table 1. PMCS - BEFORE - Continued.
2 Before Coolant Level WARNING

and Radiator
Cap
Cooling system is under extreme pressure

when hot. Allow engine to cool before re-
moving radiator cap. Pressurized steam
from hot system can cause severe burns.
Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
NOTE
If a leak is detected, further investigation is
needed to determine the location and cause
of the leak. If there is any doubt, contact
your supervisor or field level maintenance.
Remove bolt (Figure 2, Item 3), washer (Figure 2, Coolant is not visible in
Item 2), and armor plate (Figure 2, Item 1). Remove radiator. Class III leak.
radiator cap (Figure 2, Item 4) and check that coolant
level is visible in the radiator. Add coolant as required.
3
1 2
4
MHULL0855
Figure 2. Coolant Level Check.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Check for damage to radiator cap (Figure 2, Item 1) Damage to radiator cap
and that seal is present. or seal is missing.
3 Before Non-Skid Paint WARNING
Surfaces painted with non-skid paint can

become slippery when worn and cause a
falling hazard. Failure to comply may result
Check non-skid painted surfaces (Figure 3, Item 1). Paint is chipped/missing
Ensure paint is in good condition with no smooth spots. or surface has smooth
area more than 2 inches
in diameter.
1 1
ASV02176_1
1
1
Figure 3. Non-Skid Surface.
4 Before Armor Panels NOTE

All armor panels are checked the same
way. Driver's side shown.
Check armor panels (Figure 4, Item 1) for cracks, Spanner nuts that are
chips, or gouges. Check that washers (Figure 4, loose. Missing washers or
Item 2) are installed on front wheelwell and side slope spanner nuts.
panels.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1 ASV02177_1
2
Figure 4. Armor Panels.
Check for missing spanner nuts. Notify maintenance Any armor panels with
personnel to torque loose spanner nuts. dents, gouges, scratches,
missing paint exposing
Kevlar or cracks that
expose the internal
structure of the panel to
the elements.
5 Before Winch Check exposed winch cable (Figure 5, Item 1) for Winch cable has any
crushed or broken strands. crushed or broken
strands, or chain is
broken or missing.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ASV02178_1
Figure 5. Winch Cable.
Check winch (Figure 6, Item 3), hydraulic hoses Any Class III hydraulic
(Figure 6, Item 1), and air line (Figure 6, Item 2) for leak or any air leak.
leaks.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
2
1
ASV02179_1
3
1
Figure 6. Winch.
6 Before Mirrors Check mirrors (Figure 7, Item 1) and brackets Mirrors are broken,
(Figure 7, Item 2) for broken, missing, or damaged scratched, or cracked so
parts. that view is obscured.
2 1
ASV02180_1
Figure 7. Mirrors.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
7 Before Wheels and Check tires (Figure 8, Item 1) for cuts and gouges. Tire is unserviceable.
Tires Tire is considered
unserviceable when no
tread remains and/or cuts
or gouges more than 1/4
inch in depth are present
and/or tire is flat.
ASV02181_1
1
Figure 8. Wheels and Tires.
NOTE
Air hose must be connected to check tire
pressure.
Check tires for proper inflation. Tire is under or over
inflated.
Check for loose or missing lug nuts (Figure 9, Item 3). Loose or missing lug
nuts.
8 Before Wheel Valves Check wheel valves (Figure 9, Item 2) for damage. Wheel valve is damaged.
Check wheel valves (Figure 9, Item 2) for leaking air. Wheel valve is leaking air.
9 Before CTIS Hoses Check CTIS hoses (Figure 9, Item 1) on wheel ends for CTIS hoses are cut or
cuts or damage. damaged.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
3 ASV02182_1
2
1
Figure 9. Wheel Valves and CTIS Hoses.
10 Before Shocks and Check shocks (Figure 10, Item 1) for oil leakage. Class II leak or shock
Springs covered with oil.
Check springs (Figure 10, Item 2) for cracks. Springs are cracked.
1
2
ASV02183_1
Figure 10. Shocks and Coil Springs.
11 Before Suspension Check cotter pins (Figure 11, Item 1) and mounting Missing or broken cotter
hardware (Figure 11, Item 2) on all tie-rod ends. pins.
Loose, missing, or broken
tie-rod end mounting
hardware.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1 2
2 1
ASV02184_1
Figure 11. Tie-Rods and Mounting Hardware.
12 Before Exterior of WARNING

Vehicle
• Do not start engine or move vehicle

when personnel are under vehicle or
working on brake lines. Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Ensure engine is off and eye
protection is worn when checking for
leaks. Failure to comply may result in
Check underneath entire vehicle for fluid leaks. Any fuel, Class III leak, or
damaged lines and
fittings.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Check exterior of vehicle (Figure 12, Item 1) for Any damage that would
obvious damage. impair operation of
vehicle.
ASV02185_1
1
Figure 12. Vehicle.
13 Before Fluid Levels CAUTION

Cold
Ensure that fluid levels are not overfull or
too low. These conditions could cause dam-
age or shorten the life of the engine and
powertrain components. Failure to comply
may result in damage to the equipment.
Check engine oil level on dipstick (Figure 13, Item 1). Engine is overfull or
below the ADD 4 QT.
mark.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ADD 4 QT. FULL
M5550047
Figure 13. Engine Oil Level.
Check transmission oil level on dipstick (Figure 14, No oil is present on

Item 1) for presence of oil. dipstick.
COLD COLD HOT HOT

ADD FULL ADD FULL M5550048
Figure 14. Transmission Oil Level.
Check hydraulic oil level on dipstick (Figure 15, Item 1) No oil is present on
for presence of oil. dipstick.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ADD FULL DIS-CHI
M5550049
Figure 15. Hydraulic Oil Level.
Check coolant level in coolant recovery bottle Coolant is below COLD

(Figure 16, Item 1). LEVEL or coolant
recovery bottle is
damaged.
1
HOT FULL
COLD FULL
ASV02189_1
Figure 16. Coolant Level.
14 Before Air Restriction Check that air restriction indicator (Figure 17, Item 1) is Broken, missing, or air
Indicator not broken, missing, or in the red. restriction indicator is in
the red.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ASV02190_1
1
Figure 17. Air Restriction Indicator.
15 Before Rear Door Check lower rear door (Figure 18, Item 2) and upper Lower rear door does not
rear door (Figure 18, Item 1) for damage and ease of operate freely, cylinder
operation. leaks, seal is torn more
than 1 inch, or upper rear
door will not latch in open
position.
Requires two personnel
to raise the lower rear
door.
2 O5550026
Figure 18. Rear Doors.
16 Before Rear Engine Check rear engine close out panels (Figure 19, Item 1) Any rear close out panel
Close Out for damage. (WP 0169) that will not seal. Any seal
Panels

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
that is torn more than 1/2
inch in length.
O5550027
Figure 19. Rear Engine Closeout Panels.
17 Before Engine Drive Check engine drive belt (Figure 20, Item 1) for Engine drive belt is
Belt lengthwise cracking, fraying, or broken pieces. missing, damaged,
frayed, or has pieces
missing from the belt, or
the belt has cracks.
ASV02193_1
1
Figure 20. Engine Drive Belt.
18 Before Air Conditioner Check air conditioner belt (Figure 21, Item 1) for Belts missing or
Belt fraying or cracks. unserviceable with any
frays, cracks, or missing
pieces.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1 ASV02194_1
Figure 21. Air Conditioner Belts.
19 Before Air Conditioning Check air conditioner compressor brackets (Figure 22, Cracks in brackets.
Compressor Item 1) for cracks.
Brackets
ASV02783_1
Figure 22. Air Conditioner Compressor Brackets.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
20 Before Fuel/Water WARNING

Separator and
Fuel Filter
• Spilled fuel is slippery and could

create a falling hazard. Clean up and
properly dispose of spilled fuel. Failure
to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel.
• Fuel is highly flammable and can be
accidently ignited. Do not allow fuel to
come in contact with hot surfaces,
such as exhaust manifold, pipe, or
muffler. Do not smoke or allow open
flame or sparks in the vicinity while
working on any part of fuel system.
Failure to comply may result in injury
NOTE
• Drain fuel into suitable container.
• Engine shown removed for clarity.
Check fuel/water separator (Figure 23, Item 1) and fuel Any fuel leak or damage
filter (Figure 23, Item 2). Loosen drain cap to open to fuel/water separator or
drain valve and drain until pure fuel flows from valve. fuel filter.
Close drain valve by tightening drain cap. Check for
leaks or damage.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
MHULL0874
Figure 23. Fuel/Water Separator and Fuel Filter.
21 Before Starter and Check starter (Figure 24, Item 2) and mounting for Any loose, missing, or
Starter Wires loose, missing, or broken hardware. broken hardware.
Check starter wires (Figure 24, Item 1) for looseness or Any loose or frayed wires.
damage.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
2 O5550029
Figure 24. Starter.
22 Before Driver's Side and NOTE

Commander's
Driver's side door shown.
Side Doors
Check driver's side and commander's side upper doors Driver's side or
(Figure 25, Item 1) for damage and ease of operation. commander's side upper
doors do not open or
close freely.
Check driver's side and commander's side lower doors Driver's side or
(Figure 25, Item 2) for damage and ease of operation. commander's side lower
doors do not open or
close freely.
Check driver's side and commander's side door seals Driver's side and
(Figure 25, Item 3) for tears and mounting. commander's side door
seals missing or
unserviceable.
ASV02834_1
3 2
Figure 25. Side Doors.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
23 Before Hand-Held Fire Check that hand-held fire extinguishers (Figure 26, Missing or discharged
Extinguishers Item 1) are present and fully charged. hand-held fire
extinguisher.
O5550011
Figure 26. Hand-Held Fire Extinguishers.
24 Before Crew Seat Check that crew seat (Figure 27, Item 2) is latched Crew seat not latched
down and locked in position. and locked in position.
25 Before Crew Seat Seat Check crew seat seat belt (Figure 27, Item 1) for Seat belt does not
Belt proper operation. operate.
Check seat belt strap webbing for wear, tears, or Webbing is cut, frayed, or
fraying. excessively worn.
2
ASV02836_1
1
Figure 27. Crew Seat.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
26 Before Automatic Fire Check AFES engine compartment fire extinguisher

Extinguisher (Figure 28, Item 2) for a gauge pressure of 750 psi
System (AFES) (5171 kPa) at 70°F (21°C). Ensure all seals and official
tags are in place and up to date.
Check that AFES engine compartment fire extinguisher Seals have been broken
bottle (Figure 28, Item 2) is secure in bracket or gauge pressure is low
(Figure 28, Item 1). or not in the green zone.
Tags are out of date.
AFES engine
compartment fire
extinguisher bottle not
secure in bracket.
Check that two AFES crew compartment fire AFES crew compartment
extinguisher bottles (Figure 28, Item 3) are secure in fire extinguisher bottles
brackets (Figure 28, Item 4). not secure in bracket.
Check two AFES crew compartment fire extinguisher AFES crew compartment
bottle pressure gauges (Figure 28, Item 5) to ensure fire extinguisher bottle
that both are within the normal operating range of 900 gauges do not read 900
PSIG at 70°F (21°C). PSIG at 70°F (21°C).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1
2
(HIDDEN) 5 4 O5550015
Figure 28. Automatic Fire Extinguisher System (AFES).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
27 Before Transfer Case Check oil level on dipstick (Figure 29, Item 1). Oil below the lowest mark
or above the HIGH mark
on the dipstick. Any Class
III leak.
1
TRA
ENG NSFER
AGE CAS
DIS E
ENG
AGE
HIGH
M5550050
Figure 29. Transfer Case Oil Level.
Check for loose, broken, or missing mounting Any loose, broken, or

hardware (Figure 30, Item 1). missing hardware.
ASV02839_1
Figure 30. Transfer Case Mounting Hardware.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
28 Before Batteries WARNING
DO NOT allow battery acid to contact eyes,

skin, or fabric. Upon contact with eyes or
skin, immediately flush with water, apply
first aid and obtain medical attention. DO
NOT lean over battery when connecting or
disconnecting battery cables. DO NOT al-
low negative and positive cables to touch
each other. Keep open flame or sparks
away from battery vent holes. ALWAYS
wear eye protection when working with bat-
teries. Failure to comply may result in injury
CAUTION
DO NOT OVERFILL BATTERIES. Battery
acid will damage armor, wiring, and tubing.
If acid overflows, flush area clean with water
and drain hull. Failure to comply may result
NOTE
Battery terminal shown removed for clarity.
For vehicles equipped with wet lead acid batteries, Batteries are not secure
check each cell’s (Figure 31, Item 4) electrolyte level in or electrolyte level is low.
both batteries. Check terminals (Figure 31, Item 2), Battery terminals are
clamps (Figure 31, Item 1), and battery hold-down loose.
screws (Figure 31, Item 3) for security and signs of
corrosion.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ASV02840_1
4 3
Figure 31. Batteries.
29 Before Air Filter Clean air filter (Figure 32, Item 1) and air filter end Any missing components
cover (Figure 32, Item 2). (WP 0166) and/or the air filter
canister or end cover
have dents 1 inch or more
in depth.
2
1
ASV02841_1
Figure 32. Air Filter.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
30 Before View Block Check and fill two view block washer reservoirs Washer reservoirs not
Washer (Figure 33, Item 1) as required. full.
Reservoirs
M5550044_1
Figure 33. View Block Washer Reservoirs Fluid Level.
31 Before Driver's and Check driver's and commander's seats (Figure 34, Driver’s or commander’s
Commander's Item 1) for tears or damage. seat torn or damaged.
Seats
ASV02843_1
Figure 34. Seats.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
32 Before Driver's and WARNING

Commander's
Seat Electric
Control and
Hydraulic Valves
Ensure hands and fingers are clear of pinch

points when adjusting seats up, down, or
back. Failure to comply may result in injury
to personnel.
Check electric seat control (Figure 35, Item 1) for Electric seat control does
proper operation and seat actuator bypass valves not work or any Class III
(Figure 35, Item 2) for leaks. (WP 0030) leak.
1
SEAT
CONTROL
UP
DOWN
ASV02845_1
Figure 35. Electrical Seat Controls.
33 Before Driver's and NOTE

Commander's
Commander's side shown. Driver's side op-
Seat Belts
posite.
Check seat belts (Figure 36, Item 1) for cuts, frays, and Seat belts have cuts,
proper operation. frays, or will not latch.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1 ASV02846_1
Figure 36. Seat Belts.
34 Before View Blocks Check view blocks (Figure 37, Item 1) for cracks, View blocks have cracks,
chips, or signs of moisture. chips, or are cloudy,
which prevent the driver
from seeing through the
view block.
1 1
ASV02847_1
Figure 37. View Blocks.
35 Before Lights and Horn NOTE

• This check requires soldier No. 2 to
be outside of vehicle.
• Horn will not operate unless master
light selector is in SERVICE DRIVE
or STOP LIGHT position.
Check headlights (Figure 38, Item 4), front marker Horn or any light
lights (Figure 38, Item 2), front blackout drive light inoperative, damaged, or
(Figure 38, Item 3), horn (Figure 38, Item 5), tail lights loose mounting.
(Figure 38, Item 1), and turn signal lights / hazard
warning light (Figure 38, Items 1 and 2) for proper
operation and mounting. (WP 0030)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1 1
2
2
5 3
4 ASV02848_1
Figure 38. Vehicle Lights.
36 Before Auxiliary Heater NOTE

If operating vehicle in extreme cold, refer to
STARTING VEHICLE IN COLD AND ARC-
TIC WEATHER CONDITIONS. (WP 0070)
Check auxiliary heater control panel display (Figure 39, Auxiliary heater control
Item 1) for power and no fault indicator. panel display indicates no
power or display indicates
fault after starting
auxiliary heater.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
TER
CREW HEA
OFF
ON
LY
DIESEL SUPP ER EPTACLE
SLAVE REC
HEAT
AUXILIARY
LY
ON AIR SUPP
OFF
SED
COMPRES
CLE
AIR RECEPTA
M5550051
37 Before Engine Start engine. (WP 0030) Vehicle fails to start.
38 Before Instruments NOTE

Check the instruments listed below for dam-
age, operation, and condition.
Engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 40, Item 2). Engine oil pressure
gauge is inoperative or
reads lower than 10 psi
(0.7 bar).
Tachometer (Figure 40, Item 5). Tachometer is
inoperative. Tachometer
indicates less than 850
rpm or more than 1050
rpm at idle after engine
has been properly
warmed up.
Battery voltage read out (Figure 40, Item 3). Battery voltage gauge
does not read in green
zone.
Temperature gauge (Figure 40, Item 1). Temperature gauge does
not operate or reads more
than 220°F (104°C).
Fuel gauges (Figure 40, Item 4). Fuel gauges are
inoperative, or indicate

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
less than the required
amount of fuel needed to
complete mission.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
ENGINE BOTTLE
80 3.5 RUN MARKER
FUEL CROSSOVER VALVE FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50 90
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
1 2 3
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV02851_1
5 4
Figure 40. Control Panel Gauges.
39 Before Warning Light NOTE

Panel
• Check the warning light panel
indicators listed below for proper
operation.
• In extreme cold weather operating
conditions, warning panel indicators
may stay illuminated until vehicle
reaches normal operating
temperatures.
Transmission high temperature warning light Transmission high
(Figure 41, Item 1). temperature warning light
is illuminated.
Do Not Shift warning light (Figure 41, Item 2). Do Not Shift light is
illuminated.
Low battery warning light (Figure 41, Item 3). Low battery warning light
stays on longer than 3
minutes.
Low oil pressure warning light (Figure 41, Item 4). Low pressure warning
light is illuminated.
Coolant high temperature warning light (Figure 41, Coolant high temperature
Item 5). warning light is
illuminated.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Parking brake warning light (Figure 41, Item 6). Parking brake warning
light does not go out
when parking brake is
released.
Low brake hydraulic pressure warning light (Figure 41, Low brake hydraulic
Item 7). pressure warning light is
illuminated.
Engine coolant low level warning light (Figure 41, Engine coolant low level
Item 8). warning light is
illuminated.
CTIS over speed warning light (Figure 41, Item 9). CTIS over speed warning
light is illuminated.
Low fuel warning light (Figure 41, Item 10). Low fuel warning light is
illuminated.
1
R
N
D 2
3
4
5
P
6
P
7
8
9
10
ASV02852_1
40 Before Automatic Fire Observe two yellow TROUBLE LEDs Either yellow TROUBLE
Extinguisher (Figure 42, Item 1) and one green AFES ON LED LED remains on or
System (AFES) (Figure 42, Item 2). flashes, or if green AFES
Control Panel ON LED is not on steady.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
AFES ON
M M M M
A A A 1 ON 2 3MENU
N
BRT
N N
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
U
ZEROIZE
U U Rockwell
A A RESET A P
L
P
L L
2 2 ENGINE STOP
FRONT
WIPE
WASH
OFF
RUN
IGNITION
START
OFF
GRID
HEATER
ON
OFF
MASTER
POWER
ON
TURRET
POWER
ON
BLACKOUT
OVERRIDE
OFF
CB1
OFF
CB2
ON
ON
DE-ICE
NBC FAN/
NBC HEAT 3
OFF
CB7
OFF
CB8
ON
ON
HEAT/
AC
DOME LIGHTS
PNL IND LIGHTS
TL1
TL2
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
MARKER LIGHT
80 B.O. SER
GLOBAL
125 225 25
16
24 32 POSITION
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
C/F EMR
TEMP OIL VOLTS
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50

20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
CREW ENGINE FIRE

ENGINE
O5550032
Figure 42. AFES Control Panel.
41 Before Central Tire NOTE

Inflation System
• CTIS mode selected LED will flash
(CTIS)
while CTIS inflates or deflates tires
to selected pressure.
• It may take up to six minutes for
CTIS to adjust tire pressure to
selected level.
• When tires reach desired pressure,
CTIS control panel mode LED will
stop flashing and stay on steady.
Check operation of each mode on CTIS control panel CTIS fails to operate in
(Figure 43, Item 1). any mode or more than
one flashing light on
panel.
RUN
FLAT
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
EMER
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
CB2 CB8 INDICATORS
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON SPARE
SAND
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
HWY
ASV02854_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
42 Before View Block Check that view block wipers (Figure 44, Item 1) View block wipers do not
Wipers operate and wiper blades are in good condition. operate. Any missing or
unserviceable wiper
blade.
1 ASV02855_1
43 Before 2WD/4WD Lever Move lever (Figure 45, Item 1) from 2WD to 4WD to 2WD/4WD does not
ensure proper operation. operate properly.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
SYM
FRONT FAN CONTROL

S M
2 E O
1 L N
OFF 3 I
E T
C O
1 2WD
T R
SYM SYM
MODE
AC AC
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
SYM
REAR FAN CONTROL

4WD
1 2
OFF 3
ASV02856_1
Figure 45. 2WD/4WD Lever.
44 Before Brakes Check brake pedal (Figure 46, Item 1) for excessive Excessive brake pedal
pedal travel. travel.
Step on brake pedal (Figure 46, Item 1). Check that Low brake hydraulic
low brake hydraulic pressure light does not illuminate. pressure light illuminates.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75 24
RUN
32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 10 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
1 ASV02857_1
Figure 46. Brake Pedal.
45 Before NBC System Check that NBC heaters (Figure 47, Item 2) operate NBC system does not
properly and there are no obstructions in hoses operate or hoses are
(Figure 47, Item 1). obstructed.
1
2 ASV02858_1
Figure 47. NBC Heater Components.
46 Before Internal Check all intercom positions with Combat Vehicle Internal communications
Communications Crewman (CVC) helmets. or CVC helmets do not
operate.
47 Before Tow Pintle Check for presence and condition. Ensure safety pin Safety pin is missing.
and chain are present.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Table 2. PMCS - DURING.
1 During Instrument Panel Monitor driver's instrument panel (Figure 48, Item 1) for Any gauge becomes
operation of all gauges. inoperative or has a
reading outside of normal
operation.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
ENGINE BOTTLE
80 3.5 RUN MARKER
B.O. SER
GLOBAL
125 225 25
16
24 32 POSITION
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
30
20 50 20
km/h
50
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60
0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV02578_1
Figure 48. Driver's Instrument Panel.
2 During Engine Listen for any unusual noises from engine and check Unusual noises, engine
for excessive smoke. overspeeds, or excessive
smoke from engine.
3 During Power Train, While operating the vehicle, notice if it has normal Unusual noises when
Wheels and Hull power and acceleration in each speed. Speed up engine is under load.
vehicle in any driving gear to see if it will reach, but not
exceed, governed speed specified for that gear.
4 During Transmission Check transmission for smooth shifting through all gear Transmission does not
ranges. shift smoothly or does not
shift.
5 During 4WD Shifting Check for proper shifting (Figure 49, Item 1) from 2WD System does not operate.
to 4WD.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Table 2. PMCS - DURING - Continued.
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell

ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON 1/2 SPARE
OFF OFF
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
SYM
FRONT FAN CONTROL

S M
2 E O
1 L N
OFF 3 I
E T
C O
1
T R
2WD
SYM SYM
MODE
AC AC
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
SYM
REAR FAN CONTROL

4WD
1 2
OFF 3
ASV02587_1
Figure 49. 2WD/4WD Shift Selector.
6 During Brakes Check brakes for any unusual sounds, excessive pedal Brakes inoperative or
travel, wheel pull, or loss of braking power. pulls excessively in one
direction when brakes are
applied.
7 During Parking Brake Check that parking brake (Figure 50, Item 1) holds Parking brake will not
vehicle on slope. hold vehicle on a slope
less than 15 degrees.
WIPE
ENGINE STOP
OFF
FRONT
HEATER
CONTROL
80 3.5
125
175
225 25
50
75
RUN
24 32
40 120 0 7
16 FLAT
C/F BAR PSI EMR

TEMP OIL VOLTS
60
50 70 SAN
40 80
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE
20 10 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL
70
FUEL 10 110
0 KILOMETERS 120
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
1 ASV02580_1
8 During Steering Check for binding and steering wheel travel. Steering binds or steering
over travels.
9 During Winch Check winch control lever (Figure 51, Item 1) for Any Class III leak.
operation and fluid leaks.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ENGAGE
SPOOL
FREE
SPOOL
1
ASV02579_1
Figure 51. Winch Control Lever.
10 During Warning Light Monitor warning light panel (Figure 52, Item 1) for Any warning light
Panel illumination of warning lights. illuminates.
R
N
D
ASV02581_1

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
11 During CTIS System Check that tires inflate/deflate when modes are CTIS system does not
selected on CTIS panel (Figure 53, Item 1). operate.
RUN
FLAT
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
EMER
ON AC AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
TL2
ON ON HTR. 3
HEATER
CONTROL TL3
NBC HTR.
OFF ON SPARE
SAND
OFF OFF 1/2
CB3 CB9
80 3.5
ENGINE BOTTLE
125 225 25 75
16
24 32
FLAT
GLOBAL INST.
SYSTEM LIGHTS
TL5
CENTRAL
50 70 SAN INFLATION
40
30
30 50 90
20
km/h ENGAGE AUX.
20 MPH
60
100 C C SPOOL POWER
10
OFF ON RADIO OFF ON
70
0 120
KILOMETERS
Faria 0000000
HIGH
USA WAY
FREE
SPOOL
X C
HWY
1 ASV02582_1
12 During Transmission NOTE

Transmission oil level must be checked with
transmission at operating temperature.
Check transmission oil level on dipstick (Figure 54, Transmission is overfull
Item 1), if mission permits. or below the add mark.
COLD COLD HOT HOT

13 During Hydraulic Oil NOTE

Hydraulic oil level must be checked with en-
gine running at idle.
Check hydraulic oil level on dipstick Oil is below the FULL
(Figure 55, Item 1), if mission permits. marks on dipstick.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ADD FULL DIS-CHI
M5550049
14 During Engine Shut down engine. (WP 0030) Engine fails to shut down.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Table 3. PMCS - AFTER.
1 After Hubs, Drums, Immediately after road test, cautiously feel accessible Overheated or
and Power Train units. An overheated wheel hub and brake drum excessively cool hubs,
indicates an improperly adjusted, defective, or dry axle differential and
wheel bearing or a dragging brake. Cautiously feel carrier, transmission, or
each differential and carrier, transmission, and transfer transfer.
for overheating.
2 After Wheel Valves Check wheel valves (Figure 56, Item 2) and CTIS Wheel valve or CTIS
hoses (Figure 56, Item 1) for damage. hoses are damaged.
2 ASV02421_1
1
Figure 56. Wheel Valves and CTIS Hoses.
3 After Shocks Check shocks (Figure 57, Item 1) for fluid leakage. Shocks have Class II leak
or are broken.
ASV02422_1
Figure 57. Shocks.
4 After View Block Check operation of view block wipers (Figure 58, View block wipers do not
Wipers Item 1). work.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
Table 3. PMCS - AFTER - Continued.
1 ASV02567_1
5 After View Block Check level of fluid in view block washer bottles View block washer bottles
Washers (Figure 59, Item 1). are empty.
M5550044_1
Figure 59. Washer Bottles Fluid Level.
6 After View Blocks Check view blocks (Figure 60, Item 1) for chips, View blocks chipped,
cracks, or signs of moisture. cracked, or are cloudy.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
ASV02570_1
Figure 60. View Blocks.
7 After Engine Check engine compartment for signs of fluid leakage. Any Class III leak in
Compartment engine compartment.
8 After Engine Oil Check engine oil level (Figure 61, Item 1). Excessive engine oil
usage or oil level is low.
ADD 4 QT. FULL
M5550047
Figure 61. Engine Oil Level.
9 After Transmission Oil Check transmission oil level (Figure 62, Item 1). Excessive transmission
oil usage or oil level is
low.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
COLD COLD HOT HOT

10 After Hydraulic Oil Check hydraulic oil level (Figure 63, Item 1). Excessive hydraulic oil
usage or oil level is low.
ADD FULL DIS-CHI
M5550049
11 After Transfer Case Check transfer case oil level (Figure 64, Item 1). Excessive transfer case
Oil oil usage or oil level is
low.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1
TRA
ENG NSFER
AGE CAS
DIS E
ENG
AGE
HIGH
M5550050
Figure 64. Transfer Case Oil Level.
12 After Air Restriction Check air restriction indicator (Figure 65, Item 1). Air restriction indicator is
Indicator red or broken.
ASV02574_1
1
Figure 65. Air Restriction Indicator.
13 After Fuel Tanks Check fuel level (Figure 66, Item 1) in fuel tanks. Fuel tanks are empty.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
1 ON 2 3MENU
BRT
4 5 6
7 8 9
WP POS NAV
CLR 0 NUM
MARK OFF LOCK
ZEROIZE
Rockwell
ON AC
CB1 CB7
WIPE RUN
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
FRONT CB2 CB8
HEATER
CONTROL OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS GRID SPARE
OFF OFF
B.O. STOP
LIGHT
ENGINE BOTTLE
3.5 RUN MARKER
80
FLAT
B.O.
DRIVE
SER
DRIVE GLOBAL
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
16
ON OFF 40 120
YEL CB4 CB10
EMR
TEMP
C/F
OIL VOLTS
TEST FAULT SILENCE
CENTRAL
TEMP VOLTS SAN BRT
INFLATION
50 70
40 80 DIM
ON AIR DRYER.
40
30
20 50 30
20
km/h
50 90
20
60
100 RADIO
10 MPH
TACH 10
70
110
10 60 0 120
MILES HIGH
000 0000000
WAY
FREE
SPOOL
80 3.5
4WD 125
175
225 25
50
75 24 32
16
40 120 0 7
YEL BLU GRN

C/F BAR PSI
TEMP OIL VOLTS
TEMP OIL VOLTS

30 40 60
50 70
40 80
40
30
20 50 30 50 90
20
km/h 60
20 10 MPH 100
FUEL FUEL 70
TACH 10 110
10 60 0
000 USA USA 0000000
ASV02575_1
1
Figure 66. Fuel Tank Level.
14 After Exterior of Check underneath entire vehicle for fluid leaks. Any fuel leak, Class III
Vehicle leak, or damaged lines
and fittings.
15 After Air Tank Check air tank (Figure 67, Item 1) for looseness and Air tank loose or any air
leaks. leak.
ASV02785_1
Figure 67. Air Tank - Inspection.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0162
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) - TURRET SYSTEMS
INITIAL SETUP:

WP 0006
WP 0072
Table 1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS).
1 Before Turret Visually inspect turret for damage. Inspect and test Hatch cannot be secured
operation of hatch and latch. Check for loose interior in closed position, or
panels, covers, and pads and condition of seat and severe turret damage has
seals. occurred.
2 Before Armor Panels Check armor panels for cracks, chips, or gouges. Any armor panels with
Check that washers are installed on side slope panels. dents, gouges, scratches,
Notify maintenance personnel to torque loose spanner missing paint exposing
nuts. Kevlar or cracks that
expose the internal
structure of the panel to
the elements.
3 Before Non-Skid Paint WARNING
Use caution when stepping onto vehicle

and turret. Worn anti-skid surfaces can be
slippery, creating a hazardous condition.
Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
Visually inspect painted anti-skid surfaces. Ensure Paint is chipped/missing
paint is in good condition and free of smooth spots. or surface has smooth
area more than 2 inches
in diameter.
4 Before/After Spent Cartridge Visually inspect spent cartridge bag (Figure 1, Item 3) Cuts, holes, or tears in
Bag for tears, rips, or broken zipper. Ensure clamp hose; rips or broken
(Figure 1, Item 2) tightly secures hose (Figure 1, zipper in spent cartridge
Item 1) to ejection chute. Visually inspect hose bag.
(Figure 1, Item 1) for cuts and holes.
0163-1 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(pmcswp) wpno(IT01002)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163
Table 1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) - Continued.
1 2
ASV01636_1
Figure 1. Spent Cartridge Bag.
5 Before Electrical Wiring Visually inspect turret electrical wiring, connectors and Wiring or connectors are
and Slip Ring shielding for signs of damage. Ensure slip ring anchor damaged. Loose slip ring
Anchor mounting hardware and ground wire are tightly anchor.
secured.
6 Before Gunner's Seat WARNING
Ensure hands and fingers are clear of pinch

points when adjusting seats up, down, or
back. Failure to comply may result in injury
to personnel.
Test operation of gunner's seat (Figure 2, Item 2) Gunner's seat does not
height adjustment. lock into position or is
difficult to move.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163
2
ASV01638_1
Figure 2. Gunner's Seat.
7 Before Seat Belt Inspect seat belt (Figure 2, Item 1) for proper function. Seat belt does not
operate.
8 Before/After Gunner's Hatch Test operation of gunner's hatch and ensure hatch lock Hatch fails to open or lock
holds in all lock positions. closed.
9 Before Periscopes 1. Inspect periscopes. 1. The exterior surface

has damage that
perforates the first layer
of glass exposing the next
layer below.
2. Metal parts that have
damage or distortion that
could interfere with the
performance of the
periscope.
3. Bonding separation,
clouding/fogging or milky
white stains of periscope
glass or mirrors that
exceeds 1/4 inch (0.63
mm) inward from interior
edge of sealant, exceeds
1/2 inch (1.27 mm) inward
of the exterior edge of the
periscope or exceeds
20% of the periphery.
4. Any surface clouding/
fogging or milky white
stains, chips, scratches,
flaking, blistering, pitting,
bonding separation or
spider cracks that impair

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163
vision more than 20% or
obscure direct line of
view.
5. Any cracks greater
than 1/2 inch (1.27 mm)
or that obscure direct line
of view.
2. Visually inspect periscope mirrors (Figure 3, Item 1) Periscope mirrors are
for cracks. Ensure that periscope mirrors (Figure 3, cracked or cannot be
Item 1) can be adjusted and secured. adjusted and secured.
ASV01641_1
Figure 3. Periscopes.
10 Before Elevation Control WARNING
Ensure weapons are unloaded and in the

safe mode before performing elevation tests
and firing circuit test. Failure to comply may
Fully elevate and depress mantlets to ensure smooth Mantlets will not elevate
operation. Ensure elevation control handle (Figure 4, or depress. Elevation
Item 1) is not hard to turn and moves freely. control handle does not
move freely.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163
ASV01644_1
11 Before Ammunition NOTE

Boxes
Linked ammunition must be clean and free
of foreign matter to prevent weapon jam-
ming.
Visually inspect interior of ammunition boxes for Ammunition boxes have
obstructions or defects that may interfere with obstructions or defects.
ammunition feed. Ensure all boxes and covers are Ammunition boxes not
latched in place and secure. secure.
12 Before CVC NOTE

Transmission circuit breaker must be in ON
position for the turret control panel to acti-
vate.
Perform an operational check of all intercom positions. Internal communication
system does not operate.
13 Before Control Panels CAUTION

Panel switches are also circuit breakers. A
circuit overload will cause a switch to move
to OFF position during operation. Do not
hold switch in ON position, or damage to
electrical circuit or components may result.
Notify maintenance personnel if switch fails
to move to OFF position. Failure to comply
Test operation of all switches on turret control panel Any switch is inoperative.
(Figure 5, Item 1) and gunner's control panel (Figure 6,
Item 1).

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163

OFF OFF OFF OFF
ASV01650_1
LAST 40 MM .50 CAL

ARMED ALL

RELAY
ON
LAST
ROUND
OVERRIDE
INHIBIT LEFT RIGHT
ASV01649_1
14 Before Interior Light Test operation of interior light (Figure 7, Item 1) in all Any light is inoperative.
switch positions. (WP 0030)

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163
ASV01648_1
15 Before Traverse Control CAUTION

Before traversing turret, ensure area is clear
of obstacles. Failure to comply may result in
Traverse turret 360-degrees in both directions, Traverse unit does not
checking for smooth operation. Test both power and operate under power or
manual traverse operation. manually. Traverse
operation is noisy.
16 Before/ Turret Override WARNING

During Switch
• Turning TURRET OVERRIDE on

overrides all of the safety features of
the inhibitor switches. Turn this switch
on only during PMCS to test the
switches or during actual combat to
override damaged sensors. Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
• Ensure crewmembers are clear of
hatch openings and the top of the hull
before moving the turret under power.
Driver's and commander's hatches
should be closed. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to
personnel.

TM 9-2320-381-10 0163
NOTE
• Circuit breaker numbers and labels
on 200 amp DCU (WP 0005) are
different from those used on 400
amp DCU (WP 0006). Switches
might be arranged slightly
differently but their functions are the
same.
• 200 amp DCU is shown in this
procedure.
With driver's and commander's hatches closed and
locked down, test for interruption of machine gun
solenoids while traversing with TURRET OVERRIDE
switch (Figure 8, Item 1) in OFF position and weapons
fully depressed over rear deck. Fire inhibitor should
activate as weapons pass over rear deck. Perform
second test, traversing with TURRET OVERRIDE
switch (Figure 8, Item 1) in ON position. As weapons
pass over rear deck, the fire inhibit should not activate.

OVERRIDE
DE-ICE HEAT/AC G
RED
CB1 CB7
OFF ON OFF ON TL2
NBC FAN DOMELIGHTS
CB2 CB8
OFF ON TL3
NBC HEAT 1/2
SEATS SPARE G
GRID HEAT
FUEL PUMP
CB3 CB9
1 OFF ON OFF ON TL4
RED GLOBAL
INHIBIT LIGHTS
POSITION G
WARN LIGHTS
SYSTEM
CB4 CB10
OFF ON OFF ON TL5
CENTRAL
TIRE TRANSMISSION G
INFLATION
CB5 CB11 BIT
INTERVEHICULAR
RADIO

Asv m1117 TM 9 2320 381 10 Operator Technical

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asv m1117 TM 9 2320 381 10 Operator Technical

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

*TM 9-2320-381-10

M1117 ARMORED SECURITY VEHICLE (ASV)

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS

a 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS - Continued

b 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS - Continued

GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION

c 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued

d 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued

e 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued

f 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued

g 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL SAFETY WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued

EXPLANATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ICONS

h 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

EXPLANATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ICONS - Continued

i 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING DESCRIPTION

j 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(warnsum) wpno(F00002)

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued

NBC contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions, as described in

WARNING SUMMARY - Continued

GENERAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING DESCRIPTION - Continued

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES

Date of issue for the original manual is:

Original 28 November 2014

Page/WP No. Change No. Page/WP No. Change No.

Front Cover 0 WP 0036 (10 pgs) 0

A 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(loepwp) wpno(ASV_LOEP_1)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES - Continued

Page/WP No. Change No. Page/WP No. Change No.

WP 0076 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0126 (2 pgs) 0

B 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(loepwp) wpno(ASV_LOEP_1)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES - Continued

Page/WP No. Change No. Page/WP No. Change No.

WP 0174 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0178 (2 pgs) 0

C/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(loepwp) wpno(ASV_LOEP_1)

M1117 ARMORED SECURITY VEHICLE (ASV)

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

i/blank 03/15/2011 Rel(1.10) root(titleblk) wpno(F00004)

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL............................................................................................................................ xxxix

Chapter 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND THEORY OF

GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................ WP 0001

Table 1. List of Abbreviations/Acronyms..................................................................................... 0001-2

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA......................................................................................... WP 0002

Figure 1. Item Location................................................................................................................ 0002-2

Table 1. Basic Item Location....................................................................................................... 0002-2